96M0366

INDEX

Installation

Support
Software

Programming

2. System Installation
3. Access Window
4. KV-D20 Operator
Interface Panel

1. Introduction

1. Programming

2. Editor

2. Instructions

3. Simulator

3. Interrupts

4. Monitor

4. High-speed Counters

5. Appendices

5. Positioning Control
6. Interrupts, High-speed
Counters, Positioning
Control

5. KV-10/80 Hardware
6. Handheld Programmer

7. Serial Communication

7. KV-L2 Serial Interface

Module

8. Programming
Examples

8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O

Module
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AFFILIATED COMPANIES

KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
PHONE: 81-6-6379-2211
FAX: 81-6-6379-2131

KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA

PHONE: 201-930-0100 FAX: 201-930-0099

KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

PHONE: 03-252-2211 FAX: 03-252-2131

KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

PHONE: 01908-696900 FAX: 01908-696777

KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-369-2777 FAX: 02-369-2775

KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

PHONE: 0711-79 73 71-0 FAX: 0711-797 77 99

KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-2627-3100 FAX: 02-2798-8925

KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

PHONE: 01 47 92 76 76 FAX: 01 47 92 76 77

KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

PHONE: 02-563-1270 FAX: 02-563-1271

KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

PHONE: 392-1011 FAX: 392-5055
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 1999 NKVP-UM-4-1000 Printed in Japan

User's Manual
Visual KV Series 3 Programming

1. Configuration and
Specifications

Visual KV Series

Programming

How this manual is organized:

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.

Safety Precautions
This instruction manual describes the operation and function of the KV Series PLC.
Read this manual carefully to ensure safe use and maximum performance from your
KV Series PLC.

Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these
messages carefully.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury. (electric

WARNING shock, burn, etc.)

CAUTION
Note:

Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage.

Provides additional information on proper operation.

Conventions
This manual describes the operation/function of all Keyence KV Series PLC.
Note following conventions when you use.
Visual KV (Series)
KV-10xx, 16xx, 24xx, 40xx

KV-10AR/AT/DR/DT
KV-24AR/AT/DR/DT

KV-16AR/AT/DR/DT
KV-40AR/AT/DR/DT

Conventional KV (Series)
KV-300 (Series)
KV-10/80 (Series)

KV-10R(W)/T(W)
KV-24R(W)/T(W)
KV-80R(W)/T(W)
KV-300

KV-16R(W)/T(W)
KV-40R(W)/T(W)

General Precautions

At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performance of the KV Sereis PLC.

We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage
in the event a problem occurs.

Do not open or modify the KV Series PLC or use it in any way other than described in the specifications.

When the KV Series PLC is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and
the surrounding environment.

Do not use the KV Series PLC for the purpose of protecting the human body.

Note: The built-in display may show the error message "Error 40" blinking the very
first time you turn on the power supply to the Visual KV Series. Press any key
around the display to cancel this message.
The Visual KV Series shows this message when no program is loaded.

(1)

Note to User
When using the Visual KV Series in the following conditions or environments, be
sure to use the Visual KV Series with sufficient margin regarding the rating and
functions, take appropriate safety precautions such as fail-safe, and contact our
sales personnel if any questions arise.

Use in conditions or environments not described in this manual

Use for nuclear power control, railway facilities, air service facilities, vehicles,
combustion devices, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, etc.

Use for applications where large effects are predicted to be given on human lives
and properties and safety is especially requested.

Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

Restriction to be compatible with EMC directives
When using a relay output type unit (whose model name ends with "R"), connect
spark killers having the appropriate withstand voltage against the load to the
output terminals in parallel to contacts (because the unit discharges when a relay
contact becomes open and noise is generated). In our experiments, we use the
following models of spark killers.
XEB0101 0.1 F-10 manufactured by OKAYA DENKI SANGYO
The following 1-turn ferrite core is added to the AC power input circuit of the KV40AR/T, the KV-24AR/T and to the DC power input circuit of the KV-40DR/T.
ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Note: The contents above do not by themselves ensure that the entire machine
manufactured in accordance with the above contents is compatible with EMC
directives.
You must judge by yourself whether or not the entire machine is compatible with
EMC directives because compatibility may change depending on the component
configuration, wiring and location inside of the machine.
Restriction on compatibility with low-voltage directives (IEC-1010-1)
Use insulated type crimp-style terminals.

For wiring materials, use lead wires whose sheath is 0.4 mm or more.

The Visual KV Series is allowed to be installed in a vertical position only.

(Spacers for expansion units are not available.)

Be sure to use the Visual KV Series inside the control panel.

(2)

Features of the Visual KV Series

Extremely small
The Visual KV Series is the smallest in the world among AC type PLCs equipped
with screw terminal blocks, and saves installation space.
Extremely fast
The minimum scan time is 140 s and minimum instruction execution time is 0.7
s, which is the fastest control in its class.
AC power built-in type newly added
AC power built-in type units are newly added. This type can be used in small
spaces where a switching power supply unit cannot be installed.
Excellent Access Window
An Access Window with two-color backlight is adopted in all models to facilitate
changing and monitoring of device data. Changing between RUN mode and
PROGRAM mode, checking the error code when an error has occurred, etc. can
be performed in a Visual KV Series unit without the need for any handheld
programmer.
The analog trimmer, which has been popular in the conventional KV Series, is
digitized to enable more detail settings. [Digital trimmers]
User message setting function
In the Access Window, 256 different user messages can be displayed. This
function can be used to give instructions on works on the production line, indicate
abnormalities in the units, etc.
Program write in RUN mode
Ladder programs can be changed even while the system is running.
Equipped with two serial ports
Visual KV Series basic units are equipped with two serial ports to connect peripheral units, improving the debug environment.
(The KV-10xx is equipped with only one serial port.)
Easy Ramp-up/down control function
The one-axis motor control function is offered separately from high-speed
counters so that feedback control is enabled.
Equipped with two 24-bit high-speed 30 kHz, two-phase counters
The Visual KV Series is equipped with two high-speed counters each with a twopoint comparator output function that enables high-speed encoder input.
Specified frequency pulse output function
High-speed counters can function as pulse oscillators of 50 kHz maximum with
easy setting, without creating a complicated ladder program.
Frequency counter function
High-speed counters can function as frequency counters with easy setting,
without creating complicated ladder programs.
Cam switch function
High-speed counters can function as cam switches with easy setting, without
creating complicated ladder programs.

(3)

 Interrupt function
The Visual KV Series is equipped with four high-speed interrupt inputs of
10 s maximum.
Input time constant change function
The time constant can be set in 7 steps from 10 s to 10 ms.
Double memory backup functions
In addition to a conventional SRAM battery backup function, the Visual KV Series
is also equipped with an EEPROM backup function.

Compatibility with Conventional KV Series Peripheral Units

The Visual KV Series functions as a high-end compatible model of the conventional
KV Series. Peripheral units of the conventional KV Series such as the ladder support
software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV" and the
handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can be used since they are part of the Visual KV
Series.
However, it should be noted that the contents have changed as follows.

The internal clock cycle of high-speed counters consists of three types: 1 s, 10

s, and 100 s.

The time constant for an input relay specified by the HSP instruction is 10 s.

The analog trimmer function is set with the Access Window built into the basic
unit.

The available device setting range of the TMIN instruction is from 0 to 65535.
[Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can display 0 to 9999 .]

The RUN/PROGRAM LED is displayed in the Access Window provided on the

front face of the basic unit.

Transistor output is not independent, but is common.

With the transistor type, the output terminal layout is different.

The specifications for output current of transistor outputs Nos. 500 to 502 is 100
mA.

Conventional KV Series expansion units are not available as expansion units for
the Visual KV Series.

The channel setting switch is not provided for expansion units. Channels are
determined in connection order.

Scans in expansion I/O units are not synchronous with the scan time in Visual KV
Series basic units.

Assignment of special utility relays has partially changed.

Data memory device Nos. DM1000 to DM1999 are assigned as special data
memories.

(4)

Cautions when using the previous version of ladder support software

Pay strict attention to the following items when using the ladder support software.

CAUTION

When using the ladder support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x", set the model to "KV-300".
DM0 to DM1999 are only available.

When the ladder support software "LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is
used, do not use the monitors Change All function. If the Change All function
is used, the basic unit may be damaged. Never use the Change All function.

Peripheral units and other units incompatible with the Visual KV Series
Peripheral units in the conventional KV Series and other units shown below are not
compatible with the Visual KV Series.

Expansion I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-8ER/8ET/8EX/16EX/

8EYR/8EYT/16EYR/16EYT
Analog I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-AD4/DA4

Cautions when Using the Serial Port

The KV-16xx/24xx/40xx units are equipped with two RJ-11 modular connectors for
serial communication.
When using them, pay strict attention to the following contents:

(5)

Programs can be transferred and monitored using either communication port A or

B. However, never connect the ladder software and a handheld programmer to
the two ports at the same time.

The KV-D20 operator interface panel can be connected to either communication

port A or B. However, only one KV-D20 unit can be connected to a single basic
unit.

Never leave both the KV-D20 operator interface panel and KV-P3E(01) handheld
programmer on simultaneously for a long period of time.

(6)

How this manual is organized

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate manuals;
1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming. Please read each manual
relevant to your purpose.

1 Installation
Chapter 1

Configuration and Specifications [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the system configuration of the Visual KV Series, the names and functions of
each part, and the specifications.

Chapter 2

System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the installation and connection of each Visual KV Series unit as well as
system maintenance.

Chapter 3

Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the Access Window used for changing and monitoring data.

Chapter 4

KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel used for changing, monitoring, and
displaying the status of inside relays, timers, counters and data memories.

Chapter 5

KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the hardware specifications and wirings for KV-300 and KV-10/80 Series.

Chapter 6

Handheld Programmer
Describes how to use the handheld programmer and memory card.

Chapter 7

KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the serial interface modules for KV-300 Series.

Chapter 8

KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O module for KV-300 Series

Chapter 9

KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O unit for KV-10/80 Series.

Chapter 10

Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the error code list, countermeasures against problems, and error
indications for each unit.

Appendices
The appendix includes a list of ladder program applications and the index.

2 Support Software
Chapter 1

Introduction
Describes the items included in the package, the product outline, the method to connect
a personal computer, the installation method, etc.

(7)

Chapter 2

Editor
Describes the operating procedures in Editor mode.

Chapter 3

Simulator
Describes the operating procedures in Simulator mode.

Chapter 4

Monitor
Describes the operating procedures in Monitor mode.

Appendices
Includes instructions list, devices list, sample program list and quick reference for key
operation and shortcuts.

3 Programming
Chapter 1

Programming
Describes basic knowledge including program creation procedures, device configuration,
relay assignments, special functions to set and confirm Visual KV Series operations, as
well as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the contents described here completely at first before creating programs.

Chapter 2

Instructions
Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Series.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-183 for details of interrupt instructions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-195 for details of the high-speed
counters used in the application instruction.

Chapter 3

Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

The interrupt processing function executes an interrupt program when an external input
or request from the high-speed counter comparator (interrupt factor) is encountered
during KV operation.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as well as inputs and outputs
encountered during interrupt processing.

Chapter 4

High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, which allow highspeed pulse measurement and pulse output, independent of the scan time.

Chapter 5

Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.

Chapter 6

Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.

Chapter 7

Serial Communication
The KV Series can be connected to an external device with an RS-232C interface to
establish communication.
This chapter describes communications specifications, how to connect the KV Series to
external devices, and how to perform communication.

Chapter 8

Programming Examples
Describes the typical programming examples for KV-10/80 Series. These programs can
be used for Visual KV Series. However, pay attention to the I/O addressing compatibility
before use.

(8)

Contents
3

Programming

Chapter 1

Programming
1.1
Before Creating Programs .............................................................................. 3-2
1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation ................................................................... 3-2
1.1.2 Scan Time ........................................................................................................... 3-3
Scan time ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Input response time delay ............................................................................ 3-3
1.2
User Memory .................................................................................................... 3-4
1.2.1 Program Capacity ............................................................................................... 3-4
Maximum number of lines in a program ....................................................... 3-4
Calculating the byte count used ................................................................... 3-4
1.3
Device Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-5
1.3.1 Device List .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Relay list ...................................................................................................... 3-5
List of I/O relays in basic units ..................................................................... 3-5
List of relays in expansion units ................................................................... 3-6
1.3.2 Relay No. ............................................................................................................ 3-7
Address No. ................................................................................................. 3-7
Contact No. .................................................................................................. 3-8
Channel No. ................................................................................................. 3-8
1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos. .......................................................................................... 3-8
1.3.4 Input Relays ........................................................................................................ 3-9
Basic unit ..................................................................................................... 3-9
Expansion unit ........................................................................................... 3-10
1.3.5 Output Relays ................................................................................................... 3-10
Output operation time ................................................................................ 3-10
1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-11
Retentive function of internal utility relays .................................................. 3-11
1.3.7 Special Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-12
Description ................................................................................................. 3-12
1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List ................................................................................... 3-14
Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ............................................ 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0) .......................................... 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1) .......................................... 3-15
Other special utility relays .......................................................................... 3-15
1.3.9 Timers and Counters ........................................................................................ 3-18
Timer/Counter list ....................................................................................... 3-18
Description ................................................................................................. 3-18
1.3.10 Data Memories ................................................................................................. 3-19
1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory .................................................................................. 3-21
1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions ................................................................................. 3-22
1.4
Special Functions .......................................................................................... 3-23
1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function ............................................................. 3-23
Setting the input time constant for basic units using special utility relays .. 3-23
1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant ......................................................... 3-24
Modification within the CPU ....................................................................... 3-24
1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode ............................................................................... 3-25
1.4.4 Output Disabled Function ................................................................................. 3-26
1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function ...................................................................... 3-26
1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function ..................................................................... 3-27
1.4.7 Special Functions ............................................................................................. 3-28
Constant Scan Time Mode ........................................................................ 3-28
Output Disabled Function .......................................................................... 3-28
Input Refresh Disabled Function ................................................................ 3-28
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3

(9)

Extended Ladder Diagrams .......................................................................... 3-29

Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams ........................................................... 3-29
Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................................... 3-30
Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 3-31

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Instructions
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5

Instruction List [Visual KV Series] .............................................................. 3-34

Basic Instructions .............................................................................................. 3-34
Application Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-36
Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-38
Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-41
Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .............................................................. 3-41

2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] ................................................. 3-42

Basic Instructions .............................................................................................. 3-42
Application Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-45
Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-48
Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-54

2.3

Convention Details ........................................................................................ 3-55

2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3

Instruction Details .......................................................................................... 3-56

Basic Instructions .............................................................................................. 3-56
Application Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-95
Arithmetic Instructions .................................................................................... 3-134

2.5

Programming Notes ..................................................................................... 3-189

Interrupts

Visual KV

3.1

Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-192

3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4

Interrupt Processing .................................................................................... 3-194

Interrupt Processing ........................................................................................ 3-194
Types of Interrupts .......................................................................................... 3-195
Interrupt Priority .............................................................................................. 3-196
Interrupt Program ............................................................................................ 3-196

3.3
Direct Input/Output ...................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.1 Direct Input ..................................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.2 Direct Output ................................................................................................... 3-197
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4

Chapter 4

Applications of Interrupt Programs ........................................................... 3-198

Interrupt with a Signal Converter .................................................................... 3-198
Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ............................................................... 3-199
Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses .............................................. 3-200
Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between Two Points ........... 3-201

High-speed Counters
4.1

Visual KV

High-speed Counter Instructions ............................................................... 3-204

4.2
Outline of High-speed Counters ................................................................. 3-206
4.2.1 High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators ........................ 3-206
Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators . 3-206
Specifications of high-speed counters ..................................................... 3-208
High-speed counter comparators ............................................................. 3-209
4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters .......................................................... 3-210
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6

Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-211

Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter .................................. 3-211
Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator .................................... 3-211
Comparator Output ......................................................................................... 3-211
Count Input Method ........................................................................................ 3-212
Resetting the High-speed Counter ................................................................. 3-214
Differences with the CTH Instruction between the
Conventional and Visual KV Series ................................................................ 3-216
4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters ............................................................. 3-217
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5

Extended Functions of High-speed Counters ........................................... 3-221

24-bit High-speed Counter .............................................................................. 3-221
Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed Counter ......................... 3-223
Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter (single-phase input) ....... 3-224
Ring Counter Function .................................................................................... 3-225
Applications of Ring Counters ........................................................................ 3-226

4.5

Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-228

(10)

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5

Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .................................................. 3-228

Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ................................... 3-229
Frequency Counter Function .......................................................................... 3-231
Applications of Frequency Counters ............................................................... 3-232
Cam Switch Function ...................................................................................... 3-233
Cam switch mode .................................................................................... 3-233
Multi-step comparator mode .................................................................... 3-234
Setting method .........................................................................................3-234
4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode) ....................................... 3-236
4.6
Direct Clock Pulse Output ........................................................................... 3-237
4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output .............................................................. 3-237
4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator .................... 3-238
Changing the pulse period and width ....................................................... 3-238
Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value ...................... 3-239
Operation with special utility relays .......................................................... 3-239
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4

Chapter 5

Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................................... 3-242

Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .................................. 3-242
Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .......................... 3-245
Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Count ............... 3-249
Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down control) ................ 3-251

Positioning Control

Visual KV

5.1
Outline of Positioning Control .................................................................... 3-254
5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control ................................................................................... 3-254
5.2
Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures .......................................... 3-255
5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure ......................................................................... 3-255
5.2.2 Operating Procedure ...................................................................................... 3-257
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3

Chapter 6

Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function .............................. 3-258

Connection Example ....................................................................................... 3-258
Tips .................................................................................................................3-258
Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ............................. 3-259

Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control

KV-300, KV-10/80

6.1
Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-268
6.1.1 Description of Interrupts .................................................................................. 3-268
Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine ...................... 3-268
Types of interrupt ..................................................................................... 3-268
Interrupt priority ........................................................................................ 3-269
Interrupt routine ........................................................................................ 3-269
Direct output ............................................................................................. 3-270
Direct input ...............................................................................................3-270
6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions ....................................................................................... 3-271
6.2
Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................................ 3-276
6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................... 3-276
Outline of High-Speed Counters .............................................................. 3-276
Outline of Pulse Output ............................................................................ 3-279
Examples of Pulse Output ....................................................................... 3-284
6.3
Positioning Control ...................................................................................... 3-296
6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control) ................................................. 3-296
Outline of positioning control .................................................................... 3-296
Setting and application of parameters ..................................................... 3-297
Examples of stepping motor control ......................................................... 3-300

Chapter 7

Serial Communication
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3

Communications Specifications ................................................................ 3-306

Communications Specification ........................................................................ 3-306
Connection with the KV Unit ........................................................................... 3-306
Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer ................................... 3-307

7.2
Serial Communication ................................................................................. 3-308
7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure ............................................................... 3-308

(11)

Chapter 8

7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7

Format of Commands/Responses .................................................................. 3-309

Communication Command/Response List ..................................................... 3-310
Setting Communication Commands and Responses to Commands .............. 3-311
Other Response Codes .................................................................................. 3-315
Error Code List ................................................................................................ 3-316
Example Program ........................................................................................... 3-317

7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3

Loading Text Data ........................................................................................ 3-318

Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 3-318
Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 3-319
Sample Program ............................................................................................. 3-320

7.4

ASCII Code List ............................................................................................ 3-321

Programming Examples
8.1

List

......................................................................................................... 3-324

8.2
Details ......................................................................................................... 3-326
8.2.1 Reference Program Examples ........................................................................ 3-326
Basic Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-326
Application Instructions ............................................................................ 3-334
Arithmetic Instructions .............................................................................. 3-343

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

3-367

Installation

Chapter 1

Configuration and Specifications

Visual KV

1.1
System Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 System Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2
Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 General Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.2 AC Power Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5
Visual KV Series operation at power interruption ........................................ 1-5
1.2.3 Performance Specifications ................................................................................ 1-6
Data backup function against instantaneous power interruption ................. 1-7
1.3
Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ................................................... 1-8
1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit .......................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications ................................................................................ 1-8
1.4
KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................. 1-10
1.4.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-11
KV-10AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-11
KV-10AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-13
1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-14
1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-15
1.4.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5
KV-16AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (16-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................. 1-17
1.5.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-17
1.5.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-18
KV-16AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-18
KV-16AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-20
1.5.3 AC Power Input (KV-16AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-21
1.5.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-22
1.5.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6
KV-24AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (24-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................. 1-24
1.6.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-24
1.6.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-25
KV-24AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-25
KV-24AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-27
1.6.3 AC Power Input (KV-24AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-28
1.6.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-29
1.6.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7

KV-40AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (40-I/O Basic Unit) .............................................. 1-31

(12)

1.7.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-31

1.7.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-32
KV-40AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-32
KV-40AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-34
1.7.3 AC Power Input (KV-40AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-35
1.7.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-36
1.7.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-37
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3

KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit) .................................................. 1-38

Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-38
Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-38
Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-39
KV-E4X (4-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-39
KV-E8X (8-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-40
KV-E16X (16-I/O expansion input unit) ...................................................... 1-41
1.8.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-42
1.9
KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output Unit) ............. 1-43
1.9.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-43
1.9.2 Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-43
KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type) ..................................................... 1-44
KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP)] .................. 1-44
1.9.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-45
KV-E4R [4-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-45
KV-E4T [4-I/O expansion output unit transistor output type)] .................... 1-46
KV-E8R [8-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-47
KV-E8T(P) [8-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output type)] .............. 1-48
KV-E16R [16-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] ...................... 1-49
KV-E16T(P) [16-I/O expansion input unit (transistor output)] .................... 1-50
1.9.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-51
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3

KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit) ....................................................... 1-52

Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-52
Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-53
Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-53
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-53
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-53
1.10.4 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-54
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-54
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-56
1.10.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-58
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4

Chapter 2

KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel) ............................................................... 1-59

Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-59
General Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-60
Functional Specifications .................................................................................. 1-60
Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-61

System Installation

Visual KV

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3

Installation Environment ............................................................................... 1-64

Installation Environment ................................................................................... 1-64
Installation Position ........................................................................................... 1-65
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 1-66
Expansion unit spacer ................................................................................ 1-66
2.1.4 Cautions on Wiring for Each Unit ...................................................................... 1-67
Wiring procedures for basic units ............................................................... 1-67
Cautions on wiring for I/O units .................................................................. 1-68
Terminal ..................................................................................................... 1-68
Cautions on grounding ............................................................................... 1-69
2.1.5 Contact Protection ............................................................................................ 1-69
2.2
Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units .......................................... 1-70
2.2.1 Visual KV Series Expansion Units .................................................................... 1-70
2.2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units ................................................. 1-71
Connection methods .................................................................................. 1-72
Number of connectable units ..................................................................... 1-73
2.2.3 Confirming the Connection Settings of Expansion Units .................................. 1-74
Expansion unit relay list ............................................................................. 1-74
Connection information for expansion units ............................................... 1-75
Input time constant for expansion units ..................................................... 1-76

(13)

Clearing the input value when disconnecting ............................................. 1-76

2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Units and the Basic Unit ...... 1-77
When inputting ........................................................................................... 1-77
In the case of output .................................................................................. 1-77
2.3
Inspection and Maintenance ......................................................................... 1-78
2.3.1 Inspection ......................................................................................................... 1-78
2.3.2 Maintenance .....................................................................................................1-78

Chapter 3

Access Window

Visual KV

3.1
Overview of the Access Window .................................................................. 1-80
3.1.1 What is the Access Window ............................................................................. 1-80
3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples ........................................................................ 1-80
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5

Basic Operating Procedures ......................................................................... 1-81

Operation Mode ................................................................................................1-81
Access Window Modes ..................................................................................... 1-81
Part Names and Functions of the Access Window ........................................... 1-82
Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock ............................................ 1-82
Turbo Function .................................................................................................. 1-83

3.3
Digital Trimmer Mode .................................................................................... 1-84
3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure ................................................................... 1-84
Key operation and screen display .............................................................. 1-84
Function and operating procedure ............................................................. 1-84
3.4
Device Mode ................................................................................................... 1-87
3.4.1 Function and Operating Procedure ................................................................... 1-87
Devices that can be displayed and changed ............................................. 1-87
Key operation and screen display .............................................................. 1-87
Selecting the device and displaying the current value/set value ................ 1-88
Changing a numeric value ......................................................................... 1-89
Holding the setting ..................................................................................... 1-91
3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type .............................................................. 1-91
Data memory (DM) .................................................................................... 1-91
Temporary data memory (TM) ................................................................... 1-91
Timer/counter (T/C) .................................................................................... 1-92
High-speed counter comparator (CTC) ...................................................... 1-92
Trimmer (TRM) .......................................................................................... 1-93
Relay (RLY) ...............................................................................................1-93
3.5
System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-94
3.5.1 Function and Operating Procedure ................................................................... 1-94
Key operation and screen display .............................................................. 1-94
LOAD mode and SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
Display in LOAD/SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
3.6
Message Display ............................................................................................ 1-97
3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status ..................................................................... 1-97
3.6.2 User Messages ................................................................................................. 1-97
How to use the user messages .................................................................. 1-98

Chapter 4

KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel

Visual KV

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

Before Operation .......................................................................................... 1-100

Checking Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-100
Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-101
Details about the KV-D20 ............................................................................... 1-102
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-102
Functional specifications .......................................................................... 1-102
Dimensions .............................................................................................. 1-103
4.1.4 Installation and Environment .......................................................................... 1-104
Use environment ...................................................................................... 1-104
Panel mounting ........................................................................................ 1-105
4.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance ........................................................................... 1-106
Inspection ................................................................................................. 1-106
Maintenance ............................................................................................ 1-106
4.2
Overview and Operation .............................................................................. 1-107
4.2.1 Use Examples for the KV-D20 ........................................................................ 1-107

(14)

4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series ....................................................................... 1-108

Connection ...............................................................................................1-108
Precautions .............................................................................................. 1-108
4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20 ................................................................................. 1-109
Switching the display mode ..................................................................... 1-109
Overview of each display mode ............................................................... 1-110
Assignment of relays/DM ......................................................................... 1-111
Other functions .........................................................................................1-112
Precautions about screen change function .............................................. 1-115
4.2.4 Operator Mode ................................................................................................1-117
Screen selection in operator mode .......................................................... 1-117
Operator screen ....................................................................................... 1-118
Direct access screen ................................................................................ 1-126
KV-I/O monitor screen ............................................................................. 1-127
Switch comment screen ........................................................................... 1-128
Lamp comment screen ............................................................................ 1-128
Screen change permission in operator mode .......................................... 1-129
4.2.5 Device Mode ................................................................................................... 1-130
Device mode ............................................................................................ 1-130
Operation example for device mode ........................................................ 1-132
4.2.6 System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-134
System mode ........................................................................................... 1-134
4.3
Examples of Ladder Programs ................................................................... 1-135
4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs .................................................................................. 1-135
Before creating ladder programs ............................................................. 1-135
Basic ladder programs ............................................................................. 1-136
4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs ....................................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying user messages ..................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying messages with titles ............................................. 1-145
Example of position control ...................................................................... 1-146
Example of frequency counter ................................................................. 1-149
Example of 24-bit high-speed counter ..................................................... 1-152
Example of cam switch function ............................................................... 1-154
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3

Chapter 5

Appendix ....................................................................................................... 1-158

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-158
Available Character List .................................................................................. 1-162
Comment Draft Sheet ..................................................................................... 1-163

KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware

KV-300, KV-10/80

5.1
System Configuration .................................................................................. 1-166
5.1.1 KV-300 ............................................................................................................1-166
5.1.2 KV-10/80 ......................................................................................................... 1-167
5.2
Module/Unit Specifications ......................................................................... 1-168
5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module ............................................................. 1-168
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-168
5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ................................................ 1-169
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-169
5.2.3 Wiring: KV-300 CPU ....................................................................................... 1-170
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-170
5.2.4 Wiring: KV-C16X/C32X Connector Input Module ........................................... 1-171
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-171
5.2.5 Wiring: KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Connector Output Module ............................... 1-172
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-172
5.2.6 Wiring: KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module ......................................................... 1-173
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-173
5.2.7 Wiring: KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T I/O Terminal Modules ............. 1-174
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-174
5.2.8 Module Names and Functions ........................................................................ 1-175
5.2.9 Peripheral Equipment Names and Functions ................................................. 1-176
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3

Module/Unit Connections ............................................................................ 1-178

Environmental Requirements ......................................................................... 1-178
Installation Guidelines ..................................................................................... 1-178
Assembling the System .................................................................................. 1-179
Connecting modules ................................................................................ 1-179
5.3.4 Mounting to the DIN Rail ................................................................................. 1-180
5.3.5 Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-181

(15)

5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and DC Power Distribution Module .... 1-182
KV-U4 AC Power Supply Module ............................................................ 1-182
KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ..................................................... 1-182
5.3.7 I/O Connectors ................................................................................................ 1-183
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-183
KV-C16X/C32X ........................................................................................ 1-184
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S .............................................................................. 1-185
KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T ...................................................... 1-186
5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and Power Distribution ......... 1-187
Transmission distance by cable type ....................................................... 1-187
Connection patterns ................................................................................. 1-187
Incorrect wiring patterns ........................................................................... 1-188
Power distribution .................................................................................... 1-188
5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions ................................................................... 1-189
5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators ............................................................................. 1-191
5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units .............................................................................. 1-192
5.3.12 Mounting Environment .................................................................................... 1-194

Chapter 6

Handheld Programmer
6.1
Using the Handheld Programmer ............................................................... 1-196
6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer ............................................................. 1-196
6.1.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-198
6.2
Basic Operations ......................................................................................... 1-200
6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation ........................................................................ 1-200
6.3

Functions ...................................................................................................... 1-216

Function Nos. list ..................................................................................... 1-216
ALL CLEAR .............................................................................................. 1-217
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR ..................................................... 1-217
COUNTER CLEAR .................................................................................. 1-218
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR ........................................................... 1-218
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR .................................................................. 1-219
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET ........................................................... 1-219
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED .......................................................... 1-220
OFFLINE EDITOR START ...................................................................... 1-221
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP ........................................................................ 1-221
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE ................................... 1-222
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE .................................................. 1-224
RELAY ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 1-226
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY ................................................................ 1-227
READ TRIMMER SETTING ..................................................................... 1-228
SYNTAX CHECK ..................................................................................... 1-228
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK .............................................................. 1-229

6.4
Memory Card ................................................................................................ 1-230
6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] .................................................................. 1-230
6.4.2 Storage Capacity ............................................................................................ 1-230
CLEAR ..................................................................................................... 1-232
NEW ......................................................................................................... 1-233
ACCS ....................................................................................................... 1-234
ACCS: SAVE ........................................................................................... 1-235
ACCS: LOAD ........................................................................................... 1-236
ACCS: VERIFY ........................................................................................ 1-236
ACCS: DELETE ....................................................................................... 1-237

Chapter 7

KV-L2 Serial Interface Module

KV-300

7.1
Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.1.1 Features .......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3

Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-241

Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-241
System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-242
Outline of Operation Modes ............................................................................ 1-244

7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3

Installation .................................................................................................... 1-245

Setting the Operation Mode ............................................................................ 1-245
Communications Protocols ............................................................................. 1-247
Connector Wiring ............................................................................................ 1-248

(16)

7.3.4 Connecting to External Units .......................................................................... 1-249

Connecting to An External Display .......................................................... 1-249
Connecting to an IBM PC-AT Computer .................................................. 1-249
Connecting to the KV-10/16/24/40/80 ...................................................... 1-250
Connecting KV-L2s .................................................................................. 1-250
7.4
Software Setup ............................................................................................. 1-252
7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)] .................................................. 1-252
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) from the KV-L2 ........................................................ 1-252
7.5
KV Mode Programming ............................................................................... 1-253
7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode .................................................................................... 1-253
Communications protocol ........................................................................ 1-253
7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure ................................................................. 1-255
Command transmission procedure .......................................................... 1-255
Command/response format ..................................................................... 1-256
Communications commands and responses ........................................... 1-256
Communications commands .................................................................... 1-257
7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data ...................................................... 1-262
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-262
Transmitting Text Data ............................................................................. 1-264
Receiving text data .................................................................................. 1-265
ASCII code/binary conversion function .................................................... 1-266
Example program ..................................................................................... 1-269
7.6
Display Interface Mode Programming ....................................................... 1-270
7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode .............................................................. 1-270
Communications protocols ....................................................................... 1-270
Communications control procedure ......................................................... 1-271
7.6.2 Command and Response Format ................................................................... 1-273
7.6.3 Commands and Responses ........................................................................... 1-275
List of commands and responses ............................................................ 1-275
Description of commands and responses ................................................ 1-277
End codes ................................................................................................1-291
7.7
Non-procedure Mode Programming .......................................................... 1-292
7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode ................................................................. 1-292
Communications protocol ........................................................................ 1-292
Connecting to the KV-L2 .......................................................................... 1-293
7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos. .......................... 1-294
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-294
7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 1-297
Data transmission and internal data memory addresses ......................... 1-297
7.7.4 Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 1-298
Format of received data and data memory addresses ............................ 1-298
7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function ........................................................ 1-300
7.8
Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................................... 1-304
7.8.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-304
7.8.2 Precautions .....................................................................................................1-305
7.9
Specifications ...............................................................................................1-306
7.9.1 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-306
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-306
Communications protocol ........................................................................ 1-306
RS-232C connector specifications ........................................................... 1-306
RS-422A terminal block specifications ..................................................... 1-306
7.9.2 Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-307
7.10 Command List .............................................................................................. 1-308
7.10.1 List of Commands and Responses ................................................................. 1-308
7.10.2 List of Commands and Responses in Display Interface mode ....................... 1-309

Chapter 8

KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module

8.1

KV-300

Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-312

Features ................................................................................................... 1-312

8.2
Configuration ...............................................................................................1-313
8.2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-313
8.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-314
8.3
Installation .................................................................................................... 1-315
8.3.1 Terminal Nos. ................................................................................................. 1-315

(17)

8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5

Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-316

Example of Voltage I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-317
Example of Current I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-318
Setting I/O Ranges ......................................................................................... 1-319

8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8.4.8
8.4.9

Programming ................................................................................................ 1-320

Input Characteristics (A/D) .............................................................................. 1-320
Calculating Input Data (A/D) ........................................................................... 1-321
Output Characteristics (D/A) ........................................................................... 1-322
Calculating Output Data (D/A) ........................................................................ 1-323
Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses ....................................................... 1-324
Reading Analog Input ..................................................................................... 1-325
Measuring Analog Input Average ................................................................... 1-326
Writing Analog Output ..................................................................................... 1-327
Converting Analog Input to Analog Output ..................................................... 1-328

8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3

KV-AN6 Appendices .................................................................................... 1-329

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-329
Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-330
Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-331
Environmental specifications ................................................................... 1-331
System specifications .............................................................................. 1-331
8.5.4 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-332

Chapter 9

KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit

9.1

KV-10/80

Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-334

Features ................................................................................................... 1-334

9.2
Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-335
9.2.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-335
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-335
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-336
9.2.2 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-337
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-337
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-339
9.2.3 System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-341
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3

Installation .................................................................................................... 1-342

Installation Procedure ..................................................................................... 1-342
Checking the Installation Environment ........................................................... 1-343
Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode ...................................................................... 1-344
Setting the input mode ............................................................................. 1-344
9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments .................................................................... 1-345
Wiring ....................................................................................................... 1-345
Wiring diagrams ....................................................................................... 1-346
9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80 ........................................................................ 1-348
9.3.6 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 1-349
Inspection and Cleaning .......................................................................... 1-349
9.4
Programming ................................................................................................ 1-350
9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4 .............................................................................. 1-350
A/D Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-350
About Digital Data after A/D Conversion .................................................. 1-351
Calculating Voltage and Current Values from Digital Data ...................... 1-352
9.4.2 Programming the KV-DA4 .............................................................................. 1-353
D/A Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-353
Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output ......... 1-354
Writing Digital Data to Data Memory for D/A Conversion ........................ 1-356
9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables ..................................................................... 1-357
Voltage Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-357
Current Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-358
9.5

Programming Examples .............................................................................. 1-359

Calculating Analog Data Values from Digital Data ................................... 1-359
Writing Data to be Analog-output ............................................................. 1-361
Outputting Analog Trimmer Values .......................................................... 1-364
Outputting Analog Input Data ................................................................... 1-365
Outputting Analog Input from a Pressure Sensor to an Air Valve ............ 1-366
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Voltage Limits and Measuring the
Average Voltage ...................................................................................... 1-367

9.6

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-370

(18)

Chapter 10

Troubleshooting
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4

Error List ....................................................................................................... 1-372

List of Error Codes in Basic Units ................................................................... 1-372
Error indication in Expansion Units ................................................................. 1-374
Program Errors ...............................................................................................1-375
Memory Card Errors and Other Errors ........................................................... 1-376

10.2

Replacing Relays .........................................................................................1-377

Replacement procedure ........................................................................... 1-377

10.3 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-378

10.3.1 Troubleshooting List ....................................................................................... 1-378
10.4

Error Messages ............................................................................................ 1-380

Appendices
Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions [Visual KV Series] .................... 1-382
A.1
System Specifications [Visual KV Series] ....................................................... 1-382
Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-382
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-383
AC power supply unit ............................................................................... 1-384
A.2
Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ..................................................... 1-384
Input specifications .................................................................................. 1-384
Output specifications (relay output): KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AR/DR,
KV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR .............................................................. 1-385
Output specifications (transistor output): KV-10AT(P)/DT(P),
KV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and KV-40AT(P)/DT(P) ............ 1-385
A.3
Expansion Unit Specifications ........................................................................ 1-385
A.4
Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-389
Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions [KV-300 Series] ......................... 1-392
B.1
System Specifications [KV-300 Series] .......................................................... 1-392
Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-392
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-393
AC Power supply module/DC power distribution module ........................ 1-394
B.2
Module Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-398
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-398
KV-C16X/C32X Input Modules ................................................................ 1-399
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Output Modules ................................................... 1-400
KV-R8X/R16X I/O Terminal Modules ....................................................... 1-401
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules ..................................... 1-402
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules (RUN Output) .............. 1-403
KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module .............................................................. 1-403
B.3
Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-404
Appendix C.

Ladder Program List ...................................................................... 1-406

Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6] ..................................... 1-408

Voltage conversion table .......................................................................... 1-408
Current conversion table .......................................................................... 1-409

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

1-419

Support software

Chapter 1

Introduction
1.1

Items Included in the Package ........................................................................ 2-2

1.2
Outline of the Ladder Builder for KV .............................................................. 2-3
1.2.1 Operating environment and system configuration .............................................. 2-3
1.2.2 Features and functions of the Ladder Builder for KV .......................................... 2-4
Features of the Ladder Builder for KV ......................................................... 2-4
Functions of the Ladder Builder for KV ........................................................ 2-6
1.3

Before Programming ....................................................................................... 2-7

Machines to be prepared ............................................................................. 2-7
1.3.1 Differences from the KV IncrediWare (DOS) ...................................................... 2-8
1.3.2 Differences from the Ladder Builder for KV Ver 1.0 ........................................... 2-8
1.4

(19)

Installing the Software ..................................................................................... 2-9

1.4.1 Preparation for installation .................................................................................. 2-9

1.4.2 Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 95 ......................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 3.1 ........................................................................ 2-12

Chapter 2

1.5

Cautions for Use ............................................................................................ 2-13

1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5

Basic Operations ........................................................................................... 2-14

Program creation flow and available modes ..................................................... 2-14
Starting up and exiting from the software ......................................................... 2-16
Screen .............................................................................................................. 2-18
Mouse operation and keyboard operation ........................................................ 2-21
Online Help ....................................................................................................... 2-23

Editor

KV-300

2.1
Outline of the Editor Functions .................................................................... 2-26
2.1.1 Cautions for editing ladder programs ................................................................ 2-26
2.2
Edit Screen .....................................................................................................2-27
2.2.1 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-27
2.2.2 Ladder program window screen ....................................................................... 2-28
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7

File Management ............................................................................................ 2-29

Creating a new file ............................................................................................ 2-29
Setting the automatic file read function ............................................................. 2-30
Setting automatic file save for the file ............................................................... 2-31
Saving and reading files ................................................................................... 2-32
Reading and saving a file in another format ..................................................... 2-33
Saving a ladder diagram in text format ............................................................. 2-36
Verifying files .................................................................................................... 2-36

2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6

Entering/Deleting Symbols and Connection Lines .................................... 2-37

Entering symbols .............................................................................................. 2-37
Deleting symbols .............................................................................................. 2-42
Entering contacts/coils directly ......................................................................... 2-42
Changing the device at the current cursor position .......................................... 2-43
Entering/Deleting connection lines ................................................................... 2-44
Canceling edit operations ................................................................................. 2-45

2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3

Entering Comments/Labels ......................................................................... 2-46

Editing comments/labels ................................................................................... 2-46
Editing line comments ....................................................................................... 2-50
Changing ladder lines into comments ............................................................... 2-51

2.6
Edit and Arrangement .................................................................................. 2-52
2.6.1 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-52
2.6.2 Inserting and deleting lines ............................................................................... 2-57
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5

Jump, Search, and Replace ......................................................................... 2-58

Jump .................................................................................................................2-58
Searching for instruction words/operands ........................................................ 2-62
Searching for the device at the cursor position ................................................. 2-63
Replacing operands .......................................................................................... 2-64
Converting a/b contacts .................................................................................... 2-65

2.8
Editing the Mnemonic List ........................................................................... 2-67
2.8.1 Displaying and terminating a mnemonic list ..................................................... 2-67
2.8.2 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-69
2.9
Displaying the Use Status ............................................................................. 2-70
2.9.1 Displaying a use status list ............................................................................... 2-70
2.10 Setting the System .........................................................................................2-71
2.10.1 Setting the system ............................................................................................ 2-71
2.11 Entering and Developing Macros ................................................................ 2-72
2.11.1 Creating a macro file .........................................................................................2-72
2.11.2 Entering and developing macros ...................................................................... 2-74
2.12
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3

Compilation .................................................................................................... 2-75

Executing compilation ....................................................................................... 2-75
Error display ......................................................................................................2-76
Double coil check .............................................................................................. 2-76

2.13

Printing Functions .........................................................................................2-77

(20)

2.13.1 Printing .............................................................................................................. 2-77

2.13.2 Preview display ................................................................................................. 2-81
2.14 Changing the Display Color on the Screen ................................................. 2-82
2.14.1 Changing display colors on the screen ............................................................. 2-82

Chapter 3

Simulator
3.1
Outline of the Simulator Functions .............................................................. 2-84
3.1.1 Outline of the functions ..................................................................................... 2-84
3.1.2 Restrictions in the simulator .............................................................................. 2-84
3.2
Starting up and Exiting from the Simulator ................................................. 2-86
3.2.1 Operating procedure for startup and exit .......................................................... 2-86
3.2.2 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-88

Chapter 4

3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5

Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................... 2-89

Outline of the ladder monitor ............................................................................ 2-89
Executing scans ................................................................................................ 2-89
Executing steps .............................................................................................. 2-101
Jump and search ............................................................................................ 2-105
Stop/reset and device all clear ........................................................................ 2-108

3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5

Monitor All .................................................................................................... 2-109

Outline of monitor all ....................................................................................... 2-109
Displaying, saving, and reading the monitor all window ................................. 2-109
Monitor all window .......................................................................................... 2-113
Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-113
Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-116

3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7

Registration Monitor .................................................................................... 2-119

Outline of the registration monitor ................................................................... 2-119
Displaying, saving, and reading the registration monitor ................................ 2-119
Registration monitor window ........................................................................... 2-122
Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-122
Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-123
Manipulating timing charts .............................................................................. 2-128
Printing out the registration monitor ................................................................ 2-131

Monitor
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

Outline of the Monitor Functions ............................................................... 2-134

Outline of the functions ................................................................................... 2-134
Restrictions in the monitor .............................................................................. 2-134
Precautions for communication ...................................................................... 2-135

4.2
Communicating with the PLC ..................................................................... 2-136
4.2.1 Setting the PLC communication parameters .................................................. 2-136
4.2.2 Setting the comment transfer .......................................................................... 2-138
4.3
Starting up and Exiting from the Monitor .................................................. 2-139
4.3.1 Operating procedures for startup and exit ...................................................... 2-139
4.3.2 Name and function of each part of the screen ................................................ 2-143
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7

Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................. 2-144

Outline of the ladder monitor .......................................................................... 2-144
Displaying the ladder monitor window ............................................................ 2-144
PLC error check .............................................................................................. 2-144
Starting the monitor ........................................................................................ 2-145
Stopping the monitor ....................................................................................... 2-145
Screen displayed while the monitor is running ............................................... 2-146
Setting the PLC operation mode ..................................................................... 2-147

4.5
Monitor All and Registration Monitor ......................................................... 2-148
4.5.1 Functions of the monitor all window ................................................................ 2-148
4.5.2 Functions of the registration monitor .............................................................. 2-148
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3

(21)

Monitor Function .......................................................................................... 2-149

Disabling the input refresh/Disabling the output ............................................. 2-149
Changing the current values all at once ......................................................... 2-150
Device all clear ...............................................................................................2-154

Appendices
Appendix A Error Message List ......................................................................... 2-156
A-1
System errors ................................................................................................. 2-156
A-2
Memory errors ................................................................................................ 2-156
A-3
File errors ........................................................................................................ 2-157
A-4
Installation errors ............................................................................................ 2-157
A-5
Errors that occur in the editor ......................................................................... 2-158
A-6
Errors that occur in the monitor/simulator ....................................................... 2-159
A-7
Communication errors (displayed in the monitor) ........................................... 2-159
A-8
PLC errors ...................................................................................................... 2-160
A-9
Errors that occur during compilation ............................................................... 2-161
Appendix B Instruction List ............................................................................... 2-163
B-1
Basic instructions ............................................................................................ 2-163
B-2
Application instructions ................................................................................... 2-164
B-3
Arithmetic instructions ..................................................................................... 2-165
B-4
Interrupt instructions ....................................................................................... 2-166
Appendix C Relay No. List .................................................................................. 2-167
C-1
Relays, timers, counters, and memory numbers for each model ................... 2-167
Appendix D Special Utility Relay List ................................................................ 2-168
D-1
Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ................................................. 2-168
D-2
Special utility relays for high-speed counter (0) .............................................. 2-168
D-3
Special utility relays for high-speed counter (1) .............................................. 2-169
D-4
Other special utility relays ............................................................................... 2-169
D-5
Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-172
D-6
Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-172
Appendix E Devices for KV-10R(W)/T(W) to 80R(W)/T(W), KV-300 ................ 2-174
E-1
Special utility relays ........................................................................................ 2-174
E-2
Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-176
E-3
Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-176
Appendix F Sample Program List ..................................................................... 2-178
F-1
Description of sample ladder programs .......................................................... 2-178
Appendix G Quick Reference ............................................................................. 2-180
G-1 Editor .............................................................................................................. 2-180
G-2 Simulator ......................................................................................................... 2-188
G-3 Monitor ............................................................................................................ 2-195
Appendix H Notes for Programming ................................................................. 2-201
H-1
Circuits that must be modified ........................................................................ 2-201
H-2
Precautions for programming ......................................................................... 2-202
H-3
Programs which cannot be decompiled .......................................................... 2-203
Appendix I

List of Files Used ............................................................................ 2-204

Appendix J

Countermeasures for Frequent Communication Errors ............ 2-205

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

2-215

(22)

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

See 3-367.

Caution

No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any form or by any

means without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.

The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.

KEYENCE has thoroughly checked and reviewed this manual. Please contact
the sales office listed at the end of this manual if you have any questions or
comments regarding this manual or if you find an error.

KEYENCE assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the information in this manual, item 3 above notwithstanding.

KEYENCE will replace any incomplete or incorrectly collated manual.

All company names and product names in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective owners.

(23)

Chapter 1
Programming
This chapter describes basic knowledge including program creation procedures,
device configuration, relay assignments, special functions to set and confirm Visual
KV Series operations, as well as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the
contents described here completely at first before creating programs.

For a detailed description of instructions, refer to "2.4. Instruction Details" (p.3-56).

1.1

Before Creating Programs .......................................................... 3-2

1.1.1
1.1.2

Flow from Introduction to Operation ........................................................... 3-2

Scan Time .................................................................................................. 3-3

1.2

User Memory ................................................................................ 3-4

1.2.1

Program Capacity ...................................................................................... 3-4

1.3

Device Configuration ................................................................... 3-5

1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.3.12

Device List .................................................................................................. 3-5

Relay No. ................................................................................................... 3-7
Assigning Relay Nos. ................................................................................. 3-8
Input Relays ............................................................................................... 3-9
Output Relays .......................................................................................... 3-10
Internal Utility Relays ............................................................................... 3-11
Special Utility Relays ................................................................................ 3-12
Special Utility Relay List ........................................................................... 3-14
Timers and Counters ................................................................................ 3-18
Data Memories ......................................................................................... 3-19
Temporary Data Memory ......................................................................... 3-21
Relay Nos. and Functions ........................................................................ 3-22

1.4

Special Functions ...................................................................... 3-23

1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7

Input Time Constant Change Function ....................................................

Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant ................................................
Constant Scan Time Mode .......................................................................
Output Disabled Function .........................................................................
Input Refresh Disabled Function ..............................................................
Contact Comment Save Function ............................................................
Special Functions .....................................................................................

1.5

Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................................... 3-29

1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3

Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams .................................................. 3-29

Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams ............................................. 3-30
Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram ............................................... 3-31

3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28

1.1 Before Creating Programs

1.1 Before Creating Programs

This section describes what you should know before creating programs and operations for the Visual KV Series.

1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation

This section describes an overview of program creation procedures, functions used,
and setting items.
In the example described below, a latch circuit is created as a program for the Visual
KV Series.
Introduction

Examining contents of operations

Figure 1 shows a latch circuit which operates as follows.
Pushbutton switch PB1: ON
Pilot lamp (PL) turns on.
Pushbutton switch PB2: OFF

Fig. 1
PB1 = N.O. contact switch
PB2 = N.C. contact switch
PB1

PB2

Pushbutton switch PB1: OFF Pilot lamp (PL) remains

lit even if PB1 turns
Pushbutton switch PB2: OFF
OFF.
Pushbutton switch PB1: OFF Pilot lamp (PL) goes out
Pushbutton switch PB2: ON
when PB2 is set to ON.

RL
(Relay)

Time chart
PB1 contact
PB2 contact

PL

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

PL

OFF

Next, a program is created that will use the same operation as this circuit to control a PLC.

Program examination
Circuit 1 shows relay symbols for the latch circuit.
Examine which contact in the Visual KV Series is used for each pushbutton switch and pilot lamp
(Table 1). When many I/O devices are required for control, expansion units should also be considered.
Table 1

Circuit 1
RL

PB1 PB2
RL

Relay (coil)

Relay (contact)
RL

Relay (contact)

PL

Pilot lamp

I/O device
Pushbutton switch PB1 (N.O. contact)
Pushbutton switch PB2 (N.C. contact)
Relay RL
Pilot lamp PL

Contact No.
Input relay (0000)
Input relay (0001)
Internal relay (1000)
Output coil (0500)

Program creation
Edit a program using the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software creation tool.
Ladder diagram
0000

0001*

1000

1000

1000

0500

Coding list
LD
0000
OR
1000
AND 0001
OUT 1000
LD
1000
OUT 0500
END

* Enter "N.O. (AND X001)" to 0001 to

use N.C. contact.

Transferring and confirming the program

Transfer the created program to the Visual KV Series, perform a test run, and then confirm operations
with the actual devices.

Operation

3-2

Chapter 1 Programming

1.1 Before Creating Programs

1.1.2 Scan Time

Scan time
The Visual KV Series repeatedly executes a ladder based on the sequence circuit
as follows.
Writes the ON/OFF status of all input terminals to the input
memory before executing the program.

Input processing

Program execution

Output processing

Reads the ON/OFF status of each device (internal utility relay,

timer, counter, etc.) based on the instructions, and performs
arithmetic operations.
Writes the arithmetic operation result to the output memory.

Outputs the contents of the output memory to output terminals.

The duration of time required to perform one cycle is called the scan time (or cycle
time). The scan time varies based on program size and the instructions used in the
program.

Input response time delay

In addition to the I/O processing time, there is also an input time delay in the Visual
KV Series caused by the scan time. The input time delay is generated because the
input status can only be read during the input processing time. If the input status is
changed after input processing, the changed contents can only be read during the
next scan time.
In the figure below, 1 and 2 can be read but 3 cannot be read.
1

Input signal

ON
OFF

Scan time

Input processing

Program
execution

Output processing

Input processing

Program
execution

Output processing

Program
execution

Input processing

Read

Output processing

Input processing

Program
execution

Output processing

Input processing

Output processing

Read

Scan time

Reference: The maximum and minimum values of the input response time are as
follows.
Maximum value: Input time constant + Scan time x 2 + Output response delay time
Minimum value: Input time constant + Scan time + Output response delay time

Note 1: When the input time constant is made small by setting the HSP instruction,
special utility relay 2813, and data memory DM1940, a signal may not be received if
its ON time is shorter than the scan time.
Note 2: The INT instruction is independent of the scan time.
Note 3: The minimum scan time is 140 s (with the basic unit).

Chapter 1 Programming

3-3

11

1.2 User Memory

1.2 User Memory

This section describes the allowable size (capacity) of a program which can be
created in the Visual KV Series.

1.2.1 Program Capacity

When a user program is created for the Visual KV Series, the maximum number of
steps a program can contain using the mnemonic diagram varies based on the byte
count of the instructions used. The instruction byte count is determined individually
for each instruction.

For more about byte counts for each instruction, refer to "2.1 Instruction List" (p.3-34).

Maximum number of lines in a program

In the KV-10xx/16xx, a program with approximately 2,000 steps can be written. In
the KV-24xx/40xx, a program with approximately 4,000 steps can be written.

Total byte count of the memory used by instructions 6,000 bytes / 12,000
bytes

Total byte count of the memory used by objects of instructions 12,000

bytes / 24,000 bytes
* In the description above, a value on the left side indicates the byte count for
the KV-10xx/16xx, while a value on the right side indicates the byte count for
the KV-24xx/40xx.
* The memory occupied by objects indicates the memory required to execute a
program when operation is started.

For example, the allowable number of steps to be written can be calculated from the
memory occupied by the instructions as follows.
12,000 bytes / 3 bytes (average byte count of an instruction) = 4,000 steps
Note: If either the memory occupied by the instructions or the memory occupied by
objects of a program exceeds the specified memory capacity, the program cannot
be written or executed.

Calculating the byte count used

The byte count used in this program can be calculated as shown in the table below.
#00020
T000

0000
0500

T000

0500

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Byte count

00000

LD

0000

00001

OR

0500

00002

TMR

000#00020

00003

ANB

T000

OUT

0500

00004

Total

3-4

Chapter 1 Programming

Number of objects

14 bytes

32 bytes

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3 Device Configuration

"Device" is a general name for relays, registers, etc. processed by instructions.
This section describes the available devices in the Visual KV Series and their
general use.

1.3.1 Device List

Relay list
Relay No.

Normal use

High-speed
use (1)

High-speed use (2)

They function as B phase of high-speed

counters through specification of utility relays in
KV-10.

0000
0001
0002

Input relays
(Direct input
allowed area)

Interrupt inputs
INT0 to INT3

Remarks

(Polarity inversion
allowed)
Input captures

0003

High-speed
counter 0 input
High-speed
counter 1 input

0004
0005
0006
Input relays
0007

0008
0009
0010 to 0415

0502

A phase
input

B phase
input

Output relays
(Direct output
allowed area)

11

Preset
input

Input relays

0500
0501

High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1

High-speed counter 0 output

High-speed
Specified frequency
counter 1
pulse output
output
Ramp-up/down control output

0503

70 points

0504 to 0915

Output relays

76 points

1000 to 1915

Internal utility relays

160 points

2000 to 2815

Special utility relays

144 points

2900 to 2915

Special utility relays

HKEY information storage area

3000 to 17915 Internal utility relays

2,144 points

Note 1: The ON/OFF status of the set functions is always cleared when the operation mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN. However, special utility relays 2700
to 2715 are held even when the operation mode is changed from PROGRAM to
RUN or when the power is turned off.
Note 2: Internal utility relays can be held by setting the MEMSW instruction

List of I/O relays in basic units

Model

KV-10xx

KV-16xx

KV-24xx

KV-40xx

Basic input relays

0000 to 0005

0000 to 0009

0000 to 0015

0000 to 0107

Basic output relays

0500 to 0503

0500 to 0505

0500 to 0507

0500 to 0515

Chapter 1 Programming

3-5

1.3 Device Configuration

List of relays in expansion units

Input units
Connection
order
1st input
module
2nd input
module
3rd input
module
4th input
module

KV-E4X

KV-E8X

KV-40

KV-10/16/24

KV-10/16/24

KV-E16X

KV-40

KV-40

KV-10/16/24

100 to 103 200 to 203 100 to 107 200 to 207 100 to 115 200 to 215
200 to 203 300 to 303 200 to 207 300 to 307 200 to 215 300 to 315
300 to 303 400 to 403 300 to 307 400 to 407 300 to 315 400 to 415
400 to 403

400 to 407

400 to 415

Output units
Connection
order
1st output
module
2nd output
module
3rd output
module
4th output
module

KV-E4T(P)/R

KV-E8T(P)/R

KV-E16T(P)/R

600 to 603

600 to 607

600 to 615

700 to 703

700 to 707

700 to 715

800 to 803

800 to 807

800 to 815

900 to 903

900 to 907

900 to 915

I/O units
KV-E4XR/T(P)
Connection
order
1st input
module
2nd input
module
3rd input
module
4th input
module
1st output
module
2nd output
module
3rd output
module
4th output
module
*
*

3-6

Input relays

Output relays

KV-10/16/24

KV-40

100 to 103

200 to 203

200 to 203

300 to 303

300 to 303

400 to 403

KV-10/16/24

KV-40

603 to 606

603 to 606

703 to 703

703 to 703

803 to 803

803 to 803

903 to 903

903 to 903

400 to 403

Relay Nos. of expansion units are automatically assigned in the order of connection.
The connection order is counted only for input and output units. When I/O units are
connected, they are counted as input units and output units separately.

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.2 Relay No.

The relay No. configuration is shown below.
Channel No.

12515
Contact No.
(00 to 15)
Address No.
(Input: 0 to 4, output: 5 to 9)

Address No.
Address Nos. are assigned to basic units, input expansion units, output expansion
units, and I/O expansion units. Zero to 4 are assigned to input units, while 5 to 9 are
assigned to output units. Address Nos. assigned in a unit vary based on the number
of I/O terminals and the connection position of the unit.
Model

Basic units

Input expansion units

Output expansion units

I/O expansion units

Address Nos.
KV-10xx

0, 5

KV-16xx

0, 5

KV-24xx

0, 5

KV-40xx

0, 1, 5

kV-E4X

1 to 4*

KV-E8X

1 to 4*

KV-E16X

1 to 4*

KV-E4R/E4T(P)

6 to 9

KV-E8R/E8T(P)

6 to 9

KV-E16R/E16T(P)

6 to 9

KV-E4XR/E4XT(P)

1 to 4*, 6 to 9

11

* 2 to 4 in KV-40xx

Address No. assignment procedure

The address No. is represented as a number 0 to 9.
Address Nos. 0 to 4 are provided for inputs, while address Nos. 5 to 9 are provided for outputs.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-7

1.3 Device Configuration

Contact No.

Contact Nos. are input/output terminal Nos. of basic units, input expansion units,
output expansion units, and I/O expansion units.

The contact No. is represented as a number 0 to 15.

Example
In the KV-E4X, with 4 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 to 3. In the KVE16T(P), with 16 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 to 15.

In a unit with 16 or more terminals, the contact No. of the 17th terminal returns to
0 and its address No. is increased by 1.

Example
In the KV-40AR, with 40 terminals (24 input and 16 output terminals), address
No. 0 is assigned to input terminal Nos. 1 to 16 and address No. 1 is assigned to
input terminal Nos. 17 to 24

Channel No.
The channel No. is the higher order digit in the contact No.

1 1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos.

When assigning relay Nos., the unit No. is based on the connection position of the
unit, and the address No. is determined based on the unit type and I/O contacts.
a) KV-16AR
Basic unit
Input: 10 points
Output: 6 points

b) KV-E4X Input
expansion
unit
Input: 4 points

c) KV-E8R Output
expansion unit
Output: 8 points

With the connections above, the relay Nos. for each unit are assigned as shown in
the table below.

3-8

Unit

Assigned relay Nos.

a) KV-16AR

0000 to 0009 (input) and 0500 to 0505 (output)

b) KV-E4X

0100 to 0103 (input)

c) KV-E8R

01600 to 0607 (output)

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.4 Input Relays

Input relays receive ON/OFF signals sent from external input equipment.
Note 1: Input relays function as contacts in programs. They cannot be used as relay
coils (outputs).
Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.O. or N.C.) used, the order the
relay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Basic unit
Input relay time constant
Though the time constant is usually 10 ms 20%, it can be changed using the
following settings.

When the HSP instruction is used: 10 s 20%

While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, the time constant can be changed in
7 steps by setting data memory DM1940 as follows.
When DM1940 is set to 0: 10s 20%
1: 20 s 20%
2: 500 s 20%
3: 1 ms 20%
4: 2.5 ms 20%
5: 5 ms 20%
6: 10 ms 20%
Never set a numeric value of 7 or larger.

11

For more about changing the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change
Function" (p.3-23).

Hardware input (independent of scan time)

High-speed counter
When the time constant is set to 10 s using the HSP instruction or data memory
DM1940 (only while special utility relay 2813 remains ON), the maximum input
response of input relays 0004 and 0005 of CTH0 and CTH1 becomes 30 kHz.

INT instruction: 0000 to 0003

This instruction can receive any signal without regard to the scan time as far as
the signal ON time is longer than the input time constant.

"HSP instruction" (p.3-86), "INT instruction" (p.3-192), "4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions"
(p.3-204)

Note 1: While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, the input time constant can be
specified for all input relays in a basic unit.
Note 2: Never enter a number of 7 or larger to data memory DM1940.
Note 3: The input time constant specified by data memory DM1940 becomes
effective at the rising edge of special utility relay 2813. To change the input time
constant, first change data memory DM1940, then set special utility relay 2813 to
OFF and ON again. Or change the operation mode of a KV basic unit from PROGRAM to RUN.
Note 4: If the HSP instruction and special utility relay 2813 are used at the same
time, priority is given to the HSP instruction.
Note 5: Only when a high-speed counter input or INT instruction is given, available
input signals do not depend on the scan time.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-9

1.3 Device Configuration

Expansion unit
Input relay time constant
By setting special utility relays 2609 to 2612 to ON, the time constant in input expansion units can be set to 10 s.
Special utility
relay No.
2609*
2610
2611
2612
*

Function
Input time constant of input expansion unit
with relay Nos. 0100 to 0115
Input time constant of input expansion unit
with relay Nos. 0200 to 0215
Input time constant of input expansion unit
with relay Nos. 0300 to 0315
Input time constant of input expansion unit
with relay Nos. 0400 to 0415

OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s

OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s

Not available with the KV-40xx

1.3.5 Output Relays

Output relays output the program execution results to the outside. There are two
types of outputs, relay and transistor.

Note 1: Output relays function as contacts and relay coils in programs.

Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.O. or N.C.) used, the order the
relay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Output operation time

Transistor output
OFF ON: 50 s or less (10 s or less in 500 to 502)
ON OFF: 250 s or less (10 s or less in 500 to 502, 100 s or less for other
outputs in the basic unit)

Relay output
OFF ON: 10 ms or less
ON OFF: 10 ms or less
Transistor output type

KV-10AT(P)/DT(P)

KV-16AT(P)/DT(P)

Relay output type

KV-10AR/DR

KV-16AR/DR

KV-24AT(P)/DT(P)

KV-40AT(P)/DT(P)

KV-24AR/DR

KV-40AR/DR

KV-E4T

KV-E8T(P)

KV-E4R

KV-E8R

KV-E16T(P)

KV-E4XT(P)

KV-E16R

KV-E4XR

Note 1: When programming direct clock pulses, output relays 0500 and 0501 are
used to output pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
Note 2: When the ramp-up/down control function is used, output relay 0502 outputs
positioning pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
"Chapter 5. Positioning Control" (p.3-253)

Note 3: When the specified frequency pulse output function is used, output relay
0501 outputs pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
"4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function" (p.3-228)

3-10

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays

In a relay circuit, when one relay contact is used twice or more inside the circuit, a
multi-pole relay with the same number of poles as the number used may be needed.
Internal utility relays function only in programs, and eliminate the complexity of relay
circuits to facilitate circuit design.
Note 1: Internal utility relays function as contacts and relay coils in programs.
Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.O. or N.C.) used, the order the
relay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Retentive function of internal utility relays

Except for internal utility relays, all relays turn OFF when the operation mode is
changed or when operation is stopped via a power shutdown. When operation is
restarted, all relays remain OFF except relays whose input condition is ON. However, internal utility relays can be set using the MEMSW (memory switch) whether or
not they are to be retained. (Internal utility relays 2700 to 2715, however, are always
retained.)
When an internal utility relay is set to be retained, its ON/OFF status is stored even if
the power is turned off. By using the retained relay all clear function (FUN65), all
relays which are set to be retained can be set to OFF.

For more about setting the memory switch, refer to "MEMSW instruction" (p.3-92).

Application example of a retentive function: Lift vertical movement control

Internal utility relays 1000 and 1001 are set to be retained.
When the upper/lower limit switch turns ON, the direction of lift movement is
inverted. Even if the power is turned off while the lift is moving up (or down), the lift
continues to move up (or down) when the power is turned on again.
MEMSW
$0004
0000

Upper limit
switch
(0000)

0001

1000
0001

#00010
T000
0000

1001

Lower limit
switch
(0001)

Move-down
(0500)

1000

1001
#00010
T001

T000

0501

0500

T001

0500

0501
END

Move-up
(0501)

ENDH

Note: The retentive function is effective only when internal utility relays retained by
the self-retentive circuit or the SET/SFT/KEEP instruction are also retained by the
memory switch.
Internal utility relays are not retained in the program shown below.
0000

1001

Chapter 1 Programming

3-11

11

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.7 Special Utility Relays

Each special utility relay has a unique function. By using special utility relays effectively, programs can be simplified and program control improved.
Note 1: A special utility relay can be used as many times as desired in one program.
Note 2: Special utility relays dedicated for reading can be used as contacts, but
cannot be used as outputs.
For more about relays dedicated for reading, refer to "1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List" (p.3-14).

Description
Relay 2002: Always ON
By setting an output relay to ON using relay 2002, the output relay can be used as a
"running indicator output".
2002

HSP
0100

2002

00000
LDA
DM0000
STA

Set the input time constant of relay 0100 to 10 s.

Transfer the ON/OFF status data of channel 0000 to DM0000.

Relay 2003: Always OFF.

Opposite that of relay 2002, use relay 2003 where it is not required to be turned on.
For example, when using only the up function of an up/down counter, use relay 2003
in the DW (down) input.
Relays 2004, 2005 and 2006: Clock pulse
For each relay, the time ratio is "ON:OFF = 1:1". (Accordingly, the ON time of relay
2005 is 0.05 sec/pulse.)
However, because these relays depend on the scan time, error as much as the scan
time is generated.

By combining an output relay, an "intermittent output" can be made.

By using relay 2006 as input for a counter, the counter can be used as a longterm timer.
1000

#03600
C000
2006
1000

C000

1000 turns ON at every hour.

Relay 2007: Remains OFF during only one scan when operation is started.
This relay can be used when a signal needs to be sent after a specific period
(equivalent to one scan) after operation is started. This relay can also be used for
an initial reset at the start of operation.
After one scan, this relay remains ON.
1000

2007

#00100
C005
0000

When operation is started, this relay returns

the current value of C005 to 0.

3-12

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

Relay 2008: Remains ON during only one scan when operation is started.
This relay can be used for an initial reset at the start of operation.
After one scan, this relay remains OFF.
0000
1000

SFT
D
1100
CLK
1100

2008
RES

When operation is started, this relay sets all internal

utility relays used by the SFT instruction to OFF.

2008

#00000
LDA
DM0000
STA

When operation is started, this relay returns the current

value of DM0000 to 0.

Relay 2813: Sets the input time constant of the CPU.

While relay 2813 remains ON, the input time constant of a basic unit can be set
using the value of DM1940.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-13

11

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List

Special relays and arithmetic operation flags

"1.3.7 Special Utility Relays" (p.3-12)

Relay No.
Always ON.

2003*

Always OFF.

2004*

0.01-s clock pulse (duty cycle: 50%)

2005*

0.1-s clock pulse (duty cycle: 50%)

2006*

1.0-s clock pulse (duty cycle: 50%)

2007*

Remains OFF during first scan after startup.

2008*

2010*

Remains ON during first scan after startup.

Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is negative or when an
overflow is generated.
Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is 0.

2011*

Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is positive.

2012*

Turns ON when an arithmetic operation generates an error.

2009*

Function

2002*

Read-only relay.

Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0)

"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)

Relay No.

Function

2100*

Internal clock used only for CTH0 (1 s)

2101*

Internal clock used only for CTH0 (10 s)

Internal clock used only for CTH0 (100 s)

Automatic clear of CTH0 when comparator CTC0
2103
turns ON.
Prohibits/permits direct output to 0500 when
2104
comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to OFF when comparator
2105
CTC0 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to ON when comparator
2106
CTC0 turns ON.
ON/OFF status of output to 0500 is reversed each
2107
time comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Prohibits/permits direct output to 0500 when
2108
comparator CTC1 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to OFF when comparator
2109
CTC1 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to ON when comparator
2110
CTC1 turns ON.
ON/OFF status of output to 0500 is reversed each
2111
time comparator CTC1 turns ON.
A
utomatic clear of CTH0 when comparator CTC1
2112
turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for comparator CTH0.
2113
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2114
OFF: 1 pulse
OFF: x2
ON: x4 ON: 2 pulses
Read-only relay.
2102*

Multiplication
mode
2113
2114

ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
FF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared

1 pulse

x2

x4

2 pulses

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Note: Never use special utility relays that are not shown above.

3-14

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1)

"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)

Relay No.
2200*

Internal clock used only for CTH1 (1 s)

2201*

Internal clock used only for CTH1 (10 s)

2202*

Internal clock used only for CTH1 (100 s)

Automatic clear of CTH1 when comparator CTC2
turns ON.
Prohibits/permits direct output to 0501 when
comparator CTC2 turns ON.
Direct output to 0501 is set to OFF when comparator
CTC2 turns ON.
Direct output to 0501 is set to ON when comparator
CTC2 turns ON.
ON/OFF status of output to 0501 is reversed each
time comparator CTC2 turns ON.
Prohibits/permits direct output to 0501 when
comparator CTC3 turns ON.
Direct output to 0501 is set to OFF when comparator
CTC3 turns ON.
Direct output to 0501 is set to ON when comparator
CTC3 turns ON.
ON/OFF status of output to 0501 is reversed each
time comparator CTC3 turns ON.
Automatic clear of CTH1 when comparator CTC3
turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for comparator CTH1.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF: 1 pulse OFF: x2 ON: x4 ON: 2 pulses

2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
*

Function

ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared

Read-only relay.
Multiplication
mode
2213
2214

1 pulse

x2

x4

2 pulses

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Note: Never use special utility relays that are not shown above.

Other special utility relays

Relay No.

2305

Function
External outputs disabled
(outputs 0500 to 0915)
External refresh inputs disabled
(inputs 0000 to 0415)
Constant scan time mode
(write preset value in TM29)
Remains ON for one scan when scan time exceeds
preset constant scan time.
Start flag for frequency counter operation.

2306

Specified frequency pulse output

2307
2308

Error flag for specified frequency pulse output

Stops motor driver when turned ON.
Turns ON when motor driver is in operation. Stops motor driver in
emergencies when turned OFF by interrupt instruction.
Starts motor driver when turned ON (detection at rising edge).
Start flag for cam switch operation.
Turns ON when an error occurs in cam switch operation.

2300
2301
2303
2304

2309
2310
2314
2315

ON: Disabled
OFF: Not disabled
ON: Disabled
OFF: Not disabled
ON: Enabled
OFF: Disabled

ON: Enabled
OFF: Disabled

* Read-only relay.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-15

11

1.3 Device Configuration

Relay No.
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414

2415

2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508

2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2515

3-16

Function
Timing of CTH0 external signal
OFF

External preset

OFF

OFF

not used

ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

Level

Interrupt polarity of INT

OFF
OFF

At rising edge

OFF
ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

At both edges

Interrupt polarity of INT1

OFF
OFF

At rising edge

OFF
ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

At both edges

CTH0 set as ring counter

ON: Set
OFF: Not set
Ignore phase B input when CTH0 is set to no multiplication mode.
ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up.
OFF: Use phase B input as usual.
Timing of CTH1 external preset
OFF

External preset

OFF

OFF

not used

ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

Level

Interrupt polarity of INT2

OFF
OFF

At rising edge

OFF
ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

At both edges

Interrupt polarity of INT3

OFF
OFF

At rising edge

OFF
ON

At falling edge

ON
OFF

At rising edge

ON
ON

At both edges

CTH1 set as ring counter

ON: Set
OFF: Not set
Ignore phase B input when CTH1 is set to no multiplication mode.
ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up.
OFF: Use phase B as usual.
Customized switch [F1] on KV-D20 operator interface panel is assigned.
Customized switch [F2] on KV-D20 operator interface panel is assigned.
Customized switch [F3] on KV-D20 operator interface panel is assigned.
Customized switch [F4] on KV-D20 operator interface panel is assigned.
Customized indicator lamp 1 on KV-D20 operator interface panel is
assigned.
Customized indicator lamp 2 on KV-D20 operator interface panel is
assigned.
Customized indicator lamp 3 on KV-D20 operator interface panel is
assigned.
Customized indicator lamp 4 on KV-D20 operator interface panel is
assigned.
Permits change between operator
OFF: Not
mode and device mode of KV-D20
ON: Permitted
permitted
operator interface panel .
Permits the KV-D20 operator interface
OFF: Not
panel to be shifted between operator
ON: Permitted
permitted
mode and system mode.
Specifies the display language for the
ON: Japanese
OFF: English
KV-D20 operator interface panel
Sets the beep for the KV-D20 operator
ON: Use beep
OFF: No beep
interface panel
Reserved for system
Reserved for system
Displays a user message (contents of ON: Display
OFF: Do not
DM1950) in the Access Window
message
display message

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

Relay No.
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613

Function
Input time constant of input expansion unit with relay
Nos. 0100 to 0115
Input time constant of input expansion unit with relay
Nos. 0200 to 0215
Input time constant of input expansion unit with relay
Nos. 0300 to 0315
Input time constant of input expansion unit with relay
Nos. 0400 to 0415
Clearing of input at expansion disconnect

2712

Disconnect error OFF: Normal

ON: Disconnection in connected unit

2714

Use of high-speed input correction circuit

ON: Used OFF: Not used

OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: Cleared
ON: Not cleared
This area is stored
even when the
operation mode is
changed from
PROGRAM to RUN,
or when the power is
turned off (without
being affected by the
MEMSW instruction).
This area is not
cleared even if the
utility relay All Clear
function is activated.
However, this area is
cleared when an All
Clear is executed
without registering a
program.

2715

ON while cam switch is in operation.

2800

Break signal send to communication port A (remains ON while sending).

Receives text data from communication port A, and remains ON during only
1 scan while receiving text data.
Communication port A text data acceptance error. Remains ON during only
1 scan ON when text data is received while either relay 2801 or relay 2803
is ON.
Communication port A text data receive error
Remains ON during only 1 scan when a text data receive error occurs.
Communication port A text data send start (remains ON during sending.)
Break signal send to communication port B (remains ON while sending).
Receives communication port B text data, and remains ON during only 1
scan while receiving text data.
Communication port B text data acceptance error.
Remains ON during only 1 scan ON when text data is being received while
relay 2806 or relay 2808 is ON.
Communication port B text data receive error
Remains ON during only 1 scan when a text data receive error occurs.
Communication port B text data send start (remains ON during sending.)
Turns ON when an abnormality occurs with backup battery.

2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2812

2813

Sets input time constant to all inputs in basic module (except inputs used by
HSP instruction).
OFF: Sets input time constant to 10 ms.
ON: Refers to value stored in DM1940, then determines input time constant.

2814
HKEY instruction: Multiple keys are prohibited.
2815
HKEY instruction: Scan is finished.
2900 to 2915 HKEY information storage area.

Note: Never use special utility relays that are not shown above.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-17

11

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.9 Timers and Counters

Timers and counters can be set in a program, and their outputs can be used as
contacts elsewhere in the program. [There is no restriction on the contact type (N.O.
or N.C.) and the order of use.]
A same number can be assigned to only one timer or counter. For example, T005
and C005 cannot be used in the same program.

Timer/Counter list
Name

Timer

Counter

Timer (0.1-s timer)

High-speed timer
(0.01-s timer)
High-speed 1-ms timer
(0.001-s timer)
Counter
Up/down counter

Contact

T000 to T249

Coil
(instruction)
TMR000 to 249
TMH000 to 249
TMS000 to 249

C000 to C249

Number

250 in total

C000 to 249
UDC000 to 249

Description

Timers
When 0.1-s timers (TMR) and high-speed 0.001-s timers (TMS) are used as
contacts, the "Tnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the form for setting is
different. "TMRnnn#ddddd" is used for 0.1-s timers, "TMHnnn#ddddd" is used for
high-speed 0.01-s timers, and "TMSnnn#ddddd" is used for high-speed 1-ms
timers (nnn = timer No, ddddd = timer set value).

In a single program, different timer Nos. must be assigned to each of TMRnnn,

TMHnnn, and TMSnnn.

When the PLC is stopped, all timers are reset and their current values become
equivalent to set values.

Counters
When counters (C) and up/down counters (UDC) are used as contacts, the
"Cnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the form for setting is different.
"Cnnn#ddddd" is used for counters, while "UDCnnn#ddddd" is used for up/down
counters.

In one program, different numbers must be assigned to each of the counters and
up/down counters.

Even when operation is stopped, each counter stores whatever value it has at
that time.

"TMR instruction" (p.3-67), "TMH instruction" (p.3-68), "TMS instruction" (p.3-69), "C instruction" (p.372), "UDC instruction" (p.3-76).

High-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators

The Visual KV Se ries is equipped with two high-speed counters (CTH0 and CTH1)
and four high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, CTC1, CTC2, and CTC3) with a
30-kHz input response speed (frequency), two phases, and size of 16 or 24 bits.
Note: When a high-speed counter or high-speed counter comparator will be used as
a 24-bit device, a set value is required to be stored in a data memory using the
MEMSW instruction.

3-18

For details about high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, refer to "Chapter 4 Highspeed Counters" (p.3-203).

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.10 Data Memories

Data memories store various types of data.
Data memories are not usually used in a program that consists of contacts, coils,
timers, and counters. When arithmetic instructions are used, however, data memories can be used to store data for arithmetic operations as well as the results of
arithmetic operations.
DM No.
DM0 to DM999

Description
Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1000 to DM1099

Text receive port A

DM1100 to DM1199

Text send port A

DM1200 to DM1299

Text receive port B

DM1300 to DM1399

Text send port B

DM1400

DM1403

Cam switch function: The first output relay No.

Cam switch function: Comparison value in multi-step comparator
mode
Cam switch function: Pulse count of one cycle of equipment input
to CTH0
Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1404

Measurement cycle (ms)

DM1405

Result of frequency count (Hz)

Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay
turns ON/OFF
Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay +1
turns ON/OFF
:
Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay +31
turns ON/OFF
Reserved by system (cannot be used by user)

DM1401
DM1402

DM1406/DM1407
DM1408/DM1409
:
DM1468/DM1469
DM1470
DM1471 to DM1479
DM1480
DM1481
DM1482
DM1483
DM1484
DM1485
DM1486

Not specified (can be used by user)

Ramp-up/down control function: Startup frequency (Hz) (200 to
50,000)
Ramp-up/down control function: Operating frequency (Hz) (200 to
50,000)
Ramp-up/down control function: Acceleration time (ms)
(0 to 4,000)
Not specified (can be used by user)
Ramp-up/down control function: Output pulse count (lower digit)
(0 to 65,535)
Ramp-up/down control function: Output pulse count (upper digit)
(0 to 65,535)
Ramp-up/down control function: Error code (11 to 17)

DM1487 to DM1499

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1565 to DM1569

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1578 and DM1579 Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1580 to DM1599

KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Display device No.

DM1664 to DM1699

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1670 to DM1675

Reserved by system (cannot be used by user)

KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Screen shift permission setting
in operator mode

DM1676

Chapter 1 Programming

3-19

11

1.3 Device Configuration

DM No.

DM1680 to DM1699

Description
Area for direct access mode for the KV-D20 operator interface
panel
KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Display device attributes

DM1764 to DM1799

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1806 to DM1809

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1826 to DM1899

Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1677 to DM1679

DM1900/DM1901*

24-bit value read from CTH0 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1902/DM1903*

24-bit value read from CTH1 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1904/DM1905*

24-bit value read from CTC0 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1906/DM1907*

24-bit value read from CTC1 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1908/DM1909*

24-bit value read from CTC2 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1910/DM1911*

24-bit value read from CTC3 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1912/DM1913

24-bit current value written to CTH0 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1914/DM1915

24-bit current value written to CTH1 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1916/DM1917

24-bit current value written to CTC0 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1918/DM1919

24-bit current value written to CTC1 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1920/DM1921

24-bit current value written to CTC2 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1922/DM1923

24-bit current value written to CTC3 (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1924/DM1925

CTH0 preset input (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1926/DM1927

CTH1 preset input (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1928/DM1929*

Input capture when INT0 is generated (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1930/DM1931*

Input capture when INT1 is generated (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1932/DM1933*

Input capture when INT2 is generated (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1934/DM1935*

Input capture when INT3 is generated (lower digit/upper digit)

DM1936

Specified frequency pulse output function: Set frequency (Hz)

DM1937

I/O expansion unit connection information

DM1938

Digital trimmer No. 0: Upper limit value

DM1939

Digital trimmer No. 1: Upper limit value

Input time constant setting
0: 10 s 1: 20 s
2: 500 s
3: 1 m s
4: 2.5 ms 5: 5 ms
6: 10 ms
Any other value cannot be set.
Reserved by system (cannot be used by user)
Number of instructions converted into 1 scan when division
conversion is performed
Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1940
DM1941 to DM1943
DM1944
DM1945 to DM1949
DM1950
DM1951 to DM1999

Access window error display (0 to 255)

Not specified (can be used by user)

Read-only relay.

Note 1: 16-bit binary data is stored in each of the data memories as for internal
registers.
Note 2: The data stored in data memories is held even when the power is turned off
or when the All Clear function is executed. The backup time is 20 days or more in
the KV-10xx, and 2 months or more in other models.
Note 3: DM1000 to DM1999 are assigned as special data memories.

3-20

Chapter 1 Programming

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory

These data memories are used for temporary storage. When arithmetic instructions
are used, temporary data memories can be used to temporarily store the data for
arithmetic operations as well as the results of arithmetic operations.
TM No.

Usage

Attribute

TM00

Used for arithmetic operations (DIV/MUL)

R/W

TM01

Used for arithmetic operations (DIV)

R/W

TM02 to TM27 Not specified (can be used by user)

Stores scan time (module: 1 ms) beyond set value while
TM28
constant scan time operation is performed.
Stores set value (module: 1 ms) of constant scan time
TM29
operation
TM30
Stores CTC0 value when INT3 interruption is given.
Stores measured scan time (mean value of every 10
TM31
scans) (module: 0.1 ms).

Attribute
*

R: Read

R/W
R*
R/W
R*
R

W: Write

Both R and W are enabled when special functions are not used.

Note 1: Temporary data memories are initialized when the power is turned on.
Note 2: TM20, TM30, and TM31 are read-only, so cannot be used for writing.
However, TM28 can be used for both reading and writing if special functions are not
used.
Note 3: TM00 and TM01 are used by the MUL and DIV instructions. Never use them
for any other purpose.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-21

11

1.3 Device Configuration

1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions

Assignment of Relay Nos.
The components of a relay no. are shown below.

0 7 5 1 5
Channel No.

Relay No. (00 to 15)

Module No. (07 to 17)

Address No. Input (0 to 4)

Output (5 to 9)

Unit Nos.
Unit nos. are assigned to units within the KV-300 system, with the unit connected to
the right of the KV-300 CPU (see the figure below) assigned as no. 7. The CPU is
assigned as unit no. 0.

Power supply unit

CPU
0

16

17

Address Nos.
Address nos. are assigned to the input units, output units, and I/O terminal units.
The following table shows the assignment of address nos. to units.
Unit
KV-300 CPU

CPU

0, 5

KV-C16X

16-input unit

KV-C32X

32-input unit

0. 1

KV-B16R

16-output unit

KV-B16S

16-output unit

KV-C32T

32-output unit

5, 6

KV-R8X

8-input terminal unit

0 to 4 *

KV-R16X

16-input terminal unit

KV-R8R

8-output terminal unit

KV-R16R

16-output terminal unit

KV-R8T

8-output terminal unit

KV-R16T

16-output terminal unit

3-22

Address No.

5 to 9 *

The KV-R1A I/O Distribution Unit accommodates 5 input units and 5 output units.
Addresses are set with address switches.

Chapter 1 Programming

1.4 Special Functions

1.4 Special Functions

This section describes special functions to set and confirm operations on the Visual
KV Series, and useful functions for program debugging and adjustment of external
equipment.

1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function

The input time constant can be changed when a signal is read from an input contact.
When connecting external equipment which has no contact in which chattering such
as transistor outputs does not occur, and inputting pulses of short width, the input
time constant change function can be used to decrease the input time constant.

Setting the input time constant for basic units using special utility relays
The input time constant for a basic unit can be changed using data memory DM1940
and special utility relay 2813.
Though the input time constant is usually 10 ms, it can be changed to a value that
corresponds to the number stored in DM1940 by setting special utility relay 2813 to
ON.
If the HSP instruction and special utility relay 2813 are used at the same time,
priority is given to the HSP instruction and the number stored in DM1940 is ignored.
Special utility relay 2813
OFF: Sets the input time constant to 10 ms.
ON: Refers to the number stored in DM1940, then determines the input time
constant.
Number stored in DM1940
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 or more

Input time constant

10 s
20 s
500 s
1 ms
2.5 ms
5 ms
10 ms
Not allowed

Note 1: Be sure to set the input time constant to 10 s when using the 30-kHz high-speed
counter input.
Note 2: Never enter a number that is 7 or larger to data memory DM1940.
Note 3: The input time constant specified by data memory DM1940 becomes effective at the
rising edge of special utility relay 2813.
To change the input time constant, first change data memory DM1940, then set special utility
relay to OFF and ON again. Or change the operation mode of the KV basic unit from
PROGRAM to RUN.
Note 4: The input time constant for input relays set by the HSP instruction is 10 s.

For more about the HSP instruction, refer to "HSP instruction" (p.3-86).
For more about setting the input time constant for expansion units, refer to "Input time
constant for expansion units" (p.1-76).
Note 5: Set the special utility relay using the SET/RES instructions.
Note 6: When the input time constant is set to 1 ms or less, connect the output equipment
without contacts. If connecting output equipment with contacts, contact bounds may enter.
Note 7: Except for interrupts and high-speed counters, signals whose ON time is shorter than
the scan time may not be received even if the input time constant is set to a small value.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-23

11

1.4 Special Functions

1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant

KV-300 PLC Only

Modifying with External Switches

KV-C32X/C16X KV-R16X/R8X
Input time constant
selection switch
3

24V

1 ms
0 ms 10 ms

5V 0 ms 10 ms
1 ms

As shown in above figures, an external switch can be used to select the input time
constant only on the KV-C32X/C16X Connector Input Units and KV-R16X/R8X I/O
Terminal Units.

In the following table, white represents the switch position.

Input time constant

KV-C32X/C16X

KV-R16X/R8X
0ms 1ms 10ms

25 s 20%

0ms 1ms 10ms

0ms 1ms 10ms

1 ms 20%

0ms 1ms 10ms

10 ms 20%

0ms 1ms 10ms

0ms 1ms 10ms

Note: Connect a solid-state contact output device when the input time constant is
set to 1 ms for 25 s. Connection of a contact output device may result in contact
bounce.

Modification within the CPU

The input time constant for KV-300 CPU input relay nos. 0000 to 0009 can be
modified in the program.
Input time constant

Setting

10 s 20%

Turn ON special utility relay 2813 (0000 to 0009).

25 s 20%

Use the HSP instruction.

10 ms 20%

Default

Note 1: When using the 30 kHz high-speed counter input, turn ON special utility
relay 2813.
Note 2: When special utility relay 2813 is ON, the input time constant of input relays
0000 to 0009 is set to 10 s 20%.
Note 3: The input time constant remains 10 ms 20% if the HSP instruction is used
when special utility relay 2813 is ON.
Note 4: When the input time constant is set to 10 s or 25 s, a solid-state output
device must be connected. Connection of a contact output device may result in
contact bounce.

3-24

Chapter 1 Programming

1.4 Special Functions

1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode

This function executes a program while keeping the scan time at a constant value
which usually changes based on the processing contents. This section describes
how to set this function.
Though the scan time changes usually depending on the processing contents, it can
be kept at a constant value by using this function. This function can be used to
acquire data from external equipment at a constant time interval.
The set value should be longer than the maximum scan time because the scan time
is kept at a constant value until the end of processing.
Setting procedure
Set the desired scan time to temporary data memory TM29.
Set special utility relay 2303 to ON.
The scan time is written to TM31.
The scan time can be set in 1-ms increments.
Enter the desired scan time (ms) to the temporary data memory.
Setting example
In this example, the scan time is kept at 20 ms.

2008

#00020
LDA

TM29
STA

11

2303
SET

Note 1: Be sure to set the constant scan time value so it is larger than the actual
scan time.
Note 2: If the actual scan time exceeds the set scan time, special utility relay 2304
turns ON (during the next 1 scan) while the actual scan time is written to TM28 (unit:
1 ms).
Note 3: The scan time can be set up to 200 ms in temporary data memory TM29. If
a value larger than 200 ms is input, it will be treated as 200 ms.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-25

1.4 Special Functions

1.4.4 Output Disabled Function

This function disables outputs from each unit in RUN mode without regard to the
program used. By disabling external outputs, the program can be debugged while
external equipment is connected, even when output of signals to the external
equipment is not desired.
Setting procedure
When special utility relay 2300 turns ON, all outputs from all output relays (0500 to
0915) to the outside are cleared after 1 scan is finished.
However, the display in the Access Window and the output indicator lamps are not
cleared.
Setting example
By setting/resetting special utility relay 2300 using the Access Window, the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software,
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external output prohibition function
can be used.
External outputs are prohibited while input 0000 is ON. External outputs are permitted, though, while input 0000 is OFF.
0000

2300

For more about operating procedures, refer to the "Chapter 6. Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).

1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function

This function disables the update of inputs from each unit triggered by input signals
from external equipment.
By disabling external input refresh, inputs from each unit can be set to ON/OFF in
monitor status without mechanical operations to enable a program check.
Setting procedure
When special utility relay 2301 turns ON, input refresh (read of input relays) for all
input relays (0000 to 0415 used by the QL Series) is skipped.
In this status, inputs can be set to ON/OFF from the Access Window, the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software,
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Setting example
By setting/resetting special utility relay 2301 using the Access Window, the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software,
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external input refresh prohibition
function can be used.
External input refresh is prohibited while input 0000 is ON. External input refresh is
permitted, though, while input 0000 is OFF.
0000

2301

For more about operating procedures, refer to the "Chapter 6. Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).

Note: Once external input refresh is prohibited, it can be permitted only by setting
special utility relay 2301 to OFF from the Access Window, the "KV IncrediWare
(DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software, or the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer.

3-26

Chapter 1 Programming

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function

This function transfers contact comments to the Visual KV Series using the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support
software.

The Visual KV Series can store not only programs but also comments registered
to each contact using the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for
KV" programming support software.
A program may not be easy to understand if only device Nos. are used. By
registering comments to the contacts, the program can be easily debugged and
more efficiently maintained.

The number of contact comments that can be transferred is up to 1,000 for both
normal transfer and compression transfer.

The KV-D20 operator interface panel includes the contact comment display
function.

For more about operating procedures, refer to "2.5 Entering Comments/Labels" (p.1-46) and "4.2.2
Setting the comment transfer" (p.2-138).

Note 1: Line comments cannot be stored.

Note 2: The KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer cannot read or write contact comments.
Note 3: The KV-D20 operator interface panel cannot display contact comments
which have been compressed and transferred.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-27

11

1.4 Special Functions

1.4.7 Special Functions

KV-300 PLC only

Constant Scan Time Mode

In this mode, operation can take place according to a preset scan time (in ms).
Setting
Write the desired scan time into TM29 (temporary data memory), then turn on
special utility relay No. 2303. The scan time can also be written into TM31. Specify a
scan time in increments of 10 ms (a value of less than 10 ms is invalid).
Here, write a value into TM equivalent to 10 times the scan time.

Example
Set the constant scan time to 20 ms.
02008

#00200
LDA

TM29
STA

2303
SET

Note 1: The set value for the constant scan time must be greater than the actual
scan time. Otherwise, special utility relay 2304 turns on during every scan to disable
constant scan time mode.
Note 2: If the scan time exceeds the set value, special utility relay no. 2304 turns on
during the next scan.

Output Disabled Function

During checking of a program, this function clears output from output relays regardless of the program currently running.
Setting
Turn on special utility relay No. 2300. After one scan is completed, all output relays
(00500 to 00503, 07500 to 17915) are cleared.

Example
Use the output disabled function by executing FORCED RESET/RESET to special
utility relay No. 2300 from the monitor display.

To execute FORCED RESET or RESET, refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).

Input Refresh Disabled Function

Set this function if it is desired to turn ON/OFF input relays from the monitor display
without activating the machine when checking a program.
Setting
Turn ON special utility relay No. 2301 to skip input refresh (reading from input
relays). Input relays can then be turned ON/OFF with the KV-P3E(01) or with KV
IncrediWare (DOS) on the monitor display.

Example
Set input relay No. 0000 to ON to disable input refresh; set to OFF to enable input
refresh.
0000

2301

Note: If input refresh is disabled, it is not enabled until input relay No. 0000 is turned
on from the handheld programmer.

3-28

Chapter 1 Programming

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

This section describes KEYENCEs unique extended ladder diagram.

1.5.1 Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams

The extended ladder diagram is a programming method developed to reduce
problems related to design, testing, operation, and maintenance of programs.
In a conventional ladder diagram, output instructions can be written only on the right
side of a ladder diagram. On the other hand, in an extended ladder diagram, output
instructions can be written anywhere except on the left. As the result, the programs
shown below can be written.
Mixture of input and output circuits
Conventional ladder diagram

Only input circuits

can be written.

Only output
circuits can
be written.

Extended ladder diagram

Only input
circuits can
be
assembled.

Both input
circuits and
output circuits
can be
assembled.

Only output
circuits can
be
assembled.

Connection of two or more instructions on one line

Conventional ladder diagram
Extended ladder diagram

Instructions can be written only from the

left end to the right end on one line.

Many instructions can be connected.

Branch from output coil

Conventional ladder diagram

Branches can be made only from input

contacts.

Extended ladder diagram

Branches can also be made from output

coils.

There is only a single line, so the ladder

diagram is easier to understand.
Three lines are required.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-29

11

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

1.5.2 Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams

The number of lines in a ladder diagram can be reduced.
Because both output instructions and input instructions can be written side by side,
the number of program lines can be reduced.
As the result, the contents of the program can be seen at a glance.

Example
When DM0000 stores 1000, 0500 turns ON.
2000, 0501 turns ON.
3000, 0502 turns ON.
Conventional ladder diagram

Extended ladder diagram

DM0000 #01000
LDA
CMP

2010

0500

#01000
CMP

#02000
CMP

2010

0501

2010

0500

#03000
CMP

2010

0502

2002

#02000
CMP

2010

0501

2002

#03000
CMP

2010

0502

DM0000
LDA

2002

2002

In a conventional ladder diagram, operations

performed by the program cannot be easily
understood. In an extended ladder diagram,
operations performed by the program can be
understood at a glance.

Processing sequence is clear.

Ladder symbols can be laid out in processing sequence, so the program flow is
easier to understand. In addition, maintainability is considerably improved.

Example
When the start switch is set to ON, a lamp is lit for three seconds, a buzzer is
sounded for two seconds, and then the motor starts to rotate.
0000

1100
DIFU

1100

1000
STG

0500

#00030
T000

T000

1001
JMP

1001
STG

0501

#00020
T001

T001

1002
JMP

1002
STG

0502

0000

1000
SET

ENDS

Conventional ladder diagram

0000
1000

T000

1001

T001

T001

T002

1001

#00020
T001

#00030
T002

1001

0500

1003

3-30

Chapter 1 Programming

Extended ladder diagram

1001
STG

1003

1003

When the start switch (0000) is set to OFF, the motor is stopped
and all operations are reset.

#00010
T000

1003

1002

When timer 1 turns ON two seconds later, the buzzer is stopped

and the motor (0502) starts to rotate.

0000

1002

1002

When timer 0 turns ON three seconds later, the lamp goes out, a
buzzer (0501) is sounded, and timer 1 is activated.

1000
DIFU

T002
T000

When the start switch (0000) is set to ON, a lamp (0500) is lit and
timer 0 is activated.

0501

1000
DIFU

1000

1001
SET

0500

#00010
T000

T000

1002
JMP

1002
STG

0501

#00020
T001

T001

1003
JMP

1003
STG

0500

#00030
T002

T002

1001
JMP

0501

By using an extended ladder diagram as shown

above, the program can be executed in the
sequence of the processing to be performed. So
even a person who uses a relay sequence for the
first time can understand the processing contents.
By combining the STG instruction, double coils
can also be used.

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

Note: When an extended ladder diagram is used, the number of lines in ladder
diagram may be reduced. However, this may not necessarily reduce the number of
mnemonics in the program.
Conventional ladder diagram
0000

Extended ladder diagram

0500

0000

0500

0501

0501

LD 0000
OUT 0500
OUT 0501

LD 0000
OUT 0500
CON
OUT 0501
The CON instruction for connection is added.
(The scan time is not affected.)

1.5.3 Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram

Using W-UE
Only when inputs are given in the order "0000 0001 0002", output 0500 turns
ON.
Conventional ladder diagram
1002
DIFU

0001
0002
1002

1003
DIFU
0000

1000

1000

1001

1000
1003

At the rising edge of input

0001, 1002 turns ON.
At the rising edge of input
1003, 1002 turns ON.
If input 0000 is ON, 1000
turns ON.

Extended ladder diagram

0000

0001
1000

1000

0002

1001

0500

1001

Input 0000 Input 0001 Input 0002 Output 0500

turns ON. turns ON. turns ON. turns ON.

If 1000 is ON, 1001 turns ON.

1001
1001

0500

When 1001 turns ON, output 0500

turns ON.

Because the program can be written in only one line when an extended adder
diagram is used, it is easier to look at and understand compared with a program
written using a conventional ladder diagram.

Chapter 1 Programming

3-31

11

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams

3-32

Chapter 1 Programming

Chapter 2
Instructions
Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Series.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-191 for details of interrupt instructions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-203 for details of the highspeed counters used in the application instruction.
2.1

Instruction List [Visual KV Series] ....................................... 3-34

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5

Basic Instructions ................................................................................. 3-34

Application Instructions ........................................................................ 3-36
Arithmetic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-38
Interrupt Instructions ............................................................................ 3-41
Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .................................................. 3-41

2.2

Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] .......................... 3-42

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Basic Instructions ................................................................................. 3-42

Application Instructions ........................................................................ 3-45
Arithmetic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-48
Interrupt Instructions ............................................................................ 3-54

2.3

Convention Details ................................................................. 3-55

2.4

Instruction Details .................................................................. 3-56

2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3

Basic Instructions ................................................................................. 3-56

Application Instructions ........................................................................ 3-95
Arithmetic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-134

2.5

Programming Notes ............................................................... 3-189

2.1 Instruction List

Visual KV Series

2.1 Instruction List

Visual KV Series

The KV Series uses 80 instructions.

The instructions are divided into four categories according to their functions: basic
instructions, application instructions, arithmetic instructions, and interrupt instructions.
The following is an overview of applications and functions. For details, refer to the
respective description pages for each instruction.

2.1.1 Basic Instructions

Instruction

Symbol
nnnn

LOAD

LOAD BAR

nnnn

AND

nnnn

Function

Exec.time
(s)

Bytes

Page

LD

Connects N.O. contact to bus.

0.7 to 1.6

3 (12)

3-57

LDB

Connects N.C. contact to bus.

0.7 to 1.6

3 (12)

3-57

0.7 to 0.9

3 (8)

3-58

0.7 to 0.9

3 (8)

3-58

Mnemonic Operand Operand value

AND
R No.
T/C No.

Connects N.O. contact in

0000 to 17915 series with previous contact.
T000 to T249
C000 to C249 Connects N.C. contact in
CTC0 to CTC3 series with previous contact.

AND BAR

nnnn

OR

nnnn

OR

Connects N.O. contact in

parallel with previous contact.

0.7 to 0.9

3 (8)

3-60

OR BAR

nnnn

ORB

Connects N.C. contact in

parallel with previous contact.

0.7 to 0.9

3 (8)

3-60

0.8

1 (4)

3-61

0.8

1 (4)

3-63

1.5

3 (12)

3-65

1.5

3 (12)

3-65

1.9 to 12.8

3 (14)

3-66

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
Forces R/T/C OFF when input 1.9 to 20.5
T000 to T249
is ON.
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3

3 (14)

3-66

ANB

AND LOAD

ANL

OR LOAD

ORL

OUT

nnnn

Connects in series blocks

made of one or more
contacts.
Connects in parallel blocks
made of one or more
contacts.

OUT
R No.

OUT BAR

SET

nnnn

nnnn
SET

OUB

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915 Forces relay ON and holds
T000 to T249 this status when input is ON.
C000 to C249

SET
R No.
T/C No.

nnnn
RES

RES

0.1-s
TIMER

#ddddd
Txxx

TMR

0.01-s
TIMER

#ddddd
T
Txxx
H

TMH
(FUN49)

RESET

3-34

Outputs input ON/OFF status

0500 to 1915 to R coil.
2009
2300 to 17915 Outputs inverted input ON/
OFF status to R coil.

T No.,
# preset
value

Chapter 2 Instructions

000 to 249
#00000 to
#65535

16-bit on-delay T that counts

down in 0.1-s decrements.

12.0 to 17.8

2 (6)

3-67

16-bit on-delay T that counts

down in 0.01-s decrements.

12.0 to 17.8

2 (6)

3-68

2.1 Instruction List

Exec.time
(s)

Bytes

Page

16-bit on-delay T that

T No.,
000 to 249
# preset value #0000 to #65535 counts down in 1-ms
decrements.

12.0 to 17.8

2 (7)

3-69

#00000 to
# preset value,
#65535
Sets 16-bit up-counter.
C No., counter 000 to 249
input R
0000 to 17915

12.0 to 17.8

4 (7)

3-72

13.0 to 24.0

2 (10)

3-76

3 (10)

3-78

3 (10)

3-78

3 (11)

3-80

(*)

5 (15)

3-82

Reduces input relay time

constant to 10 s for
higher input response.

3.8 to 9.4

3 (8)

3-86

MC
(FUN24)

Selects ON/OFF status of

R coils, Ts, or Cs.

0.2

1 (4)

3-89

MCR

MCR
(FUN25)

Represents end of MC.

0.2

1 (0)

3-89

MEMSW
$xxxx

MEMSW
(FUN26)

Sets memory switches.

3 (0)

3-92

Performs no operation.

1 (0)

3-94

END

Indicates end of each

routine of program.

1 (1)

3-94

ENDH

Indicates end of entire

program.

1 (0)

3-94

Instruction

Symbol

Mnemonic

1-ms
TIMER

#ddddd
T
S Txxx

TMS
(FUN51)

COUNTER

#ddddd
Cxxx
nnnn

UP-DOWN
COUNTER

UP
DW #ddddd
RES

DIFFERENTIATE UP

nnnn
DIFU

DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN

nnnn
DIFD

KEEP

UDC xxx

UDC
(FUN52)

DIFD
(FUN09)

KEEP

KEEP
(FUN22)

SET nnnn
RES

SFT
(FUN39)

D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm

HSP
nnnn

MASTER
CONTROL

MC

MEMORY
SWITCH

HSP
(FUN18)

END HI

R No.
nnnn: 1st R
No. mmmm:
Last R No.

R No.

$ constant

NOP
(FUN30)

NOP

END

C No.,
# preset value

R No.

HIGH
SPEED

MASTER
CONTROL
RESET

Operand

DIFU
(FUN10)

SFT

SHIFT

Visual KV Series

END

ENDH

Operand value

000 to 249
#00000 to
#65535

1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915

Function

Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.

Turns ON R for 1 scan

11.2 to 13.2
time at rising edge of
input.
Turns ON R for 1 scan
10.0 to 12.8
time at falling edge of
input.
Turns ON R and holds this
status when SET input is ON.
8.2 to 19.8
Turns OFF R when RESET
input is ON.

1000 to 1915
Sets shift register.
3000 to 9915
(KV-10)
0000 to 0005
(KV-16)
0000 to 0009
(KV-24)
0000 to 0015
(KV-40)
0000 to 0107

$ 0000 to
$ FFFF

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
*1 34 + 0.25 + n x 0.25 (n: No. of shift steps)
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-35

12

2.1 Instruction List

Visual KV Series

2.1.2 Application Instructions

Instruction

Symbol

Mnemonic

Operand Operand value

WAIT ON

nnnn
ON
mmmm

W-ON

WAIT OFF

nnnn
OFF
mmmm

W-OFF

17915
T000 to T249
nnnn:
R, T, C C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
Nos.
mmmm:
mmmm: 1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
R No.
1000 to 1915
R No.

WAIT UP
EDGE
WAIT
DOWN
EDGE

W-UE

nnnn
mmmm

CON
(FUN 06)

PUSH

MPS

READ

MRD

POP

MPP

nnnn
STG

nnnn
JMP

JMP
(FUN 21)

END
STAGE

ENDS

ENDS
(FUN 14)

STEP

STEP END

STP
nnnn

STP
(FUN 45)

STE

STE
(FUN 43)

Page

5 (12)

3-96

5 (12)

3-96

5 (12)

3-98

1 (0)

3-98

1 (4)

3-102

3.2

1 (4)

3-103

6.8

1 (4)

3-103

10.5 to 13.0

3 (10)

3-103

Executes instructions in STG

block when R (operand) is ON. 4.5 to 12.5

3 (8)

3-106

1 (4)

3-106

2.5

3 (10)

3-106

5 (12)

1 (0)

3-114

Turns ON

3-114

R (output operand [mmmm])

when R, T, or C (input operand 10.4 to 12.6
[nnnn]) is ON.
Turns ON R (output operand
[mmmm]) when R, T, or C (input 13.6 to 18.5
operand [nnnn]) is OFF.
Turns ON R (output operand
[mmmm]) at rising edge of R, T, 13.6 to 18.5
or C (input operand [nnnn]).

Reads input status and

arithmetic flag stored with
PUSH.
Reads & clears input status
and arithmetic flag stored
with PUSH.

R, T, C
Nos.

3000 to 9915
0000 to 0009 When input is ON, turns R of
current stage OFF and moves 4.3 to 7.5
to stage specified by operand.
Turns current stage OFF and
next stage ON when input is
ON.

R No.
nnnn:
0000 to

0500 to 9915
Executes program between
T000 to T249 STP & STE when R (operC000 to C249 and) is ON.
CTC0 to CTC3
11.2 to 13.4
Is used with STEP to make
program step.

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay
numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

3-36

Bytes

Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.

STG
(FUN 44)

JUMP

Exec.time
(s)

Turns ON R (output operand

[mmmm]) at falling edge of R, T, 6.8 to 5.3
or C (input operand [nnnn]).
Represents series connection
of output instruction together
with another instruction.

W-DE

CONNECT

STAGE

nnnn
mmmm

Function

Chapter 2 Instructions

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F

2.1 Instruction List

Instruction

INTERVAL
TIMER

16-BIT
COUNTER

16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

16-BIT
COUNTER

Symbol
ITVL
PLS
DMnnnn
PAUSE
mmmm
RES

CTH0
nnnn

#ddddd
CTCn

CTH1
nnnn

16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

#ddddd
CTCn

SUBROUTINE
CALL

nn
CALL

Mnemonic

CTH

Count input
R

CTC

n:
Comparator
n: 0,1
No.
ddddd: #00001
ddddd:
to #65535
# preset
value

5 (10)

3-117

0004
2100
2101
2102

14.4

4 (6)

3-204

Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
values of high-speed counter
2.3 to 3.5
(CTH0). This comparator is
turned ON when these
values are equal.

2 (6)

3-204

0005
0500
2200
2201
2202

16-bit (0 to 65535) updown counter for clock

pulses with input
response frequency of 30
kHz.

14.4

4 (6)

3-204

16-bit (0 to 65535) updown counter for clock

pulses with input response
frequency of 30 kHz.

CTC

Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
values of high-speed counter
(CTH1). This comparator is
turned ON when these
values are equal.

2.3 to 3.5

2 (6)

3-204

CALL
(FUN 03)

Subroutine
No.

00 to 99

Executes subroutine
specified by operand.

5.4 to 6.5

2 (8)

3-122

Subroutine
No.

00 to 99

Represents beginning of
subroutine specified by
operand.

2 (4)

3-122

4.3

1 (4)

3-122

12.0 to
18.0

3 (20)

3-125

0.5

1 (4)

3-125

22.1 to
180.0

5 (10)

3-131

RET
(FUN 33)

REPEAT
START

FOR
nnnn

FOR
(FUN 16)

Represents end of
subroutine.

# constant,
DM No.
TMxx

#00000 to
#65535
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29

HKEY
(FUN 17)

Executes program
between FOR & NEXT
for number of times
specified by operand.
Represents end of
repetition.

NEXT
(FUN 29)

20.0 to 80.0

n:
Comparator
n: 2,3
No.
ddddd: #00001
ddddd:
to #65535
# preset
value

RET

Page

Count input
R

SUBROUTINE
RETURN

HKEY
nnnn
mmmm

Bytes

CTH

SBN
(FUN 38)

16-KEY INPUT

Exec.time
(s)

Function

DMnnnn:
DM0000 to Measures pulse-to-pulse
DM1985
interval & pulse width in
mmmm:
specified mode.
1000 to 1912
3000 to 9912

ITVL

SBN
nn

NEXT

Operand value

DMnnnn:
DM No.
mmmm: R
No.

SUBROUTINE
ENTRY

REPEAT END

Operand

Visual KV Series

nnnn:
Input R
mmmm:
Output R

nnnn:
0000 to 415
mmmm:
0500 to 915

Reads 16-key data by

time-sharing and outputs
these data into special
utility Rs 2900 to 2915.

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay
numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-37

12

2.1 Instruction List

Visual KV Series

2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions

Instruction

DATA
MEMORY
WRITE

TRIMMER
SETTING

Symbol

Mnemonic

nnnn
DW
DMmmmm

DW

n
TMIN

TMIN
(FUN 50)

Operand value

nnnn:
#/$ constant
DMmmmm:
DM No.

nnnn:
#0000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
DMmmmm:
DM0000 to
DM1999

Writes constant into data

memory.

0 to 1

Inputs value set by

access windows digital
trimmer (0 to 65535) to
internal register.

Trimmer No.
n
TMIN

nnnn
LDA

LOAD A
nnnn
LDA

@TMIN
@(FUN 50)
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
LDA
CTH0 to CTH1
(FUN 23)
R No.,
DM0000 to
C/T No.,
DM1999
DM No,
TM00 to TM31
TM xx,
#00000 to
#/$ constant,
#65535
@LDA
#TMxx
$0000 to $FFFF
@(FUN 23)
#TM00 to
#TM29

2
STA
(FUN 42)

nnnn
STA

STORE A
nnnn
STA

@STA
@(FUN 42)

nnnn
CMP

CMP
(FUN 04)

nnnn
CMP

@CMP
@(FUN 04)

nnnn
ADD

ADD
(FUN00)

R No.,
C/T No.,
DM No.,
TM xx,
#TMxx

0500 to 1915
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

COMPARE

ADD
nnnn
ADD

nnnn
SUB

SUBTRACT
nnnn
SUB

DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
@ADD
#00000 to
@(FUN 00) DM/TM No.
#65535
TMxx,
$0000 to
#/$ constant,
$FFFF
SUB
#TMxx
#TM00 to
(FUN 46)
#TM29
@SUB
@(FUN 46)

nnnn
MUL

MUL
(FUN 28)

nnnn
MUL

@MUL
@(FUN28)

MULTIPLY

3-38

Function

Operand

Inputs value specified by

operand into internal
register or inputs current
value when T/C is
specified as operand.

Transfers content of
internal register to
location specified by
operand, or changes
preset value when T/C is
specified as operand.

Compares content of
internal register and
value specified by
operand.

Exec.time
(s)

Bytes

Page

8.0

5 (8)

3-136

8.9

1 (6)
3-138

20.9

1 (16)

6.4 to 14.0

3 (8)

3-140
18.4 to 26.0

3 (18)

6.6 to 28.5

3 (8)
3-140

18.0 to 40.5

3 (18)

10.8 to 35.6

3 (6)
3-146

22.8 to 47.6

Adds content of internal

9.4 to 34.2
register and value
specified by operand and
inputs result back to
21.4 to 46.2
same register.
Subtracts value specified
10.8 to 35.6
by operand from content
of register and inputs
result back to same
22.8 to 47.6
register.
Multiplies content of
14.4 to 38.1
internal register by value
specified by operand and
inputs result back to
26.4 to 50.1
same register.

3 (16)

3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)

3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)

3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.

Chapter 2 Instructions

2.1 Instruction List

Instruction

Symbol
nnnn
DIV

DIVIDE
nnnn
DIV

nnnn
ANDA

AND A
nnnn
ANDA

nnnn
ORA

OR A
nnnn
ORA

nnnn
EORA

EXCLUSIVE
OR A
nnnn
EORA

SHIFT
RIGHT A

SHIFT LEFT
A

Mnemonic

Operand

DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
R No.,
#00000 to
DM No.,
#65535
TM xx,
$0000 to
#/$ constant,
@DIV
$FFFF
#TMxx
@(FUN 11)
#TM00 to
#TM29
DIV
(FUN 11)

ANDA
(FUN 01)

0000 to 17915
DM0000 to
DM1999
@ANDA
R No.,
TM00 to TM31
@(FUN 01) DM No.,
#00000 to
TM xx,
#65535
#/$
constant,
ORA
$0000 to
#TMxx
(FNC 31)
$FFFF
#TM00 to
@ORA
#TM29
@(FUN 31)

0000 to 17915
DM0000 to
DM1999
R No.,
TM00 to TM31
DM No.,
#00000 to
TM xx,
#65535
#/$ constant,
$0000 to
#TMxx
@EORA
$FFFF
@(FUN 15)
#TM00 to
#TM29
EORA
(FUN 15)

#dd
SRA

SRA
(FNC 41)

#dd
SRA

@SRA
@(FUN 41)

#dd
SLA

SLA
(FNC 40)

#dd
SLA

@SLA
@(FUN 40)

#dd
RRA

RRA
(FUN 37)

#dd
RRA

@RRA
@(FUN 37)

#dd
RLA

RLA
(FUN 35)

ROTATE
LEFT A

#dd
RLA

@RLA
@(FUN 35)

Exec.time
(s)

Function

17.4 to 43.3
Divides content of internal
register by value specified
by operand and inputs
result back to same
29.4 to 55.3
register.

ANDs each of 16 bits of

8.2 to 33.1
internal register and that
of value specified by
operand, and inputs result
20.2 to 45.1
back to same register.
ORs each of 16 bits of
8.2 to 33.1
internal register and that
of value specified by
operand, and inputs result 20.2 to 45.1
back to same register.

EXCLUSIVE-ORs each of
16 bits of internal register
and that of value specified
by operand, and inputs
result back to same
register.

Moves content of internal

register serially right by
value specified by
operand.

Moves content of internal

register serially left by
value specified by
operand.
# constant

ROTATE
RIGHT A

Operand value

Visual KV Series

8.2 to 33.1

Bytes

Page

3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)

3 (8)
3-159
3 (18)

3 (8)
3-161
3 (18)

3 (8)

3-164

20.2 to 45.1

3 (18)

9.3 to 27.6

2 (6)

12

3-166
21.3 to 39.6

2 (16)

9.2 to 27.6

2 (6)
3-166

21.2 to 39.6

2 (16)

#01 to #16
10.3 to 28.6
Rotates contents of
internal register and carry
bit (2009) clockwise by
operand value.
22.3 to 40.6
10.3 to 28.6
Rotates contents of
internal register and carry
bit (2009) counterclock22.3 to 40.6
wise by operand value.

2 (6)
3-169
2 (16)
2 (6)
3-169
2 (16)

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-39

2.1 Instruction List

Instruction

Visual KV Series

Symbol

Mnemonic

COM

COM
(FUN 05)

COMPLEMENT

INCREMENT
MEMORY

DECREMENT
MEMORY

MULTIPLEXER

COM

@COM
@(FUN 05)

nnnn
INC

INC
(FNC 19)

nnnn
INC

@INC
@(FUN 19)

nnnn
DEC

DEC
(FNC 07)

nnnn
DEC

@DEC
@(FUN 07)

#n
MPX

MPX
(FUN 27)

#n
MPX

@MPX
@(FUN 27)

DMX

DMX
(FUN 12)

DMX

@DMX
@(FUN 12)

TBCD

TBCD
(FUN 47)

TBCD

@TBCD
@(FUN 47)

TBIN

TBIN
(FUN 48)

TBIN

@TBIN
@(FUN 48)

Operand

DM/TM No.

# constant

2
TRANSFER
BCD

TRANSFER
BIN

ASC

ASC
(FUN 02)

ASC

@ASC
@(FUN 02)

RASC

RASC
(FUN 32)

RASC

@RASC
@(FUN 32)

ROOT

ROOT
(FUN 36)

ROOT

@ROOT
@(FUN 36)

ASCII
CONVERT

REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT

SQUARE
ROOT

Exec.time
(s)

Bytes

5.6

1 (4)
3-171

17.6

1 (14)

9.8

3 (6)

21.8

3 (16)

10.4

3 (6)

22.4

3 (16)

DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29

Adds 1 to content of data

memory specified by
operand.

DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29

Subtracts 1 from content

of data memory specified
by operand.

10.1

1 (6)

#0 to #3

Converts 4-bit data

(specified by operand) of
internal register into 16-bit
data.

22.1

1 (16)

Converts position of
highest order bit with 1 in
internal register into 4-bit
data.

22.6

1 (4)

34.6

1 (14)

Converts content of
internal register (16-bit
binary) into 4-digit BCD
data.

5.6

1 (4)

17.6

1 (14)

9.6

1 (4)

21.6

1 (14)

9.7

1 (4)

21.7

1 (14)

9.3

1 (4)

21.3

1 (14)

95.7

1 (4)

107.7

1 (14)

Converts content of
internal register (4-digit
BCD) into 16-bit binary
data.

Converts content of lower

order 8 bytes of internal
register into 2-digit ASCII
code.
Converts 2-digit ASCII
code of internal register
into 2-digit numerical
value.
Takes square root of 32bit data (TM00: higher
order byte, internal
register: lower order byte)
and inputs result back to
same register.

Page

3-172

3-172

3-176

3-176

3-180

3-180

3-183

3-183

3-185

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay
numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

3-40

Function

Inverts content of each bit

in internal register.

DM/TM No.

DEMULTIPLEXER

Operand
value

Chapter 2 Instructions

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F (OUTPUT)

2.1 Instruction List

Visual KV Series

2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions

Instruction

Symbol

Mnemonic

INTERRUPT
DISABLED

DI

DI
(FUN 08)

INTERRUPT
ENABLED

EI

EI
(FUN 13)

INT
nnnn

INT
CTCn

RETI

R No.

000 to 003

Comparator
No.

CTC0 to
CTC3

RETI
(FUN 34)

Exec.time
(s)

Bytes

Page

Disables execution of
interrupt.

2.2

1 (12)

3-193

Enables execution of
interrupt.

4.0

1 (10)

3-193

Executes interrupt
instructions between INT
and RETI at rising/falling
edge of input relays 0000
through 0003.

60.0 to
90.0

1 (8)

3-192

Used with comparators

CTC0 to CTC3 and
executes instructions
between INT and RETI.

60.0 to
90.0

1 (8)

3-192

Represents end of
interrupt.

18.0 to
22.0

1 (4)

3-192

Function

Operand value

INT
(FUN 20)

INTERRUPT

RETURN
INTERRUPT

Operand

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay
numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915

X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F

2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order)

The following list shows the function Nos. used to enter instructions with the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer.

Function No. Instruction

Refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" on page 1-195 for details.

Function No. Instruction

Function No. Instruction

Function No. Instruction

00

ADD

13

EI

26

MEMSW

39

SFT

01

ANDA

14

ENDS

27

MPX

40

SLA

02

ASC

15

EORA

28

MUL

41

SRA

03

CALL

16

FOR

29

NEXT

42

STA

04

CMP

17

HKEY

30

NOP

43

STE

05

COM

18

HSP

31

ORA

44

STG

06

CON

19

INC

32

RASC

45

STP

07

DEC

20

INT

33

RET

46

SUB

08

DI

21

JMP

34

RET1

47

TBCD

09

DIFD

22

KEEP

35

RLA

48

TBIN

10

DIFU

23

LDA

36

ROOT

49

TMH

11

DIV

24

MC

37

RRA

50

TMIN

12

DMX

25

MCR

38

SBN

51

TMS

52

UDC

Reference: To find function No. assigned to desired function:

1. Press the [FUN] key.
2. When the cursor appears at the position where the function No. is to be entered,
press the ON or OFF key and scroll the functions and assigned Nos. to find the
desired function.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-41

12

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

2.2 Instruction List

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
Abbreviations: R: Relay, T: Timer, C: Counter, #: Decimal, $: Hex.

2.2.1 Basic Instructions

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction Symbol

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

nnnn

LOAD

LOAD BAR

nnnn

AND BAR

1.5 to 2.5

3 (4)

Connects N.O. contact

to bus.

3-57

LDB

2.1 to 3.5

3 (6)

Connects N.C. contact

to bus.

3-57

AND

1.5 to 2.5

R No.
T/C No.
ANB

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
2.7 to 4.5
CTC0 to CTC3

OR

nnnn

OR

1.5 to 2.5

OR BAR

nnnn

ORB

2.7 to 4.5

AND LOAD

ANL

1.0 to 1.4

OR LOAD

ORL

1.0 to 1.4

nnnn

OUT

OUT

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 2915

nnnn

OUT BAR

OUB

nnnn

SET

(SET)

nnnn

RESET

(RES)

0.1-s TIMER

#ddddd
T xxx

SET

R No.

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3

RES

5.2 to 8.4
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 6915 6.4 to 10.4 3 (17) ON/OFF status to R
coil.

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119 3.1 to 24.0 3 (8)
C000 to C119
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3

TMR

17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)

T No.,
# preset
value

000 to 063
#00000 to
#65535

#ddddd
H xxx

TMH
(FNC49)

1-ms TIMER

#ddddd
S xxx

TMS
(FNC51)

COUNTER

#ddddd
C xxx
nnnn

# preset
value, C
No., clock
source R

#00000 to
65535
000 to 063
0000 to 6915

UP-DOWN
COUNTER

UP #ddddd
DW
RES

UDC
(FNC52)

C No.,
# preset
value

000 to 063
#00000 to
#65535

3-42

Connects N.O. contact

in series with previous
contact.
Connects N.C. contact
3 (8) in series with previous
contact.
Connects N.O. contact
3 (4) in parallel with previous
contact.
Connects N.C. contact
3 (8) in parallel with previous
contact.
Connects in series
1 (2) blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Connects in parallel
1 (2) blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Outputs input ON/OFF
3 (13) status to R coil.
Outputs inverted input
3 (4)

000 to 119
#00000 to
#65535

17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)

17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-58

3-58
3-60

3-60

3-61

3-63

3-65
3-65

0500 to 1915 0500 to 1915

2009
2009
Forces R ON and holds
2100 to 2915 2100 to 6915 3.1 to 23.0 3 (8) this status when input is 3-66
T000 to T063 T000 to T119
ON.
C000 to C063 C000 to C119

0.01-s
TIMER

UDC xxx

Page

LD
nnnn

nnnn

AND

Function

#00000 to
#65535
19.0 to 21.0 4 (7)
000 to 119
0000 to 6915
000 to 119
#00000 to
#65535

21.0 to 26.0 2 (5)

Forces R/T/C OFF

when input is ON.

16-bit on-delay T that

counts down in 0.1-s
decrements.
16-bit on-delay T that
counts down in 0.01-s
decrements.
16-bit on-delay T that
counts down in 1-ms
decrements.

3-66

3-67

3-68
3-69

Sets 16-bit up-counter.

3-72

Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.

3-76

2.2 Instruction List

Instruction

Symbol

DIFFERENTIATE UP

nnnn
DIFU

DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN

KEEP

KEEP
(FNC22)

R No.

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915

SFT
(FNC39)

R No.1st
& last R
Nos.

1000 to 1915

HSP
(FNC18)

R No.

(KV-10)
0000 to 0005
(KV-16)
0000 to 0009

D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm

HIGH
SPEED

HSP

MASTER
CONTROL

MC

nnnn

SFT

nnnn

MCR

MEMSW
$xxxx
$xxxx

NOP

END

END HI

1000 to 1915

DIFD
(FNC09)

SHIFT

MEMORY
SWITCH

DIFU
(FNC10)

nnnn
DIFD

SET
RES

MASTER
CONTROL
RESET

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand
value
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

R No.

KEEP

END

ENDH

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
1000 to
19153000 to
6915
(KV-24)
0000 to 0015
(KV-40)
0000 to 0107

Page

Turns ON R for 1
11.0 to 13.0 3 (5) scan time at rising
edge of input.
Turns ON R for 1
11.0 to 13.0 3 (5) scan time at falling
edge of input.
Turns ON R and
9.0 to 26.0 3 (5) holds this status when
SET input is ON.
5 (7) Turns OFF R when
RESET input is ON.

(*)

8.0 to 9.0

MC
(FNC24)

1.8 to 3.2

MCR
(FNC25)

0.6 to 1.0

MEMSW $ constant
(FNC26)

Function

3 (4)

3-78

3-78

3-80
3-82

Sets shift register.

3-86

Reduces input relay time

1 (7) constant to 25 ms for
higher input response.
Selects ON/OFF
1 (2) status of R coils, Ts,
or Cs.
Represents end of MC.
Sets memory switches.

3-89

3-89

3 (0)

NOP
(FNC30)

Performs no opera1 (0) tion.

3-94

END

1 (3) Indicates end of each

routine of program.

3-94

ENDH

Indicates end of entire

1 (0) program.

3-94

$ 0000 to $ FFFF

3-92

KV-300
KV-300
Instruction

Symbol

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

Function

Page

LD

0.15 to 0.70 3 (5)

Connects N.O. contact

to bus.

3-57

LDB

0.15 to 0.90 3 (7)

Connects N.C. contact

to bus.

3-57

Mnemonic Operand

Operand value

nnnn

LOAD
nnnn

LOAD BAR
nnnn

AND

AND BAR

AND
R No.
T/C No.

nnnn

ANB

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

0.15 to 0.50 3 (4)

0.15 to 0.80 3 (8)

OR

nnnn

OR

0.15 to 0.50 3 (4)

OR BAR

nnnn

ORB

0.15 to 0.80 3 (8)

AND LOAD

ANL

0.55

1 (3)

OR LOAD

ORL

0.55

1 (3)

Connects N.O. contact

in series with previous
contact.
Connects N.C. contact
in series with previous
contact.
Connects N.O. contact
in parallel with
previous contact.
Connects N.C. contact
in parallel with
previous contact.
Connects in series
blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Connects in parallel
blocks made of one or
more contacts.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-58

3-58

3-60

3-60

3-61

3-63

3-43

12

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
KV-300

Instruction

Symbol

Mnemonic Operand

Operand value

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915

0.20 to 0.56

nnnn

OUT

OUT
nnnn

OUB

OUT BAR

nnnn

(SET)

SET

nnnn

RESET

(RES)

0.1-s TIMER

#ddddd
T xxx

SET

RES

#ddddd
H xxx

TMH
(FNC49)

1-ms TIMER

#ddddd
S xxx

TMS
(FNC51)

COUNTER

#ddddd
C xxx
nnnn

UP-DOWN
COUNTER

UP #ddddd
DW
RES

UDC xxx

Forces R/T/C OFF

0.50 to 4.40 3 (12) when input is ON.

# preset
value, C
No., clock
source R

C No.,
UDC
(FNC52) # preset
value

000 to 249
#00000 to 65535

#00000 to #65535
000 to 249
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915

7.60 to 9.45

000 to 249
#00000 to #65535

8.00 to 11.60 2 (10) Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.

DIFU
FNC10)

DIFFERENTIATE DOWN

nnnn
DIFD

DIFD
(FNC09)

KEEP

KEEP
(FNC22)

R No.

SFT
(FNC39)

1st &
last R
Nos.

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*) 7000 to 9915

HSP
(FNC18)

R No.

0000 to 0009

R No.

SHIFT

D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm

nnnn

SFT

HSP

HIGH
SPEED

nnnn

16-bit on-delay T that

counts down in 0.1-s
decrements.
16-bit on-delay T that
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7) counts down in 0.01-s
decrements.
16-bit on-delay T that
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7) counts down in 1-ms
decrements.
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7)

T No.,
# preset
value

3-65

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3

nnnn
DIFU

SET
RES

Outputs inverted input

0.50 to 1.20 3 (11) ON/OFF status to R
coil.

3-65

Forces R ON and holds

3-66
0.20 to 5.70 3 (12) this status when input
is ON.

DIFFERENTIATE UP

KEEP

Outputs input ON/OFF

status to R coil.

Page

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

TMR

0.01-s TIMER

R No.

3 (8)

Function

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*) 7000 to 9915

4 (7)

Sets 16-bit up-counter.

3-66

3-67

3-68

3-69

3-72

3-76

Turns ON R for 1 scan

3 (10) time at rising edge of
input.
Turns ON R for 1 scan
3 (10) time at falling edge of
6.70
input.
Turns ON R and holds
6.10 to 7.90 3 (11) this status when SET
input is ON.

3-78

6.40 to 8.20 5 (15) Turns OFF R when

RESET input is ON.

3-82

6.70

4.66 to 4.92

3-78

3-80

3 (8) Sets shift register.

3-86

Reduces input relay time

1 (4) constant to 25 ms for
higher input response.

3-89

MASTER
CONTROL

MC

MC
(FNC24)

0.20

MASTER
CONTROL
RESET

MCR

MCR
(FNC25)

1 (0)

Selects ON/OFF status

of R coils, Ts, or Cs.

3-89

MEMORY
SWITCH

MEMSW
$xxxx
$xxxx

3 (0)

Represents end of MC.

Sets memory switches.

3-92

NOP
(FNC30)

1 (0)

Performs no operation.

3-94

END

0.95

1 (1)

Indicates end of each

routine of program.

3-94

ENDH

1 (0)

Indicates end of entire

program.

3-94

NOP

END

END HI

END

ENDH

MEMSW $ constant
(FNC26)

$0000 to $FFFF

Note: 14.0 + 3.0 x (n) to 17.0 + 3.0 x (n) (n represents number of times the original
data is generated.)

3-44

Chapter 2 Instructions

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

2.2.2 Application Instructions

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction Symbol

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80

nnnn
ON
mmmm

W-ON

WAIT OFF

nnnn
OFF
mmmm

W-OFF

WAIT UP
EDGE

nnnn

mmmm

W-UE

WAIT DOWN
EDGE

nnnn

mmmm

W-D

WAIT ON

nnnn:
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
nnnn: C000 to C063
R,T, or C CTC0 to CTC3
No.
mmmm:
1000 to 1915

nnnn:
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

11.0 to
13.0
11.0 to
13.0
14.0 to
18.0
14.0 to
18.0

CONNECT

CON
[FNC 06]

0.4 to
0.6

PUSH

MPS

11.0 to
14.0

READ

MRD

8.0 to
10.0

POP

MPP

10.0 to
12.0

nnnn
STG

STG
[FNC 44]

11.0 to
14.0

JUMP

nnnn
JMP

JMP
[FNC 21]

END
STAGE

ENDS

ENDS
[FNC 14]

STEP

STP
nnnn

STP
[FNC 45]

STAGE

R No.

STEP END

STE

ITVL

SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SUBROUTINE
RETURN

DM0000 to
DM1985
1000 to 1912
3000 to 6912

3-96

3-98

3-98

3-102

3-103

Reads input status and

1 (3) arithmetic flag stored with
3-103
PUSH.
Reads & clears input status
1 (3) and arithmetic flag stored with 3-103
PUSH.
Executes instructions between
3 (7) STG & JMP when R
3-106
(operand) is ON.

1 (3) Turns current stage OFF when 3-106

input is ON.

3.7 to
5.3

Executes program between

3 (7) STP & STE when R (operand) 3-114
is ON.

0.00
DM0000 to
DM0985
1000 to 1912

1 (3) Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.

3-96

7.0 to
9.0

29.0 to
79.0

Clock
source Rs

0004
2100 to 2102

9.0 to
39.0

#ddddd
CTCn

CTC

n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value

n: 0,1
ddddd: #00000 to #00255

3.0 to 4.0

CTH1
nnnn

CTH

Clock
source Rs

0005
2200 to 2202

8.0 to
48.0

#ddddd
CTCn

CTC

n: Comparator No.
ddddd: #
preset value

n: 2,3
ddddd: #00000 to #65535

3.0 to 4.0

nn
CALL

CALL
[FNC 03]

Subroutine No.

00 to 99

8.0 to
10.0

SBN
nn

SBN
[FNC 38]

Subroutine No.

00 to 99

0.00

RET

RET
[FNC 33]

CTH0
nnnn

SUBROUTINE CALL

STE
[FNC 43]

Turns ON R (2nd operand

5 (7) [mmmm]) when R, T, or C (1st
operand [nnnn]) turns ON.
When R, T, or C (1st operand
5 (7) [nnnn]) turns OFF, R (2nd
operand [mmmm]) turns ON.
R (2nd operand [mmmm])
5 (7) turns ON at rising edge of R, T,
or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
R (2nd operand [mmmm])
5 (7) turns ON at falling edge of R,
T, or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
Represents series connection
301 of output instruction together
with another instruction.

Turns current stage OFF and

3 (5) next stage ON when input is
ON.

CTH

8-BIT
COUNTER

16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

Page

10.0 to
13.0

DM & R
No.

PLS
nnnn
DM
PAUSE mmmm
RES

16-BIT
COUNTER

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

ITVL

INTERVAL
TIMER

8-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

R, T, C
Nos.

1000 to 1915

Function

3-106

1 (0) Is used with STEP to make

program step.

3-114

Measures pulse-to-pulse
5 (7) interval & pulse width in
specified mode.

3-117

8-bit (0 to255) up-counter for

4 (4) clock pulses with input
response frequency of 10 kHz.
Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
2 (5) values of high speed counter.
This comparator is turned ON
when these values are equal.
16-bit (0 to 65535) up-counter
4 (4) for clock pulses with input
response frequency of 10 kHz.
Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
2 (5) values of high speed counter.
This comparator is turned ON
when these values are equal.

3-277

3-277

3-204

3-204

2 (6) Executes subroutine specified

by operand.

3-122

Represents beginning of
2 (0) subroutine specified by
operand.

3-122

4.6 to 6.2 1 (5) Represents end of subroutine. 3-122

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-45

12

2.2 Instruction List

Instruction

Symbol

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

Mnemonic Operand

REPEAT
START

FOR
nnnn

FOR
[FNC 16]

REPEAT
END

NEXT

NEXT
[FNC 29]

HKEY

nnnn
mmmm

16-KEY
INPUT

HKEY
[FNC 17]

# constant,
DM No.

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

Function

Page

#00000 to
#00000 to
#65535
#65535
DM0000 to 5.0 to 20.0 3 (15)
DM0000 to
DM1999
DM0999
TM00 to TM29 TM00 to TM29

Executes program
between FOR & NEXT
for number of times
specified by operand.

3-125

1 (3)

Represents end of
repetition.

3-125

5 (7)

Reads 16-key data by

time-sharing and
outputs these data into 3-131
special utility Rs 2900
to 2915.

1.7 to 2.3

I/O R

nnnn:0000 to 0009
10000 to 10415
:
17000 to 17415
mmmm:10500 to 10915
:
17500 to 17915

71 to 370

KV-300
KV-300

Instruction

Symbol

Mnemonic Operand

WAIT ON

nnnn
ON
mmmm

W-ON

WAIT OFF

nnnn
OFF
mmmm

W-OFF

WAIT UP
EDGE

nnnn

mmmm

W-UE

WAIT DOWN
EDGE

nnnn

mmmm

W-DE

nnnn:
R,T, or
C No.

Operand value
nnnn:
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

Function

Turns ON R (2nd operand

[mmmm]) when R, T, or C (1st
operand [nnnn]) turns ON.
When R, T, or C (1st operand
5.00 to 6.10 5 (9) [nnnn]) turns OFF, R (2nd
operand [mmmm]) turns ON.
R (2nd operand [mmmm])
6.10 to 7.50 5 (10) turns ON at rising edge of R,
T, or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
R (2nd operand [mmmm])
6.10 to 7.50 5 (10) turns ON at falling edge of R,
T, or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
Represents series connection

1 (0) of output instruction together

with another instruction.
5.00 to 6.10 5 (9)

CONNECT

CON
[FNC 06]

PUSH

MPS

1.30

1 (9)

READ

MRD

2.70

Reads input status and

1 (18) arithmetic flag stored with
PUSH.

POP

MPP
nnnn
STG

STAGE

STG
[FNC 44]
R No.

JUMP

nnnn
JMP

JMP
[FNC 21]

END
STAGE

ENDS

ENDS
[FNC 14]

STEP

STEP END

INTERVAL
TIMER

16-BIT
COUNTER

3-46

STP
nnnn

STP
[FNC 45]

STE

STE
[FNC 43]

ITVL

PLS
nnnn
DM
PAUSE mmmm
RES

CTH0
nnnn

R, T,
C Nos.

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915

0000 to 0009
0500 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

ITVL

DM & R No.

DMnnnn:
DM0000 to DM9985
mmmm:
1000 to 1912
3000 to 6912
(*)7000 to 9912

CTH

Clock
source Rs

0004
2100
2101
2102

Chapter 2 Instructions

Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.

Page

3-96
3-96

3-98

3-98

3-102

3-103
3-103

Reads & clears input status

3-103
and arithmetic flag stored
with PUSH.
Executes instructions
5.60 to 6.50 3 (10) between STG & JMP when R 3-106
(operand) is ON.
Turns current stage OFF and
3.80 to 6.00 3 (7) next stage ON when input is 3-106
ON.
1.40

1 (9)

1 (0)

Turns current stage OFF

when input is ON.

3-106

1.30

3 (9)

Executes program between

STP & STE when R
(operand) is ON.

3-114

1 (0)

Is used with STEP to make

program step.

3-114

13.80 to
17.30

3.85

Measures pulse-to-pulse
5 (11) interval & pulse width in
specified mode.

4 (7)

3-117

16-bit (0 to 65535) up-counter

for clock pulses with input
3-204
response frequency of 30
kHz.

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

KV-300
Instruction Symbol

Mnemonic Operand

Operand value

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

CTC

n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value

n: 0, 1
ddddd:
#00000 to #65535

CTH

Clock
source Rs

0005
2200
2201
2202

CTC

n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value

n: 2, 3
ddddd:
#00000 to #65535

CALL
Subroutine
[FNC 03]
No.

00 to 99

3.16

SBN
nn

SBN
[FNC 38]

00 to 99

RET

RET
[FNC 33]

REPEAT
START

FOR
nnnn

FOR
[FNC 16]

REPEAT
END

NEXT

NEXT
[FNC 29]

16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

#ddddd
CTCn

16-BIT
COUNTER

CTH1
nnnn

16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR

#ddddd
CTCn

SUBROUTINE CALL

nn
CALL

SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SUBROUTINE
RETURN

16-KEY
INPUT

HKEY

nnnn
mmmm

HKEY
[FNC 17]

Subroutine
No.

#00000 to #65535
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29

16-bit (0 to 65535) up4 (7) counter for clock pulses with

input response frequency of
30 kHz.

3.85

1.55

I/O R

nnnn:0000 to 0009
10000 to 10415
:
17000 to 17415
mmmm:0500 to 0503
10500 to 10915
:
17500 to 17915

16.50

Page

Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
2 (0) values of high speed counter. 3-204
This comparator is turned ON
when these values are equal.

3-204

Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
2 (0) values of high speed counter. 3-204
This comparator is turned ON
when these values are equal.

2 (17) Executes subroutine

specified by operand.

1.15 to 1.45
# constant,
DM No.

Function

3-122

Represents beginning of
2 (0) subroutine specified by
operand.

3-122

Represents end of
subroutine.

3-122

Executes program between

3 (19) FOR & NEXT for number of
times specified by operand.

3-125

1 (6)

1 (0) Represents end of repetition. 3-125

Reads 16-key data by time5 (9) sharing and outputs these

data into special utility Rs
2900 to 2915.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-131

3-47

12

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

2.2.3 Arithmetic Instructions

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction

DATA
MEMORY
WRITE

Symbol

nnnn

< DW >
DMmmmm

< TMIN >

TRIMMER
SETTING

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Function
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
#00000 to
#0000 to
#65535
#65535
#/$
$0000 to
$0000 to
3.6 to 6.0 5 (6) Writes constant into
constant,
DW
data memory.
$FFFF
$FFFF
DM No.
DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
TMIN
[FNC 50]

@TMIN
TMIN > @[FNC 50]

Trimmer
No.

0 to 1

nnnn

< LDA >

LOAD A
nnnn

LDA >

nnnn

< STA >

STORE A
nnnn

STA >

nnnn

< CMP >

COMPARE
nnnn

CMP >
nnnn

< ADD >

ADD
nnnn

ADD >
nnnn

< SUB >

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
LDA
R No., CTH0 to CTH1
[FNC 23]
C/T No.,
DM0000 to
DM/TM
DM0999
No.,
TM00 to TM31
#/$
#00000 to
constant,
#65535
@LDA
$0000 to
#TMxx
@[FNC 23]
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@STA
constant,
@[FNC 42] #TMxx
STA
[FNC 42]

CMP
[FNC 04]

nnnn

SUB >
nnnn

< MUL >

MULTIPLY
nnnn

MUL >
nnnn

< DIV >

SUB
[FNC 46]
@SUB
@[FNC 46]

DIV >

@DIV
@[FNC 11]

Chapter 2 Instructions

Inputs value specified

by operand into
internal register or
inputs current value
when T/C is specified
as operand.

3-136

3-138

3-140

Transfers content of
internal register to
location specified by
operand, or changes
preset value when T/
C is specified as
operand.

3-140

14.0 to 68.0 3 (5) Compares content of

internal register and
value specified by
26.0 to 82.0 3 (12) operand.

3-146

Adds content of
13.0 to 65.0 3 (5) internal register and
value specified by
operand and inputs
25.0 to 79.0 3 (12) result back to same
register.
Subtracts value
15.0 to 68.0 3 (5) specified by operand
from content of
register and inputs
27.0 to 82.0 3 (12) result back to same
register.

DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31
MUL
#00000 to
#00000 to 17.0 to 71.0 3 (5)
[FNC 28] DM/TM
#65535
#65535
No.,
$0000 to
$0000 to
#/$
No.,
@MUL
$FFFF
$FFFF
29.0 to 85.0 3 (12)
@[FNC 28] #TMxx
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
#TM29
#TM29
DIV
22.0 to 79.0 3 (5)
[FNC 11]

DIVIDE
nnnn

0500 to 1915
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

13.0 to 15.0 1 (4) Converts trimmer

rotation angle into 0
to 249 and inputs it
25.0 to 29.0 1 (11) into internal register.

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119 10.0 to 46.0 3 (5)
CTH0 to CTH1
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to
#65535
22.0 to 60.0 3 (12)
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
0500 to 1915
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119 9.0 to 99.0 3 (5)
C000 to C119
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29 21.0 to 113.0 3 (12)
#TM00 to
#TM29

DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM1999
DM0999
DM/TM TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31
@CMP
#00000 to
#00000 to
No.,
@[FNC 04]
#65535
#65535
#/$
$0000 to
$0000 to
constant,
ADD
$FFFF
$FFFF
#TMxx
[FNC 00]
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
#TM29
#TM29
@ADD
@[FNC 00]

SUBTRACT

3-48

Page

Multiplies content of
internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
result back to same
register.
Divides content of
internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
34.0 to 93.0 3 (12) result back to same
register.

3-150

3-150

3-150

3-150

2.2 Instruction List

Instruction

Symbol
nnnn

<ANDA>

AND A
nnnn

ANDA>
nnnn

< ORA >

OR A
nnnn

ORA >

EXCLUSIVE
OR A

SHIFT
RIGHT A

0000 to 2915 0000 to 6915

DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
@ANDA
TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31
R No.,
@[FNC 01]
#00000 to
DM/TM No.,
#00000 to
#65535
#/$ No.,
#65535
ORA
$0000 to
#TMxx
$0000 to
[FNC 31]
$FFFF
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
@ORA
#TM29
#TM29
@[FNC 31]

#dd

< SRA >

SRA
[FNC 41]

#dd

@SRA
@[FNC 41]

#dd

SLA
[FNC 40]

< SLA >

#dd

< RRA >

#dd

RLA
[FNC 35]

Moves content of
internal register serially
right, allowing each bit
3-169
that leaves right end to
24.0 to 44.0 2 (11) enter carry bit and then
leftmost bit.
Moves content of
12.0 to 29.0 2 (4) internal register serially
left, allowing each bit 3-169
that leaves left end to
24.0 to 43.0 2 (11) enter carry bit and then
rightmost bit.
12.0 to 30.0 2 (4)

< COM >

COM
[FNC 05]

COM >

@COM
@[FNC 05]

17.0 to 20.0 1 (10)

INC
[FNC 19]

12.0 to 15.0 3 (5)

nnnn

< INC >

nnnn

INC >
nnnn

< DEC >

nnnn

DEC >
#n

MULTIPLEXER

#01 to #16

@RLA
@[FNC 35]

COMPLEMENT

< MPX >

5.0 to 6.0

DM/TM No.

MPX >

3-171

DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999TM00
TM00 to TM29
to TM29
14.0 to 17.0 3 (5)

@DEC
@[FNC 07]
MPX
[FNC 27]
@MPX
@[FNC 27]

Inverts content of
each bit in internal
register.

Subtracts 1 from
content of data
memory specified by
26.0 to 31.0 3 (12) operand.

Converts 4-bit data

(specified by
operand) of internal
36.0 to 39.0 1 (11) register into 16bit
data.

3-172

24.0 to 25.0 1 (4)

# constant

#n

1 (3)

Adds 1 to content of
data memory
3-172
24.0 to 29.0 3 (12) specified by operand.

@INC
@[FNC 19]
DEC
[FNC 07]

12

Moves content of
internal register
3-166
serially left by value
22.0 to 42.0 2 (11) specified by operand.

RLA >

#dd

3-166

10.0 to 28.0 2 (4)

RRA
[FNC 37]
@RRA
@[FNC 37]

< RLA >

DECREMENT
MEMORY

ANDs each of 16 bits

of internal register and
that of value specified
3-159
by operand, and inputs
23.0 to 78.0 3 (12) result back to same
register.
ORs each of 16 bits of
11.0 to 63.0 3 (5) internal register and
that of value specified
3-161
by operand, and
23.0 to 77.0 3 (12) inputs result back to
same register.
11.0 to 64.0 3 (5)

Moves content of
internal register
serially right by
value specified by
23.0 to 42.0 2 (11) operand.

@SLA
@[FNC 40]

#dd

RRA >

INCREMENT
MEMORY

Page

11.0 to 28.0 2 (4)

# constant
#dd

ROTATE
LEFT A

Function

0000 to 2915 0000 to 6915

DM0000 to
DM0000 to 10.0 to 63.0 3 (5) EXCLUSIVE-ORs
<EORA>
DM0999
DM1999
each of 16 bits of
R No.,
TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31
internal register and
DM/TM No.,
#00000 to
#00000 to
3-164
that of value
#/$ No.,
#65535
#65535
specified by operand,
#TMxx
$0000 to
$0000 to
and inputs result
@EORA
nnnn
$FFFF
$FFFF
22.0 to 77.0 3 (12) back to same
EORA> @[FNC 15]
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
register.
#TM29
#TM29
EORA
[FNC 15]

SLA >

ROTATE
RIGHT A

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

ANDA
[FNC 01]

nnnn

SRA >

SHIFT
LEFT A

Mnemonic Operand

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

#0 to #3

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-176

3-49

2.2 Instruction List

Instruction

Symbol

DMX
[FNC 12]

DMX >

@DMX
@[FNC 12]

<TBCD>

TBCD
[FNC 47]

TBCD>

@TBCD
@[FNC 47]

< TBIN >

TBIN
[FNC 48]

TBIN>

@TBIN
@[FNC 48]

< ASC >

ASC
[FNC 02]

ASC >

@ASC
@[FNC 02]

<RASC>

RASC
[FNC 32]

TRANSFER
BIN

ASCII
CONVERT

REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT

Function

Page

28.0 to 30.0 1 (3)

Converts position of
highest order bit with
1 in internal register
40.0 to 44.0 1 (10) into 4-bit data.

3-176

Converts content of
internal register (16bit binary) into 4-digit
31.0 to 35.0 1 (10) BCD data.

3-180

19.0 to 21.0 1 (3)

18.0 to 20.0 1 (3)

Converts content of
internal register (4digit BCD) into 16-bit
30.0 to 34.0 1 (10) binary data.
8.0

12.0 to 14.0

ROOT
[FNC 36]

3-183

1 (3)

Converts 2-digit ASCII

code into one byte
data.
24.0 to 28.0 1 (10)

3-183

Takes square root of 32bit data (TM00: higher

order byte, internal
register: lower order
1 (10) byte) and inputs result
back to same register.

3-185

102.0 to
103.0

@ROOT
ROOT>
@[FNC 36]

3-180

1 (3)

Converts content of
lower order byte of
internal register into
20.0 to 22.0 1 (10) 2-digit ASCII code.

@RASC
RASC>
@[FNC 32]
<ROOT>

SQUARE
ROOT

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand
value
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

< DMX >

DEMULTIPLEXER

TRANSFER
BCD

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

114.0 to
117.0

1 (3)

KV-300
KV-300
Instruction

Symbol

DATA
MEMORY
WRITE

nnnn

< DW >
DMmmmm

TRIMMER
SETTING

< TMIN >

DW

@TMIN
TMIN > @[FNC 50]

< LDA >

LOAD A
nnnn

LDA >

nnnn

< STA >

STORE A
nnnn

STA >

#/$
constant,
DM No.

Operand value
nnnn:
#0000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
DMmmmm:
DM0000 to DM9999

TMIN
[FNC 50]

nnnn

3-50

Mnemonic Operand

Trimmer
No.

LDA
[FNC 23]
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@LDA
@[FNC 23] constant,
#TMxx

STA
[FNC 42]

R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@STA
constant,
@[FNC 42]
#TMxx

Chapter 2 Instructions

0, 1

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

0500 to 1915
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Page

0.60 to
1.40

5 (11) Writes constant into

data memory.

3-136

5.10 to
5.60

1 (11) Converts trimmer

rotation angle into 0 to
249 and inputs it into
1 (25) internal register.

3-138

2.00 to
5.70
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29

Function

0.30 to
28.00

3 (12)

2.30 to
30.00

3 (26)

0.20 to
30.00

3 (12) Transfers content of

internal register to
location specified by
3-140
operand, or changes
preset value when T/C
3 (26) is specified as operand.

2.20 to
32.00

Inputs value specified

by operand into internal
register or inputs
3-140
current value when T/C
is specified as operand.

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

KV-300
Instruction

Symbol
nnnn

< CMP >

Mnemonic Operand

Operand value

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
9.20 to
36.00

CMP
[FNC 04]

COMPARE
nnnn

CMP >
nnnn

< ADD >

@CMP
@[FNC 04]
ADD
[FNC 00]

ADD

DM/TM
No.,
#/$
constant,
#TMxx

DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29

11.20 to
38.00
7.70 to
35.00
9.70 to
37.00

nnnn

SUB
[FNC 46]

8.40 to
35.00

nnnn

@SUB
@[FNC 46]

10.40 to
37.00

nnnn

MUL
[FNC 28]

SUBTRACT
SUB >

< MUL >

MULTIPLY

DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
#TMxx

DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29

9.80 to
37.00

nnnn

@MUL
@[FNC 28]

nnnn

DIV
[FNC 11]

13.70 to
41.00

nnnn

@DIV
@[FNC 11]

15.70 to
42.00

nnnn

ANDA
[FNC 01]

6.90 to
33.00

MUL >

< DIV >

11.80 to
39.00

DIVIDE
DIV >

<ANDA>

AND A
nnnn

@ANDA
@[FNC 01]

nnnn

< ORA >

ORA
[FNC 31]

nnnn

@ORA
@[FNC 31]

ANDA>

OR A
ORA >

R No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
nnnn
@EORA
EORA> @[FNC 15] #TMxx
nnnn

EXCLUSIVE
OR A

EORA
[FNC 15]

R No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
#TMxx

<EORA>

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29

8.90 to
35.00
6.90 to
33.00
8.90 to
35.00

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM9999TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29

6.90 to
33.00
8.9 to
35.00

3 (12) Compares content of

internal register and
value specified by
3 (26) operand.

3-146

Adds content of internal

register and value
3-150
specified by operand
3 (26) and inputs result back
to same register.

@ADD
@[FNC 00]

< SUB >

Page

3 (12)

nnnn

ADD >

Function

Subtracts value
3 (12) specified by operand
from content of register
and inputs result back
3 (26) to same register.

3-150

Multiplies content of
3 (12) internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
3 (26) result back to same
register.

3-150

Divides content of
3 (12) internal register by
value specified by
3-150
operand and inputs
3 (26) result back to same
register.
ANDs each of 16 bits of
3 (12) internal register and that
of value specified by
3-159
operand, and inputs
3 (26) result back to same
register.
ORs each of 16 bits of
3 (12) internal register and
that of value specified
by operand, and inputs 3-161
3 (26) result back to same
register.
EXCLUSIVE-ORs each
3 (12) of 16 bits of internal
register and that of value 3-164
specified by operand,
3 (26) and inputs result back to
same register.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-51

12

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
KV-300

Instruction Symbol

#dd

@SRA
@[FNC 41]

12.80

#dd

SLA
[FNC 40]

10.80

< SLA >

#dd

SLA >

10.80

@SLA
@[FNC 40]

12.80
# constant

12.00

@RRA
@[FNC 37]

14.00

RLA
[FNC 35]

12.00

RLA >

@RLA
@[FNC 35]

14.00

< COM >

COM
[FNC 05]

6.10

#dd

RRA >
#dd

< RLA >

ROTATE
LEFT A

#dd

COMPLEMENT
COM >

nnnn

< INC >

INCREMENT
MEMORY

nnnn

INC >
nnnn

DECREMENT
MEMORY

< DEC >

3-52

Moves content of
2 (11) internal register serially
left, allowing each bit
that leaves left end to
2 (25) enter carry bit and then
rightmost bit.

3-169

1 (9)

7.70

3 (12)

@INC
@[FNC 19]

9.70

3 (26)

7.70

3 (12)

@DEC
@[FNC 07]

9.70

#n

MPX
[FNC 27]

7.30

Inverts content of each

bit in internal register.

3-171

Adds 1 to content of
data memory specified
by operand.

3-172

Subtracts 1 from content

of data memory
3-172
3 (26) specified by operand.

MPX >

@MPX
@[FNC 27]

9.30

1 (11) Converts 4-bit data

(specified by operand)
of internal register into
1 (25) 16- bit data.

< DMX >

DMX
[FNC 12]

6.70

1 (9)

DMX >

@DMX
@[FNC 12]

< MPX >

DEMULTIPLEXER

3-169

INC
[FNC 19]

DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29

# constant
#n

Chapter 2 Instructions

#0 to #3

8.70

3-166

Moves content of
2 (11) internal register serially
right, allowing each bit
that leaves right end to
2 (25) enter carry bit and then
leftmost bit.

1 (23)

DM/TM
No.

Page

2 (11) Moves content of

internal register serially
left by value specified by 3-166
2 (25) operand.

8.10

DEC
[FNC 07]

Function

2 (22) Moves content of

internal register serially
right by value specified
2 (25) by operand.

@COM
@[FNC 05]

nnnn

DEC >

MULTIPLEXER

#01 to #16

RRA
[FNC 37]

#dd

< RRA >

ROTATE
RIGHT A

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

SRA
[FNC 41]

SRA >

SHIFT
LEFT A

Operand value

< SRA >

#dd

SHIFT
RIGHT A

Mnemonic Operand

Converts position of
highest order bit with 1
in internal register into
1 (23) 4-bit data.

3-176

3-176

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80

KV-300
Instruction

TRANSFER
BCD

Symbol

Mnemonic

<TBCD>

TBCD
[FNC 47]

@TBCD
TBCD> @[FNC 47]

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
13.20

15.20

TBIN
[FNC 48]

14.00

TBIN>

@TBIN
@[FNC 48]

16.00

< ASC >

ASC
[FNC 02]

8.50

ASC >

@ASC
@[FNC 02]

10.50

<RASC>

RASC
[FNC 32]

6.80

ASCII
CONVERT

@RASC

RASC> @[FNC 32]

<ROOT>

SQUARE
ROOT

Operand value

< TBIN >

TRANSFER
BIN

REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT

Operand

Page

Converts content of
internal register (16-bit
binary) into 4-digit BCD
1 (23) data.

3-180

Converts content of
internal register (4-digit
BCD) into 16-bit binary
1 (23) data.

3-180

1 (9)

1 (9)

1 (9)

Converts content of
lower order byte of
internal register into 21 (23) digit ASCII code.

3-183

1 (9)
Converts 2-digit ASCII
code into one byte data. 3-183

8.80

ROOT
[FNC 36]

77.70

@ROOT

79.70

ROOT> @[FNC 36]

Function

1 (23)
Takes square root of 32bit data (TM00: higher
order byte, internal
3-185
register: lower order
1 (23) byte) and inputs result
back to same register.
1 (9)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-53

12

2.2 Instruction List

KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

2.2.4 Interrupt Instructions

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand

Function

Page

Symbol

INTERRUPT
DISABLED

< DI >

DI
[FNC 08]

3.0 to 4.6

1 (4)

Disables execution
of interrupt.

3-193

INTERRUPT
ENABLED

< EI >

EI
[FNC 13]

3.0 to 4.6

1 (4)

Enables execution
of interrupt.

3-193

INT
nnn

R No.

RETI

1 (8)
Comparator
No.

INT
CTCn

RETURN
INTERRUPT

35.0 to 48.0

000 to 003

INT
[FNC 20]

INTERRUPT

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80

Instruction

Used with comparators CTC0 to CTC3

3-192
and executes
instructions between
INT and RETI.

35.0 to
48.8

CTC0 to CTC3

RETI
[FNC 34]

20.0 to
23.0

Executes instructions between INT

and RETI at rising
edge of any of input 3-192
000 to 003 or at
falling edge of 003.

1 (3)

Represents end of
interrupt.

3-192

KV-300
KV-300
Mnemonic Operand

Exec.time
Bytes
(s)

Instruction

Symbol

INTERRUPT
DISABLED

< DI >

DI
[FNC 08]

3.20

INTERRUPT
ENABLED

< EI >

EI
[FNC 13]

5.80

INT
nnn

R No.

INT
CTCn

3-54

000 to 003

Function

Page

1 (9)

Disables execution
of interrupt.

3-193

1 (0)

Enables execution
of interrupt.

3-193

40.00 to
80.00

1 (0)

Executes instructions
between INT and
RETI at rising edge
3-192
of any of input 000 to
003 or at falling edge
of 003.

40.00 to
80.00

1 (0)

60 to 100

1 (0)

INT
[FNC 20]

INTERRUPT

RETURN
INTERRUPT

Operand value

RETI

Comparator
No.

RETI
[FNC 34]

Chapter 2 Instructions

CTC0 to CTC3

Used with comparators CTC0 to CTC3

3-192
and executes
instructions between
INT and RETI.
Represents end of
interrupt.

3-192

2.3 Convention Details

2.3 Convention Details

In this chapter, each instruction is described as follows:

Ladder symbol
Represents the form
of the instruction on a
ladder diagram.

Instruction key
Represents the key or
function No. for entry.

Instruction
Describes the name
and brief function of
the instruction.
SET / RES

2.4 Instruction Details

SET: Set

Mnemonic
Represents the instruction in ladder language.

RES: Reset

SET

RES

Example

Example
Timing diagram
Description
Perform programming
using the given example
to gain experience.

nnnn
SET

nnnn
RES

Turns ON specified relay when input is ON

and enables this relay to remain ON.
Turns OFF specified relay, timer, or counter
when input is ON.

0000

0500
SET

0001

0500
RES

Coding
Line No.

Instruction
LD

0000

0001

SET

0500

0002

LD

0001

0003

OUB

0500

Description

Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OFF. Output relay
0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.
SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it.
RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a reset signal when
a timer or counter is used as an operand.

0001

#00100
C000
00000
C000
RES

0002

Note
Describes the notes
for the instruction.

0001

0002

Coding
Shows the
coding for
the given
example.

#00100
C000
0000

Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any order. Note, however,
that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES has priority over
SET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.

Tips
Differences between SET/RES and KEEP
Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( p. 3-57 and p. 3-71) serve the same purpose.
SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can be placed before
SET.
Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.
KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving memory space when
used a number of times.

Tips
Describes hands-on
techniques for efficient
programming.
Operand
Shows operands (element
Nos.) that can be used for
the instruction.

Operand

0000

0000

0500
RES

0001

0500
SET

LD
RES
LD
SET

0000

0000
0500
0001
0500

KEEP
SET
0500

0001

LD
0000
LD
0001
KEEP 0500

RES

Operands
NEW KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119

CTH0 to CTH1 (RES only)

CTC0 to CTC3 (RES only)

Key operation
Describes the basic key
operations on the handheld
programmer. Set the mode
switch to PROGRAM.

Key operation
SET

3-66

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

RES

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

* The above page is created for explanation purposes only.

This page may be different from the actual page.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-55

12

2.4 Instruction Details

2.4 Instruction Details

2.4.1 Basic Instructions
This section describes the basic instructions used for programming. You can create
complete programs with only these basic instructions.
Instruction
Load

3-57

LDB

3-57

And

AND

3-58

And Bar

ANB

3-58

OR: Or

OR

3-60

ORB

3-60

ANL: And Load

ANL

3-61

Or Load

ORL

3-63

OUT: Out

OUT

3-65

OUB: Out Bar

OUB

3-65

SET: Set

SET

3-66

RES: Reset

RES

3-66

TMR: 0.1-s Timer

TMR

3-67

TMH: 0.01-s Timer

TMH (FUN49)

3-68

TMS: 1-ms Timer

TMS (FUN51)

3-69

3-72

C: Counter
UDC: Up-Down Counter

UDC (FUN52)

3-76

DIFU: Differentiate Up

DIFU (FUN10)

3-78

DIFD: Differentiate Down

DIFD (FUN09)

3-78

KEEP: Keep

KEEP (FUN22)

3-80

SFT: Shift

SFT (FUN39)

3-82

HSP: High Speed

HSP (FUN18)

3-86

MC: Master Control

MC (FUN24)

3-89

MCR: Master Control Reset

MCR (FUN25)

3-89

MEMSW (FUN26)

3-92

NOP: No Operation

NOP

3-94

END: End

END

3-94

ENDH: End Hi

END

3-94

MEMSW: Memory Switch

3-56

Reference page

LD

Load Bar

ORB: Or Bar

Mnemonic

Chapter 2 Instructions

LD / LDB
2.4 Instruction Details

LD: Load

LD

nnnn

LDB: Load Bar

LDB

nnnn

7
4

Connects N.O. contact to bus.

Connects N.C. contact to bus.

Example
0000

0500

0001

0501

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OUT

0500

0002

LDB

0001

0003

OUT

0501

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON.
When input relay 0001 turns OFF, output relay 0501 turns ON.

12

Description

LD and LDB instructions are used to connect a contact to the bus.

LD and LDB instructions are also used to separate program blocks when ANL or
ORL instruction is used.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

Key operation
Example: LD C014
LD

LDB

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

L D CTR SET LDB

7 ( C) 1
4

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-57

AND / ANB
2.4 Instruction Details

AND: And

AND

nnnn

ANB: And Bar

ANB

nnnn

Connects N.O. contact in series with

previous contact.
Connects N.C. contact in series with
previous contact.

Example
0000

0001

0500

0002

0003

0501
0502
0004

0503

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

AND

0001

0002

OUT

0500

0003

LD

0002

0004

ANB

0003

0005

OUT

0501

0006

OUT

0502

0007

AND

0004

0008

OUT

0503

To turn ON 0503, 0002 must be ON, 0003 OFF, and 0004 ON at the same time. The
AND and ANB instructions are used when two or more conditions (in this case,
0002: ON, 0003: OFF, 0004: ON) must be satisfied at the same time.

Description

As many contacts as desired can be connected in series provided these contacts

are used in the same program.
As OUT 0503 shown in the above example, when an AND or ANB instruction is
used immediately after an OUT instruction to connect the other relay via a
contact (0004 in the example), the AND or ANB can be used as many times as
desired, provided the program syntax is correct.
The following two circuits operate in the same manner, but the coding for these
circuits are different.
0000

0001

0000

0501

0001

0500

0500

Coding
Line No.

Coding
Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand
0000

0000

LD

0000

0000

LD

0001

OUT

0500

0001

MPS

0002

AND

0001

0002

AND

0001

0003

OUT

0501

0003

OUT

0501

0004

MPP

0005

OUT

3-58

0501

Chapter 2 Instructions

"MPS instruction" (p. 3-103)

"MPP instruction" (p. 3-103)

0500

AND / ANB
2.4 Instruction Details

Operand
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

Key operation
Example: AND T012
AND

ANB

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

AND TMR SET ANL

8 (T) 1
2

ENT
R-SRCH

12

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-59

OR / ORB
2.4 Instruction Details

OR: Or

OR

nnnn

ORB

nnnn

ORB: Or Bar

Connects N.O. contact in parallel with

previous contact.
Connects N.C. contact in parallel with
previous contact.

Example
0000

0500

0003

0001
0002
0004

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OR

0000

0002

ORB

0002

0003

AND

0003

0004

OR

0004

0005

OUT

0500
0000 must be ON or

To turn ON 0500,

0003 must be ON, and

0001 ON or

or,

0002 OFF.

0004 must be ON.

The OR and ORB instructions are used when at least one of the conditions (here,
two sets of conditions: <0003: ON, 0004: ON>, and <0000: ON, 0001: ON, 0002:
OFF> are given) must be satisfied.

Description

The OR and ORB instructions are used to connect in parallel the contacts for
these instructions with contacts on the previous line. An LD or LDB instruction is
used together with the OR and ORB instructions.
As many contacts as desired can be connected in parallel provided they are used
in the same program.

Note: Output circuits (except for

and
)
cannot be included in the parallel connection.

0500

0000

Incorrect

0001

0501

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

Key operation
Example: OR T018
OR

ORB

Operand

3-60

Chapter 2 Instructions

ENT
R-SRCH

O R TMR SET AND

9 ( T) 1
8

ENT
R-SRCH

ANL
2.4 Instruction Details

ANL: And Load

ANL

Connects in series blocks made of one or

more contacts.

Example
0000

0001

0002

0003

0500

ANL

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OR

0002

0002

LD

0001

0003

OR

0003

0004

ANL

0005

OUT

0500

12

Description
0000

The above example shows a serial connection between Block A

0002

0001

and Block B
series.

0003

. The ANL instruction is used to connect two or more blocks in

Operands

Key operation
ANL

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-61

ANL
2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of ANL Instruction

0000

0002

0004

0001

0003

0005

0500

Coding (1)
Line No.

Coding (2)
Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0000

LD

0000

0001

OR

0001

0001

OR

0001

0002

LD

0002

0002

LD

0002

0003

OR

0003

0003

OR

0003

0004

ANL

0004

LD

0004

0005

LD

0004

0005

OR

0005

0006

OR

0005

0006

ANL

0007

ANL

0008

OUT

0500

0007

ANL

0008

OUT

0500

The ANL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, that
in example (2) above, ANL is entered one less time than the number of blocks to
be connected.
Also, ANL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), whereas in example
(1) it can be used as many times as desired.

Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when ANL is used 9 or

more times in example (2).

3-62

Chapter 2 Instructions

ORL
2.4 Instruction Details

ORL: Or Load

ORL

Connects in parallel blocks made of one or

more contacts.

Example
0000

0001

0002

0003

0050

ORL

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

Operand
0000

0001

AND

0001

0002

LD

0002

0003

AMD

0003

0004

ORL

0005

OUT

0500

Description
The above example shows a parallel connection of Block A
and Block B
parallel.

0002 0003

0000 0001

12

. The ORL instruction is used to connect two or more blocks in

Operands

Key operation
ORL

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-63

ORL
2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of ORL Instruction

0000

0001

Block

0002

0003

Block

0004

0005

Block

0500

Coding (1)
Line No.

Coding (2)
Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0000

LD

0000

0001

AND

0001

0001

AND

0001

0002

LD

0002

0002

LD

0002

0003

AND

0003

0003

AND

0003

0004

ORL

0004

LD

0004
0005

0005

LD

0004

0005

AND

0006

AND

0005

0006

ORL

0007

ORL

0008

OUT

0500

0007

ORL

0008

OUT

0500

The ORL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, that
in example (2) above, ORL is entered one less time than the number of blocks to
be connected.
Also, ORL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), whereas in example
(1) it can be used as many times as desired.

Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when ORL is used 9 times
or more in example (2).

3-64

Chapter 2 Instructions

OUT / OUB
2.4 Instruction Details

OUT: Out
OUB: Out Bar

OUT

nnnn

OUB

nnnn

Outputs ON/OFF status of input to relay coil.

Outputs inverted ON/OFF status of input to
relay coil.

Example
0500

0000

0501

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OUT

0500

0002

OUB

0501

Description

When input relay 0000 turn ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and output relay
0501 turns OFF.
The OUT and OUB instructions are used to drive relay coils for output relays,
internal utility relays, and latch relays. These instructions are not used for input
relays, timers, counters, or data memories.

Note: Double coil

When one output relay receives input from two or more OUT or OUB instructions,
priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
When 0001 is OFF, 0500 does not turn ON even if 0000 turns ON.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 2915

0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 6915

Key operation
OUT

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

OUB

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-65

12

SET / RES

2.4 Instruction Details

SET: Set
RES: Reset

SET

nnnn
SET

RES

nnnn
RES

1
0

Example

Turns ON specified relay when input is ON

and enables this relay to remain ON.
Turns OFF specified relay, timer, or counter
when input is ON.

0000

0500
SET

0001

0500
RES

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

SET

0500

0002

LD

0001

0003

OUB

0500

Description

Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OFF. Output relay
0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.
SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it.
RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a reset signal when
a timer or counter is used as an operand.

#00100
C000
00000
C000
RES

0001
0002

0001

#00100
C000
0000

0002

Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any order. Note, however,
that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES has priority over
SET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.

Tips
Differences between SET/RES and KEEP
Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( See above and p. 3-80) serve the same purpose.
SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can be placed before
SET.
Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.
KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving memory space when
used a number of times.
0000

0500
RES

0001

0500
SET

LD
RES
LD
SET

0000

0000
0500
0001
0500

KEEP
SET
0500

0001

LD
0000
LD
0001
KEEP 0500

RES

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119

CTH0 to CTH1 (RES only)

CTC0 to CTC3 (RES only)

Key operation
SET

3-66

Operand

Chapter 2 Instructions

ENT
R-SRCH

RES

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

TMR

2.4 Instruction Details

TMR: 0.1-s Timer

TMR
(T)

Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that counts

down in 0.1-s decrements.

#ddddd
Txxx

Example
0000

#00010
T000

Preset value: 1 s

#00035
T001

Preset value: 3.5 s

T000

0500

T001

0501

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
TMR
TMR
LD
OUT
LD
OUT

Operand
0000
000 #00010*1
001 #00035*2
T000
0500
T001
0501

*1 0.1 s x 10 = 1 s
*2 0.1 s x 35 = 3.5 s

12

Timing diagram (TMR000 #00010 and 0500 in the above example)

Scan
Input 0000

ON
OFF

Current #00010
value of
TMR000
#00000

ON

Output 0500

0500 and 0501 turn ON 1 second and 3.5 seconds respectively after 0000 turns
ON.
TMR000 is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000",
contact T000 turns ON, and then output relay 0500 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 and T001 turn OFF and the
current values of TMR000 and TMR001 are reset.

Note 1: The TMR number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or UDC
instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current value of TMR is not retained but is reset to the preset value if a power
failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.

Tips

When the number specified by TMR is used as a contact (T000 in the above
example), this contact can be used as many times as desired. It can also be
used as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.
Timer accuracy = 0.1 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.)

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Key operation
TMR
(T)

Operand

Operand

(TMR No.)

(Preset value)

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-67

TMH

2.4 Instruction Details

TMH: 0.01-s Timer

FUN

LDB

OR

Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that

counts down in 0.01-s decrements.

#ddddd
T
Txxx
H

Example
0000

#00010
T
T000
H

T000

0500

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

TMH

000 #00010*1

0002

LD

T000

0003

OUT

0500

*1 0.01 s x 10 = 0.1 s

Description

0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.

TMH is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000", the
contact of the timer No. turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 turns OFF and the current value
of TMH000 is reset.

Note 1: The TMH number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
UDC instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current value of TMH is not retained but is reset to the preset value if
power failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.

When the number specified by TMH is used as a contact (T000 in the above
example), this contact can be used as many times as desired. It can also be
used as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.
Timer accuracy = 0.01 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.)

Operand
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Key operations
FUN

3-68

LDB

Chapter 2 Instructions

OR

ENT

Operand

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(TMH No.)

(Preset value)

R-SRCH

TMS

2.4 Instruction Details

TMS: 1-ms Timer

ANB SET

FUN 5

Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that

counts down in 0.01 ms decrements.

#ddddd
T Txxx
S

Example
0000

#00100
T
T000
S

T000

0500

Preset value: 0.1 s

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

TMS

000 #00010*1

0002

LD

T000

0003

OUT

0500

*1 0.001 s x 100 = 0.1 s

Description

0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.

TMS is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000", the
contact of the timer No. turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 turns OFF and the current value
of TMS000 is reset.

Note 1: The TMS number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
UDC instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current value of TMS is not retained but is reset to the preset value if
power failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.

When the number specified by TMS is used as a contact (T000 in the above
example), this contact can be used as many times as desired. It can also be
used as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.
Timer accuracy = 0.001 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.)

Operand
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Key operations
FUN

ANB

SET

ENT

Operand

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(TMS No.)

(Preset value)

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-69

12

TMR

2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of TMR instruction

One-shot circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and remains ON for a
specified time.
#00020
T000

0000
T000

0500

2 sec.

0500

Timing diagram
ON
OFF

0000

ON

ON

2 sec.

2 sec.

0500

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

Operand
0000

0001

OR

0500

0002

TMR

000 #00020

0003

ANB

T000

0004

OUT

0500

Off-delay circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 0500 turns OFF in a
specified time after 0000 turns OFF.
0000

0500

T000
0000

0500

#00020
T000

Timing diagram
ON

0000

OFF

0500

ON
2 sec.

Coding
Line No.

3-70

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OR

0500

0002

ANB

T000

0003

OUT

0500

0004

ANB

0000

0005

TMR

000 #00020

Chapter 2 Instructions

2 sec.

TMR

2.4 Instruction Details

On-delay circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after input relay 0000 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 also turns OFF.
0000

#00020
T000

T000

0500

2 sec.

Timing diagram
ON
OFF

0000

ON

0500

1s

2s

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

TMR

000 #00020

0002

LD

T000

0003

OUT

0500

12

Flicker circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while input relay 0000 is ON.
0000

T001

T000

#00020
T000

2 sec.

#00010
T001

1 sec.

0500

Timing diagram
ON

0000

OFF

0500

ON

ON

ON

2s 1s 2s 1s 2s 1s

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

ANB

T001

0002

TMR

000 #00020

0003

LD

T000

0004

AMR

001 #00010

0005

OUT

0500

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-71

2.4 Instruction Details

CTR
(C)

C: Counter

#ddddd
Cxxx
nnnn

Sets a 16-bit up-counter.

Example
Reset input

Preset value

#00010
C000
0000
0500

Counter No.

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

0001

0001

000 #00010 0000

0002

LD

C000

0003

OUT

0500

0001
C000

Count input

Coding

Timing diagram (C000#00010 and 0500 in the above example)

0000
(Count input)

ON
OFF

0001
(Reset input)
Current value
of C000
#00010

C000
0500

10

ON

Description

The counter performs one counting at the rising edge of clock pulse. When the
current value reaches the preset value, the coil of specified No. turns ON.
When a reset input (b [N.C.] contact) turns ON, the current counter value is reset
to "00000".
Since C is software counter which is set on the program, the response speed
depends on the scan time.

Note 1: When a reset input is provided using an a (N.O.) contact, the current
counter value is reset at power-off.
Note 2: The C number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
UDC instructions in the same program.
Note 3: The current C value is stored more than two months (KV-10xx: More than
20 days) at 25C even when the KV is not in operation or is turned off.

Tips
By entering relay 2007 (which can turn the counter OFF for only the first scan time
when the operation is started) using an 'a' (N.O.) contact in series as the input relay
for resetting counter, you can reset the current C value whenever the operation is
started.
0001

3-72

Chapter 2 Instructions

#00010
C000
0000

2.4 Instruction Details

Details of counter
Extended ladder
The counter for the KV Series supports the extended ladder method.
KV counter
0001

#00010
C005
0000

2007

The extended ladder allows you to connect contacts or output coils after the
counter in series, reducing the number of ladder program lines.

In the following example, the counter starts counting when counter input relay 0004
turns ON. When the current counter value reaches "300", output relay 0500 turns
ON.
0002

#00300
C002
0004

C002

0500

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

0002

0001

002 #00300 0004

0002

CON

0003

AND

C002

0004

OUT

0500

12

"CON instruction" (p. 3-102)

For details of the extended ladder, refer to "1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams"
(p.3-29).

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

No.: 000 to 249

Count input:
0000 to 17915

No.: 000 to 249

Count input:
0000 to 0009,
0500 to 17915
Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 063

Count input:
0000 to 2915

No.: 000 to 119

Count input:
0000 to 6915

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Preset value:
#00001 to #65535

Key operation
CTR
(C)

Operand

Operand

Operand

ENT

(Counter No.)

(Preset value)

(Count input)

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-73

2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of C (counter) instruction

Long-duration timer
Sets a long-duration timer by combining a timer and a counter.
Output 0500 turns ON in 1 hour.
Special utility relay
(1-second clock)
#03600
C002
2006
0500

0000
C002

Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0000
0001
C
002 #03600 2006
0002
LD
C002
0003
OUT
0500
"1.3.7 Special Utility Relays" (p. 3-12)

Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of power failure)

Coding
0001

#03600
C001
2006
1000

C001

C001

#00600
C002
1000

0001

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LDB
ANB
C
LD
OUT
LDB
C

Operand
0001
C001
001 #03600 2006
C001
1000
0001
002 #00600 1000

Instruction
LDB
ANB
C
LD
OUT
LDB
C

Operand
0002
C001
001 #10000 0000
C000
1000
0002
001 #65535 1000

Large capacity counter

Coding
0002

#10000
C000
0000
1000

C000

C000

#65535
C001
1000

0002

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Multi-level setting
Sets a multi-level counter using arithmetic instructions.

#01000
CMP

2009

#09999
C002
0000
0500

#02000
CMP

2009

0501

#03000
CMP

2009

0502

0001
2002

C002
LDA

Outputs in 3 different levels according to the current counter value.

Current counter value
1000 or more 0500 turns ON.
2000 or more 0501 turns ON.
3000 or more 0502 turns ON.

3-74

"2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions" (p. 3-134)

Chapter 2 Instructions

2.4 Instruction Details

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT

Operand
0002
002 #09999 0000
2002
C002

#01000
2009
0500

Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019

Instruction
MRD
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT

Operand
#02000
2009
0501
#03000
2009
0502

Counter multi-level setting

0001
2002 C000
LDA

#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP

#09999
C000
0000
0500
0501

#02999 2011 0500 0501 0502

CMP

12

Outputs in 3 different levels according to the counter current value.

Current counter value
00000 to 00999 0500 turns ON.
01000 to 01999 0501 turns ON.
02000 to 02999 0502 turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT

Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000

#00999
2011
0500
#01999
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-75

UDC
2.4 Instruction Details

UDC: Up-Down Counter

ANB ANL

FUN 5

UDC xxx

UP
DW #ddddd
RES

Sets a 16-bit up-down-counter.

Example

UP input

UDC 000

0001

UP
DOWN input

#00009
0002
DW

RESET input

0003
RES
0500

C000

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0001

0001

LD

0002

0002

LD

0003

0003

UDC

000 #00009

0004

LD

C000

0005

OUT

0500

Timing diagram

2 3

Current value of C000

Carry

Carry

ON

Time
ON

OFF

C000

ON
OFF

Input for up 0001

ON

Input for down 0002

Input for resetting
0003

OFF
ON
OFF

When UP input relay (0001) turns ON, the current value of the counter is
incremented by one. When DOWN input relay (0002) turns ON, the current value
is decremented by one.
C000 turns ON when the digit shifts (#00009 to #00000, or #00000 to #00009).

Note 1: The UDC number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
UDC instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current UDC value is stored more than two months (KV-10xx: More
than 20 days) at 25C even when the KV is not in operation or is turned off.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535

Key operation
FUN

3-76

ANB

Chapter 2 Instructions

ANL

ENT

Operand

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(C No.)

(Preset value)

R-SRCH

UDC

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of UDC instruction

Multi-level UP/DOWN counter
UP/DOWN counter which allows a count setting value up to 99,990,000.
UDC 000

0001

UP
#09999

BCD
Low-order 4 digits

0002
DW
0003
RES
C000

UDC 001

0001

UP
#09999
C000

BCD
High-order 4 digits

0002
DW

0003
RES
Up-input
0001
Down-input 0002

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0001

0001

LD

0002

0002

LD

0003

0003

UDC

000 #09999

0004

LD

C000

0005

AND

0001

0006

LD

C000

0007

AND

0002

0008

LD

0003

0009

UDC

001 #09999

12

The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC001 and
the low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.
0004

C000
LDA

TBCD

0500
STA

C001
LDA

TBCD

0600
STA

Low-order
4 digits
High-order
4 digits

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-77

DIFU / DIFD
2.4 Instruction Details

SET RES

nnnn
DIFU

RES OR

nnnn
DIFD

DIFU: Differentiate Up

FUN 1

DIFD: Differentiate Down:

FUN 0

0
9

Detects rising edge of input signal and turns

ON specified relay for 1st scan time only.
Detects falling edge of input signal and turns
ON specified relay for 1st scan time only.

Example
1000
DIFU

0000

1001
DIFD

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

Operand
0000

0001

DIFU

1000

0002

DIFD

1001

Timing diagram (0000, 1000, and 1001 in the above example)

ON

0000

OFF

ON

1000

ON for 1st scan time only

ON

1001

ON for 1st scan time only

The DIFU instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operand for only the 1st
scan time at the rising edge of input signal (0000).
The DIFD instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operand for only the 1st
scan time at the falling edge of input signal (0000).

Note 1: Any DIFU/DIFD operand relay No. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 2: When an expanded ladder is used, the DIFU instruction in example a)
operates without any problems. However, with the DIFD instruction in example b),
output relay 0500 does not turn ON because 1000 turns ON at the next scan after
the falling edge of input relay 0000 though input relay 0000 is already OFF. In this
case, change the ladder diagram as in example c).
a) 0500 turns ON for one scan at the rising edge
of input relay 0000.
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

b) 0500 does not turn ON for one scan at

the falling edge of input relay 0000.

0500

1000
DIFD

0000

1000

0500

c) 0500 turns ON for one scan at the

falling edge of input relay 0000.
0000

1000
DIFD

1000

0500

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915

1000 to 1915

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or I/O
terminal module ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
FUN

3-78

SET RES ENT Operand

Chapter 2 Instructions

R-SRCH

(Relay No.)

ENT FUN RES

0
R-SRCH

OR

ENT

Operand ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

(Relay No.)

DIFU / DIFD
2.4 Instruction Details

Application of DIFU, DIFD instructions

One-shot circuit using the differentiate instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 0500 and 0501 turns ON oneshot (1 second).
Coding
1000
DIFU

0000

1001
DIFD
1000

0500

T001

#00010
T001

0500
1001

0501

T002

#00010
T002

0501

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
LD
DIFU
DIFD
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR

Operand
0000
1000
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
1001
0501
T002
0501
002 #00010

Timing diagram
0000
1000
1001

ON
OFF

12

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON

0500

1s
ON

0501

1s

Alternating circuit
Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF alternately.
Coding
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

0500

1000

0500

0500

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
ANB
LDB
AND
ORL
OUT

Operand
0000
1000
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-79

KEEP

2.4 Instruction Details

KEEP: Keep

ORL OR

FUN 3

Turns ON specified relay when SET input

relay turns ON and enables this relay to
remain ON. And, turns OFF specified relay
when RESET input relay turns ON.

KEEP
SET
nnnn
RES

Example
KEEP

0001

SET input

SET
0500
0002
RES

RESET input

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002

Instruction
LD
DIFU
DIFD

Operand
0000
1000
1001

Description

When SET input relay No. 0001 is ON and RESET input relay No. 0002 is OFF,
0500 turns ON.
When RES input (0002) is ON, output relay 0500 turns OFF.
When both 0001 and 0002 are OFF, the previous status is retained.

Note 1: When 0500 used for KEEP instruction in the above example is changed to
0500
OUT instruction (
), it forms a double coil. In such a case, priority is given to the
instruction that is entered last "Double coil" (p. 3-65)
Note 2: When both 0001 and 0002 are ON, RESET (0002) has priority over SET
(0001), causing 0500 to turn OFF.

Tips
Internal utility relay latching function
The ON/OFF status of an internal utility relay immediately before power-off can be
stored by setting the memory switch (MEMSW).

"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)

If this stored utility relay is used for a latching instruction (SET or KEEP), the relay
settings can be stored while the power is off.
Stores the status of
internal utility relays
1000 through 1915.

MEMSW

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

$0004
KEEP

0001

SET
1000
0002
RES
0500

1000

Instruction
MEMSW
LD
LD
KEEP
LD
OUT

Operand
$0004
0001
0002
1000
1000
0500

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915

0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915

Key operation
FUN

3-80

ANL

Chapter 2 Instructions

ANL

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(Relay No.)

R-SRCH

KEEP

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of KEEP instruction

Detection of chewing gum packs
Detects chewing gum packs over the carton using the proximity switch ES series
(0001 to 0003). If the switch detects that one or more packs of chewing gum are
missing, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.
The timing clock is generated from the visible beam photoelectric switch PZ2 (0000).

Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 are ON.
Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs at DOWN edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.
Reflector R-2

ES

ON

OFF

ON

ES
Gum
Gum
Gum Gum Gum
Gum Gum Gum

0000 0001 0002 0003

PZ2-61

KEEP
SET
1000

1001

12

Executes SET when all input relays

0000 to 0003 are ON.

RES
0000

1001
DIFD

1001 1000 T001

0500
#00010
T001

0500

Detects presence/absence of chewing

gum packs all Down edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot plus from output
relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
AND
AND
AND
LD
KEEP
LD

Operand
0000
0001
0002
0003
1001
1000
0000

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
DIFD
LD
ANB
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR

Operand
1001
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010

Timing diagram
ON

0000

OFF
ON

0001

OFF
ON

0002

OFF
ON

0003

OFF
ON

0500

OFF

ON

ON

1s

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-81

SFT
2.4 Instruction Details

SFT: Shift

ORL O R

FUN 3

SFT

D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm

Sets a shift register.

Example
Relay shift
operation

Data input

SFT

0001
D

1000

0002

First relay No.

CLK

Clock

1002

0003

Last relay No.

RES

RESET input

0500

1002

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
LD
LD
SFT
LD
OUT

Operand
0001
0002
0003
1000 1002
1002
0500

Timing diagram
RESET input
0003

ON

Data input
0001

ON

Clock
0002

ON

1000
1001
1002
0500

0
1

Lost

1001
0

1000
1

0001
1

A)

Lost

1002
0

1001
1

1000
1

0001
1

B)

Lost

1002
1

1001
1

1000
1

0001
1

C)

Lost

1002
1

1001
1

1000
1

0001
1

D)

ON

Lost

1002
1

1001
1

1000
0

0001
0

E)

ON

Lost

1002
1

1001
0

1000
0

0001
1

F)

Lost

1002
0

1001
0

1000
1

0001
1

G)

OFF

OFF
A

OFF
ON

ON

ON

ON
ON
ON

OFF
ON

1002
0

ON

Description

First relay No. 1000 turns ON (OFF) when the data input relay is ON (OFF) at the
rising edge of the clock pulse.
Clock pulse A) shifts the ON status of input relay 0001 to relay 1000, and shifts
the status of other relays in sequence as shown in A) on the right.
When the data input is OFF as for clock pulse E), OFF status is shifted to relay
1000.
When the RESET input relay turns ON, all the relays (from the first one to the last
one) turn OFF.
Several SFT instructions can be used in a program.

Note: No SFT operand relay No. can be duplicated in a program.

3-82

Chapter 2 Instructions

SFT

2.4 Instruction Details

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915

1000 to 1915

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
FUN

ORL

OR

ENT

Operand

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(Relay No.)

(Relay No.)

R-SRCH

Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit
Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns alternately ON and OFF.
Coding

SFT

1000
D

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

1000

0000
CLK

1000

2003
RES

0500

1000

Instruction
LDB
LD
LD
SFT
LD
OUT

Operand
1000
0000
2003
1000 1000
1000
0500

Timing diagram
0000

ON
OFF

0500

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Reference: Alternating circuit can be configured without SFT instruction.

The following circuit does the same operation as the circuit above.
"DIFU instruction" (p. 3-78)

Coding
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

0500

1000

0500

0500

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
ANB
LDB
AND
ORL
OUT

Operand
0000
1000
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-83

12

SFT
2.4 Instruction Details
Resetting internal utility relays
When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No. 1000 through 1915
turn OFF.
SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This application can be used
to reset many relays at one time.
(All relays 3000 through 9915 can also be turned OFF at one time.)
Coding
SFT

2003
D

1000

2003
CLK

1915

0000

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003

Instruction
LD
LD
LD
SFT

Operand
2003
2003
0000
1000 1915

RES

Repeat shift circuit

Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets 1000 to 2008 (ON for 1st
scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 0500 to 0504 every second at T001.
When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same sequence as above repeats.
Coding

1000
SET

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2008

#00010
T001

0001

SET

1000

2008
T001

SFT

2003
D

1000

T001
CLK

1005

2003
RES
1000
1001

0501

1002

0502

1003

0503

1004

0504

1005

3-84

0500

Chapter 2 Instructions

1000
SET

Operand

0002

LDB

T001

0003

T001

#00010

0004

LD

2003

0005

LD

T001

0006

LD

2003

0007

SFT

1000 1005

0008

LD

1000

0009

OUT

0500

0010

LD

1001

0011

OUT

0501

0012

LD

1002

0013

OUT

0502

0014

LD

1003

0015

OUT

0503

0016

LD

1004

0017

OUT

0503

0018

LD

1005

0019

SET

1000

SFT

2.4 Instruction Details

Asynchronous shift register
Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1000 to 1010) when the data
input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock input to 0001.
0000

1100
DIFU

1100

1000
SET
SFT

2003
D

1000

0001
CLK

1010

0002

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
SET
LD
LD
LD
SFT

Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
2003
0001
0002
1000 1010

RES

Timing diagram
Scan
0001

ON
OFF

0000

ON
OFF

1000

ON
OFF

1001

ON
OFF

1002

ON
OFF

12

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-85

HSP
2.4 Instruction Details

HSP: High Speed

SET AND

FUN 1

Shortens time constant of specified input

relay to 10 s to increase input response.

HSP
nnnn

Example
Enable input

0000

HSP
0001

0001

0500
SET

0002

0501
SET

0003

0500
RES
0501
RES

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

HSP

0001

0002

LD

0001

0003

SET

0500

0004

LD

0002

0005

SET

0501

0006

LD

0003

0007

RES

0500

0008

RES

0501

Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002

ON
OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

5 ms

0501

ON

5 ms

15 ms
ON

0003
0500

ON

ON

ON
ON
ON

Description

When enable input 0000 turns ON, the time constant of input 0001 (specified by
HSP) changes from 10 ms to 10 s.
When enable input relay 0000 is ON and the scan time is 1 ms, and when the
ON time ( ) of input relays 0001 and 0002 is 5 ms, output relay 0500 turns ON
but 0502 does not.

"1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode" (p. 3-25)

Note 1: The time constant is switched by special utility relays 2609 through 2612
with the expansion units, or by the provided switches with I/O distribution module.
Note 2: The HSP instruction is used for the input to basic units only.

3-86

Chapter 2 Instructions

HSP

2.4 Instruction Details

Note 3: The HSP instruction must be specified when the INT instruction or highspeed counter is used.
Note 4: When special utility relay 2813 and HSP instruction turn ON at the same
time, priority is given to the HSP instruction and the time constant is changed to 10
s.
Note 5: Connect a non-contact input for the HSP instruction to prevent a contact
bounce from being entered.

Details of HSP Instruction

This section describes the operation of the HSP instruction.
Input signal width
ON

Scan time

Inputdevice

Program
execution

Output device

Inputdevice

Program
execution

3)
Output device

2)

Inputdevice

1)
Output device

OFF

Scan time

Program
execution

Scan time

Even if the input signal width is shorter than the scan time, the signal can be fetched
when it turns ON during input process as in 1). However, it cannot be fetched when
it turns ON any other time than the input process as in 2).
For reliable signal reception, the input signal width must be longer than the scan
time as in 3).
Scan time < Input signal width < Normal time constant (10 ms 20%)
Switching the input time constant of expansion units
Expansion input unit
Expansion I/O unit
KV-E4X
KV-E4XT(P)
KV-E8X
KV-E4XR
KV-E16X
The input time constant of an expansion unit is initially set to 10 ms.
It can be changed to 10 s by creating a ladder program or by using the Access
Window, the LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software, or with the
KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Change the values of special utility relays 2609 to 2612.
Special utility relay
2609
2610
2611
2612

Description
Input time constant of 1st unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 2nd unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 3rd unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 4th unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s

Operands
KV-300

KV-10

KV-16

KV-24

KV-40/80

0000 to 0009

0000 to 0005

0000 to 0009

0000 to 0015

0000 to 0107

Key operation
FUN

SET

AND

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand
(Relay No.)

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-87

12

HSP

2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of HSP Instruction

High-speed fetching of input data
When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and 2-ms scan time and
input relay 0001 is ON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high speed and outputs
1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500.
Coding
HSP
0000

0001
1-s timer

#00010
T000

0000
0500

0500

T000

Turns ON
timer for 1s
when 0500
is ON.

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
HSP
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT

Operand
0001
0000
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500

Timing diagram
Scan

0000

ON
OFF

0001

ON
OFF

0500

ON

1s

To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan time, use the interrupt instruction.

Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" (p. 3-191).

When using the interrupt instruction

Turn ON for 1st
scan only at startup.
2008
EI
2813
SET
0500
T000

#00010
T000
0500
RES

Interrupt enabled
Input time constant 10 s

Initial settings

Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

Resets 0500 when T000 turns ON.

END

2002

INT
0000

Sets interrupt input at 0000.

0500
SET

Sets 0500 when 0000 turns ON.

RETI
ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

3-88

Chapter 2 Instructions

Instruction
LD
EI
SET
LD
T000
LD
RES

Operand
2008
2813
0500
#00010
T000
0500

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
END
INT
LD
SET
RET1
ENDH

Operand
0000
2002
0500

MC / MCR

2.4 Instruction Details

MC: Master Control

MCR: Master Control
Reset

ANL LDB

MC

ANL ANB

MCR

FUN 2
FUN 2

4
5

Selects ON/OFF status of relay coils, timers,

or counters set before MCR instruction.
Used in pairs with MC instruction to end the
execution of MC instruction.

Example
0000

MC

0001

0500
0501
MCR

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
MC
LD
OUT
OUB
MCR

Operand
0000
0001
0500
0501

12

Description

When 0000 is OFF, both 0500 and 0501 do not turn ON, even if 0001 is turned
ON.
When 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON and 0501 turns OFF as soon as 0001 is turned
ON.
Regard the function of MC-MCR instructions as "power switch" or "main switch".
When the input relay for MC is OFF, the instructions entered between MC and
MCR instructions function as follows:
Instructions

Function

OUT and OUB

Corresponding relay is OFF

TMR, TMH, and TMS

Timer is reset

C, SFT, KEEP, SET, RES, and CTH

Previous status is retained

Other instructions such as TMIN

Instruction is not executed.

Note: MC-MCR instructions cannot be used in the following configuration.

1. Nesting

2. Improper combination with STP-STE

instructions
MC

STP
xxxx

MC

MC

MCR

STE

MCR

MCR

"STP, STE instructions" (p. 3-114)

Operands

Key operation
FUN

ANL

LDB ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

FUN

ANL

ANB ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-89

MC / MCR
2.4 Instruction Details

Details of MC-MCR Instructions

Position of MC-MCR instructions
MC-MCR instructions can be used in the following positions.
1. MC-MCR instructions can
be placed before or after
STP-STE instructions.

2. MC-MCR instructions can

be placed between STP
and STE instructions.

3. STP-STE instructions can

be placed between MC
and MCR instructions.

STP
xxxx

STP
xxxx

MC

STE

MC

STP
xxxx

MC

MCR

STE

MCR

STE

MCR

Making an input condition

The input condition for an MC instruction can be made as shown below:
0000

0001

0003

0002

MC
0500
MCR

Note: The scan time is not shortened even if the input relay of the MC instruction is
OFF.
Output relays 0500 within and outside of the MC-MCR instructions form a double
coil as shown below. "Double coil" (p. 3-65)

In this case, priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.

0003

0500

0001

MC

0002

0500
MCR

3-90

Chapter 2 Instructions

This relay is ignored.

The last relay has priority.

MC / MCR

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of MC-MCR Instruction

Emergency stop circuit
When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then 0501 turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.
Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON when 0001 is ON, 0501 turns ON
when 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is ON.
Timing diagram
Scan
0000
0001
0002

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0003
0500
0501
0502

ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON

Coding

ON
ON

ON

0000

1000

1001

1101
RES

1102
RES

0001
0000
0002

1002
DIFU

1100
RES

1002

MC

1000
0003
1100
STG

1200

#00010
T000

T000

0004

1101
JMP

1201

#00020
T001

T001

0005

1101
STG

1102
JMP

1202

#00030
T002

T002

0006

1102
STG

1100
JMP
MCR

0007
1001

MC

0001

1203

0002

1204

0003

1205

0008
0009
0010
0011
MCR
0012
1200

0500

0013
1203
0014
1201

0501

0015
1204
0016
1202

0502

0017
1205
0018
END
0019
ENDH
0020

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056

Instruction
LD
OUT
CON
OUB
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
MC
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
MCR
LD
MC
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
MCR
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
END
ENDH

Operand
0000
1000
1001
0000
1002
1002
1100
1101
1102
1000
1100
1200
000 #00010
T000
1101
1101
1201
001 #00020
T001
1102
1102
1202
002 #00030

Chapter 2 Instructions

T002
1100
1001
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
1200
1203
0500
1201
1204
0501
1202
1204
0502

3-91

12

MEMSW

2.4 Instruction Details

MEMSW:
Memory Switch

FUN

ANL ORB

MEMSW
$nnnn

Sets memory switches.

Key operation
FUN

ANL

ORB

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Operands
$0000 to $FFFF

Example
MEMSW
$3800

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

MEMSW

$3800

Specify 3 of SW3 and 0 and 1 of SW4 to reset the values of DM1900 to DM1999, counter,
up-down counter, CTH, and CTC when the operation is started.

Description
Switch Nos. and functions are as follows. The switch consists of 16 bits. The function of the switch is specified by turning a certain bit ON or OFF.

2
SW4

SW3

SW2

SW1

MEMSW
$3800

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1

1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

Switch
Function of switch
No.
0
Cancels error when power is ON.
1

1
2

Action when "Memory error" occurs at

startup (due to data memory, counter
value, or retained content being erased).
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
1000 through 1915.
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
3000 through 3915.
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
4000 through 4915.
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
5000 through 5915.
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
6000 through 6915.
Not used.
Not used.
Clears DM0000 to DM0999 at power-on.
Clears DM1000 to DM1899 at power-on.
Switches between 24- and 16-bit comparators for CTH0.
Switches between 24- and 16-bit comparators for CTH1.
Clears values of counter, CTH, and CTC.
Write-protects program in KV PLC.

Read-protects program in KV PLC.

2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0

3-92

Chapter 2 Instructions

ON
Retains error.

OFF
Cancels error and
starts operation.

Loads memory Does not load

from EEPROM memory from
EEPROM
Uses latch
Doesn't use
function.
latch function.
Doesn't use
Uses latch
latch function.
function.
Uses latch
Doesn't use
function.
latch function.
Uses latch
function.
Uses latch
function.

Doesn't use
latch function.
Doesn't use
latch function.

Clears DM.
Clears DM.
24-bit

Retains DM.
Retains DM.

24-bit

16-bit

Clears values.
Write-protects
program.
Read-protects
program.

Retains values.
Doesn't writeprotect program.
Doesn't readprotect program.

16-bit

MEMSW
2.4 Instruction Details
Note 1: When a read-protected program is transferred into the KV PLC it cannot
be read or modified from this PLC. Before read-protecting a program, be sure to
create a backup copy of the program.
Note 2: When a 24-bit high-speed counter comparator is used, the ladder program
which specifies the numerical values of a 24-bit CTC is required before starting the
high-speed counter.
Note 3: The value of MEMSW can be changed even during operation. However,
the new operation is not actually performed. The change is effective only after the
KV is turned off or stopped once and then restarted.

Details of MEMSW
Setting memory switches
Specify a hexadecimal number for each switch No.
SW4

SW3

SW2

SW1

(Switch No.)

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
(8)

(4)

(2)

(Example)
(1)

23

22

21

20

Hexadecimal number

0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1

MEMSW
$0269

Hexadecimal
number

Clears DM0000 to DM0999

when power is ON.

12

Retains Internal utility relay

5000 through 5999 and 6000
through 6999.
Retains all errors when power is ON.
Retains utility relays 3000 through 3999.

Tips

Description

The data entered for the memory switch is set into the KV PLC when the program is transferred to the KV PLC.
When MEMSW instruction is not entered into the program, "$0000" is set.
If you try transfer a program into the KV PLC which is write-disabled, warning
message "WRITE PROTECTED REPLACE OK?" is displayed. When executing
the transfer regardless of the message, press ENT
.
R-SRCH
To use internal utility
relays 1000 through
1915 as latch relays.

MEMSW
$0004

To clear a DM when
operation is started.

MEMSW
$0E00

To read-protect a
program.

MEMSW
$8000

To clear a counter when

operation is started.

MEMSW
$2000

To use a 24-bit highspeed counter CTH0.

MEMSW
$0800

To use a 24-bit highspeed counter CTH1.

MEMSW
$1000

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-93

END / ENDH
NOP
2.4 Instruction Details

NOP: No Operation

ORL RES

FUN 3

Performs no operation.

When ALL CLEAR [FNC60] or HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR)

[FNC61] is executed to delete the program, NOP appears on all lines of the deleted
program.
NOP is not written by the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software.

END: End

END
DM

ENDH: End Hi

ENDH
TM

END

Indicates end of each routine of program.

ENDH

Indicates end of entire program.

Description

END and ENDH instructions must be used at the end of a program.

A subroutine or interrupt program can be written between END and ENDH.
When not using either subroutine or interrupt programs, write ENDH immediately
after END.

2
Normal program
END

Normal program
END

Subroutine program
Interrupt program

ENDH
ENDH

Note: When a program does not have END or ENDH, "ENTER END", "ENTER
ENDH" or "LOGIC ERROR" occurs when the program is converted or transferred.

Operands

Key operation
END
DM

3-94

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

ENDH
TM

ENT
R-SRCH

2.4 Instruction Details

2.4.2 Application Instructions

Application instructions are used for batch processing of input signals. Data is
transmitted to specified memory locations or changed into different formats. Moreover, parts of a program can be repeated or skipped with the instruction.

Instruction

Mnemonic

Reference page

W-ON: Wait ON

W-ON

3-96

W-OFF: Wait OFF

W-OFF

3-96

W-UE: Wait Up Edge

W-UE

3-98

W-DE: Wait Down Edge

W-DE

3-98

CON (FUN06)

3-102

CON: Connect
MPS: Push

MPS

3-103

MRD: Read

MRD

3-103

MPP: Pop

MPP

3-103

STG: Stage

STG (FUN44)

3-106

JMP: Jump

JMP (FUN21)

3-106

ENDS: End Stage

END (FUN14)

3-106

STP: Step

STP (FUN45)

3-114

STE: Step End

STE (FUN43)

3-114

ITVL: Interval Timer

ITVL

3-117

16-bit high-speed counter

CTH

3-204

16-bit high-speed counter comparator

CTC

3-204

16-bit high-speed counter

CTH

3-204

16-bit high-speed counter comparator

CTC

3-204

CALL: Subroutine Call

CALL (FUN03)

3-122

SBN: Subroutine Entry

SBN (FUN38)

3-122

RET: Subroutine Return

RET (FUN33)

3-122

FOR: Repeat Start

FOR (FUN16)

3-125

NEXT: Repeat End

NEXT (FUN29)

3-125

HKEY: 16 Key input

HKEY (FUN17)

3-131

Chapter 2 Instructions

12

3-95

W-ON / W-OFF

2.4 Instruction Details

W-ON: Wait ON
W-OFF: Wait OFF

W-ON

nnnn
ON
mmmm

W-OFF
Li

nnnn
OFF
mmmm

Turn ON second operand relay when first

operand relay contact turns ON.
Turns ON second operand relay when first
operand relay contact turns OFF.

Example
0001
ON
1000
0500

0000
1000

0003
OFF
1001
0501

0002
1001

W-ON

W-OFF

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

W-ON

0001 1000

0002

LD

1000

0003

OUT

0500

0004

LD

0002

0005

W-OFF

0003 1001

0006

LD

1001

0007

OUT

0501

Timing chart
W-ON
ON

0000

OFF
ON

0001

OFF

ON

1000
0500

ON

When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON as soon as input operand
0001 turns ON. 0500 remains ON until 0000 turns OFF.

W-OFF
ON

0002
0003

OFF
ON
OFF

1001
0501

ON

ON

When input relay 0002 is ON, output relay 0501 turns ON as soon as input operand
0003 turns OFF. 0501 remains ON until 0002 turns OFF.

3-96

Chapter 2 Instructions

W-ON / W-OFF

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
W-ON
Input operand
0000

Same
operation

0001
ON
1000

0001

0000

1000

1000

Output operand

When input relay 0000 is ON, output operand 1000 turns ON as soon as the
contact of input operand 0001 turns ON.

W-OFF
Input operand
0002

Same
operation

0003
OFF
1001

0003

0002

1001

1001

Output operand

When input relay 0002 is ON, output operand 1001 turns ON as soon as the
contact of input operand 0003 turns OFF.

Note: Output operand relay Nos. for W-ON/W-OFF instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

nnnn:
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915

nnnn:
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915

nnnn:
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915

nnnn:
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or
remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
W-ON

W-OFF
Li

First operand

Second operand

ENT

(nnnn)

(mmmm)

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-97

12

W-UE / W-DE

2.4 Instruction Details

W-UE: Wait Up Edge

W-DE: Wait Down Edge

W-UE

W-DE
Lo

Turns ON second operand relay at rising

edge of first operand relay contact.
Turns ON second operand relay at falling
edge of first operand relay contact.

nnnn
mmmm
nnnn
mmmm

Example
0000

0001

1000

1000
0500

0002

0003

1001

1001
0501

W-UE

W-DE

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

W-UE

0001 1000

0002

LD

1000

0003

OUT

0500

0004

LD

0002

0005

W-DE

0003 1001

0006

LD

1001

0007

OUT

0501

Timing chart
W-UE

0000
0001

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON

1000
0500

When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON at rising edge of first
operand relay 0001.
As soon as input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 turns OFF.

W-DE
ON

0002
0003

OFF
ON
OFF

1001
0501

3-98

ON

When input relay 0002 is ON, output relay 0501 turns ON at falling edge of first
operand relay 0003.
As soon as input relay 0002 turns OFF, output relay 0501 turns OFF.

Chapter 2 Instructions

W-UE / W-DE

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
W-UE

0000

Input operand
Same
operation
0001
1000

1002
DIFU

0001
1002

0000

1000

1000

Output operand

When input relay 0000 is ON, the output operand turns ON at the rising edge of
the input operand.

W-DE

0002

Input operand
Same
operation
0003
1001

1003
DIFD

0003
1003

0002

1001

1001

Output operand

When input relay 0002 is ON, the output operand turns ON at the falling edge of
the input operand.

Note 1: If the input operand is already ON before input relay 0000 turns ON, the
output operand does not turn ON.
Note 2: The W-UE/W-DE instruction must be used in subroutine programs that are
executed every scan time (because rising and falling edges cannot be recognized).
Note 3: Output operand relay Nos. for W-UE/W-DE instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

nnnn:
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915

nnnn:
0000 to 0009
00500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915

nnnn:
0000 to 6915
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915

nnnn:
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915

Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or
remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
W-UE

W-DE
Lo

First operand
(nnnn)

Second operand

ENT

(mmmm)

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-99

12

W-UE / W-DE
2.4 Instruction Details

Details of W-ON and W-UE Instructions

A combination of W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, and W-DE instructions is much more
effective when used in programs controlling sequential operation where the completion of one operational step starts the next step.
This section describes minute differences in the operation of these instructions.
Difference between W-ON and W-UE
0001
ON
1000
0001

0000

0100

1001
0500

1001

0501

Output relay 0100 turns ON when both input relays

0000 and 0001 turn ON in any order.
Output relay 1001 turns ON only when input relay
0000 turns ON before input relay 0001.

ON

0000

OFF
ON

0001
1000
0500

OFF

ON

1001
0501

ON

ON

(W-ON)
(W-UE)

2
W-ON:

Output relay 0500 turns ON when both input relays 0000 and 0001 turn
ON in any order.

W-UE:

Output relay 0501 turns ON only when input relay 0000 turns ON before
input relay 0001.

Note: An input operand relay No. for these instructions can be duplicated in a
program, but output operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated.
As shown above, W-UE requires a certain order for turning ON relays 0000 and
0001, but W-ON does not. Therefore, W-UE is suitable for circuits to be executed at
every input; W-ON is suitable for circuits that go on to the next operation when a
certain condition is satisfied.
The operation of W-OFF and W-DE instructions are same as above by the operation
which turns relays OFF.

3-100

Chapter 2 Instructions

W-UE
2.4 Instruction Details

Application of W-UE Instruction

Input sequence check
Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is ON and input 0001, 0002, and
0003 turn ON in this sequence.
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is OFF.
Coding
0000

0001

1000

1000
0002

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

W-UE

0001 1000

1001

1001
0003

0001
0002

LD

1000

1002
0500

0003

W-UE

0002 1001

1002

0004

LD

1001

0005

W-UE

0003 1002

0006

LD

1002

0007

OUT

0500

Timing diagram
Scan
0000

ON
OFF

0001

ON
OFF

0002

ON
OFF

0003

ON
OFF

12

0500

ON

Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

Checks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 turns
ON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns ON when input relay 0001
turns ON and then 0000 turns ON.
0000

1001

1000

0500

0001

1000
0000

1001

0501

Leave warehouse
Enter warehouse

1001

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0005

LD

0001

0001

W-UE

0001 1000

0006

W-UE

0000 1001

0002

CON

0007

CON

0003

AND

1000

0008

AND

1001

0004

OUT

0500

0009

OUT

0501

Timing diagram
Scan

0000

ON
OFF

0001

ON
OFF

0500
0501

ON
ON

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-101

CON

2.4 Instruction Details

CON: Connect

RES ORB

FUN 0

Represents series connection of output

instruction with another instruction.

Example
0500

0000

0501

CON

CON

0502

0503

CON

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OUT

0500

0002

CON

0003

OUT

0004

CON

0005

OUT

0006

CON

0007

OUT

0501
0502
0503

Description

When input relay 0000 turns ON, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503 turn ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503 turn OFF.
The CON instruction is used to connect instructions after output instructions
when the extended ladder is used.
When the LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software is used, the
CON instruction is automatically converted into a mnemonic and entered in the
ladder diagram by just writing a connection line.
The CON instruction does not affect the scan time.

Refer to "1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams" (p. 3-29) for details of eetecded ladders.

Operands

Key operation
FUN

3-102

RES

Chapter 2 Instructions

ORB

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

MPS / MRD / MPP

2.4 Instruction Details

MPS: Push

MPS

MRD: Read

MRD

MPP: Pop

MPP
ch

Stores current input and arithmetic flag

status.
Reads input and arithmetic flag status
stored with PUSH.
Reads and clears input and arithmetic flag
status stored with PUSH.

Example
0000

MPS

0001

0500

0002

0501

0003

0502

MRD
MPP

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

MPS

0002

AND

0001

0003

OUT

0500

0004

MRD

0005

AND

0002

0006

OUT

0501

0007

MPP

0008

AND

0003

0009

OUT

0502

12

Description

When input relay 0000 is ON:

0500 turns ON as soon as 0001 turns ON.
0501 turns ON as soon as 0002 turns ON.
0502 turns ON as soon as 0003 turns ON.
The MPS instruction is used at the start of an output branch.
The MRD instruction is used to connect an output branch.
The MPP instruction is used at the end of an output branch.
When the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV programming
support software is used, the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions are automatically
converted into mnemonics and entered in the ladder diagram.

Note 1: Limit the number of MPS instructions to 8 or less in a circuit.

Note 2: An MPS instruction must have a corresponding MPP instruction. This
means that the same number of MPS and MPP instructions must be used in a
program. An MPS or MPP instruction without a corresponding MPP or MPS instruction results in a logic error.

Operands

Key operation

MPS

MRD

ENT
R-SRCH

MPP
ch

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-103

MPS / MRD / MPP

2.4 Instruction Details

MPS/MRD/MPP applications
MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions are used as follows:
0002

0003

0004

0500
Start of branch

0006

MPS

0501
Connection of branch

0007

MRD

0502
Connection of branch

0008

MRD

0503
End of branch

MPP

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

0000

LD

0002

0001

AND

0003

0002

MPS

0003

AND

0004

0004

OUT

0500

0005

MRD

0012

AND

0008

0006

AND

0013

OUT

0503

Operand

0000

0002

0500

MPS

0003

0501

MPP

0005

0502

MPS

0006

0503

0001

MPS

0004

0006

MPP

Instruction

Operand

0007

OUT

0501

0008

MRD

0009

AND

0007

0010

OUT

0502

0011

MPP

MPP

Coding

3-104

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

0000

0009

MPP

0001

MPS

0010

AND

0002

AND

0001

0011

MPS

0003

MPS

0012

AND

0005

0004

AND

0002

0013

OUT

0502

0005

OUT

0500

0014

MPP

0006

MPP

0015

AND

0006

0007

AND

0003

0016

OUT

0503

0008

OUT

0501

Chapter 2 Instructions

0004

MPS / MRD / MPP

2.4 Instruction Details

0000
MPS

0001
MPS

0002
MPS

0003

0004

0500

MPS

0501

MPP

0502
0503

MPP

0504

MPP

MPP

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

MPS

0002

AND

0003

MPS

0004

AND

0005

MPS

0001
0002

0006

AND

0007

MPS

0008

AND

0004

0009

OUT

0500

0010

MPP

0011

OUT

0012

MPP

0013

OUT

0014

MPP

0015

OUT

0016

MPP

0017

OUT

0003

12

0501
0502
0503
0504

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-105

STG / JMP / ENDS

2.4 Instruction Details

STG: Stage
JMP: Jump

ANL SET

nnnn
JMP

SET LDB

ENDS

FUN 2

ENDS: End Stage

nnnn
STG

LDB LDB

FUN 4

FUN 1

Executes instructions in STG block when operand relay is ON.

When transition condition relay is ON, turns OFF relay of current
stage and transfers execution to stage specified by operand.
When transition condition relay is ON, turns OFF relay
of current stage.

Example
1000
SET

2008

1)

1000
STG

2)

1001
STG

3)

1002
STG

0000

1001
JMP

0500

0001

1002
JMP

0501

0002

1001
JMP

0003

1000
JMP

Initial setting

1003
JMP
1003
STG

4)

0502

0004
ENDS

2
1) When transition condition relay 0000 is ON, transfers execution to STG1001.
2) 0500 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0001 is ON, transfers execution
to STG1002.
3) 0501 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0002 is ON, transfers execution
to STG1001 and repeats the process above.
When transition condition relay 0003 turns ON, transfers execution to STG1000
and 1003.
4) 0502 turns ON. The process finishes when transition condition relay 0004 turns
ON.
Coding

3-106

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2008

0013

MPS

Operand

0001

SET

1000

0014

AND

0002
1001

0002

STG

1000

0015

JMP

0003

AND

0000

0016

MPP

0004

JMP

1001

0017

AND

0003

0005

STG

1001

0018

JMP

1000

0006

OUT

0500

0007

CON

0008

AND

0009
0010
0011

OUT

0012

CON

Chapter 2 Instructions

0019

JMP

1003

0020

STG

1003

0001

0021

OUT

0502

JMP

1002

0022

CON

STG

1002

0023

AND

0501

0024

ENDS

0004

STG / JMP / ENDS

2.4 Instruction Details

Note 1: The following table shows the status of each instruction between STG and
JMP/ENDS when STG operand relay turns OFF.
Instruction

Function

Relay for OUT instruction

Turned OFF.

Relay for OUB instruction

Turned ON.

TMR, TMH, TMS,

C (counter) instructions

Reset.

SET, RES instructions

Current status is retained.

Other instructions

Not executed.

Note 2: STG/JMP/ENDS operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 3: The STG instruction must be used in combination with the JMP or ENDS
instruction.
Note 4: The following instructions are not properly executed between STG and JMP/
ENDS instructions:
DIFU, DIFD, KEEP, UDC, SFT, FOR, NEXT, and
Differentiation type instruction (@xxx)

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915

1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915

1000 to 1915

1000 to 1915

12

Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or
remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
FUN

LDB

FUN

ANL

FUN

SET

4
2
1

LDB

SET

LDB

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(nnnn)

R-SRCH

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

(nnnn)

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-107

STG

2.4 Instruction Details

Details of STG instruction

STG instruction
The STG instruction is suitable for sequential step-by-step processing.
The whole process is divided into several operational steps, and one program is
assigned to each step.
The process to turn on several lamps sequentially can be divided into the following
five steps:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Wait until the start switch is turned ON.

Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.
Turn on lamp 2 for 3 second.
Turn on lamp 3 for 5 second.
Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously for 7 seconds.

These five steps are sequentially performed in order as shown in the flowchart
below.
If a ladder program is written for such sequential processing without any STG
instructions, the resulting program may be complicated and difficult to review by
others.
Sequential processing

Start
Start
SW ON?

NO

YES
Turn on lamp 1
for 1 second.
Turn on lamp 2
for 3 second.
Turn on lamp 3
for 5 second.
Turn on lamps 1, 2,
and 3 simultaneously
for 7 seconds.

I/O assignments
Assign the input and output of the Visual KV Series as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)

Start switch: Turned on when 0000 turns ON.

Lamp 1: Lights when 0500 turns ON.
Lamp 2: Lights when 0501 turns ON.
Lamp 3: Lights when 0502 turns ON.
I/O assignment
Lamp 1

KV
0000

0500

Start SW
Lamp 2
0501

Lamp 3
COM

3-108

Chapter 2 Instructions

0502
COM

STG

2.4 Instruction Details

Sequence program
Assign the relays to execute the five processes on the previous page as follows:
1
2
3
4
5

Wait until the start switch is turned ON.:

Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.:
Turn on lamp 2 for 3 second.:
Turn on lamp 3 for 5 second.:
Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously:
for 7 seconds.

Input relay 0000

Output relay 0500
Output relay 0501
Output relay 0502
Output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502

The following is the ladder diagram for the I/O assignments above, and is written
with and without STG instructions.

Without STG instruction

0000

1000

T000

1000 (0500) turns ON for 1 second

when input 0000 turns ON.

#00010
T000

1000
T000

1001

T001

1001 (0501) turns ON for 3 seconds

when T000 turns ON.

#00030
T001

1001
T001

1002

T002

1002 (0502) turns ON for 5 seconds

when T001 turns ON.

#00050
T002

1002
T002

1100

T003

1101

1100

1102

12

1100 (0500), 1101

(0501), and 1102 (0502)
turn ON for 7 seconds
when T002 turns ON.

#00070
T003
T003

1000
SET

1000

0500

The process is repeated from the

beginning when T003 turns ON.

1100
0501

1001

OR circuit is required because

double coil cannot be used.

1101
0502

1002
1102

With STG instruction

1001
SET

2008

1001
STG

0000

1002
STG

0500

#00010
T000

T000

1002
JMP

0501

#00030
T001

T001

1003
JMP

1003
STG

0502

#00050
T002

T002

1004
JMP

1004
STG

0500

0501

0502

1001 turns ON at the start of operation.

0500 turns ON for 1 second when input

0000 turns ON. Then, 1002 turns ON.
0501 turns ON for 3 seconds when
1002 turns ON. Then, 1003 turns ON.
0502 turns ON for 5 seconds when 1003
turns ON. Then, 1004 turns ON.
0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for 7
seconds when 1004 turns ON.

#00070
T003

T003

1001
JMP

The process is repeated from the

beginning when T003 turns ON.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-109

STG

2.4 Instruction Details

Process progression with Wait instruction
1000
SET

2008
0000

1100

1001
JMP

0500

1100
0000

1101

1002
JMP

0501

1101
0000

1102

1003
JMP

0502

1102
0000

1103

1004
JMP

0500

1103
0501

0502

0000

1104

1000
STG
1001
STG
1002
STG
1003
STG
1004
STG

1000
JMP

1104

Description
When using the W-UE instruction in a program with STG instructions on the previous page, you can create a program for an operation which moves to the next stage
every time when start switch 0000 turns ON (process progression).

"W-UE instruction" (p. 3-98)

Tips
Resetting STG instructions (in the above example)
Use the SFT instruction to turn OFF all STG instructions in an emergency.

SFT

2003
D
2003

1000

STG start relay

1004

STG end relay

CLK

Reset input
RES

Reset input

1000
SET

Initial setting

Enter the initial setting process depending on the program. The above example
cannot start the next operation without the initial setting.

"SFT instruction" (p. 3-82)

Note 1: The scan time is not affected by any instructions between STG and JMP/
ENDS instructions which are not executed.
Note 2: STG operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.
Note 3: The STG instruction must be connected to the bus.
Note 4: The STG, JMP, or ENDS instruction cannot be used in subroutines.

3-110

Chapter 2 Instructions

STG

2.4 Instruction Details

Cautions for using STG instruction

Interlock
When an STG instruction moves to another stage, the previous and next stages turn
ON simultaneously only for one scan. Provide an interlock circuit for the output
which may be dangerous when turned ON in such occasions (e.g., motor's normal/
reverse rotation).
1000
STG

0501

0500

0001

1001
JMP

1001
STG

0500

0501

0002

1002
JMP

Interlock

Double coil
A double coil can be used for an STG instruction.
1000
STG

0500

1001
STG

0501

1002
STG

0500

0001
ON
1100
0002
ON
1101
0003
ON
1102

1100

1001
JMP

1101

1002
JMP

1102

1003
JMP

Double coil

Note: When STG 1000 and 1002 turn ON simultaneously, priority is given to output
relay 0500 of STG 1002, which is entered last.
Retaining output
Use the SET instruction to retain output.
1000
STG

0500
SET

0000

1001
JMP

1001
STG

0501
SET

0001

1002
JMP

12

When no JMP is used

When no JMP instruction is used, the STG instruction does not turn OFF even if
0001 turns ON. Be sure to use JMP after STG.
1000
STG

0500

0001

0501

STG operand
When the STG operand relay remains ON, 0500 does not turn OFF even if 0001
turns ON.
0000
1000
STG

1000
SET
0500

0001

1001
JMP

Use a differentiation type instruction for the condition of the first STG instruction.
0000

1100
DIFU

1100

1000
SET

1000
STG

0500

0001

1001
JMP

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-111

STG / JMP

2.4 Instruction Details

JMP operand
Unlike the STG operand relay, the JMP operand relay No. can be duplicated in a
program.
1000
STG

0001

0500

1001
JMP
1002
JMP

1001
STG

0002

0501

1002
JMP

DIFU/DIFD instructions in an STG block

The operand relay for an STG instruction cannot be used as the input operand relay
for a DIFU or DIFD instruction.
1000
STG

3000
DIFU

0001

0500

3000

1001
JMP
0501

Application of STG and JMP instructions

Enabling a double coil
When start SW 0000 is pressed, the following output operation is repeated:
Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second.
Output relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 seconds.
Output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for 3 seconds.

0000

1100
DIFU

1000
STG

1100

1000
SET

1000 turns ON at the rising edge of input 0000.

0500

#00010
T000

T000

1001
JMP

Output 0500 turns ON for 1 second.

1002
JMP

Outputs 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 seconds.

1001
STG

0500

0501

#00020
T001

T001

1002
STG

0500

0501

0502

#00030
T002

T002

1000
JMP

Outputs 0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for

3 seconds.

Coding

3-112

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

0000

0016

CON

0001

DIFU

1100

0002

CON

0003

AND

1100

Operand

0017

TMR

0018

CON

001 #00020

0019

AND

T001

0004

SET

1000

0020

JMP

1002

0005

STG

1000

0021

STG

1002

0006

OUT

0500

0500

0007

CON

0008

TMR

0009

CON

0010

0022

OUT

0023

CON

000 #00010

0024

OUT

0025

CON

AND

T000

0026

OUT

0011

JMP

1001

0027

CON

0012

STG

1001

0028

TMR

0013

OUT

0500

0029

CON

0014

CON

0030

AND

T002

0015

OUT

0031

JMP

1000

Chapter 2 Instructions

0501

0501
0502
002 #00030

STG / JMP

2.4 Instruction Details

Note: The double coils in different STG instruction blocks operate properly. However, when several STG instructions turn ON simultaneously, priority is given to the
one programmed last.
Conditional branching
When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. Then, as
programmed for conditional branching, output relay 0501 turns on for 1 second
when 0001 turns ON, and 0502 turns ON for 2 seconds when 0002 turns ON. After
each operation is completed, the program returns to the conditional branch and
repeats the same steps.
0000

1100
DIFU

1100

1000
SET

1000
STG

0500

0001

1001
JMP

0002

1002
JMP

1001
STG

0501

#00010
T000

T000

1000
JMP

1002
STG

0502

#00020
T001

T001

1000
JMP

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

12

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

DIFU

1100

0002

CON

0003

AND

1100

0004

SET

1000

0005

STG

1000

0006

OUT

0500

0007

CON

0008

MPS

0009

AND

0001

0010

JMP

1001

0011

MPP

0012

AND

0002

0013

JMP

1002

0014

STG

1001

0015

OUT

0501

0016

CON

0017

TMR

0018

CON

000 #00010

0018

AND

T000

0020

JMP

1000

0021

STG

1002

0022

OUT

0502

0023

CON

0024

TMR

0025

CON

001 #00020

0026

AND

T001

0027

JMP

1000

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-113

STP / STE

2.4 Instruction Details

LDB ANB

LDB ORL

FUN 4

STP: Step
STE: Step End

FUN 4

5
3

Executes instructions between STP and

STE when operand relay is ON.

STP
nnnn
STE

Used with STP to make a program step.

Example
1000

0000

STP
1000
0500

0001

STE

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OUT

1000

0002

STP

1000

0003

LD

0001

0004

OUT

0500

0005

STE

Description

When 1000 is ON, 0500 turns ON/OFF as soon as 0001 turns ON/OFF.
When 1000 is OFF, 0500 remains OFF after 0001 turns ON. When 0001 and
0500 are ON, 0500 remains ON after 0001 turns OFF.

The program step specified with

STP-STE instructions are executed when the STP operand
relay is ON. When the operand
relay is OFF, the program
execution jumps to STE instruction. (Fig 1).

STP-STE instructions can be

nested up to 8 levels deep as
shown in Fig. 2. When 1000 is
OFF, steps 1) through 3) are not
executed. Control jumps to the
STE instruction just above step
4), then step 4) is executed.
When 1000 and 1001 are ON,
steps 1) through 3) are executed
in that order. When 1000 is ON
and 1001 is OFF, steps 1), 3),
and 4) are executed in that
order, while step 2) is left unexecuted.

STP

1000

When 1000 is OFF,

A is not executed.

STE
B

STP

Fig. 1

1000
1)

STP

1001
2)

STE

When 1000 is OFF,

steps 1) through 3) are
not executed.

3)
STE
4)

Fig. 2

Note 1: STP/STE operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 2: When an STP operand turns OFF during program execution between STP
and STE instructions, the state of the instructions between STP and STE are retained.
Note 3: The scan time is not affected by any instructions between STP and STE
which are not executed.

3-114

Chapter 2 Instructions

STP / STE

2.4 Instruction Details

Tips
Operation when STP turns OFF
Using a timer in an STP block
When a timer is used in a program defined with an STP instruction, the operation is
as follows:
a) 1000 is reset immediately when the
timer turns ON. The STE instruction is
started with the timer remaining ON.

a)
0000

Scan

1000
SET
STP
1000

T000

0500

1000

#00050
T000

T000

1000
RES

Timer
remains
ON.

Jump

STE

b)
0000

Scan

1000
SET
STP
1000

T000

1000
RES

T000

0500

1000

#00050
T000

Timer
remains
ON.

Timer is reset.

b) 1000 is not reset immediately when the

timer turns ON but is reset at the next
scan. The timer is reset before the STE
instruction is started.

Jump

STE

Usage of STG and STP instructions

STG instruction
Use the STG instruction for process progression with branches.
1000
SET

0000
1000
STG

0500

0001

1001
JMP

0002

1002
JMP

1001
STG

0501

0003

1002
STG

0502

0004

ENDS
ENDS

STP instruction
Use the STP instruction for process progression without branches.
1000
SET

0000

STP
1000
0002

1000
RES

1001
SET
0500

0001

STE
STP
1001
0003
0004

1001
RES

1002
SET
0501

STE

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-115

12

STP / STE

2.4 Instruction Details

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 0009
0500 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3

0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3

Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
FUN

LDB

FUN

LDB

4
4

ANB

ORL

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand
(nnnn)

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Application of STP and STE instructions

Process progression
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON for 2 seconds, then
output relay 0501 turns ON for 3 seconds automatically.
Coding

2
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

1001
SET
STP
1001

T000

1001
RES

T000

0500

1001

#00020
T000

T000

1002
SET
STE
STP
1002

T001

1002
RES

T001

0501

1002

#00030
T001
STE
END
ENDH

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024

The double coils in different STP blocks operate properly.

3-116

Chapter 2 Instructions

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
LD
SET
STE
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
STE
END
ENDH

Operand
0000
1000
1000
1001
1001
T000
1001
T000
0500
1001
000 #00020
T000
1002
1002
T001
1002
T001
0501
1002
001 #00030

ITVL

2.4 Instruction Details

ITVL
#TM

ITVL: Interval Timer

ITVL
PLS
DMnnnn
PAUSE
mmmm
RES

Example

Measures pulse-to-pulse interval or pulse

width in specified mode.

"Pulse" input
ITVL
PLS

0000

Beginning of workpiece data table

"Measurement Pause" input
First flag relay

DM0000

0001

PAUSE
1000

0002

RES

"Reset" input

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

LD

0001

0002

LD

0002

0003

ITVL

DM0000 1000

Operation in the above example

Measures pulse-to-pulse interval or pulse width for input relay 0000.
ITVL instruction has two functions:
Measures pulse-to-pulse interval (cycle) or pulse width. (Minimum unit: 10 ms)
Obtains the average of the contents of data memory.
Each input has the following functions:
PLS
Executes measurement. In data memory measurement, however, PLS input is
disabled in modes 0006 to 1999. Values are fetched only at the scan when PLS
input is ON in modes 10000 to 11999.
The measured value is written into the specified data memory (DM).
In the above example, the measured value of input relay 0000 is
written into DM0004 (DM0000 + 4 addresses).

PAUSE
Pauses the measurement when turned ON.

RES
Initializes the contents of data memory (DM) when turned ON.
In the above example, DM0004 to DM0015 are reset to "#00000".

DM0000 to DM0003 are designated as the area to write the initial setting.

Note: ITVL operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Operands

Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

Data table No.:

Data table No.:
DM0000 to DM0985 DM0000 to DM1985
DM0000 to DM1984 DM0000 to DM9985
1000 to 1912
1000 to 1912
1000 to 1912
Flag relay No.:
3000 to 6912
Flag relay No.:
1000 to 1912
3000 to 9912
3000 to 9912
*7000 to 9915
* Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation
ITVL
#TM

First operand

Second operand

ENT

(nnnn)

(mmmm)

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-117

12

ITVL

2.4 Instruction Details

Setting procedure
The ITVL instruction reserves 16 data memories: 1 specified data memory and 15
successive data memories. It also reserves 4 relays: 1 specified relay and 3 successive relays.
Note: Do not use the 16 data memories and 4 relays specified with the ITVL instruction for any other purpose.
Data memory (DM) assignment
Set the initial setting data to the first four data memories.
Data memory
DM XX + 00
01
02

Mode

Specifies measurement mode (0 to 5).

MAX value

Presets highest value in measurement

range.
Presets lowest value in measurement
range.
Specifies number of measurements for
mean calculation (1 to 65535).
Stores current measured value.

MIN value

04

Preset No.of
measurements
Measured value

05

MAX measured value

06

MIN measured value

07

Mean

08

No.of measurements
performed*

09

Higher digits*

10

Lower digits*

11 to 12

Work memory

03

Initial
setting
is to be
specified
by user.

Stores Max. measured value.

Stores Min. measured value.
Stores mean value.
Stores number of times measurements
actually performed.
Stores higher 16 bits of accumulating
total of measurements. (#00000 to
#65535) ($0000 to $FFFF)
Stores lower 16 bits of accumulating
total of measurements. (#00000 to
#65535)($0000 to $FFFF)
Used for computing measured values, Max.
measured values, Min. measured values, mean
values, and accumulating totals. (Cannot be used)

Relay assignment
Relay
MAX error

Turns ON and remains ON for one scan time when

measured value exceeds Max preset value.

MIN error

Turns ON and remains On for one scan time when

measured value goes below Min preset value.

+2

Every
measurements
completion

Turns ON at completion of every measurement and

remains ON for one scan time.

+3

Measurements
completion for
mean calculation

Relay +0
+1

Turns ON for one scan time at completion of the

specified No. of measurements for mean value
calculation, then remains ON for one scan time.

Note 1: When 0 (zero) is specified as the number of measurements, mean value

calculation will not be performed. In this case, the number of measurements will be
accumulated until RES input turns ON, which may cause overflow.
Note 2: Data in the No. of measurements, Higher digits, and Lower digits are reset
when the No. of measurements performed reaches the preset No. of measurements.
Note 3: Once ITVL instruction is defined in MC-MCR block, the measurement
process pauses when the block is not executed.
Note 4: For programs containing subroutines, interrupts, steps, or stages, ITVL
instructions must be defined so that they are executed unconditionally for every scan
time.

3-118

Chapter 2 Instructions

ITVL

2.4 Instruction Details

Mode setting
Write the desired mode No. into the first data memory.
Mode for pulse measurement
Pulse-to-pulse interval measurement
Pulse-to-pulse
Unit
Mode
interval

Pulse width measurement

Mode

Pulse width

Unit

10 m sec

10 m sec

100 m sec

100 m sec

1 sec

1 sec

Mode for DM measurement

Write the desired mode No. into the specified data memory.

Example
Write "#0006" to obtain the average of the contents of DM0006.
Mode No.

DM No.

Description

10000

DM0000

Measure the contents of DM0000 and obtain the

average.

10001

DM0001

Measure the contents of DM0001 and obtain the

average.

10005

DM0005

10006

DM0006

0007

10007

DM0007

1999

11999

DM1999

0006

2000 to 9999

Measure the contents of DM0005 and obtain the

average.
Measure the contents of DM0006 and obtain the
average.
Measure the contents of DM0007 and obtain the
average.

Measure the contents of DM1999 and obtain the

average.

12000 or more Not provided Cannot be used.

Note 1: When the mode No. is set to 10000 through 11999, values are fetched at
the scan only when the PLS input relay is ON.
Note 2: When the average of a data memory is calculated, values "32768" to
"65535" are converted into corresponding compliment numbers (-32767 to -1) .
Note 3: Some data memories after DM1000 are assigned to special functions. Be
careful when specifying data memory for the ITVL instruction.
Refer to "1.3.10 Data Memories" (p. 3-19) for data memory assignments.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-119

12

ITVL

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of ITVL instruction

This section describes examples of pulse interval measurement.
Pulse interval measurement
Turns ON output relay 0500 for 3 seconds when the pulse interval is not within the
range of 490 to 510 ms.
2008

#00000 DM0000
Sets mode 0 (Unit:10 ms).
LDA
STA

2008

#00051 DM0001
Sets max. setting value of measurement range to 510 ms.
LDA
STA

2008

#00049 DM0002
Sets min. setting value of measurement range to 490 ms.
LDA
STA

2008

#00010 DM0003
LDA
STA
Sets number of averaging measurements to 10.
ITVL

0000

PLS
0001

PAUSE
RES

Pauses measurement while input relay 0001 turns ON.

1000

0002
1000

Measures pulse interval when input relay 0000 turns ON.

DM0000

0500

T000

1001

#00030
T000

Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns ON.

1000 turns ON for one scan when measured
value exceeds max. setting value (510 ms).
1001 turns ON for one scan when measured value
is below min. setting value (490 ms).

0500

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD

Operand
2008
#00000

Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025

DM0000
2008
#00051
DM0001
2008
#00049
DM0002
2008

Instruction
Operand
LDA
#00010
CON
STA
DM0003
LD
0000
LD
0001
LD
0002
ITVL
DM0000 1000
LD
1000
OR
1001
OR
0500
ANB
T000
OUT
0500
TMR
000 #00030

Timing diagram
0000

ON
OFF

500ms

400ms

600ms

1000

ON

1 scan

1001

ON

1 scan

0500

ON

3 sec.

3-120

Chapter 2 Instructions

ON

3 sec.

ITVL

2.4 Instruction Details

A/D data measurement
Turns ON output relay 0500 when the analog input from the KL-4AD to DM1600
(range: 1 to 5 V) exceeds +3 V. Turns ON output relay 0501 when the input is below
+2 V. Writes the average into DM0100.
Refer to the "KL-4AD/KL-2AD Users Manual" for data memory settings for the KL4AD.
2008

#01600 DM0000
LDA
STA

Measures contents of DM1600.

2008

#02000 DM0001
Sets max. setting value to +3 V (2000).
LDA
STA

2008

#01000 DM0002
Sets min. setting value to +2 V (1000).
LDA
STA

2008

#00100 DM0003
Sets number of averaging measurements to 100.
LDA
STA

ITVL

2003

PLS
DM0000

0001

PAUSE

Pauses measurement when input relay 0001 turns ON.

Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns ON.

1000

0002

12

RES

1000

0500
0500 turns ON when measured value exceeds max. setting value.

0501

1001

0501 turns ON when measured value is below min. value.

1003

DM0007 DM0100
LDA
STA
Writes average into DM0100 every 100 measurement.

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2008

0014

CON

Operand

0001

LDA

#01600

0015

STA

DM0003

0002

CON

0003

STA

0016

LD

2003

DM0000

0017

LD

0001

0004

LD

2008

0018

LD

0002

0005

LDA

#02000

0019

ITVL

DM0000 1000

0006

CON

0020

LD

1000

0007

STA

DM0001

0021

OUT

0500

0008

LD

2008

0022

LD

1001

0009

LDA

#01000

0010

CON

0011

STA

0012

LD

0013

LDA

#00100

0023

OUT

0501

0024

LD

1003

DM0002

0025

LDA

DM0007

2008

0026

STA

DM0100

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-121

CALL / SBN / RET

2.4 Instruction Details

RES RES
CALL: Subroutine Call FUN 0 0 :
AND
SBN: Subroutine Entry FUN ORL
3
8 :
RET: Subroutine Return
ORL ORL

FUN 3

nn
CALL
SBN
nn
RET

Executes subroutine specified by operand.

Represents beginning of subroutine specified by operand.
Represents end of subroutine.

Example
00
CALL

0000

END
SBN
00
RET
ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Instruction
:
:
LD
CALL
:
END
SBN
:
RET
ENDH

Operand
:
:
0000
00
:
:
00
:
:
:

Description

When input relay 0000 turns ON, the subroutine specified by SBN00 and RET is
executed. When the subroutine ends, instructions following CALL are executed.
When the input relay is ON, the CALL instruction executes the subroutine specified by the operand.
A subroutine program must be defined between the SBN and RET instructions.
A subroutine must be defined between END and ENDH instructions.
Once a CALL instruction has been encountered, program execution transfers to
the subroutine specified by the SBN and RET instructions. Once a RET instruction has been encountered, program execution returns to the instruction immediately following the CALL instruction.

Operand
CALL

00 to 99

SBN

00 to 99

RET

Key operations

3-122

FUN

RES

ORL
AND

R-SRCH

FUN

ORL

FUN

ORL

ORL

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

0
3
3

ENT

Operand

Chapter 2 Instructions

ENT
R-SRCH

CALL / SBN / RET

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of subroutine
Program

A)
00
CALL

2008

Normal scan
Program

B)
END
SBN
00

Subroutine program

Subroutine

RET
ENDH

When CALL00 is encountered during normal scan execution, the subroutine is

executed. At the completion of this subroutine, program execution returns to program at B) immediately following CALL00. Then, the normal scan is continued until
an END instruction is encountered.
With no CALL instruction
Program

With CALL instruction

Program

A)

A)

12
00
CALL

0000

Program

00
CALL

0000

Program

B)

Subroutine program

B)

Nesting structure of a subroutine

Subroutine instructions can be nested up to 4 levels deep.
A subroutine which is called from another subroutine should be defined before
the call.
00
CALL

0001

Program
END
SBN
01

Subroutine program
RET
SBN
00
0000

01
CALL

Call

RET
ENDH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-123

CALL / SBN / RET

2.4 Instruction Details

Calling a subroutine from an interrupt program
Subroutines can be called from interrupt programs.
A subroutine which is called from an interrupt program should be defined before
the call.
0500

0001

Program
END
SBN
00

Subroutine program
RET
INT
0000
0002

00
CALL

Call

RETI
ENDH

Note 1: Subroutine Nos. for SBN instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.

(It can be duplicated for CALL instructions.)
Note 2: When a subroutine is executed, the scan time is extended by the time
needed for subroutine execution.
Note 3: The following instructions cannot be used in subroutines:
STG, JMP, ENDS, INT, RETI, and MEMSW
Note 4: The following instructions can be used only in subroutines which are executed every scan time:
TMR, TMH, TMS, C, SFT, UDC, DIFU, DIFD, W-UE, W-DE, HKEY, ITVL,
and Differentiation type instruction (@xxx)

3-124

Chapter 2 Instructions

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

SET ORB

ANL OR

FOR: Repeat Start

FUN 1

NEXT: Repeat End

FUN 2

6
9

FOR
nnnn
NEXT

Executes program between FOR and NEXT

by number of times specified by operand.
Represents end of repetition.

Example
2008

00
CALL
END
SBN
00
#00100
LDA

2002

TM02
STA

Specify the first DM No.(DM100)

Specify the number of DMs to be
initialized.
#TM02

2002

STA

#00000
LDA
FOR
#00050
TM02
INC
NEXT
RET

12
ENDH

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0001

CALL

2008

0107

FOR

#00050

00

0108

LD

2002

0109

STA

#TM02

0099

END

0100

SBN

0110

CON

0111

INC

00

0101

LD

2002

0112

NEXT

0102

LDA

#00100

0113

RET

0103

CON

0104

STA

0105

CON

0106

LDA

TM02

:
TM02

:
:

#00000

0199

ENDH

Description
Use FOR-NEXT instructions in a subroutine program (between SBN and RET) to
initialize data memory (DM0100 through DM0149) when the operation is started.
The indirect addressing method is used to change the data memory, so the initialization is completed when the TM02 value becomes "50 + 1" between the FOR and
NEXT instructions.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

The FOR instruction takes either of the following two types of operands: the
number of repetitions or the location (DM No.) of the data memory containing the
number of repetitions.
Define the program to be repeated between the FOR and NEXT instructions.
The FOR instruction repeats the desired sequence by the specified number of
times during each scan time.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-125

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

Tips
Note 1: The FOR-NEXT instruction pair repeats the program for a specified time
period at each scan. It usually is used in steps or subroutines.
Note 2: When a large number of loops or long programs are defined between FOR
and NEXT instructions, the processing time for one scan may become too long,
resulting in "Cycle time error". In such a case, reduce the number of loops or shorten
the ladder program.

The FOR-NEXT instruction set can be nested up to 8 levels deep. Nine or more
nested levels will result in a FOR-NEXT error.
FOR
#05
FOR
#02
FOR
#05

1) 2) 3)

NEXT
NEXT
NEXT

After repeating FOR-NEXT 3) five times, program execution transfers to the

instructions following the NEXT instruction.
FOR-NEXT 2) is repeated twice while FOR-NEXT 3) is executed once.
Thus, FOR-NEXT 2) is executed 10 times.
FOR-NEXT 1) is repeated 5 times while FOR-NEXT 2) is executed once.
Thus, FOR-NEXT 1) is executed up to 50 (5 x 2 x 5) times.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

#0000 to #65535 DM0000 to DM1984 #00000 to #65535 #00001 to #65535

DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM02 to TM28
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29

Key operation
FUN
FUN

3-126

SET

ORB

ANL

Chapter 2 Instructions

OR

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing is used to so you don't have to use fixed data memories or relay
Nos. when the contents of data memory or a relay is stored in internal registers, or
when the contents of the internal memory is stored in data memory or a relay.
Method for indirect addressing
Specify the operand for instructions as "#TMxx". The contents of "TMxx" is
considered to be the specification No. (indirect addressing).

Example
When TM02 value is "0000", "#TM02" represents DM0000.
When TM02 value is "10000", "#TM02" represents 0000 (relay).

Any of "02" through "29" can be specified for "xx".

Specify the desired decimal number for "xx".
Numbers "0000" through "1999" specify DM0000 through DM1999 (data
memory).
Numbers "10000" through "27915" specify 0000 through 17915 (relay).

Example: LDA #TM15

TM15 value

Data entered into internal register

20

DM0020

11000

1000 to 1015

This is the same operation whether "LDA DM0020" or "LDA 1000" is specified. The
specified data memory or relay can be changed as desired by changing the value of
TM15.
Example: STA #TM02
TM02 value

Specified destination

00

DM0000

13000

3000 to 3015

This is the same operation whether "STA DM0000" or "STA 3000" is specified. The
specified data memory or relay can be changed as desired by changing the value of
TM02.
Range of DM and relay Nos. that can be specified by "TMxx"
TMxx value

DM/relay

0000 to 1999

DM0000 to DM1999

2000 to 9999

Cannot be used.

10000 to 27915

0000 to 17915

Instructions which can use indirect addressing:

Specify "#TMxx" as an operand relay.
LDA, @LDA, STA, @STA, CMP, @CMP, ADD, @ADD, SUB, @SUB, MUL, @MUL,
DIV, @DIV, ANDA, @ANDA, ORA, @ORA, EORA, @EORA
Note 1: "2000" to "9999" cannot be used as a TMxx value.
Note 2: If there is no data memory or relay corresponding to the number specified
with "#TMxx", special utility relay 2012 turns ON.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-127

12

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

Data memory block transfer
The contents of DM0000 are
transferred to DM0100.

DM0000

DM0099
DM0100

The block of 100 data is

transferred.
Transfer a
block of
data.

The contents of DM0099 are

transferred to DM0199.

DM0199

Comparison between a program with normal addressing and one with indirect
addressing.

Program with normal addressing

0000

1000
DIFU

0000

1000
DIFU

1000

DM0000 DM0100
LDA
STA

1000

00
CALL

1000

DM0001 DM0101
LDA
STA

1000

DM0002 DM0102
LDA
STA

1000

DM0003 DM0103
LDA
STA

1000

DM0098 DM0198
LDA
STA

1000

DM0099 DM0199
LDA
STA

Program steps
are reduced by
one-eighth.

No. of data
memory to be
transferred.

SBN
00
2002

2002

#00000
LDA

#TM02
LDA

TM02
STA

#TM03
STA

#00100
LDA

TM02
INC

TM03
STA

1)

FOR
#0100

2)

TM03
INC

3)

NEXT
RET

ENDH

ENDH

4)

The first No. of the source DM block is specified

(DM0000).
The first No. of the destination DM block is specified
(DM0100).
The contents of the DM indirectly addressed by
"#TM02" is transferred to the internal register.

The contents of the internal register are transferred

to the DM indirectly addressed by "#TM03".

Chapter 2 Instructions

END

END

The contents of DM0000 are transferred

to DM0100.
The contents of DM0001 are transferred
to DM0101.
The contents of DM0002 are transferred
to DM0102.

The contents of DM0099 are transferred

to DM0199.

3-128

Program with indirect addressing

Add "1" to both "TM02" and "TM03" to increment

the Nos. of the source and destination DMs by one.

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

Description

On line 1), "TM02" is assigned to the first No. of the source 0000 and "TM03" is
assigned to the first No. of the destination 0100. This is the initial setting.
On lines 2) to 4), the contents of DM0000 to DM0099 are transferred to DM0100
to DM0199.
The ladder program on line 3) is executed 100 times in one scan.

1st operation: TM02 value: 0000, TM03 value: 0100

2002

#TM02
LDA

#TM03
STA

DM0000 is
indirectly
addressed.

DM0100 is
indirectly
addressed.

TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM02".

TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM03".

2nd operation: TM02 value: 00001, TM03 value: 0101

#TM02
LDA

#TM03
STA

DM0001 is
indirectly
addressed.

DM0101 is
indirectly
addressed.

TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM02".

TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM03".

2002

This operation is repeated.

12

100th operation: TM02 value: 0099, TM03 value: 0199

2002

#TM02
LDA

#TM03
STA

DM0099 is
indirectly
addressed.

DM0199 is
indirectly
addressed.

TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value
of "TM02".

TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value
of "TM03".

When the ladder program on line 3) is repeated 100 times, the contents of the
specified DM block are transferred.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-129

FOR / NEXT

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of SBN-RET and FOR-NEXT instructions

Data memory shift
Shifts the contents of the current data memory (DM) to the next DM at the rising
edge of the synchronous (timing) signal. As the number of DMs to be shifted increases, the required scan time becomes longer.
1000
0000
DIFU
Synchronous
signal

#00010 TM02
LDA
STA
Shift start DM
No. (DM0010)
is designated.

1000

#00030 TM03
LDA
STA
Shift end DM
No. (DM0030)
is designated.

00
CALL

Data is shifted from DM0010 to

DM0030.

END
SBN
00

TM03
LDA

2002

#00001
ADD

TM04
STA

TM02
SUB

TM05
STA

Shift level
TM03
DEC

2002

2002

TM04
DEC

#TM03 #TM04
LDA
STA
Indirect addressing is used
to designate DM Nos.

#00000 #TM02
LDA
STA
Shift start DM No. is cleared to
"#00000" after data is shifted.

FOR
TM05

NEXT

Program lines which execute

data shift are grouped as a
subroutine.

RET
ENDH

Coding

3-130

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0020

STA

TM04

0001

DIFU

1000

0021

CON

0002

CON

0003

AND

1000

0004

LDA

#00010

0005

CON

0006

STA

0007

CON

0008

LDA

0009

CON

0010

STA

TM02
#00030
TM03

0022

SUB

0023

CON

TM02

0024

STA

TM05

0025

FOR

TM05

0026

LD

2002

0027

DEC

TM03

0028

CON

0029

DEC

0030

CON

0011

CON

0012

CALL

0013

END

0033

STA

0014

SBN

00

0034

NEXT

0015

LD

2002

0035

LD

2002

0016

LDA

TM03

0036

LDA

#00000

0017

CON

0037

CON

0018

ADD

0019

CON

Chapter 2 Instructions

00

#00001

0031

LDA

0032

CON

TM04

0038

STA

0039

RET

0040

ENDH

#TM03
#TM04

#TM02

HKEY

2.4 Instruction Details

HKEY: 16-Key Input

SET LD

FUN 1

Reads hexadecimal key data on timesharing basis and outputs these data to
special utility relays 2900 to 2915.

HKEY
nnnn
mmmm

Input relay

Example
HKEY
0000
0500

0005

Output relay

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0005

0001

HKEY

0000 0500

Description

When input relay 0005 turns ON, the operand hexadecimal key data is read.
HKEY instruction employs four inputs and four outputs arranged as shown below.

Refer to "Fetching 16-key input" (p. 3-133) for the programming example.

12
24
VDC

COM

000

COM

500

002

003

502

503

Pressing two or more keys

simultaneously is invalid.
0

Pressing two or more keys

simultaneously is OK.
(With diode)

The HKEY instruction employs four input relays and four output relays from the
specified number.
Inputs are processed on a time-sharing basis, so that input processing requires 8
scan time cycles (approx. 160 msec when the scan time is 20 msec or less).
When a hexadecimal key is pressed, the HKEY instruction turns ON the corresponding special utility relay (2900 to 2915).
Relay No. 2900
Hex key

001
KV
501

2901

2902

2903

2904

2905

2906

2907

2908

2909

2910

2911

2912

2913

2914

2915

The special utility relay status indicates whether two or more keys can be
pressed simultaneously or whether a key input read operation has completed, as
shown in the following table:
Relay No.
Status
R: Reading

2814 R/W
ON: Pressing two or more keys
simultaneously is not valid.

2815 R
ON: Key input read operation has
completed.

W: Writing

Note 1: An HKEY instruction can be defined only once in a program.

Note 2: The HKEY instruction turns output relays ON/OFF every scan time. Connect
the device with transistor output.
Note 3: If the scan time is shorter than 8 ms, set the input time constant smaller
than the scan time.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-131

HKEY

2.4 Instruction Details

Note 4: When two or more keys are pressed simultaneously even once during the
scan while relay 2814 is ON, relays 2900 through 2915 keep the current status as
soon as relay 2815 turns ON.
Note 5: The HKEY instruction does not properly operate if the scan time is longer
than 200 ms.
Note 6: When the expansion I/O module is used as an operand, the fetch may fail
unless the scan time is fixed to 2 ms or longer.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16/24/40/80

Input relay Output relay Input relay Output relay Input relay Output relay
0000 to
0415

0500 to
0915

00000 to
00009
10000 to
10415
:
17000 to
17415

00500 to
00503
10500 to
10915
:
17500 to
17915

0000 to
0415

0500 to
0915

Key operation
FUN

SET

LD

ENT
R-SRCH

Input relay

Output relay

ENT
R-SRCH

2 Application of HKEY instruction

Changing the preset value of internal counters using a BCD digital switch
Coding
2002

0001

#09999
C000
0000

C000

0600

2900
LDA

HKEY
0104
0512
C000
STA

0005
2815

TBIN

END
ENDH

Instruction
Operand
LD
2002
ANB
0001
C
000 #09999 0000
CON
AND
C000
OUT
0600
LD
0005
HKEY
0104 0512
LD
2815
LDA
2900
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
C000
END
ENDH

As soon as 0005 turns ON, the preset value is replaced with the new preset
value specified by the digital switches.

"TBIN instruction" (p. 3-180), "LDA, STA instructions" (p. 3-140)

The digital switches are connected to the KV PLC as shown in the following
diagram: (Be sure to add the diodes at the specified points.)
The preset values range from #0000 to #9999.
The preset value is updated as soon as special utility relay 2815 turns ON.

3-132

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

Chapter 2 Instructions

HKEY

2.4 Instruction Details

100

101

102

103

BCD Digital switch

Diode

24
VDC

COM

1
0104

COM

0512

2
0105
KV
0513

4
0106

8
0107

0514

0515

Fetching 16-key input

Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 as 4-digit BCD.
Pressing the [F] key clears the input value.
2008

2814
SET

2002

HKEY
0000
0500
TM06
STA

2815

2900
LDA

2010

$03FF
ANDA

TM05
CMP

2010

TM05
STA

2815

2900
LDA

2010

$03FF
ANDA

TM05
CMP

2010

TM05
STA

DM0000
LDA

#04
SLA

2815

DMX

12
TM06
STA

DM0000
STA
#00000
DW
DM0000
END

2915

ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019

Instruction
LD
SET
LD
HKEY
LD
LDA
CON
ANB
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
DMX
CON
STA
LD
LDA

Operand
2008
2814
2002
0000 0500
2815
2900
2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05

TM06
2815
2900

Line No.
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040

Instruction
Operand
CON
AND
2010
ANDA
$03FF
CON
CMP
TM05
CON
ANB
2010
STA
TM05
CON
LDA
DM0000
CON
SLA
#04
CON
ORA
TM06
CON
STA
DM0000
LD
2815
AND
2915
DW
#0000 DM0000
END
ENDH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-133

2.4 Instruction Details

2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions

Arithmetic instructions handle data as integers to perform arithmetic, comparative, or
logical operations.

3-134

Instruction

Mnemonic

DW: Data Memory Write

DW

3-136

Trimmer In

TMIN (FUN50), @TMIN @(FUN50)

3-138

LDA/@LDA: Load A

LDA (FUN23), @LDA@ (FUN23)

3-140

STA/@STA: Store A

STA (FUN42), @STA@ (FUN42)

3-140

CMP/@CMP: Compare

CMP (FUN04), @CMP @(FUN04)

3-146

ADD/@ADD: Add

ADD (FUN00), @ADD @(FUN00)

3-150

SUB/@SUB: Subtract

SUB (FUN46), @SUB @(FUN46)

3-150

MUL/@MUL: Multiply

MUL (FUN28),@ MUL @(FUN28)

3-150

DIV/@DIV: Divide

DIV (FUN11), @DIV @(FUN11)

3-150

ANDA/@ANDA: And A

ANDA (FUN01), @ANDA @(FUN01)

3-159

ORA/@ORA: Or A

ORA (FUN31), @ORA @(FUN31)

3-161

EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A

EORA (FUN15), @EORA@ (FUN15)

3-164

SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A

SRA (FUN41), @SRA @(FUN41)

3-166

SLA/@SLA: Shift left A

SLA (FUN40), @SLA @(FUN40)

3-166

RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right A

RRA (FUN37), @RRA@ (FUN37)

3-169

RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A

RLA (FUN35), @RLA @(FUN35)

3-169

COM/@COM: Complement

COM (FUN05), @COM @(FUN05)

3-171

INC/@INC: Increment Memory

INC (FUN19), @INC @(FUN19)

3-172

DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory

DEC (FUN07), @DEC@ (FUN07)

3-172

MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer

MPX (FUN27), @MPX@(FUN27)

3-176

DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer

DMX (FUN12), @DMX @(FUN12)

3-176

TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD

TBCD (FUN47), @TBCD @(FUN47)

3-180

TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN

TBIN (FUN48), @TBIN @(FUN48)

3-180

ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert

ASC (FUN02), @ASC @(FUN02)

3-183

RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert

RASC (FUN32), @RASC @(FUN32)

3-183

ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root

ROOT (FUN36), @ROOT @(FUN36)

3-185

Chapter 2 Instructions

Reference page

2.4 Instruction Details

Internal register
KV executes all arithmetic instructions (i.e. data exchange) by using an internal
register, in order to increase the processing speed.
This section begins by describing details of the internal register.
Internal register
An internal register stores 16-digit binary data. That is, the resister uses 16 bits for
storing ON-OFF status data (1-0 status data). The internal register is required when
the KV performs arithmetic operation. Because this is not an instruction nor operand,
it is not necessary to take into consideration how the internal register functions or
operates.
Arithmetic instructions executed using internal register
(Arithmetic instructions executed as binary code.)
Data memory,
temporary
memory

Constant 3. 4.
(decimal,
hexadecimal)

Current T/C
value. 2.

Relay No.1.

Data memory accessed

in indirect addressing via
temporary memory

LDA instruction
TMIN

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

STA direction

Relay No

Preset T/C
value. 5.

Data memory,
temporary
memory

Data memory accessed

in indirect addressing via
temporary memory

MPX
DMX
TBCD
TBIN
ASC
RASC

Constant

Data memories,
temporary memories

Internal register

CMP
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
ANDA
ORA
EORA
SRA
SLA
RRA
RLA
COM
INC
DEC

1. ON-OFF status of the specified relay and 15 successive relays is stored into the
resister.
2. Current T/C value (decimal value = #*****) is automatically converted into a
binary value and input to the internal register.
3. Constant (decimal value = #*****, hexadecimal value = $****) is automatically
converted into a binary value and input to the internal register.
4. The range of numbers that can be specified is as follows:
Decimal #00000 to #65535
Hexadecimal $0000 to $FFFF
The constants can be entered by using #,@$ and the corresponding alphanumeric
keys.
(Pressing #,@$ once allows you to enter decimal values, and pressing twice to enter
hexadecimal values.)
5. The contents of the internal register (binary) is automatically converted into a
decimal value and (#*****) input to a timer/counter as the preset value.
Note 1: The internal structure of the internal register is the same as that of the data
memories. Although the data memories can store data when the power is being
OFF, the internal register cannot do so.
Note 2: Even for running one program, the contents of the internal register is rewritten each time when an instruction is executed.
Note 3: The internal register cannot be monitored.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-135

12

DW
2.4 Instruction Details

DW: Data Memory Write

DW

nnnn
DW
DMmmmm

Directly writes constant into data memory.

Example
First operand

$0018 #00050
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001

2008

Second operand

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

0001

DW

$0018 DM0000

0002

CON

0003

DW

#00050 DM0001

When starting operation, $0018 is written into DM0000 and #00050 into DM0001.

Values are directly written into data memories, without using the internal register.

Description

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Operand

Data memory

Note: The contents of the internal register and the arithmetic flag do not change
even after the DW instruction is executed.

Tips

The DW instruction can be used to reset the contents of data memories.

2008

#00000 #00000
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

nnnn:
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
DM mmmm:
DMmmmm
DMmmmm
DMmmmm
DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999

Key operation
DW
reraly

First operand

Second operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011
2012

3-136

Chapter 2 Instructions

No change
No change

@xxxx
2.4 Instruction Details

@xxxx: Differentiation

#,$ FUN

xxxx

Executes instruction only at rising edge of

input to input relay.

Example
Every-scan type instruction

Differentiation type instruction

DM0000
INC

0000

DM0000
INC

0000

Description

Arithmetic instructions have two instruction types: differentiation type and everyscan type.
The differentiation type instruction is executed only at the rising edge of input
relay 0000.
The every-scan type instruction is executed every scan time while input relay
0000 is ON.

Timing diagram
Differentiation type instruction

Every-scan type instruction

ON
OFF

0000

INC

0000

Stopped

Executed

Stopped

INC

ON
OFF

Stopped

12

Stopped

Executed only once at the rising

edge of input relay 0000.

Instructions with the DIFFERENTIATION function are as follows:

LDA, SAT, CMP, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, ANDA, ORA, EORA, SRA, SLA, RRA,
RLA, COM, INC, DEC, MPX, DMX, TBCD, TBIN, ASC, RASC, ROOT

Note:
0000

DM0000
INC

0000

DM0000
INC

0000

1000
DIFU

1000

DM0000
INC

In the top program, an INC instruction is

executed every scan time, incrementing
the contents of DM0000 by one, while
input relay 0000 is ON.
In the middle program, an INC instruction is executed and the contents of
DM0000 is incremented only when input
relay 0000 is turned from OFF to ON.

The bottom program uses the

every-scan type instruction which
performs the same operation as the
differentiation type instruction.

Operands
Key operation

#,$

FUN

Function No.

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-137

TMIN / @TMIN
2.4 Instruction Details

ANB RES

TMIN: Trimmer In

FUN 5
@

@TMIN: Trimmer Setting

#,$ FUN

ANB RES

n
TMIN

n
TMIN

Inputs numerical value specified by digital

trimmer of access window (0 to 65535) to
internal register.

T000 preset value can be changed with trimmer as follows (#00000 to #65535):
Inputs trimmer rotation angle of 0 to internal register.
Transfers contents of internal register to timer T000
for use as preset value.

2002

0
TMIN

0000

#00010
T000

T000
STA
T000 0500
Turns ON output 0500 when current value of
T000 reaches "#00000".
Timer T000 operates as ON-delay timer when 0000 is ON.

Coding

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
LD

Operand
2002
0
T000
0000

Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008

Instruction
TMR
CON
AND
OUT

Operand
000 #65535
T000
0500

Description
The TMIN instruction transfers the value of the KV series digital trimmer (0 to
65535) to the internal register. Additionally, if this value is transferred to a timer,
counter, relay, or data memory (by using the STA instruction), the numeric data of
the destination can be changed without modifying the program.

Internal
register

TMIN

Digital trimmer
value of access
window [0 to 65535]

Input

STA

Transfer

Numeric data
0 to 65535

Timer/counter preset
value
Relay ch No.
Data memory
Temporary memory
Destination

Note: To check the setting value of the digital trimmer with the KV-P3E(01)
handheld programmer, select the "READ TRIMMER SETTING" function (FUN73).
(Only values 0 to 9999 can be displayed.)
The @TMIN instruction is executed only once at the rising edge of the input relay.
Refer to "Chapter 3: Access Window" on page 1-79 for the functions and operation
procedures for the digital trimmer of the Access Window.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300/24/40/80

KV-10/16

0, 1

0, 1

Key operation
FUN
@

Arithmetic flag

#,$

ANB

FUN

2009
2010

RES

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

No change
Turns ON when "0" is entered by the TMIN instruction. Turns
OFF at other times.
2011, 2012 No change

3-138

Chapter 2 Instructions

TMIN / @TMIN
2.4 Instruction Details

Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction

Changing the timer setting value
Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change the setting value of a timer (0 to 6553.5
sec.).
0
TMIN

2002

T000
STA
#00010
T000

0000
T000

0500

0500

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
LD

Operand
2002
0
T000
0000

Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008

Instruction
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT

Operand
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500

Changing setting values for multiple timers

Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change setting values for multiple timers (0 to
6553.5 sec.).
2002

0
TMIN

T000
STA

T001
STA

T002
STA
#00010
T000

0000
0500

T000

0500
#00010
T001

0001
T001

0501

0501
#00010
T002

0002
T002

0502

0502

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
CON
STA
CON
STA
LD
OR
TMR
ANB

Operand
2002
0
T000
T001
T002
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
OUT
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT

Operand
0500
0001
0501
001 #00010
T001
0501
0002
0502
002 #00010
T002
0502

In the above example, T000, T001, and T002 have the same setting value.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-139

12

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

nnnn
LDA

ANL ORL

FUN 2

LDA: Load A

#,$ FUN

@LDA: Load A

@STA: Store A

LDB ORL

nnnn
STA

LDB ORL
@
#,$ FUN 4
3

nnnn
STA

FUN 4

STA: Store A

nnnn
LDA

ANL ORL

Inputs value specified by operand to internal

register.

Transfers contents of internal register to

destination specified by operand.

The LDA instruction inputs each data item to the internal register.
The STA instruction transfers the contents of the internal register to the specified
destination.
Source

T/C current
value

Decimal
Hexadecimal
T
C

Relay No.

LDA

XXXX
XX

STA

T
C

Data memory DM
Temporary memory TM

Relay No.

Relay No. XXXX

"Internal Register" (p. 3-126)

Operands
Visual KV
LDA
STA
0000 to
0500 to
17915
1915
T000 to
2100 to
T249
17915
(Current
value)
C000
T000 to
to 249
T249
(Current
(Preset
value)
value)
CTH0 to
C000
CTH1
to C249
(Preset
value)
DM0000 to CTC0 to
DM1999
CTC3
TM00 to DM0000 to
TM31
DM1999
#00000 to
TM00
#65535
to TM29
$0000 to #TM00 to
$FFFF
#TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

KV-300
LDA
STA
0000 to
0009
0500 to
0500 to
17915
1915

KV-10/16
LDA
STA
0000 to
2915
T000 to
0500 to
T063
1915

KV-24/40/80
LDA
STA
0000 to
6915
T000 to
0500 to
T119
1915

T000 to
T249

2100 to
17915

C000 to
C063

2100 to
2915

C000 to
C119

2100 to
6915

C000 to
C249

T000 to
T249

CTH0 to
CTH1

T000 to
T063

CTH0 to
CTH1

T000 to
T119

CTH0 to
CTH1
DM0000 to
DM9999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29

C000 to
C249
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM9999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29

C000 to
C063
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29

C000 to
C119
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

#,$

3-140

FUN
FUN

ANL

LDB

FUN

Chapter 2 Instructions

ORL

ANL

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

XXX
XXX

XXXX
XX

Relay No. XXXX 7

(Data type: operand)

(Data type: operand)

Destination
T/C preset
value

XXX
XXX

Data memory DM
3 Temporary memory
TM

Transfer

(#XXXXX)
($XXXXX)
Internal register

1 Constant

Storage

Input

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010

No change
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after
"LDA #00000" is executed. Turns OFF at other times.
No change
Turns ON when the DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is
out of range.

2011
2012

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Application of LDA and STA instructions

Changing the counter setting value
0000

#00100
LDA

C001
STA

0000

#00200
LDA

C001
STA

C001

0500

a)

b)

0002

#09999
C001
0001

When 0000 is ON, #00100 is transferred as C001

preset value.
When 0000 is OFF, #00200 is transferred as C001
preset value.
When C001 current value equals to its preset value,
0500 turns ON.

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

Operand
0000

0001

LDA

#00100

0002

CON

0003

STA

0004

LDB

0000

0005

LDA

#00200

0006

CON

0007

STA

C001

0008

LD

0002

0009

001 #09999 0001

0010

CON

0011

AND

C001

0012

OUT

0500

12

C001

Description
In step a), contents of DM00100 is transferred to C001 via the internal register for
use as the C001 preset value, when 0000 is ON.
In step b) , contents of #00200 is transferred to C001 via the internal register for
use as the C001 preset value, when 0002 is OFF.
Although the C001 preset value is #09999 in the above example, any value
except #00000 can be given because the preset value is changed to the specified value by turning ON/OFF 0000.
Note 1: If an STA instruction is executed when the current value is larger than the
preset value, the current value will be changed to the preset value.
Note 2: Do not specify "#00000" as the setting value for C001.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-141

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

Transferring the current counter value to data memory (DM)
#09999
C010
0000
DM0000
STA

0001
2002
a)

C010
LDA

The C010 current value is transferred to DM0000.

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

0000

LDB

Operand
0001

0001

010 #099999 0000

0002

LD

2002

0003

LDA

C010

0004

CON

0005

STA

DM0000

Description
In step a), the C010 current value is transferred via the internal register and stored
into DM0000, throughout the operation.
Transferring the contents of data memory as a setting value for a timer
0002

DM0010
LDA

T002
STA

0002

DM0011
LDA

T002
STA

T002

0500

a)

2
b)

0003

#00010
T002

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0002

0007

STA

T0002

0001

LDA

DM0010

0008

LD

0003

0002

CON

0009

TMR

002 #00010

0003

STA

T002

0010

CON

0004

LDB

0002

0011

AND

T002

0005

LDA

DM0011

0012

OUT

0500

0006

CON

Description
In step a), contents of DM0010 is transferred to T002 via the internal register for
use as the T002 preset value, when 0002 is ON.
In step b), contents of DM0011 is transferred to T002 via the internal register for
use as the T002 preset value, when 0002 is OFF.
Although the preset value of T002 is #00010 in the above example, any value
except #00000 can be given because the preset value is changed to the specified value by turning ON/OFF 0002. Once the counter value has been changed,
the changed value will be stored until it is changed again.
The setting values of timers and counters are reset to the original setting values
after the power is turned OFF once and then ON again.
Note 1: If an STA instruction is executed when the current value is larger than the
preset value, the current value will be changed to the preset value.
Note 2: Do not change the setting value of T002 to "#00000".

3-142

Chapter 2 Instructions

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

Outputting the input (ON/OFF status) of a basic unit directly to an expansion output unit
The ON/OFF status of a KV series basic unit is output to a KV-E16T(P) unit connected next to the basic unit.
0000
LDA

2002

0600
STA

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

Operand
2002

0001

LDA

0000

0002

CON

0003

STA

0600

Description
Input
(KV basic unit)

Input

Output
(KV-E16T(P))

(Internal register)
1 : ON
16-bit
0 : OFF

000

ON

0000

D0

0600

ON

00

001

ON

0001

D1

0601

ON

01

002

ON

0002

D2

0602

ON

02

003

ON

0003

D3

0603

ON

03

004

OFF

0004

D4

0604

OFF

04

005

OFF

0005

D5

0605

OFF

05

006

OFF

0006

D6

0606

OFF

06

007

OFF

0007

D7

0607

OFF

07

008

ON

0008

D8

0608

ON

08

009

ON

0009

D9

0609

ON

09

010

ON

0010

D10

0610

ON

10

011

ON

0011

D11

0611

ON

11

012

OFF

0012

D12

0612

OFF

12

013

OFF

0013

D13

0613

OFF

13

014

OFF

0014

D14

0614

OFF

14

015

OFF

0015

D15

0615

OFF

15

0000
<LDA>

0600
<STA>

12
Output

Binary number

The LDA instruction transfers the input (ON/OFF status) of the KV basic unit to
the internal register using binary numbers.
The STA instruction outputs the binary data in the internal register as the ON/
OFF status from the KV-E16T(P) (output unit).
Refer to "1.3 Device Configuration" (p. 3-5) for relay number assignments.

Note 1: When "LDA 0004" and "STA 0604" are programmed in the above example,
the LDA instruction can transfer inputs 0100 through 0103 to the internal register;
however, the STA instruction cannot output data across the channels. As a result,
the ON/OFF status of inputs 0100 through 0103 cannot be output even if they are
fetched by the LDA instruction.
Note 2: Relays 0000 through 0415 are assigned as input relays, and 0500 through
0915 are assigned as output relays.

"1.3 Device Configuration" (p. 3-5)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-143

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

When a BCD (2-digit) digital switch is connected to inputs 0000 through
0007 and a toggle switch is connected to inputs 0008 through 0015
a) Use the value of the digital switch (2 digits) as the setting value of a counter
(C001).
b) The current value of the counter (C001) is output to 0500 to 0515 using BCD
output.
Coding
0008
0010

a)

0011
b)

0000
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

TBIN

C001
LDA

TBCD

0500
STA

#09999
C001
0009
C001
STA

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA

Operand
0008
001 #09999 0009
0010
0000
$00FF

C001
0011
C001

0500

Description
Digital switch

Counter
setting
value

Internal register

(C001)

<59>
000 ON

D0

D0

001 OFF

D1

D1

002 OFF

D2

D2

003 ON

D3

D3

004 ON

D4

D4

005 OFF

D5

D5

D6

D6

007 OFF

D7

008 OFF ON/OFF

009 ON status is
trans010 ON ferred to
011 ON internal
register.
012 OFF

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

013 OFF

D13

014 OFF

015 OFF

006 ON

Reset input
Proximity
SW input
SW input

07000
<LDA>

$00FF
<ANDA>

<TBIN>

C001
<STA>

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

D14

D15

D15

Only loworder 2
digits is
used.

0
0

BCD
data is
converted
into binary
data.

0
0
0

Data is
transferred
as setting
value of
counter.

2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 1 + 2 + 8 + 16 + 32 = 59 (Decimal
number)

In example a), the LDA instruction reads the ON/OFF status of input relays 0000
through 0015 to the internal register.
"ANDA $00FF" instruction is used to leave only the digital switch input (2 digits).
BCD data is then converted into BIN (binary) data. (BIN is used in the KV series.)
The contents of the internal register is input as the setting value of C001.
In example b), the current value of counter C001 is read and output to output
relays 0500 through 0515.

Note 1: An LDA instruction can read the current value of a counter or a timer, but
cannot read the setting value.
Note 2: An STA instruction can change the setting value of a counter or a timer, but
cannot change the current value.

3-144

Chapter 2 Instructions

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

2.4 Instruction Details

Note 3: When an STA instruction is executed while the setting value of a counter or
a timer is smaller than the current value, the current value is changed to be the
setting value.
First-in first-out (FIFO)
The data once fetched is written into DM0004,
DM0003, , to DM0000 in this order. At the
unloading timing, data is fetched from
DM0004 and the contents of DM are shifted
to the next DM.

OK/NG
judgment
Data
shift

DM0000
DM0001
DM0002
DM0003
DM0004
Unloading
timing

The OK/NG judgment and unloading timings can be used in asynchronous programs.
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

OK/NG judgment
timing

$1111
DM0000
LDA
STA
"$1111" is transferred to
DM0000.
OK/NG judgment
$5555
DM0000
0001
LDA
STA
"$5555" is transferred to DM0000.
0001

2002

DM0004
LDA

$0000
CMP

2010

DM0003 DM0004
LDA
STA

$0000
LDA

DM0003
STA

2002

DM0003
LDA

$0000
CMP

2010

DM0002 DM0003
LDA
STA

$0000
LDA

DM0002
STA

2002

DM0002
LDA

$0000
CMP

2010

DM0001 DM0002
LDA
STA

$0000
LDA

DM0001
STA

2002

DM0001
LDA

$0000
CMP

2010

DM0000 DM0001
LDA
STA

$0000
LDA

DM0000
STA

0002

Unloading
timing

$0000
LDA

Contents of DM is compared with "$0000".

When two values match, contents of one
previous DM is transferred, then "$0000" is
transferred to DM.

DM0004
STA
"$0000" is transferred to DM
at unloading timing.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
MPS
AND
LDA
CON
STA
MPP
ANB
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON

Operand
0000
1000
1000
0001
$1111
DM0000
0001
$5555
DM0000
2002
DM0004
$0000
2010
DM0003
DM0004
$0000
DM0003
0002
DM0003
$0000
2010
DM0002

Line No.
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069

Instruction
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@LDA
CON
@STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
DM0003
$0000
DM0002
2002
DM0002
$0000
2010
DM0001
DM0002
$0000
DM0001
2002
DM0001
$0000
2010
DM0000
DM0001
$0000
DM0000
0002
$0000
DM0004

3-145

12

CMP / @CMP
2.4 Instruction Details

RES LDB

CMP: Compare

FUN 0

@CMP: Compare

#,$ FUN

RES LDB

nnnn
CMP

nnnn
CMP

Compares contents of internal register with

value specified by operand.

CMP instruction compares the contents of the internal register with the value specified by the operand, and turns ON/OFF the special utility relays (2009, 2010, 2011)
according to the result of comparison.
2009

2010

2011

(Internal register) < (Operand)

ON

OFF

OFF

(Internal register) = (Operand)

OFF

ON

OFF

(Internal register) > (Operand)

OFF

OFF

ON

Comparing the current value of the counter and CMP value

0001
2002

2002

C001
LDA

C001
LDA

#01000
CMP

#02000
CMP

2009

#09999
C001
0003
0500

2010

0501

2011

0502

2009

0503

1) (<)
2) (=)
3) (>)
4) ()

1) Output relay 0500 turns ON when the counter value is smaller than "1000" (C001
< #01000).
2) Output relay 0501 turns ON when the counter value is equal to "1000" (C001 =
#01000).
3) Output relay 0502 turns ON when the counter value is greater than "1000" (C001
> #01000).
4) Output relay 0503 turns ON when the counter value is equal to or greater than
"2000" (C001 #02000).
Coding

3-146

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

0001

0001

001 #099999 0003

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0012

OUT

0501

0013

MPP

0002

LD

2002

0014

AND

2011

0003

LDA

C001

0015

OUT

0502

0004

CON

0016

LD

2002

0005

CMP

0017

LDA

C001

0006

CON

0018

CON

0007

MPS

0019

CMP

0008

AND

2009

0020

CON

0009

OUT

0500

0010

MRD

0011

AND

Chapter 2 Instructions

#01000

2010

#02000

0021

ANB

2009

0022

OUT

0503

CMP / @CMP
2.4 Instruction Details

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999

TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN

RES

LDB

ENT

R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is negative. Turns OFF at
other times.
2010 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is "0". Turns OFF at other
times.
2011 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is positive. Turns OFF at
other times.
2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

12

Description

As shown in the above example, the CMP instruction is used by connecting the
special utility relay (2009 to 2011) immediately after the instruction.
The operation of the CMP instruction varies depending on the contents of the
internal register.

Note: Special utility relays 2009 to 2011 are used as arithmetic flags. The function
varies depending on the execution of other arithmetic instructions.

Tips
An operand is compared with the internal register using the following program.
DM0000 #00999
LDA
CMP

2009

When the internal register is assumed as "a" and the operand is "b" such as , the
statuses of the special utility relays are as follows:
a
LDA
2009

b
CMP
a < b,

2011

a b,

2010

a = b,

2009

a b,

2011

a>b

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-147

CMP / @CMP
2.4 Instruction Details

Application of CMP instruction

Multi-level counter
Coding
0001
2002

C000
LDA

#00999
CMP

2011

#01999
CMP

2011

0500

#02999
CMP

2011

0500

#09999
C000
0000
0500

Line No.
0000
0001

0501

0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

0502

0501

Instruction
Operand
LDB
0001
C
000 #099999
0000
LD
2002
LDA
C000
CON
MPS
CMP
#00999
CON
ANB
2011
OUT
0500
MRD
CMP
#01999
CON
ANB
2011
ANB
0500
OUT
0501
MPP
CMP
#02999
CON
ANB
2011
ANB
0500
ANB
0501
OUT
0502

Description
The following outputs are provided according to the current value of the counter.
(Current value)
(Output)
0000 to 0999
0500 turns ON.
1000 to 1999
0501 turns ON.
2000 to 2999
0502 turns ON.
When comparing values with no specific range
Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller than the CMP value.
Turns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to the CMP value.
Turns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater than the CMP value.
2002 DM0000 #01000
LDA
CMP

2009

0500
DM0000<#01000

2010

0501
DM0000=#01000

2011

0502
DM0000>#01000

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

3-148

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
MPS
AND
OUT

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
2002
DM0000
#01000
2009
0500

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
MRD
AND
OUT
MPP
AND
OUT

Operand
2010
0501
2011
0502

CMP / @CMP
2.4 Instruction Details
Setting the upper/lower limit
Turns ON 0500 when the C001 value is 1000 or less.
Turns ON 0501 when the C001 value is 2000 or more.
0001
2002
2002

C001
LDA

#01000
CMP

2011

C001
LDA

#02000
CMP

2009

#09999
C001
0000
0500
C001#01000

0501
C001#02000

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
Operand
LDB
0001
C
001 #09999 0000
LD
2002
LDA
C001
CON
CMP
#01000
CON
ANB
2011

Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

Instruction
OUT
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT

Operand
0500
2002
C001
#02000
2009
0501

Changing the CMP setting value

Compares the current value of counter C000 with the CMP setting value. The setting
value of the CMP instruction is specified with the digital trimmer (TMIN0). The
following example changes the setting value to the range from "0" through "100".
The upper limit of the digital trimmer is set to "100".
0500 turns ON when the current value of C000 is smaller than the CMP setting
value.
0501 turns ON when the current value of C000 is equal to or greater than the CMP
setting value.
2002

0
DM0000
STA Sets range of TMIN from 0 to 100.
TMIN

0001

#09999
C000
00000
2009 0500

2002

C000 DM0000
LDA
CMP

2009

0501

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
ADD
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
LDB

Operand
2002
0
#00001
#00004
#00010
DM0000
0001

Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

Instruction
Operand
C
000 #09999 0000
LD
02002
LDA
C000
CON
CMP
DM0000
MPS
AND
2009
OUT
0500
MPP
ANB
2009
OUT
0501

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-149

12

ADD / @ADD / SUB / @SUB / MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV

2.4 Instruction Details

RES RES

ADD: Add

FUN 0
@

@ADD: Add

#,$ FUN

RES RES

LDB ORB

SUB: Subtract

FUN 4
@

@SUB: Subtract

#,$ FUN

LDB ORB

ANL AND

MUL: Multiply

FUN 2
@

@MUL: Multiply

#,$ FUN

ANL AND

SET SET

DIV: Divide

FUN 1
@

@DIV: Divide

#,$ FUN

SET SET

nnnn
ADD

Adds value specified by operand to contents of

internal register, and inputs result back to same
internal register.

nnnn
ADD

:
:

nnnn
SUB

nnnn
SUB

nnnn
MUL

nnnn
MUL

nnnn
DIV

nnnn
DIV

Subtracts value specified by operand from

contents of internal register, and inputs results
back to same register.
Multiplies contents of internal register by value
specified by operand, and inputs result back to
same register.
Divides contents of internal register by value
specified by operand, and inputs result back to
same register.

MUL
DIV

Decimal

(#XXXXX)

Hexadecimal

($XXXX)

DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
#TM00 to #TM29

Arithmetic operation

Internal register

SUB

Data memories

Operand

Internal register

ADD

Constants

ADD, SUB, MUL, and DIV allow arithmetic instructions between the contents of
internal register and the value specified by the operand.

Result

Note: Arithmetic instructions use binary numbers (BIN). Therefore, the contents of
the internal register used for the arithmetic instruction must be BIN data. Use the
TBIN instruction to convert BCD data into BIN data.

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999

TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

3-150

FUN

RES

LDB

ANL

SET

Chapter 2 Instructions

RES

ORB

AND

SET

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ADD / @ADD

2.4 Instruction Details

ADD (Addition)
DM0000 #00100 DM0001
LDA
ADD
STA

2002

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2002

0001

LDA

DM0000

0002

CON

0003

ADD

0004

CON

0005

STA

#00100
DM0001

Description

The ADD instruction adds the operand value to the contents of the internal
register and inputs the result back to the internal register.
In the above example, "#00100" is added to the contents of DM0000 and the
result is stored in DM0001.
When the contents of DM0000 is "#00100", for example, "#00200" is stored in
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00100) + #00100 DM0001(#00200)

Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation result exceeds 16 bits ($FFFF,
#65535). In such a case, only the data of the low-order 16 bits is input back to the
internal register. For example, when the contents of the internal register is "$FFFF"
and the operand is "$0001", the result will overflow.
Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Example:
Internal register

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = $FFFF

Operand + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = $0002
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = $0001

Overflow 1
Special
utility relay

2009

Input back internal register

Result

Tips
Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits
2002

DM0000 DM0001
LDA
ADD

2009

DM0002 #00000 DM0003

STA
LDA
STA

2009

DM0002 #00001 DM0003

STA
LDA
STA

DM0000 + DM0001 = DM0003 (High-order 16 bits), DM0002 (Low-order 16 bits)

DM0000 and DM0001 must be 16 bits or less.

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

Turns ON when the result of an ADD operation exceeds the range of 16 bits
($FFFF). Turns OFF at other times.
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after an ADD
operation. Turns OFF at other times.
No change
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-151

12

ADD / @ADD

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of ADD instruction

Total count
Writes the total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. The total count must
be within #65535.
0000

#09999 C001
LDA
C001
0001
0000
#09999 C002
LDA
C002
0002
0000
#09999 C003
LDA
C003
0003
2002 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003
LDA
ADD
ADD

DM0001
STA

Writes C001 current value into DM0001.

DM0002
STA

Writes C002 current value into DM0002.

DM0003
STA

Writes C003 current value into DM0003.

DM0100
STA

Writes total count (DM0001 + DM0002 +

DM0003) into DM100.

Coding

3-152

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LDB

0001

0001

010 #099999 0000

0002

CON

0003

LDA

0004

CON

Operand

C001

0005

STA

0006

LDB

DM0001
0000

0007

002 #099999 0002

0008

CON

0009

LDA

0010

CON

C002

0011

STA

DM0002

0012

LDB

0000

0013

003 #099999 0003

0014

CON

0015

LDA

0016

CON

0017

STA

0018

LD

2002

0019

LDA

DM0001

0020

CON

0021

ADD

0022

CON

0023

ADD

0024

CON

0025

STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

C003
DM0003

DM0002
DM0003
DM0100

SUB / @SUB

2.4 Instruction Details

SUB (Subtraction)
2002

DM0000 #00100 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2002

0001

LDA

DM0000

0002

CON

0003

SUB

0004

CON

0005

STA

#00100
DM0001

Description

The SUB instruction subtracts the operand value from the contents of the internal
register and inputs the result back into the internal register.
In the above example, "#00100" is subtracted from the contents of DM0000 and
the result is stored in DM0001.
When the contents of DM0000 is "#00150", for example, "#00050" is stored in
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00150) #00100 DM0001 (#00050)

Note 1: When the operation result is a negative value (-), the 2's complement value
is also stored in the internal register.
Special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Internal register
Operand -

Underflow 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = $0001
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = $FFFF

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = $0002

2's complement is stored.

2009

Note 2: To convert the complement into an antilogarithm, add the following operation:
Inverted bit of complement + 1 = Antilogarithm

Tips
Solution when operation result is a negative value
2002

DM0000 DM0001
LDA
SUB

2009
2009
COM

DM0000 - DM0001 =

#0001
ADD

DM0002
STA

(Stores positive value)

DM0003
STA

(Stores negative value)

Positive value

DM0002

Negative value

DM0003

Absolute value
is stored.

When DM0000 is "#10" and DM0001 is "#30", "#20" is stored in DM0003.

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

Turns ON when the result of a SUB operation is negative. Turns OFF at

other times.
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after a SUB
operation. Turns OFF at other times.
Turns ON when the result of a SUB operation is positive. Turns OFF at other
times.
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-153

12

SUB / @SUB

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of SUB instruction

Comparing absolute values
Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ON 0500 when the
difference between the two absolute values is greater than 5.
2002

DM0000 DM0001
LDA
SUB

2009

#0005
CMP

2009

1000

2009

DM0001 DM0000 #00005

CMP
LDA
SUB

2009

1001
0500

1000
1001

Coding

3-154

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2002

0001

LDA

DM0000

0002

CON

0003

SUB

0004

MPS

DM0001

0005

ANB

2009

0006

CMP

#00005

0007

CON

0008

ANB

2009

0009

OUT

1000

0010

MPP

0011

AND

2009

0012

LDA

DM0001

0013

CON

0014

SUB

0015

CON

0016

CMP

0017

CON

DM0000
#00005

0018

ANB

2009

0019

OUT

1001

0020

LD

1000

0021

OR

1001

0022

OUT

0500

Chapter 2 Instructions

MUL / @MUL

2.4 Instruction Details

MUL (Multiplication)
DM0000 #00100 DM0001
LDA
MUL
STA

2002

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2002

0001

LDA

DM0000

0002

CON

0003

MUL

0004

CON

0005

STA

#00100
DM0001

Description

The MUL instruction multiplies the contents of the internal register by the operand value and inputs the result back to the internal register.
In the above example, the contents of DM0000 are multiplied by "#00100" and
the result is stored in DM0001.
When the contents of DM0000 is "#00200", for example, "#20000" is stored in
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00200) x #00100DM0001 (#20000)

Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation result exceeds 16 bits (#65535). In
such a case, only the data of the low-order 16 bits are stored in the internal register,
and the overflow data of the high-order 16 bits is stored in TM00. (The data of the
high-order 16 bits is always stored in TM00.)
Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Internal register F F F F
Operand

0 0 0 2

Hexadecimal number

0 0 0 1 F F F F
(TM00) (Internal register)

Tips
Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits
2002

DM0000 DM0001 DM0002

LDA
MUL
STA

TM00
LDA

DM0003
STA

DM0000 x DM0001 = DM0003 (High-order 16 bits) DM0002 (Low-order 16 bits)

The operation result must be 32 bits or less.

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

Turns ON when the result of a MUL operation exceeds 16 bits. Turns OFF at
other times.
Turns ON when all 32 bits are "0" after a MUL operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
No change
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-155

12

MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by the DM value
Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 value and writes the high-order
16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bits of the product into
DM0100.
0001
C001
LDA

2002

DM0000 DM0100
MUL
STA

TM00
LDA

#09999
C001
0000
DM0101
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MUL
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA

Operand
0001
001 #099999 0000
2002
C001
DM0000
DM0100
TM00
DM0101

DIV (Division)
DM0001
LDA

2002

TM00
STA

High-order

DM0000 #00100 DM0002

LDA
DIV
STA
Low-order

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017

3-156

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
DIV
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
2002
DM0001
TM00
DM0000
#00100
DM0002
TM00
DM0003
TM01
DM0004

Low-order

TM00
LDA

DM0003
STA
High-order

TM01
LDA

DM0004
STA
Remainder

DIV / @DIV

2.4 Instruction Details

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

No change
Turns ON when all 32 bits are "0" after a DIV operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
No change
Turns ON when the divisor of a DIV operation is "0" or the DM or relay
indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

The 32-bit value (binary) consisting of the higher 16 bits from TM00 and lower 16
bits from the internal register is divided by the value specified by the operand.
The higher 16 bits of the result is input back to TM00 and lower 16 bits to the
same internal register. The remainder is stored in TM01.

Description

TM00

Internal register

High-order 16 bits

Low-order 16 bits

TM00

Internal register

High-order 16 bits

Low-order 16 bits

Operand

TM01
Remainder (16 bits)

Quotient

Example

DM0001

12

#00100

DM0000

High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits

DM0003

DM0002

DM0004
Remainder (16 bits)

High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits

Quotient

Note 1: When data of 16 bits or less is divided by the operand value, the contents of
TM00 must be cleared (set to "#00000") before the DIV operation.
Note 2: If the contents of TM00 are not cleared, the data stored in TM00 is also
used for the operation.

Tips
Solution when data of 16 bits or less is divided
02002

#00000
LDA

TM00
STA

DM0000 DM0001 DM0002

LDA
DIV
STA

TM01
LDA

DM0003
STA

TM00 DM0000 = TM00 DM0002 DM0003

High-order
16 bits

Low-order
16 bits

High-order
16 bits

Low-order
16 bits

Remainder

Quotient

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-157

DIV / @DIV

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of DIV instruction

Total count average
Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD.
(C001 + C002 + C003) 3 BCD output value
The BCD value is output to 500 to 515.
0000
0000
0000
2002

C001
#09999
LDA
C001
0001
C002
#09999
LDA
C002
0002
C003
#09999
LDA
C003
0003
DM0001 DM0002
LDA
ADD

2002
2002

#00003
DIV

DM0001
STA

Writes the C001 current value into DM0001.

DM0002
STA

Writes the C002 current value into DM0002.

DM0003
STA

Writes the C003 current value into DM0003.

DM0003
ADD

#00000
LDA

TM00
STA

TBCD

0500
STA

(DM0001+DM0002+DM0003)

3 Output to 0500 to 0515 in 4-digit BCD.

Coding

3-158

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LDB

0000

0001

001 #099999 0001

0002

CON

0003

LDA

0004

CON

Operand

C001

0005

STA

DM0001

0006

LDB

0000

0007

002 #099999 0002

0008

CON

0009

LDA

0010

CON

0011

STA

0012

LDB

0000

0013

003 #099999 0003

0014

CON

C002
DM0002

0015

LDA

0016

CON

C003

0017

STA

0018

LD

2002

0019

LDA

DM0001

0020

CON

0021

ADD

0022

CON

0023

ADD

DM0003

DM0002
DM0003

0024

LD

2002

0025

DIV

#0003

0026

CON

0027

TBCD

0028

CON

0029

STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

500

ANDA / @ANDA
2.4 Instruction Details

ANDA:

AND A
@ANDA: (Logical product)

RES SET

FUN 0

#,$ FUN

RES SET

nnnn
ANDA

nnnn
ANDA

ANDs contents of internal register and

value specified by operand for each of
16 bits, and inputs result back to same
register.

Example
0000

DM0000
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

DM0001
STA

(DM0000) ^ ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical product

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA

Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001

Description

The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and the value specified by the
operand ($00FF) are ANDed for each bit and the result (logical product) is input
back to the same register.
When the operation result is "0", special utility relay 2010 turns ON.
The contents of the internal register are transferred to DM0001.
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F0F0".

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Contents of DM0000
are transferred to the
internal register.

DM0000 ($F0F0)

DM0000
LDA

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Internal
($F0F0)
register

AND

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
$00FF
ANDA

These values are ANDed for

each bit to obtain logical product.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

The result is transferred

to DM0001.

Operand ($F0F0)

Internal ($F0F0)
register

AND (Logical product)

truth table
(Result)
Internal
register
1
1
0
0

Operand

Internal
register
1
0
0
0

1
0
1
0

Only when both bits of the

internal register and the
operand are "1", will the logical
product be "1".

DM0001
STA

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

DM0001 ($00F0)

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
0000 to 17915
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Key operation

FUN
@

#,$

FUN

RES

SET

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-159

12

ANDA / @ANDA
2.4 Instruction Details

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ANDA operation.
Turns OFF at other times.
No change
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Tips
Solution when connecting one-digit data of a BCD digital switch to inputs 0100
to 0103, while ignoring other inputs
Only one-digit data of the BCD digital switch is transferred as the setting value of the
fetching counter (C004).
Other inputs (0104 to 0115) are ignored.
#00300
C004
0005
C004
STA

0004
2002

0100
LDA

$000F
ANDA

TBIN

Application of ANDA instruction

Fetch input data separately
Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7007) to counter C000
and the high-order 2 digits (7008 to 7015) to timer T001.

2
2002
2002

7000
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

TBIN

C000
STA

7000
LDA

$FF00
ANDA

#08
SRA

TBIN

T001
STA
#09999
C000
0000
#09999
T001

0001
0001

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

3-160

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
SRA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
LDB
T

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
2002
7000
$00FF

C000
2002
7000
$FF00
#08

T001
0001
000 #09999 0000
0001
001 #09999

Converts data of 7000 to 7007 to BIN and

writes it into C000.
Shifts data to right by 8 bits, converts it to BIN,
and writes it into T001.
Sets C000.
Sets T001.

ORA / @ORA
2.4 Instruction Details
ORL SET

FUN 3

ORA:

Or A
@ORA: (Logical sum)
Example

#,$ FUN

0000

DM0000
LDA

ORL SET

$00FF
ORA

nnnn
ORA

nnnn
ORA

ORs contents of internal register and value

specified by operand for each of 16 bits,
and inputs result back to same register.

DM0001
STA

(DM0000) U ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical sum

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ORA
CON
STA

Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001

Description

The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and the value specified by the
operand ($00FF) are ORed for each bit and the result (logical sum) is input back
to the same register.
When the operation result is "0", special utility relay 2010 turns ON.
The contents of the internal register are transferred to DM0001.
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F0F0".
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Contents of DM0000 are
transferred to the internal
register.

DM000 ($F0F0)

DM0000
LDA

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Internal
($F0F0)
register

OR
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
$00FF
ORA

These values are ORed for

each bit to obtain logical sum.

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The result is transferred
to DM0001.

Operand ($00FF)

Internal
($F0FF)
register

OR (Logical sum)
truth table
Internal
register
1
1
0
0

Operand
1
0
1
0

(Result)

Internal
register
1
1
1
0

Only when both bits of the

internal register and the
operand are "0", will the logical
sum be "0".

DM0001
STA

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
0000 to 0009
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
DM0000 to DM1999
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN

ORL

SET

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-161

12

ORA / @ORA
2.4 Instruction Details

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ORA operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
No change
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Tips
Solution when connecting two-digit data of a BCD digital switch (inputs 0100
to 0103 for the first digit and 0200 to 0203 for the second digit) separately
Fetches the two-digit data of the BCD digital switch, which are separated into the
first digit (0100 to 0103) and the second digit (0200 to 0203), and transfers the
values as the setting value of a counter (C004).
0004

#00300
C004
0005

2002

0100
LDA

$000F
ANDA

DM0000
STA

0200
LDA

$000F
ANDA

#04
SLA

DM0000
ORA

TBIN

C004
STA

2
Application of ORA instruction
Output of BCD 2-digit data
Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD and sends 2 digits of BCD data
to output relays 0500 to 0507.
However, retain ON/OFF of 0508 to 0515 which are loaded.
0000
2002

0500
LDA

2002
2002

#00099
C000
0001
$FF00 DM0000
ANDA
STA

C000
LDA

TBCD

DM0000
ORA

0500
STA

$00FF
ANDA

Sets C000.

Writes data of 0008 to 0015 into DM0000.

Converts the current value of C000 to BCD and retains
the low-order 2 digits of BCD in the internal register.
ORs the data in the internal register and the DM0000
data and sends the ORed data to 0500 to 0515.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001

3-162

Instruction
Operand
LDB
0000
C
001 #00099 0001

Line No.
0009
0010

Instruction
LDA
CON

Operand
C000

0002

LD

2002

0011

TBCD

0003

LDA

0500

0012

CON

0013

ANDA

$00FF

$FF00

0014

LD

2002
DM0000

0004

CON

0005

ANDA

0006

CON

0015

ORA

0007

STA

DM0000

0016

CON

0008

LD

2002

0017

STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

0500

ORA / @ORA
2.4 Instruction Details
Separate input of 2-digit BCD
Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0000 to 0003 for the 1st digit, 0100
to 0103 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
0000
0000
LDA

#00099
C000
0001
$000F DM0000
STA
ANDA

2002

0100
LDA

$000F
ANDA

2002

#04
SLA

DM0000
ORA

2002

Sets C001.

Writes data of 7000 to 7003 into DM0000.

Writes data of 8000 to 8003 into internal register.

TBIN

C001
STA

ORs content of internal register which is shifted

to left by four bits and data of 7000 to 7003,
converts ORed data into BIN, and write it into
C001.

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

0001

0001

001 #00099 0001

0002

LD

2002

0003

LDA

0000

0004

CON

0005

ANDA

0006

CON

0007

STA

$000F

0008

LD

2002

0009

LDA

0100

0010

CON

0011

ANDA

$000F

0012

LD

2002

0013

SLA

#04

0014

CON

0015

ORA

0016

CON

0017

TBIN

0018

CON

0019

STA

12

DM0000

DM0000

C001

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-163

EORA / @EORA
2.4 Instruction Details

EORA: Exclusive Or A
@EORA: (Exclusive
logical sum)

SET ANB

FUN 1
@

#,$ FUN

SET ANB

nnnn
EORA

nnnn
EORA

EXCLUSIVE ORs contents of internal

register and operand for each of 16 bits,
and inputs result back to same register.

Example
0000

DM0000
LDA

$00FF
EORA

DM0001
STA

(DM0000) U ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Exclusive
logical sum

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
EORA
CON
STA

Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001

Description

The contents of DM0000 is transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and the value specified by the
operand ($00FF) are EORed (exclusive OR) for each bit and the result is input
back to the same register.
When the operation result is "0", special utility relay 2010 turns ON.
The contents of the internal register is transferred to DM0001.
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F0F0".
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 DM0000 ($F0F0)

Contents of DM0000 are

transferred to the internal
register.

DM0000
LDA

Internal
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 register ($F0F0)
EORA
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand ($00FF)
$00FF
EORA

These values are EORed for each

bit to obtain exclusive OR value.

Internal
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 register ($F00F)
The result is transferred to DM0001.

EOR (Exclusive OR)

truth table
Internal
register
1
1
0
0

Operand
1
0
1
0

Only when the bits of the

internal register and the
operand have different values,
will the exclusive logical sum
be "1".

DM0001
STA

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

DM0000 ($F00F)

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

0000 to 17915
00000 to 0009
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
DM0000 to DM1999
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

3-164

FUN

SET

Chapter 2 Instructions

ANB

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

(Result)

Internal
register
0
1
1
0

EORA / @EORA
2.4 Instruction Details

Arithmetic flag
2009 No change
2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an EORA operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
2011 No change
2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Tips
Turning output 0500 ON when inputs 0000 through 0015 have the same value as a
constant ($0F0F)
When the values match, special internal relay 2010 turns ON and output relay 0500
turns ON.
In this example, the constant is "$0F0F", or "0000 1111 0000 1111". Therefore,
output relay 0500 turns ON when input relays 0000 through 0003 and 0008 through
0011 are ON.
0000
LDA

2002

$0F0F
EORA

2010

0500

Application of EORA instruction

Judgment of matching data
Turns ON 0500 when the ON/OFF statuses of input relays 0100 to 0107 match the
DM0000 setting value.
2008

$00AA
LDA

DM0000
STA

2002

0100
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

DM0000
EORA

2010

0500

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON

Operand
2008
$00AA
DM0000
2002
0100

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
ANDA
CON
EORA
CON
AND
OUT

Operand
$00FF
DM0000
2010
0500

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

$BBBB 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0100 to 0115

ANDA

$00FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand

$00BB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Internal register

EORA

$00AA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DM0000

$0011

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Internal register

When 2010 is ON, the two values match.

When 2010 is OFF, the two values do not match.

2010 is OFF. When the

value of internal register is 0000, 2010 turns ON.
Judges match between the operand and the
data of 0100 to 0107.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-165

12

SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA

2.4 Instruction Details
LDB SET

FUN 4

SRA: Shift Right A

@SRA: Shift Right A
SLA: Shift Left A
@SLA: Shift Left A

#,$ FUN

LDB SET

#dd
SRA

#dd
SRA
#dd
SLA

LDB RES

:
LDB RES :
FUN 4
0

FUN 4
@

#,$

Moves contents of internal register

serially right by value specified by operand.

Moves contents of internal register

serially left by value specified by operand.

#dd
SLA

Example
0000

DM0000
LDA

#05
SRA

DM0001
STA

0001

DM0010
LDA

#10
SLA

DM0011
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
SRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
SLA
CON
STA

Operand
0000
DM0000
#05
DM0001
0001
DM0010
#10
DM0011

Operands
#01 to #16

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

#,$

FUN
FUN

LDB

LDB

FUN

SET

RES

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

3-166

Turns ON when "1" enters 2009 after an SRA/SLA operation. Turns OFF at
other times.
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an SRA/SLA operation.
Turns OFF at other times.
No change
No change

Chapter 2 Instructions

SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
Operations using the SRA instruction
When input relay 0000 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal
register and shifted serially right by the operand value (5). The operation result is
written into DM0001. The contents of D0 are shifted to carry bit 2009.
In the above example, the contents shift to the right by the operand value (5) every
scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use @SRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0000 turns ON.
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Carry
2009

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Carry
2009

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

Operation using the SLA instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal
register and shifted serially left by the operand value (10). The operation result is
written into DM0011. The contents of D15 are shifted to carry bit 2009.
In the above example, the contents shift to the left by the operand value (10) every
scan time while input relay 0001 is ON.
Use @SLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0001 turns ON.
Carry
2009

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Carry
2009

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordance with the operation
results; however, it changes immediately when another operation is executed.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-167

12

SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA

2.4 Instruction Details

Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Fetching four-digit data of the BCD digital switch (inputs 0004 through 0011
for low-order 2 digits and 0100 through 0107 for high-order 2 digits) to
transfer them as a counter setting value
2002

0000
LDA

$0FF0
ANDA

#04
SRA

DM0000
STA

0100
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

#08
SLA

DM0000
ORA

C004
STA
#09999
C004
0000

0001

Separate input of BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0112 to 0115 for the 1st digit, 0000 to
0003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
0001
0100
LDA

#00099
C001
0000
$F000
ANDA

2002

#12
SRA

DM0000
STA

2002

0000
LDA

$000F
ANDA

#04
SLA

DM0000
ORA

TBIN

C001
STA

2002

2002
2002

Sets C001.

Sends the data of 0112 to 0115 to internal register.

Shifts the value of internal register to right by 12 bits and writes it
into DM0000.
Sends the data of 0000 to 0003 to internal register.
Shifts the data of internal register to left by 4 bits, ORs the internal
register data and the data of DM0000, and sends the ORed data to
the internal register.
Converts the data of internal register to BIN data and writes it into
C001.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

3-168

Instruction
LD
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
LD
TBIN
CON
STA

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
0001
001 #00099 0000
2002
0100
$F000
2002
#12
DM0000
2002
0000
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000
2002

C001

RRA / @RRA / RLA / @RLA

2.4 Instruction Details

ORL LD

RRA: Rotate Right A

FUN 3
@

@RRA: Rotate Right A

#,$ FUN

ORL LD

ORL ANB

RLA: Rotate Left A

FUN 3
@

@RLA: Rotate Left A

#,$ FUN

ORL ANB

#dd
RRA

#dd
RRA

#dd
RLA

#dd
RLA

Rotates contents of internal register and

carry (2009) clockwise by operand value.
Rotates contents of internal register and
carry (2009) counterclockwise by operand
value.

Example
0000

DM0000
LDA

#01
RRA

DM0001
STA

0001

DM0010
LDA

#04
RLA

DM0011
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
RRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
RLA
CON
STA

Operand
0000
DM0000
#01
DM0001
0001
DM0010

12

#04
DM0011

Operands
#01 to #16

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

FUN

ORL

ORL

LD

ANB

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009

Turns ON when "1" enters 2009 after an RRA/RLA operation. Turns

OFF at other times.
2010
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an RRA/RLA operation.
Turns OFF at other times.
2011, 2012 No change

Description
Operation when using the RRA instruction
When input relay 0000 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal
register. The contents of the internal register and carry (2009) are rotated clockwise
by the operand value.
In the above example, the contents are rotated clockwise every scan time while
input relay 0000 is ON.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-169

SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA

2.4 Instruction Details
Use @RRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Carry
2009

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

Carry
2009

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Operation using the RLA instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal
register. The contents of the internal register and carry (2009) are rotated counterclockwise by the operand value.
In the example above, the contents are rotated counterclockwise every scan time
while input relay 0001 is ON.
Use @RLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0001 turns ON.

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Carry
2009

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Carry
2009

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordance with the operation
results; however, it changes immediately when another operation is executed.

Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count
Writes the number of error detection sensors, which are connected to input relays
(0000 to 0015) and turn ON, into DM0000.
2002

0000
LDA
FOR
#00016

2002

#01
RRA

2009

Writes the data of 0000 to 0015 into internal register.

Executes FOR-NEXT instruction 16 times.

TM10
INC

Shifts the data including carry (2009) to right, and

increments TM10 by 1 when 2009 is ON.

NEXT
2002

TM10
LDA

DM0000 #00000
LDA
STA

TM10
STA

Writes the TM10 data into DM0000, and then writes

#00000 to TM10.

Coding

3-170

Line No.
0000
0001

Instruction
LD
LDA

Operand
2002
0000

Line No.
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
LDA

0002

FOR

#00016

0011

CON

0003

LD

02002

0012

STA

0004

RRA

#01

0005

CON

0006

AND

0007

INC

0008

NEXT

Chapter 2 Instructions

0013

CON

0014

LDA

2009

0015

CON

TM10

0016

STA

Operand
2002
TM10
DM0000
#00000
TM10

COM / @COM
2.4 Instruction Details

COM: Complement
@COM: (Bit inversion)

RES ANB

FUN 0

RES ANB
@
#,$ FUN 0
5

COM

COM

Inverts contents of each bit in internal

register.

Example
DM0000
LDA

0000

COM

DM0001
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
@LDA
CON
@COM
CON
@STA

Operand
0000
DM0000

DM0001

Description

Each time input relay 0000 turns from OFF to ON, the contents of DM0000 are
transferred to the internal register. The COM instruction inverts the status of each
bit and transfers the result to DM0001.
Special utility relay 2010 turns ON when the result is "0".
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$5F5F".
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

DM0000

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 = $5F5F

COM instruction

Bit inversion

DM0001

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 = $A0A0

Note:

0000

DM0000
LDA

COM

DM0001
STA

When an every-scan type COM instruction is used, the status of bits are inverted
every scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use @COM, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown in the example.

Operands
Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN

RES

ANB

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012

No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after a COM operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
No change
No change

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-171

12

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC

2.4 Instruction Details

INC: Increment Memory

@INC: Increment Memory
DEC: Decrement Memory

nnnn
INC

SET OR
@
#,$ FUN 1
9

nnnn
INC

RES LD

nnnn
DEC

nnnn
DEC

FUN 0

@DEC: Decrement Memory

Example

SET OR

FUN 1

#,$ FUN

RES LD

Adds 1 to contents of data memory

specified by operand.
Subtracts 1 from contents of data
memory specified by operand.

DM0000
INC

0000

DM0001
DEC

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002

Instruction
LD
@INC
@DEC

Operand
0000
DM0000
DM0001

Description
Operation using the @INC instruction
Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is added to the contents of the data
memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back to the same data
memory. (In the above example, "1" is added to the contents of DM0000. DM0000 +
1 DM0000) When the data memory specified by the operand is "#65535", the
result of the addition is "#00000" so that special utility relay 2009 turns ON.

@ INC instruction
0 0

1 0

Contents of data memory specified by operand

0 0

0 1

1 is added.

0 0

1 1

Contents of data memory specified by operand

Operation using the @DEC instruction

Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is subtracted from the contents of the data
memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back to the same data
memory. (In the above example, "1" is subtracted from the contents of DM0001.
DM0001 - 1 DM0001) When the data memory specified by the operand is
"#00001", the result of the subtraction is "#00000" so that special utility relay 2010
turns ON.
When the specified data memory is "00000", the result of the subtraction is "#65535
($FFFF)" so that special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
@ DEC instruction
0 0

1 1

Contents of data memory specified by operand

0 0

0 1

1 is subtracted.

0 0

1 0

Contents of data memory specified by operand

Operands
Visual KV

KV-300

KV-10/16

KV-24/40/80

DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999

TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29

3-172

Chapter 2 Instructions

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC

2.4 Instruction Details

Key operation
FUN
@

FUN

#,$

FUN
@

FUN

#,$

SET

OR

RES

LD

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009

Turns ON when the result is "0" after an INC operation, or when the
result is "$FFFF (#65535)" after DEC operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
2010
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an INC or DEC operation. Turns OFF at other times.
2011, 2012 No change
Note: When an every-scan type INC/DEC instruction is used, INC (+1) or DEC (-1)
instruction is executed every scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use a differentiation type instruction (@INC or @DEC) to execute the instruction
only once when input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown in the example.
0000

DM0000
INC

DM0000
INC

0000

12

Tips
When using DM0000 as an UP/DOWN counter
Performs an UP count (addition) when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs a DOWN count (subtraction) when input relay 0001 turns ON.
0000

DM0000
INC

0001

DM0000
DEC

Applications of INC/DEC instructions

UP/DOWN count
Performs an UP count when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs a DOWN count when input relay 0001 turns ON.
Writes the count value into DM0000.
Reset input relay is 0005.
2008

#00000 DM0000
LDA
STA

0000

DM0000
INC

0001

DM0000
DEC

0005

#00000
DW
DM0000

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
of input relay 0000.
Decrements DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
of input relay 0001.
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005
turns ON.

Coding
Line No.
0000

Instruction
LD

Operand
2008

Line No.
0005

Instruction
@INC

Operand
DM0000

0001

LDA

#00000

0006

LD

0001

0002

CON

0007

@DEC

DM0000

0003

STA

DM0000

0008

LD

0005

0004

LD

0000

0009

DW

#00000 DM0000

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-173

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC

2.4 Instruction Details

Total count 1
Writes the total count of 4 lines (0000 to 0003) into DM0000.
Reset input relay is 0005.
2008

#00000 DM0000
LDA
STA

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

DM0000
INC

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of input relay 0000.

0001

DM0000
INC

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of input relay 0001.

0002

DM0000
INC

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of input relay 0002.

DM0000
INC

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of input relay 0003.

0000

0003
0005

#00000
DW
DM0000

Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005 turns ON.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
DW

Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000

Total count 2
Counts the number of boxes transferred on 5 production lines. Produces output
when the number becomes 100 or more.
0000

DM0000
INC

0001

DM0000
INC

0002

DM0000
INC

0003

DM0000
INC

0004

DM0000
INC

0005

$0000
DW
DM0000
2002 DM0000 #00100 2009 0500
LDA
CMP

3-174

Chapter 2 Instructions

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of

input relay 0000.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of
input relay 0001.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of
input relay 0002.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of
input relay 0003.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of
input relay 0004.
Clears DM0000 when input relay 0005
turns ON.
Turns output relay 0500 ON when value
of DM0000 is 100 or more.

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC

2.4 Instruction Details

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD

Operand
0000
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0004
DM0000
0005

Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020

Instruction
Operand
DW
#00000 DM0000
LD
2002
LDA
DM0000
CON
CMP
#00100
CON
ANB
2009
OUT
0500
END
ENDH

Programming technique
Two kinds of instructions can be used for the counting operation: a C (counter)
instruction and an INC instruction with data memory.
The following examples show how to program the total count with each instruction.
Programming with the C instruction
0005

2002

#09999 C001
C001
LDA
0000
#09999 C002
C002
LDA
0001
#09999 C003
C003
LDA
0002
#09999 C004
C004
LDA
0003
#09999 C005
C005
LDA
0004
DM0001 DM0002 DM0003 DM0004 DM0005
LDA
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

Programming with the INC instruction

with data memory

DM0001
STA

0000

DM0000
INC

DM0002
STA

0001

DM0000
INC

DM0003
STA

0002

DM0000
INC

DM0004
STA

0003

DM0000
INC

DM0005
STA

0004

DM0000
INC

DM0000
STA

0005

$0000
DW
DM0000

12

As the example of the INC instruction shows, using different instructions sometimes
simplifies the program even for the same control.
Simpler programming reduces the time for debugging.
It is convenient to use the CMP instruction for comparator outputs.
OR instruction
Compare the following two programs.
With program 1), input relays 0000 through 0004 are individually counted even when
they turn ON simultaneously.
With program 2), when some input relays 0000 through 0004 turn ON simultaneously, duplicated inputs are ignored.
Use the appropriate program according to your application.
0000

DM0000
INC

0000

0001

DM0000
INC

0001

0002

DM0000
INC

0002

0003

DM0000
INC

0003

0004

DM0000
INC

0004

1)

DM0000
INC

2)

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-175

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX

2.4 Instruction Details

MPX:

ANL LD

Multiplexer

FUN 2
@

@MPX: (4-to-16 decoder),

DMX:

Demultiplexer

#,$ FUN

ANL LD

SET ANL

FUN 1

@DMX: (16-to-4 encoder)

#,$ FUN

SET ANL

#n
MPX

#n
MPX

DMX

DMX

Converts 4-bit data of internal

register into 16-bit data. The 4-bit
data to be converted is specified as
operand.
Converts position of most significant bit with 1 in internal register
into 4-bit data.

Example
0000

0000
LDA

#1
MPX

1000
STA

0001

0100
LDA

DMX

DM0000
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
MPX
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
CON
STA

Operand
0000
0000
#1
1000
0001
0100

DM0000

Operands
#0 to #3

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

FUN

SET

RES

OR

LD

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

Operand

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012
Turns ON when no bit is ON after a DMX operation (the result is
"0"). Turns OFF at other times.

3-176

Chapter 2 Instructions

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
Operation with the MPX instruction
When input relay 0000 is ON, the ON/OFF status of input relays 0000 through 0015
is transferred to the internal register. The section of the internal register specified by
the operand (input relays 0004 through 007: 4 bits) is converted into a hexadecimal
number (0 to F). Only the bit at the position specified by the hexadecimal number is
set to "1" and other bits are set to "0". The resulting ON/OFF status is input back to
the internal register, and then output to inputs 1000 to 1015.
In the example, when the value specified by inputs 0004 to 0007 are converted into
"A", internal relay 1010 turns ON.
#3

#2

#1

Operand

#0

Internal register

1 0 1 0

No. represented by the section of the

internal register specified by operand

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Internal register

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Operation with the DMX instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the ON/OFF status of input relays 0100 through 0115
is sent to the internal register. Within the 16-bit data of the internal register, the
number corresponding to the position of the most significant bit with "1" (0 to F) is
converted into 4-bit data and input back to the internal register. The contents of the
internal register are then transferred to DM0000.
In the example, when input relay 0114 turns ON, "E" is input to DM0000.
Most significant bit with "1"
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Enter the number of the most

significant bit with "1".

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
0 to F

The value is converted into a hexadecimal number.

The DMX instruction is disabled when all bits in the internal register are OFF. In
such a case, special utility relay 2012 turns ON.

Application of MPX and DMX instructions

MPX instruction
Connect the one-digit data of a BIN digital switch to input relays 0004 through 0007.
Connect output relays 0500 through 0515 to lamps 0 to 15.
An operator turns on the lamp corresponding to the digital switch using binary
numbers.
2002

0000
LDA

#1
MPX

0500
STA

When the digital switch shows "8", output 0508 turns ON, therefore, lamp 8 lights.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-177

12

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX

2.4 Instruction Details

DMX instruction
Connect sensors 0 to 15 to input relays 0000 through 0015.
Connect output relays 0500 through 0503 to the one-digit data of a BIN indicator.
The sensors which are currently ON are shown by the BIN indicator.
* Assume that several sensors do not turn on simultaneously.
2002

0000
LDA

0500
STA

DMX

When sensor 8 is ON, the indicator shows "8".

Output of error input No. in BCD
Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 0000 to 0015 to output relays 0500 to
0507 in 2-digit BCD.
2002

0000
LDA

DMX

TBCD

$00FF
ANDA

2002

Converts the most significant bit of 16-bit data (0000 to

0015) to 4-bit BIN data and sends it to internal register.

0500
STA

Converts internal register data to BCD data, executes an

ANDA instruction, and outputs the data to 0500 to 0507.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
LD
TBCD
CON
ANDA
CON
STA

Operand
2002
0000

2002

$00FF
0500

Display of 7-segment LED

Displays the current value of counter C007 to the 7-segment LED.
Outputs from 0600 to 0615.
7-segment configuration
a

c
d

3-178

Chapter 2 Instructions

a : 0600
d : 0603
g : 0606

b : 0601
c : 0604

c : 0607
f : 0605

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX

2.4 Instruction Details

Converts the counter value to 16-bit
data using the MPX instruction.

Auto-reset
counter

C000

#00009
C000
0000

C000
LDA

#0
MPX

1000
STA

Sends internal register data to

output relays starting from 0600.

1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009

$003F
LDA

0600
STA

$0006
LDA

0600
STA

$005B
LDA

0600
STA

$004F
LDA

0600
STA

$0066
LDA

0600
STA

$006D
LDA

0600
STA

$007D
LDA

0600
STA

$0007
LDA

0600
STA

$007F
LDA

0600
STA

$006F
LDA

0600
STA

7-segment display

12

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023

Instruction
Operand
LDB
C000
C
000 #00009 0000
CON
LDA
C000
CON
MPX
#0
CON
STA
1000
LD
1000
LDA
$003F
CON
STA
0600
LD
1001
LDA
$0006
CON
STA
0600
LD
1002
LDA
$005B
CON
STA
0600
LD
1003
LDA
$004F
CON
STA
0600

Line No.
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA

Operand
1004
$0066

Chapter 2 Instructions

0600
1005
$006D
0600
1006
$007D
0600
1007
$0007
0600
1008
$007F
0600
1009
$006F
0600

3-179

TBCD / @TBCD / TBIN / @TBIN

2.4 Instruction Details

LDB LD

TBCD: Transfer BCD

FUN 4

@TBCD: Transfer BCD

LDB LD

LDB AND

TBIN: Transfer BIN

FUN 4
@

@TBIN: Transfer BIN

Example

#,$ FUN

#,$ FUN

0000
0001

LDB AND

TBCD

TBCD

TBIN

TBIN

DM0000
LDA

TBCD

DM0001
STA

DM0010
LDA

TBIN

DM0011
STA

Converts contents of internal register

(16-bit binary) into 4-digit BCD data.

Converts contents of internal register

(4-bit binary) into 16-digit BCD data.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
@TBCD
CON
@STA
LD
LDA
CON
@TBIN
CON
@STA

Operand
0000
DM0000

DM0001
0001
DM0010

DM0011

Operands
Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

#,$

FUN
FUN

LDB

LDB

FUN

LD

AND

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register are greater
than "$270F (#09999)" before TBCD operation, or when the
contents of the internal register are not BCD data before the
TBIN operation (In these cases, the TBCD or TBIN instruction
will not be executed.). Turns OFF at other times.

3-180

Chapter 2 Instructions

TBCD / @TBCD / TBIN / @TBIN

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
Operation using the TBCD instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the
internal register. The contents of the internal register (16-bit binary data) are converted into 4-digit BCD data, which is input back to the internal register, and then
transferred to DM0001.
216

20

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

Data is converted into BCD of "0" through "9999".

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
103
(0)

102
(0)

101
(2)

100
(4)

Operation using the TBIN instruction

When input relay 0001 turns ON, the contents of DM0010 are transferred to the
internal register. The contents of the internal register (4-digit BCD data) are converted into 16-bit binary data, which is input back to the internal register, and then
transferred to DM0011.
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
102
103
101
100
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

12

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Data is converted into binary number of "0" through "9999".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Note 1: The TBCD instruction can only convert data up to "#09999". When the
conversion of data of "#10000" or greater is attempted, special utility relay 2012
turns ON and the conversion is disabled.
Note 2: When the data in the internal register is not BCD data, special utility relay
2012 turns ON and the TBIN instruction is disabled.

Applications of TBCD instruction

Output of 4-digit BCD data
Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 0700 to 0715 in 4-digit BCD data.
0001
2002

C001
LDA

TBCD

#09999
C001
0000
0700
STA

Sets C001.
Converts current value of C001 into BCD data,
and outputs it to 0700 to 0715.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA

Operand
0001
001 #00009 0000
2002
C001

0700

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-181

TBCD / @TBCD / TBIN / @TBIN

2.4 Instruction Details

Output of 8-digit BCD data
Outputs the calculated product of DM0000 x DM0001 (0 to 99999999) in BCD of 8
digits at maximum as below:
High-order 4-digit BCD data To 0600 to 0615
Low-order 4-digit BCD data To 0500 to 0515
DM0000 x DM0001 =

Internal register

TM00

High-order 4 digits Low-order 4 digits

Internal register

TM00

TM00

#10000
... TM01

Internal register

High-order 4 digits

Low-order 4 digits

Remainder

Display

0600 to 0615
High-order 4 digits
2002

0500 to 0515
Low-order 4 digits

DM0000 DM0001 #10000 DM0101

LDA
MUL
DIV
STA
DM0101
LDA

TBCD

TM01
LDA

0500
STA

TBCD

0600
STA

Coding

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
CON
LDA

Operand
2002
DM0000
DM0001
#10000
DM0101
TM01

Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019

Instruction
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA

Operand

0500
DM0101

0600

Application of TBIN instruction

Input of 4-digit BCD data
Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (0400 to 0415) as the counter C001 value.
2002

0400
LDA

TBIN

C001
STA
#09999
C001
0000

0001

Converts data of 0400 to 0415 to BIN data and writes

into C001.
Sets C001

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

3-182

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C

Chapter 2 Instructions

Operand
2002
0400

C001
0001
001 #09999 0000

ASC / @ASC / RASC / @RASC

2.4 Instruction Details

RES ANL

ASC: ASCII Convert

@ASC: ASCII Convert
RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert
@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert

Example

ASC

RES ANL
@
#,$ FUN 0
2

ASC

ORL ANL

RASC

RASC

FUN 0

FUN 3
@

#,$ FUN

0000
0001

ORL ANL

DM0000
LDA

ASC

DM0001
STA

DM0010
LDA

RASC

DM0011
STA

Converts contents of lower order byte

of internal register into 2-digit ASCII
code.
Converts 2-digit ASCII into byte data
representing 2-digit hex number.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
@ASC
CON
@STA
LD
LDA
CON
@RASC
CON
@STA

Operand
0000
DM0000

DM0001
0001
DM0010

12

DM0011

Operands
Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN
FUN

#,$

FUN

RES

ORL

ANL

ANL

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012

Turns ON when the high- and low-order 8-bit value is not within
the range of "$30" to "$39" and "$41" to "$46", respectively,
before the RASC instruction is executed (In this case, the RASC
instruction will not be executed.). Turns OFF at other times.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-183

ASC / @ASC / RASC / @RASC

2.4 Instruction Details

Description
Operation using the ASC instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the
internal register. The contents of the internal register (low-order 8-bit, 2-digit numerical value) are converted into 2-digit ASCII code. This 2-digit code is input back to the
internal register, and then transferred to DM0001.
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Operation using the RASC instruction

When input relay 0001 turns ON, the contents of DM0010 are transferred to the
internal register. The contents of the internal register (2-digit ASCII code) is converted into a low-order 8-bit, 2-digit numeric value. This 2-digit numeric value is input
back to the internal register, then transferred to DM0011..
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

The value is converted only when the high- and low-order 8-bit value of the internal
register is within the range of "$30" to "$39" and "$41" to "$46", respectively, before
the conversion. (When either of the high- or low-order 8-bit value is not within the
range, the conversion is disabled. In this case, special utility relay 2012 turns ON.)
Example of conversion between hex and ASCII numbers
Hex number

3-184

Bit configuration

Code

Bit configuration

$30

$31

$32

$33

$34

$35

$36

$37

$38

$39

$41

$42

$43

$44

$45

$46

Chapter 2 Instructions

ROOT / @ROOT

2.4 Instruction Details

ROOT: Square Root

ORL ORB

FUN 3

@ROOT: Square Root

#,$ FUN

ORL ORB

ROOT

ROOT

Takes square root of 32-bit data (TM00:

higher order byte, internal register: lower
order byte), and inputs result back to same
register.

Example
0000 DM0001
LDA

TM00
STA

DM0000
LDA

ROOT

DM0100
STA

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

LDA

DM0001

0002

CON

0003

STA

0004

CON

0005

LDA

0006

CON

0007

ROOT

0008

CON

0009

STA

TM00
DM0000

DM0100

12

Description

The ROOT instruction takes the square root of 32-bit data (binary number) of
which the high-order 16 bits are contained in DM0001 and low-order 16 bits are
contained in DM0000, and then input the result to DM0100.
The figures to the right the decimal point of the obtained square root are omitted,
and the result is input back to the same register.
When the result is 0, special utility relay No. 2010 turns ON.
The ROOT instruction takes the square root of a 32-bit numerical value. In this
case, the high-order 16 bits are contained in TM00, and the low-order 16 bits are
contained in the internal register.

TM00

Internal register

Higher order 16 bits

Lower order 16 bits

Internal register

Operands

Key operation
FUN
@

#,$

FUN

ORL

ORB

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-185

2.4 Instruction Details

Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by arithmetic

instructions (1/3)
Instruction
DATA
MEMORY
WRITE
3-136

DW

Operand

A<0
2009

A=0
2010

A>0
2011

Error
2012

$,# constant

Relay No.

LOAD A

LDA

Timer/counter No.

3-140

[FUN23]

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

STORE A

3-140
COMPARE

3-146
ADD

3-150

Mnemonic

SUBTRACT

3-150
MULTIPLY

3-150
DIVIDE

3-150
AND A

3-159

Relay No.

STA

Timer/counter No.

[FUN42]

Data memory No.

# TM

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

CMP
[FUN04]
ADD
[FUN00]
SUB
[FUN46]
MUL
[FUN28]
DIV
[FUN11]
ANDA
[FUN01]

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

H9

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

: No change in arithmetic flag

Refer to the description of each instruction for details of the operating conditions of the flag.

3-186

Chapter 2 Instructions

2.4 Instruction Details

Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by arithmetic

instructions (2/3)
Instruction
OR A

3-161
EXCLUSIVE
OR A

3-164
SHIFT
RIGHT A
3-166
SHIFT
LEFT A
3-166
ROTATE
RIGHT A
3-169
ROTATE
LEFT A
3-169
COMPLEMENT
3-171
INCREMENT
MEMORY
3-172
DECREMENT
MEMORY
3-172
MULTIPLEXER
3-176
DEMULTIPLEXER
3-176
TRANSFER
BCD
3-180
TRANSFER
BIN
3-180
ASCII
CONVERT
3-183
REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT
3-183
SQUARE
ROOT
3-185
TRIMMER
SETTING
3-138

Mnemonic
ORA
[FUN31]
EORA
[FUN15]
SRA
[FUN41]
SLA
[FUN40]
RRA
[FUN37]
RLA
[FUN40]

Operand

A<0
2009

A=0
2010

A>0
2011

Error
2012

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

Data memory No.

$,# constant

# TM

Number of shifts

Number of shift

Number of rotations

Number of rotations

COM
[FUN05]
INC
[FUN19]
DEC
[FUN07]
MPX
[FUN27]
DMX
[FUN12]
TBCD
[FUN47]
TBIN
[FUN48]
ASC
[FUN02]
RASC
[FUN32]
ROOT
[FUN36]
TMIN
[FUN50]

12
Data memory No.

Data memory No.

Digit No.

: No change in arithmetic flag

Refer to the description of each instruction for details of the operating conditions of the flag.

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-187

2.4 Instruction Details

Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by arithmetic

instructions (3/3)
1 When the result of COMPARE is negative, the relay turns ON. When the result is
not negative, the relay remains OFF.
2 When the result of COMPARE is "0", the relay turns ON. When the result is not
"0", the relay remains OFF.
3 When the result of COMPARE is positive, the relay turns ON. When the result is
not positive, the relay remains OFF.
4 When the result of the arithmetic operation exceeds the 16-bit range ($FFFF),
the relay turns ON. When the result is within the 16-bit range, the relay remains
OFF.
5 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, the data in the internal register is
"0", the relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
6 When the result of the arithmetic operation is negative, the relay turns ON.
When the result is not negative, the relay remains OFF.
7 When the result of the arithmetic operation is positive, the relay turns ON.
When the result is not positive, the relay remains OFF.
8 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, all of the 32 bits are "0", the relay
turns ON. When any of them is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
9 When the divisor is "0", in the division, the relay turns ON. In this case, DIVIDE is
not executed.

0 When, as a result of SHIFT or ROTATE, "1" is entered into 2009, it turns ON.
When "1" is not entered, it remains OFF.
A When as a result of INCREMENT MEMORY, the data of the data memory is "0",
the relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
B When as a result of DECREMENT MEMORY, the data of the data memory
EXCEEDS 16 BIT RANGE ($FFFF), the relay turns ON. When the data is within
the 16-bit range, the relay remains OFF.
C When there is no "ON" bit in the internal register at execution of
DEMULTIPLEXER, the relay turns ON. (In this case, "0" is entered in the internal
register.) When there is a "ON" bit(s), the relay remains OFF.
D When the data in the internal register exceeds $270F (#09999) at execution of
TRANSFER BCD, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFER BCD is not
executed.) When the data does not exceed $270F, the relay remains OFF.
E When the data in the internal register is not BCD data at execution of TRANSFER BIN, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFER BIN is not executed.)
When the data is BCD, the relay remains OFF.
F When the higher-order byte or lower-order byte in the internal register is respectively not within the range of $30 through $39, or the range of $41 through $46 at
execution of REVERSE ASCII CONVERT, the relay turns ON. (In this case,
REVERSE ASCII CONVERT is not executed.)
When the value is within the range, the relay remains OFF.
G When the input value for TRIMMER SETTING is "0", the relay turns ON.
When the value is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
H During indirect addressing, there is no data memory or relay by the number
specified by "TMxx".
I When the result of the arithmetic operation exceeds the 16-bit range, the relay
turns ON. When the result is within the 16-bit range, the relay remains OFF.

3-188

Chapter 2 Instructions

2.5 Programming Notes

2.5 Programming Notes

This section describes important points and precautions for creating ladder programs.

Circuits that must be modified

1. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmed. Modify it as shown on the
right.
A

0500

0500

E
C

A
C

2. Output is disabled in 0500 in the circuit shown below left. By modifying it as

shown on the right, output of one scan only is disabled.
A

1000

1000

0500

0500

1000

1000

12
3. If the same coil is used in two positions, the latter position has priority and the
coil in the former position is ignored.
A

0500

0500

0500

4. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmed. Modify it as shown on the
right.
A

0500

0500

5. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmed. Modify it as shown on the
right.
A
C

0500

D
E

0500

A
0501

0501

Chapter 2 Instructions

3-189

2.5 Programming Notes

Programming precautions
1. A coil output or timer/counter cannot be connected directly from a bus. When an
output coil or a timer/counter is required, insert a 'b' contact of an unused internal
utility relay, a 'b' contact of an unused special utility relay, or a special utility relay
2002 (always ON) as a dummy.
0500

0500
2002

#0010
T000

#0010
T000

2. A contact cannot be connected to an output line.

A

0500

3. Make sure that every contact/coil is located on a path from a bus to an output
line. Make sure that there are no unconnected portions.
A

B
C
0500

4. Make sure that illegal short-circuits are not generated in parallel connections.
0500
A

5. Circuits including output coils cannot be connected in parallel.

A

0501

0500

However, parallel connection is enabled when each circuit in parallel connection

is connected to an output line.
A

B
D

0500
0501

6 . When the following program is entered with the programming support software
and sent to the KV, and then read from the KV with the software, reading is
disabled due to a "Reverse Compilation Error".
When a return is included in parallel connection in a ladder program, a
decompilation (reverse compilation) error is generated as shown below.
To prevent this error, change the ladder diagram to eliminate the return, or
separate the parallel connection.

3-190

Chapter 2 Instructions

Visual KV
Series

Chapter 3
Interrupts
The interrupt processing function executes an interrupt program when an external
input or request from the high-speed counter comparator (interrupt factor) is encountered during KV operation.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as well as inputs and outputs
encountered during interrupt processing.
For KV-10/80 Series, see Chapter 6.
3.1

Interrupt Instructions ...................................................................... 3-192

3.2

Interrupt Processing ....................................................................... 3-194

3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4

Interrupt Processing ...............................................................................

Types of Interrupts .................................................................................
Interrupt Priority ......................................................................................
Interrupt Program ...................................................................................

3-194
3-195
3-196
3-196

3.3

Direct Input/Output .......................................................................... 3-197

3.3.1
3.3.2

Direct Input ............................................................................................. 3-197

Direct Output .......................................................................................... 3-197

3.4

Applications of Interrupt Programs ............................................ 3-198

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4

Interrupt with a Signal Converter ............................................................

Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ......................................................
Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses ......................................
Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between
Two Points .............................................................................................

3-198
3-199
3-200
3-201

3.1 Interrupt Instructions

3.1 Interrupt Instructions

Visual KV
Series

This section describes the INT, RETI, DI, and EI instructions used for interrupt
processing.

INT: Interrupt

FUN

ANL RES

INT
nnnn

RETI: Return Interrupt

ORL LDB

RETI

FUN

Executes interrupt between INT and RETI

instructions at rising or falling edge of input
specified by operand.

Represents termination of interrupts.

Example
Coding for normal input

a)

0000

Normal
input

0000

#00020
T000

0500

T000

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

0500

(Input ON time: 10 ms min.)

Instruction
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT

Operand
0000
0500
00 #00020
T000
0500

Coding for interrupt input

b)
Interrupt
input

2008

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

EI

0000

2002

HSP
0000

1000

#00020
T000
0500

T0

1000
(RES)
END
INT
0000

2002

1000

RETI

Instruction
LD
EI
LD
HSP
LD
OR
TMR
OUT
LD
RES
END
INT
LD
OUT
RETI
ENDH

Operand
2008
2002
0000
1000
0500
000 #00020
0500
T0
1000
0000
2002
1000

ENDH
(Input ON time: 10 s min.)

Description

Example a) shows a normal input and is used when input relay 0000 turns ON
longer than the input time constant (10 ms).
Example b) is used when input relay 0000 turns ON shorter than the scan time.

Operands
0000 to 0003
CTC0 to CTC3

Key operation

3-192

FUN

ANL

FUN

ORL

2
3

Chapter 3 Interrupts

RES

LDB

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

3.1 Interrupt Instructions

DI: Interrupt Disabled

FUN

RES AND

DI

Disables execution of interrupt.

EI: Interrupt Enabled

FUN

SET ORL

EI

Enables execution of interrupt.

8
3

Visual KV
Series

Example

1000
EI
1000
DI

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001

0021
0022

Instruction
LD
EI

LDB
DI

Operand
0000

1000

Description

When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled.

When 1000 is OFF, execution of interrupt is disabled.
Interrupts are enabled between EI instruction and DI instruction.
Once an EI instruction is executed, an interrupt is enabled until a DI instruction is
executed.
Any interrupt is disabled when the Visual KV Series starts operation.
The DI instruction disables execution of an interrupt. Use this instruction to
temporarily disable an interrupt.
The EI instruction enables execution of an interrupt. Use this instruction to
release an interrupt that was disabled by a DI instruction.
To execute another interrupt during execution of the previous interrupt, include EI
instruction in this first interrupt. EI-DI instruction set can be nested to four levels.

Note 1: When any interrupt occurs between DI and EI instructions (interrupt disabled
period), the disabled interrupt is stored (to 8 levels max.). The stored interrupt is
executed as soon as an EI instruction is executed.
Note 2: If an INT CTC instruction is stored before a RES CTC instruction is executed, the stored INT CTC is deleted.

Operands
Key operation
FUN

RES

AND

FUN

SET

ORL

0
1

ENT

ENT

R-SRCH

R-SRCH

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3-193

13

3.2 Interrupt Processing

3.2 Interrupt Processing

Visual KV
Series

This section describes interrupt processing.

3.2.1 Interrupt Processing

Outline
Normally, a PLC processes a ladder sequence program by repeating the steps of
input processing, program execution, and output processing. Therefore, signals
which are shorter than the scan time cannot be received.
When the interrupt processing function is used, a process can be executed at the
instant of the interrupt, independent of the scan time.
When any interrupt occurs, the Visual KV series suspends the currently executed
program and executes the interrupt program in accordance with the interrupt factor.
When the interrupt program completes, the Visual KV resumes execution of the
suspended program.

For more about scan time, refer to "1.1.2 Scan Time" (p. 3-3).

Input
processing
Direct input *
Interrupt input
Scan
time

Program
execution

(0000 to 0015)

Interrupt
processing

Return to the next

line of the interrupt.

Direct output

Output
processing

(0500 to 0503)

Direct input/output
The direct input/output functions are used during interrupt processing. Direct input
allows the KV PLC to fetch the input status of input relays 0000 through 0015 (KV10xx: 0000-0005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009) during execution of the interrupt program.
Direct output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the ON/OFF status of output relays
0500 through 0503 during execution of the interrupt program.
No special setting is required to use the direct input/output functions. The functions
can be used only by using the devices assigned for direct input/output within the
interrupt program.

Executing interrupts
The INT (Interrupt) instruction is used to execute an interrupt. Since an interrupt is
disabled at the start of operation, it is necessary to execute an EI (Interrupt enable)
instruction before using the INT instruction. In addition, the input time constant
should be set shorter by using the HSP instruction (to 10 s) or by specifying the
desired value in DM1940 and turning ON special utility relay 2813.

For more about the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function" (p. 323).

2002
2008
EI

3-194

Chapter 3 Interrupts

#00000
DW
DM1940

2813
SET

EI
or

2002

HSP
0000

3.2 Interrupt Processing

3.2.2 Types of Interrupts

Interrupt by an external input

This interrupt is executed by input relays 0000 through 0003. Use the special utility
relay to specify the polarity of the interrupt factor to a rising or falling edge.

Visual KV
Series

Interrupts can be divided into two types: an interrupt by an external input, and an
interrupt by the high-speed counter comparator. This section describes both of these
interrupt types.

Interrupt by the high-speed counter comparator

This interrupt is executed when the current value of the high-speed counter (CTH)
matches the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator (CTC).

Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input

Turn ON the appropriate special utility relay to specify the interrupt factor to a rising
or falling edge.
The interrupt polarity can be changed as follows by setting special utility relays
2402/2403 (INT0), 2404/2405 (INT1), 2410/2411 (INT2), and 2412/2413 (INT3).
Interrupt
type

INT0

Relay
No.

2402

Status

Relay
No.

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

2403

ON

INT1

INT2

INT3

2404

2410

2412

Interrupt occurs at falling edge.

Interrupt occurs at both rising and falling edges.

OFF
OFF

2405

Interrupt occurs at rising edge.

ON

ON
OFF

Description

ON

OFF

13

Interrupt occurs at rising edge.

ON

Interrupt occurs at falling edge.

ON

ON

Interrupt occurs at both rising and falling edges.

OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

2411

OFF

Interrupt occurs at falling edge.

Interrupt occurs at both rising and falling edges.

ON

ON
OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

2413

Interrupt occurs at rising edge.

ON

OFF

ON

CAUTION

Status

Interrupt occurs at rising edge.

ON

Interrupt occurs at falling edge.

ON

Interrupt occurs at both rising and falling edges.

Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utility relays ON/OFF.

Input capture
Each external interrupt factor is provided with the input capture function. This is a
function which writes the value of the high-speed counter into the data memory
when an interrupt occurs. Without any particular settings, the value of the highspeed counter is automatically transferred to DM1928 through DM1935 when an
interrupt occurs.
External interrupt factor

Description

Occurrence of INT0

Value of CTH0 is written to DM1928 (low-order bits)

and DM1929 (high-order bits)

Occurrence of INT1

Value of CTH0 is written to DM1930 (low-order bits)

and DM1931 (high-order bits)

Occurrence of INT2

Value of CTH1 is written to DM1932 (low-order bits)

and DM1933 (high-order bits)

Occurrence of INT3

Value of CTH1 is written to DM1934 (low-order bits)

and DM1935 (high-order bits)

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3-195

3.2 Interrupt Processing

CAUTION

Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utility relays ON/OFF.

The input capture function stores the high-order bit data only when the 24bit high-speed counter is used. The data is undefined when the 16-bit highspeed counter is used.

Visual KV
Series

"4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221)

Timing of the input capture execution depends on the input polarity setting
specified with special utility relays 2402 through 2405 and 2410 through
2413.

3.2.3 Interrupt Priority

When many interrupts occur sequentially, priority is given to the interrupt which
occurs earlier.
When two or more interrupts occur simultaneously, priority is given in the order of
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, CTC2, CTC3, CTC0, and CTC1.
Note 1: While one interrupt is being executed, other interrupts are disabled. (Multilevel interrupts are possible by placing an EI instruction within an interrupt routine.)
Note 2: When other interrupts occur during execution of an interrupt, other interrupts
are stored up to 8 levels deep. The stored interrupts are executed after completion
of the previous interrupt, according to the priority order. However, an interrupt which
uses the same device as a previous interrupt cannot be stored.

3.2.4 Interrupt Program

The interrupt program is a program which is executed by an interrupt. It is necessary
to execute an EI (Interrupt enabled) instruction before executing an interrupt program.
To temporarily disable an interrupt, execute a DI (Interrupt disabled) instruction.
When an interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts are not executed but stored
until the next EI instruction.

"EI instruction", "DI instruction" (p. 3-193)

Example of an interrupt program

2008
EI
HSP
0000

An interrupt program is not executed unless an EI instruction is executed.

Set the input time constant shorter by using the HSP instruction
(to 10 s) or by turning ON special utility relay 2813.

END
INT
0000

Write the interrupt program between the END and ENDH

instructions.
RETI
ENDH

Note 1: To shorten the input time constant, use the HSP instruction (to 10 s) or
specify the desired value in DM1940 and turn ON special utility relay 2813.
Note 2: For more about the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant
Change Function" (p. 3-23).
Note 3: Use SET-RES instructions instead of OUT-OUTB instructions within interrupt programs.
The following instructions cannot be used within interrupt programs:
TMR, TMH, TMS, DIFU, DIFD, W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
HKEY, ITVL, @xxxx (differentiation type instructions), C, UDC, SFT

3-196

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3.3 Direct Input/Output

3.3 Direct Input/Output

3.3.1 Direct Input
The direct input function is used during interrupt processing. Direct input allows the
KV PLC to fetch the input status of the input relays during execution of the interrupt
program.

Visual KV
Series

This section describes direct input and output.

Direct input is available only with input relays 0000 through 0015 (KV-10xx: 00000005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009). (KV-300: 0000-0005)

The input time constant must be set to 10 s by using the HSP instruction or by
turning ON special utility relay 2813.
The direct input data is effective only within the interrupt program so that the
internal utility relay must be provided.
2008
EI
2002

HSP
0000
HSP
0005

1000

0500

END
INT
0000
0005

13

1000
SET
RETI
ENDH

3.3.2 Direct Output

Direct output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the ON/OFF status of output relays
during execution of the interrupt program. Direct output is available only with output
relays 0500 through 0503.

Direct output is not affected by the scan time.

2008
EI
2002

HSP
0000
HSP
0001
END
INT
0000

2002

0500
SET
RETI
INT
0001

2002

0501
SET
RETI
ENDH

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3-197

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

Visual KV
Series

This section presents program examples of interrupt processing.

3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter

Outline
Converts the short pulses which are input by interrupt processing into pulses of a
constant width and then outputs them.
Scan

Input 0000

ON
OFF

ON

Output 0500

ON

ON

ON

1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

OFF

Ladder diagram
Converts the short pulses input from input relay 0000 into pulses of 1-second ON
width and then outputs them from output relay 0500.
Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second from the rising edge of input relay 0000.

2008
EI

0001
0002

HSP
0000

2002
0500

0003

#00010
T000

T0000

0500
RES
END

When power is turned on, an EI

instruction enables interrupts.
Sets the input time constant of
input 0000 to 10 s.
Turns ON output 0500 for 1
second and then turns it OFF.

0004
INT
0002

0005
2002
0006

0500
SET
RETI

0007
ENDH
0008

3-198

Chapter 3 Interrupts

When input 0000 turns

ON, output 0500 turns ON.

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter

Visual KV
Series

Outline
Uses the input value of a high-speed counter from one input relay and the ON/OFF
status of another input relay to control the ON/OFF status of an output relay.

Scan

Input 0004

ON
OFF

Input 0000

ON
OFF

Output 0500

ON
OFF

ON

Example: Filling control for medicine (tablets)

Visual KV

Sensor

13
Ladder diagram
Output relay 0500 turns ON when the input value of the high-speed counter from
input relay 0004 reaches "10000".
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 turns ON.

0001
0002
0003

2008
EI
2002
2002

0000

0010

CTH0
0004

0500
RES

INT
CTC0

0007

0009

HSP
0004

When power is turned on, an EI

instruction enables interrupts.
Sets automatic reset of CTH0.
Resets current value of CTH0.
Sets an input time constant of
input 0004 to 10 s.
Specifies CTH0 as the highspeed counter for input 0004 and
sets "10000" as the preset value
of CTC0.
Turns OFF output 0500 when
input 0000 turns ON.

END

0006

0008

CTH0
RES

# 10000
CTC0

0004
0005

2103
SET

2002

0500
SET

Executes an interrupt when the

input value of CTH0 reaches
"10000". Turns ON output 0500.

RETI
ENDH

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3-199

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses

Visual KV
Series

Outline
Measures the pulse width of the pulse input to an input relay.

ON
Sensor input 0000
OFF
Pulse width (s)

Example: Measurement of workpiece length

Sensor
Visual KV

Ladder diagram
Special utility relay 2100 is turned ON to measure the pulse width using 1-s
units.
The values when input relay 0000 is ON is written into temporary data memory
TM02, and the values when input relay 0000 is OFF is written into data memory
DM1912. The pulse width can be obtained by subtracting the value of TM02 from
the value of DM1912.
The obtained value is written into data memory DM0000 (Unit: s).

2008
0001

EI
2002

HSP
0000

2002

CTH0
2100

0002
0003

When power is turned ON, an EI

instruction enables interrupts.
Sets an input time constant of
input 0000 to 10 s.
CTH0 counts pulses with a 1-s
internal clock.

END
0004
INT
0000

0005
2403
0006
2403
0007

DM1928
LDA

TM02
STA

DM1928
LDA

TM02
SUB

KEEP
SET
2403
DM0000
STA

RES
RETI

0008
ENDH
0009

3-200

Chapter 3 Interrupts

Turns ON input 0000 to execute an

interrupt.
First, an interrupt is executed at the
rising edge of input 0000. The
current value of CTH0 stored in
DM1928 is written to TM02. Turns
ON special utility relay 2403 to
change the interrupt polarity to the
falling edge.
Next, an interrupt is executed at the
falling edge of input 0000. The
value stored in TM02 is subtracted
from the current value of CTH0
stored in DM1928, and the
obtained ON width of input 0000 is
written to DM0000. Turns OFF
special utility relay 2403 to change
the interrupt polarity to the rising
edge.

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between

Two Points

Sensor 1 input 0002

ON
OFF

Sensor 2 input 0003

ON
OFF

Visual KV
Series

Outline
Measures the period in which two input relays turn ON.

Passing time (s)

Example: Measurement of tact time

Visual KV

Sensor 1

Sensor 2

Ladder diagram
Measures the time from when input relay 0002 turns ON until input relay 0003
turn ON.
The measured value is written to data memory DM0000 (Unit: s).

2008
EI

2410
RES

2411
RES

2412
RES

2413
RES

0001
2002
0002

HSP
0002

0003

HSP
0003
2002

0004

CTH1
2200

When power is turned on, an

EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets the interrupt polarity
of inputs 0002 and 0003 to the
rising edge.
Sets the input time constant of
inputs 0002 and 0003 to 10 s.

CTH1 counts the pulses using

a 1-s internal clock.

END
0005
INT
0002

0006

RETI
0007
INT
0003

0008
2002
0009

DM1934 DM1932 DM0000

LDA
SUB
STA
RETI

0010
ENDH
0011

When INT2 is executed, the

current value of CTH1 is
automatically transferred to
DM1932 and DM1933 (Input
capture).
When INT3 is executed, the
current value of CTH1 is
automatically transferred to
DM1934 and DM1935 (Input
capture).
Subtracts the input capture
value of INT2 from that of INT3
to obtain the time it takes for
the target to pass between two
points and then writes it to
DM0000.

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3-201

13

Visual KV
Series

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

3-202

Chapter 3 Interrupts

Visual KV
Series

Chapter 4
High-speed Counters
This chapter describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators,
which allow high-speed pulse measurement and pulse output, independent of the
scan time.
For KV-10/80 Series, see Chapter 6.

4.1

High-speed Counter Instructions ................................................ 3-204

4.2

Outline of High-speed Counters .................................................. 3-206

4.2.1
4.2.2

High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators ............... 3-206

Internal Clock for High-speed Counters ................................................. 3-210

4.3

Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ...................... 3-211

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7

Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter .........................

Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator ...........................
Comparator Output ................................................................................
Count Input Method ................................................................................
Resetting the High-speed Counter .........................................................
Differences with the CTH Instruction between the
Conventional and Visual KV Series .......................................................
Applications of High-speed Counters .....................................................

4.4

Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters ......................... 3-221

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5

24-bit High-speed Counter ..................................................................... 3-221

Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed Counter ................ 3-223
Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter (single-phase input) 3-224
Ring Counter Function ........................................................................... 3-225
Applications of Ring Counters ................................................................ 3-226

4.5

Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ...................... 3-228

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6

Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function ..........................................

Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ..........................
Frequency Counter Function ..................................................................
Applications of Frequency Counters ......................................................
Cam Switch Function .............................................................................
Application of the Cam Switch ...............................................................

4.6

Direct Clock Pulse Output ............................................................. 3-237

4.6.1
4.6.2

Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output ...................................................... 3-237

Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator ............ 3-238

4.7

Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................... 3-242

4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4

Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .........................

Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .................
Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Count .......
Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down control) ........

3-211
3-211
3-211
3-212
3-214
3-216
3-217

3-228
3-229
3-231
3-232
3-233
3-236

3-242
3-245
3-249
3-251

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions

Visual KV
Series

This section describes the CTH0, CTH1, and CTC instructions, which are used for
high-speed counters.

CTH0: 16-Bit Highspeed counter

CTH

RES

CTH0
nnnn

CTH1: 16-Bit Highspeed counter

CTH

SET

CTH1
nnnn

CTC: High-speed
counter comparator

CTC

#ddddd
CTCn

16-bit (0 to 65535) up/down counters for

clock pulses with a 30-kHz input 1.
response frequency.
Can be changed to 24-bit (0 to 16777215)
counters with the MEMSW instruction. 2.
Enables 30 kHz, two-phase input through
two channels.1.
Hardware-based comparator between the
preset value and current value of the
high-speed counter.
The current value can be changed to a
preset value by external input.
1. KV-300/Visual KV only
2. Visual KV only

Example
2008
1)

2008
0000

HSP
0004
2103
SET
Input-enable relay

CTH0
RES

2)

CTH0
0004

3)

#60000
CTC0
0500
SET

CTC0
4)

0500
5)

Count input

#00030
T000

T000

CTC0
RES

0500
RES

Coding

3-204

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

0009

LD

CTC0

0001

HSP

0004

0010

SET

0500

0002

LD

2008

0011

LD

0500

0003

SET

2103

000 #00030

0004

CON

0005

RES

CTH0

0012

TMR

0013

AND

T000

0014

RES

CTC0

0006

LD

0000

0015

CON

0007

CTH0

0004

0016

RES

0008

CTC0

#6000

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

0500

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions

CTH0:

0004
2100 to 2102

CTH1:

0005
0500
2200 to 2202

CTC0 to 3:

Preset value
#00001 to #65535

Visual KV
Series

Operands

Key operation
RES

CTH

Clock input

SET

ENT
R-SRCH

CTC

Operand

Preset
value

ENT
R-SRCH

Description
1) Initializes the setting when power is turned on.
The HSP instruction sets the input time constant of input relay 0004 to 10 s.
The current value of CTH0 is reset as soon as it matches the preset value of
CTC0 when special utility relay 2103 is ON.
2) The counting is disabled when input relay 0000 is OFF. Counting starts (at 0004)
when input relay 0000 turns ON.
3) Sets "60000" as the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator.
4) When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000", output relay 0500 turns ON
and the current value is reset.
5) Turns OFF both CTC0 and 0500 for three seconds after output relay 0500 turns
ON.

Tips
Unlike software-based counters, the high-speed counter is a hardware-based,
program-independent counter. It achieves an input response frequency of 30 kHz
without being affected by the scan time.

Input relays 0004 and 0005 can independently count the pulses with a 30 kHz
input response frequency.
Two-phase encoder input can be captured through two channels (30 kHz).
CTH0 uses input from relay 0004 as phase A input and input from relay 0006 as
phase B input (KV-10xx: 0000). CTH1 uses input from 0005 as phase A input
and input from 0007 as phase B input (KV-10xx: 0001).

Note: When phase differential input is used, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
kHz can be counted, provided the pulses have a duty ratio of 1:1 (50%) and phase
difference of 90. Inputting pulses with an irregular duty ratio or phase difference will
decrease the allowable input frequency.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-205

14

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series

This section describes the outline and specifications for high-speed counters and
high-speed counter comparators featured with the Visual KV Series.

4.2.1

High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators

The high-speed counter is a hardware-based counter that can count high-speed
pulses that cannot be counted by counters written in main routines (C or UDC).
(Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be counted.). *
High-speed counter comparators are hardware-based comparators that compare
their preset value with the current value of one of the a high-speed counters.
Both counters and comparators perform processing with hardware rather than
software programs, enabling high-speed performance independent of the scan time.

Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators

The Visual KV PLC has two high-speed counters, each equipped with two highspeed counter comparators and dedicated internal clocks.
Block diagram of high-speed counters
0008 (RESET) 2.

Internal clocks*
2100 (1.0 s)
2101 (10.0 s)
2102 (100.0 s)

16-bit high-speed
counter
CTH0

Input capture device

Special utility relay

DM1928, DM1929(INT0)
DM1930, DM1931(INT1)

2103 to 2114

Control circuit
Phase A 0004
Phase B(0006)

External input
0004/0006

Internal clocks*

2200 (1.0 s)
2201 (10.0 s)
2202 (100.0s)

high-speed
counter
comparator

high-speed
counter
comparator

CTC0

CTC1

16-bit high-speed
counter
CTH1

(0007)

0005/0007

Input capture device

Special utility relay

DM1932, DM1933(INT2)
DM1934, DM1935(INT3)

2203 to 2214

Control circuit

0500

External input

INT CTC0
INT CTC1

0501

Internal connection
for external clock
Phase A
Phase B 0005

0500

high-speed
counter
comparator

high-speed
counter
comparator

CTC2

CTC3

INT CTC2
INT CTC3

0009 (RESET) 2.

1. With the KV-10xx, the external input relay for CTH0 is 0004 (phase A)/0000
(phase B), and for CTH1 is 0005 (phase A)/0001 (phase B).
2. With the KV-10xx, the preset input relay for CTH0 is 0002, and for CTH1 is 0003.
For KV-10/80 user's
Max. response frequency: 10 kHz
* 2100 0.8 s
2101 6.4 s
2102 102.4 s
2200 0.4 s
2201 0.8 s
2202 3.2 s

3-206

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

List of special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0

2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114

Function
Internal clock used only for CTH0 (1 s)
Internal clock used only for CTH0 (10 s)
Internal clock used only for CTH0 (100 s)
Automatically clears CTH0 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Disables/enables direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0
turns ON.
Turns OFF direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Turns ON direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Reverses ON/OFF status of output from 0500 each time comparator
CTC0 turns ON.
Disables/enables direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC1
turns ON.
Turns OFF direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC1 turns ON.
Turns ON direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC1 turns ON.
Reverses ON/OFF status of output from 0500 each time comparator
CTC1 turns ON.
Automatically clears CTH0 when comparator CTC1 turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for CTH0.
OFF/OFF: No multiplication (1 pulse) ON/OFF: x2 OFF/ON: x4
ON/ON: 2 pulses

ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No

Visual KV
Series

Relay
No.
2100*
2101*
2102*
2103

ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No

* Read-only relay.
Multiplication
mode
2113
2114

No multiplication
(1 pulse)
OFF
OFF

x2

x4

2 pulses

ON
OFF

OFF
ON

ON
ON

List of special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1

Relay
No.
2200*
2201*
2202*
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211

14

Function
Internal clock used only for CTH1 (1 s)
Internal clock used only for CTH1 (10 s)
Internal clock used only for CTH1 (100 s)
Automatically clears CTH1 when comparator CTC2 turns ON.
Disables/enables direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC2
turns ON.
Turns OFF direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC2 turns ON.
Turns ON direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC2 turns ON.
Reverses ON/OFF status of output from 0501 each time comparator
CTC2 turns ON.
Disables/enables direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC3
turns ON.
Turns OFF direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC3 turns ON.
Turns ON direct output from 0501 when comparator CTC3 turns ON.
Reverses ON/OFF status of output from 0501 each time comparator
CTC3 turns ON.
Automatically clears CTH1 when comparator CTC3 turns ON.

ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No

2212
ON: Yes OFF: No
2213 Selects multiplication mode for CTH1.
2214 OFF/OFF: No multiplication (1 pulse) ON/OFF: x2 OFF/ON: x4 ON/ON: 2 pulses
* Read-only relay.

Multiplication
mode
2213
2214

No multiplication
(1 pulse)
OFF
OFF

x2

x4

2 pulses

ON
OFF

OFF
ON

ON
ON

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-207

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

Other special utility relays

Visual KV
Series

Relay
Function
No.
2400 Changes current value of CTH0 to preset value by external signal
2401 OFF/OFF: Not used ON/OFF: At rising edge OFF/ON: At falling edge ON/ON: Level
2406 Sets CTH0 as ring counter. ON: Yes OFF: No
2407

Ignores phase B input when no multiplication mode is used for CTH0.

ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up. OFF: Use phase B input as usual.

2408 Changes current value of CTH1 to preset value by external signal

2409 OFF/OFF: Not used ON/OFF: At rising edge OFF/ON: At falling edge ON/ON: Level
2414 Sets CTH1 as ring counter. ON: Yes OFF: No
2415

Ignores phase B input when no multiplication mode is used for CTH1.

ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up. OFF: Use phase B input as usual.

Data memory
DM No.
DM1900/DM1901
DM1902/DM1903
DM1904/DM1905
DM1906/DM1907
DM1908/DM1909
DM1910/DM1911
DM1912/DM1913
DM1914/DM1915
DM1916/DM1917
DM1918/DM1919
DM1920/DM1921
DM1922/DM1923
DM1924/DM1925
DM1926/DM1927

Description
Current value of 24-bit CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTC0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTC1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTC2 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTC3 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Current value of 24-bit CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of 24-bit CTC0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of 24-bit CTC1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of 24-bit CTC2 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of 24-bit CTC3 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.

4
Note 1: As with the internal register, the contents of data memory are stored as 16bit binary data.
Note 2: The contents of data memory are stored even when the Visual KV is turned
off or "ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR" is executed. It is stored more than 20 days
with the KV-10xx, and more than two months with other models.

Specifications of high-speed counters

The high-speed counter is a hardware-based up/down counter that counts from 0

to 65535 with an auto-reset function.

The following operands can be specified for count inputs.

High-speed counter

3-208

Operand

CTH0

2100 to 2102, 0004

CTH1

2200 to 2202, 0005, 0500

Measurement range
#00000 to 65535

High-speed counters CTH0 and CTH1 store current values only.

When input relays 0004 and 0005 are selected as operands, they can be used as
high-speed counters with a response frequency of 30 kHz.

When special utility relays 2100 through 2102 and 2200 through 2202 are selected as operands, the high-speed counters can be used as high-speed timers.

When relay 0500 is selected as an operand for CTH1, CTH1 can count the clock
pulses produced by CTH0.

CTH0 and CTH1 can be used as 24-bit high-speed counters when the MEMSW
instruction is set.

"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92), "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221), "4.3.4 Count Input
Method" (p. 3-212), "When using comparator output from other counters as count input" (p. 3-213).

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

Note 1: CTH instructions cannot be duplicated in a program. A maximum of two

counters, CTH0 and CTH1, can be used in one program.
Note 2: The operands for a high-speed counter cannot be changed during program
execution.
Note 3: When using a high-speed counter with external inputs, the input time constant must be set to 10 s with the HSP instruction or with special utility relay 2813.
(Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be counted.)
Note 4: When using input 0004 as an operand, use input 0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) for
phase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) other than for the
high-speed counter.
Note 5: When selecting no multiplication mode, and you do not want to use input
0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) as phase B input, turn ON special utility relay 2407.
Note 6: When using input 0005 as an operand, use input 0007 (KV-10xx: 0001) for
phase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0007 (KV-10xx: 0000) other than for the
high-speed counter.
Note 7: When selecting no multiplication mode, and you do not want to use input
0007 (KV-10xx: 0001) as phase B input, turn ON special utility relay 2415.
Note 8: When using the high-speed counter internal connection relay 0500, only
single-phase input is available. In this case, external input relays 0005 and 0007 for
CTH1 can be used as normal input relays.
Note 9: When using phase differential input, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
kHz can be counted, provided the pulses have a duty ratio of 1:1 (50%) and phase
difference of 90. Inputting pulses with an irregular duty ratio or phase difference will
decrease the allowable input frequency.
Note 10: The current value of the high-speed counter is stored with a built-in,
electrical double-layer capacitor for more than two months at 25C (KV-10xx: more
than 20 days). The value can also be stored in EEPROM.
"3.5 System Mode" (p.1-94).

High-speed counter comparators

The high-speed counter comparator (CTC) compares its preset value with the
value of the high-speed counter (CTH).
The CTC contact turns ON when the current value of the CTH matches the
preset value of the CTC.
Among CTC contacts, the ON/OFF status of output relays 0500 and 0501 can be
changed with hardware (direct output) or can be used to execute an interrupt. Set
special utility relays (2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2212) to change the ON/OFF status
of output relays 0500 and 0501.
The following table shows the relationship between the high-speed counters and
high-speed counter comparators.
High-speed
counter
CTH0
CTH1

High-speed counter
comparator
CTC0, CTC1
CTC2, CTC3

Preset value
range
#1 to 65535

Direct
output
0500
0501

Interrupts
INT CTC0, INT CTC1
INT CTC2, INT CTC3

Note 1: Once the high-speed counter comparator turns ON, it remains ON until a
RES instruction is encountered.
Note 2: When a high-speed counter comparator is used as an interrupt, the interrupt
is executed as soon as the current value of the high-speed counter reaches the
preset value of the comparator. At the same time, the contact for the high-speed
counter comparator automatically turns OFF.
Note 3: CTC2 or CTC3 cannot be used as comparators for CTH0; CTC0 or CTC1
cannot be used as comparators for CTH1.
Note 4: Do not specify "#00000" as the preset value for CTC0 through CTC3.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-209

Visual KV
Series

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

14

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series

Each high-speed counter (CTH) is equipped with a dedicated internal clock.

To use the internal clock, specify the appropriate relay No. as an operand for the
CTH instruction.
The internal clock or external pulses cannot be changed during program execution.
Each clock has the following count period:
High-speed counter
Relay No.

CTH0
2100
2101
2102

High-speed counter internal clock error

Absolute error: 200 ppm
Temperature coefficient: 00
Relative error between CTH0 and CTH1: 0

3-210

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

CTH1
2200
2201
2202

Period
1.0 s
10.0 s
100.0 s

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

The high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators operate using data
specified with special utility relays.

4.3.1 Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter

Visual KV
Series

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed

Counters

The current value of a high-speed counter is normally written as 16-bit data (0 to

65535).
The range of the current value for high-speed counters is as follows:
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1

Current value
0 to 65535

Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when using the 24-bit high-speed counter.

4.3.2 Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator

The preset value of a high-speed counter comparator is written as 16-bit data (0 to
65535).
The relationship between high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators
is as follows:
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1

High-speed counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
CTC2
CTC3

14

Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when using the 24-bit high-speed counter.

4.3.3 Comparator Output

The high-speed counter comparator provides the comparator output function, which
turns ON outputs as soon as the comparator turns ON, without being affected by the
scan time.
Comparator output is controlled by setting special utility relays. The relationships
among the high-speed counters, high-speed counter comparators, and special utility
relays are as follows:
High-speed
counter
CTH0
CTH1

High-speed
counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
CTC2
CTC3

Special utility
relay
2104
2108
2204
2208

Setting of special utility relay

Turns output relay 0500 ON/OFF.
Turns output relay 0500 ON/OFF.
Turns output relay 0501 ON/OFF.
Turns output relay 0501 ON/OFF.

OFF: Yes ON: No

OFF: Yes ON: No
OFF: Yes ON: No
OFF: Yes ON: No

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-211

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

4.3.4 Count Input Method

Select the input source for the high-speed counter.

Visual KV
Series

When using an internal clock as input

Three types of internal clocks are provided: 1 s, 10 s, and 100 s.
Set the desired internal clock with a special utility relay.

When using external inputs as count inputs

Set special utility relays as follows:
CTH0

Operation mode

CTH1

2113

2114

2407

2213

2214

2415

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

x2

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

x4

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

2-pulse method
(Phase A: count up, phase B: count down)

ON

ON

ON

ON

0500 (CTH1) input

No multiplication
(single-phase
input)

With direction judgement

(Count up when phase B input
0006 [0007] is OFF, count down
when ON)
Without direction judgement
(Always count up by ignoring
phase B input 0006 [0007])

Phase differential
input

Operation mode
The counting method can be selected from the following when external inputs are
used.
The ring counter function is available for each counting method.

For more about the ring counter, refer to "4.4.4 Ring Counter Function" (p. 3-225).

Types of operation modes

No multiplication mode (single-phase input)
Counts up at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is OFF.
Counts down at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is ON.

With direction judgement (Special utility relay 2407: OFF)

(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

(Counter value)
CTH0

Without direction judgement (Special utility relay 2407: ON)

(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

(Counter value)
CTH0

Phase B input can be ignored by turning ON special utility relay 2407 (for CTH0) or
2415 (for CTH1).

3-212

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Double (x2) mode:

(Phase B)
0006

ON
OFF

Visual KV
Series

(Phase A)
0004

Counts up/down based on the phase difference

between two-phase pulse inputs (phase A and
phase B).

ON
OFF

(Counter value)
CTH0
0

Quadruple (x4) mode:

(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006

Counts up/down based on the phase difference

between two-phase pulse inputs (phase A and
phase B).

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

(Counter value)
CTH0
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2-pulse method mode: Counts up at the rising edge of phase A and

counts down at the rising edge of phase B.
(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

(Counter value)
CTH0

Count up: Rising edge of phase A

Count down: Rising edge of phase B

Note 1: Use SET-RES instructions to set the special utility relays.

Note 2: When using phase differential input, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
kHz can be counted, provided the pulses have a duty ratio of 1:1 (50%) and phase
difference of 90. Inputting pulses with an irregular duty ratio or phase difference will
decrease the allowable input frequency.
When using comparator output from other counters as count input
When relay 0500 is specified as the operand for CTH1, the pulses produced by
CTH0 can be directly output from 0500 to CTH1.
In this case, input relays 0005 (phase A) and 0007 (phase B) for CTH1 can be used
as normal input relays.
ON

0500
OFF

(Counter value)

CTH1

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-213

14

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series

4.3.5 Resetting the High-speed Counter

Reset is an operation used to set the current value of a high-speed counter to "0".
Four types of reset operations are available: reset with input-enable relay, reset with
external input, reset automatically after counting up, and reset with the RES CTH
instruction.

Automatic reset after counting up

Resets the counter value as soon as the preset value matches the current value
(CTC = CTH).
This reset operation is independent of the scan time.
High-speed
counter

High-speed
counter
comparator

Relay No.

Operation

CTC0

2103

CTC1

2112

When special utility relays 2103 and 2112 are

turned ON, the current CTH0 value is reset as
soon as it matches the CTC0 or CTC1 preset
value.

CTC2

2203

CTC3

2212

CTH0

CTH1

When special utility relays 2203 and 2212 are

turned ON, the current CTH1 value is reset as
soon as it matches the CTC2 or CTC3 preset
value.

Note: Do not specify the same values for CTC0 and 1 (2 and 3) to automatically
reset the counter with both comparators.
Scan

CTH

CTH = CTC

CTH is reset when CTH value equals CTC value.

Reset with the RES CTH instruction

Resets the counter by writing a RES CTH instruction to the program.
This reset operation is dependent on the scan time.
Scan
CTH

Execution of RES CTH instruction

CTH is reset by the output process of the scan which executes the RES CTH
instruction.

Reset with the input-enable relay

Resets the counter at execution of CTH instruction during the scan after the inputenable relay is turned OFF.
This reset operation is dependent on the scan time.
Scan
Input-enable relay
for CTH instruction
CTH
Execution of CTH instruction

3-214

CTH is reset at execution of the CTH instruction during the scan after the inputenable relay turns OFF.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Resets the counter at the instant the external reset input relay turns ON.
The external reset is assigned to input relay 0008 (KV-10xx: 0002) for CTH0, and
input relay 0009 (KV-10xx: 0003) for CTH1.
The timing of the reset can be changed by setting relays 2400 and 2401 (for CTH0)
or 2408 and 2409 (for CTH1) as follows.
This reset operation is independent of the scan time.
High-speed
counter

CTH0

Relay No.

Status

2400

Relay No.

2408

Operation

OFF

OFF

Disables external reset operation.

ON

OFF

Resets counter at rising edge of input

0008 (KV-10xx: 0002).

ON

Resets counter at falling edge of input

0008 (KV-10xx: 0002).

ON

ON

Resets counter when input 0008

(KV-10xx: 0002) is ON.

OFF

OFF

Disables external reset operation.

OFF

Resets counter at rising edge of input

0009 (KV-10xx: 0003).

ON

Resets counter at falling edge of input

0009 (KV-10xx: 0003).

ON

Resets counter when input 0009

(KV-10xx: 0003) is ON.

OFF

2401

ON
CTH1

Status

OFF

2409

ON

Visual KV
Series

Reset with external input

Scan
External
reset input
CTH

14

CTH is reset at the instant the external reset input relay turns ON.

Preset function
The current value of CTH can be changed to any desired value by using the external
reset function of input relays 0008 (KV-10xx: 0002) (for CTH0) or 0009 (KV-10xx:
0003) (for CTH1) specified with special utility relays 2400 and 2401 (for CTH0) or
2408 and 2409 (for CTH1). (The external reset function sets the value to "0".)
Write the desired value of the preset input into the following data memories:
DM No.

Description

DM1924 (low-order bits), DM1925 (high-order bits)

Preset value for CTH0

DM1926 (low-order bits), DM1927 (high-order bits)

Preset value for CTH1

Use the STA or DW instruction to write data to the data memory.

Note 1: The preset function is available only with the external reset input. The CTH
value is reset to "0" with other resetting methods.
Note 2: Use the SET, RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 3: When 16-bit high-speed counter is used, write the preset values into
DM1924 and DM1926 only.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-215

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

4.3.6 Differences with the CTH Instruction between the

Conventional and Visual KV Series
Visual KV
Series

The Visual KV Series has some different high-speed counter operations from the
conventional KV Series [KV-10/16/24/80R(W)/T(W)].
Input-enable relay
0001

Input-enable relay

CTH0
0004

Count input

With the conventional KV Series, the current value of the high-speed counter is
reset when the CTH instruction is executed while the input-enable relay is OFF.
However, the counter continues counting until the end of the scan time. As a
result, when the input-enable relay starts counting again, the counter may already be incremented by the length of the scan time.
With the Visual KV Series, the current value of the high-speed counter is reset at
the falling edge of the input-enable relay, so that the counter does not continue
counting.

High-speed counter (CTH)

The conventional KV Series includes high-speed counter CTH0, which is an 8-bit
counter. The period of the internal clock is different from that in the new KV
Series.
The Visual KV Series allows you to reset a high-speed counter with external
inputs. Its high-speed counter CTH0 is a 16-bit counter (can also be used as 24bit counter).
With the Visual KV Series, when using the high-speed counter, the input time
constant must be set shorter by using the HSP instruction or by turning ON
special utility relay 2813.

Phase differential input

The Visual KV Series allows phase differential input for the high-speed counter.
Response frequency
The Visual KV Series provides a response frequency of 30 kHz.
High-speed counter comparator
The high-speed counter comparator turns ON the contact when its preset value
matches the current value of the high-speed counter. Consequently, the contact
may turn ON during the scan time.
Be careful when using the contact for one comparator in several points in a
program.
Special utility relay
A portion of the special utility relay assignment is different from that of the conventional KV Series.

3-216

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters

Uses two encoders to input phase differential signals to input relays 0004 and 0006,
and 0005 and 0007. Turns ON output relay 0500 if the count value of 0005 and 0007
is greater than that of 0004 and 0006 when 0004 and 0006 count "60000".

2008
EI

2113
SET

2114
RES

2213
SET

2214
RES

2002

CTH0
RES
HSP
0004

Initial setting
SET 2113
Setting for CTH0
RES 2114
SET 2213 Setting for CTH1
RES 2214

Visual KV
Series

Comparing encoder values

HSP
0005
HSP
0006
HSP
0007
0000

CTH0
0004
#60000
CTC0
CTH1
0005
END

Sets input time constant of inputs 0004,

0005, 0006, and 0007 to 10 s.

Phase differential input to inputs 0004 and

0006
Specifies preset value of CTC0 to "#60000".
Phase differential input to inputs 0005 and
0007

INT
CTC0
2002

CTH1
LDA

#60000
CMP

2009

0500
RES

2009

0500
SET
CTH0
RES

2002

CTH1
RES

Compares current value of CTH1 with

"#60000". Turns ON 0500 when value is
greater than "#60000". Turns OFF 0500
when value is smaller.

RETI
ENDH

Setting multi-level high-speed counters

Sets the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator for the high-speed
counter for input relay 0005 as follows:
#01000 DM0000
#02000 DM0001
#03000 DM0002
When the current counter value reaches one of the preset values, the respective
output turns ON as follows:
DM0000 0500 turns ON.
DM0001 0501 turns ON.
DM0002 0502 turns ON.
2008

#01000
LDA

DM0000
STA

#02000
LDA

DM0001
STA

#03000
LDA

DM0002
STA

2002

HSP
0005

0001

CTH1
0005

2002

CTH1
LDA

DM0000
CMP

2009

0500

DM0001
CMP

2009

0501

DM0002
CMP

2009

0502

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-217

14

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Cording

Visual KV
Series

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
HSP
LDB

Operand
2008
#01000
DM0000
#02000
DM0001
#03000
DM0002
2002
0005
0001

Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029

Instruction
CTH1
LD
LDA
MPS
CMP
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
ANB
OUT

Operand
0005
2002
CTH1
DM0000
2009
0500
DM001
2009
0501
DM0002
2009
0502

Clearing the current value of the high-speed counter

Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the current value reaches the preset value
"60000", clears the current value of high-speed counter CTH1 and turns ON output
relay 0502 for 3 seconds.
Cording
2203
SET

2008
2002

4
2002

CTC2

3-218

0502

#00030
T001

T001

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

CTH1
RES

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

HSP
0005

0001

SET

2203

0002

CON

CTH1
0005

0003

RES

0004

LD

2002

#60000
CTC2

0005

HSP

0005

CTC2
RES

CTH

0006

LD

2002

0007

CTH1

0005

0008

CTC2

#60000

0009

LD

CTC2

0010

OUT

0502

0011

CON

0012

TMR

0013

CON

0015

AND

T001

0016

RES

CTC2

001 #00030

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Inputs phase differential signals from input relays 0004 and 0006 and counts
pulses at CTH0.
The count value is written to DM0000.
When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000", clears the value, turns ON
output 0500, and stops counting at CTH0.
Input relay 0008 is used as an external reset.
2008
EI

2103
SET

2113
SET

2114
RES

2400
SET

2401
RES

CTH0
RES

Initial setting

Visual KV
Series

Phase differential input

HSP
0004

2002

HSP
0006
HSP
0008
CTH0
0004

0500

#60000
CTC0
2002

CTH0
LDA

DM0000
STA
END
INT
CTC0

2002

0500
SET
RETI
ENDH

Cording
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
HSP

Operand
2008

2103
2113
2114
2400
2401
CTH0
2002
0004

Line No.
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030

Instruction
HSP
HSP
LDB
CTH
CTC
LD
LDA
CON
STA
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH

Operand
0006
0008
0500
0 0004
0 #60000
2002
CTH0
DM0000
CTC0
2002
0500

Initial setting
Special utility relays
Turn ON 2013 to reset the current value of CTH0 when CTC0 turns ON.
Turn ON 2113 and turn OFF 2114 to set the high-speed counter to double (x2)
multiplication mode.
Turn ON 2400 and turn OFF 2401 to enable the external reset.

The counter is reset at the rising edge of input 0008.

Note : External reset input 0008 is set with hardware. Programming is not necessary
except for setting the external reset enable relays (2400 to ON and 2401 to OFF).

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-219

14

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

Fetching counts from encoder

Visual KV
Series

Uses the double (x2) multiplication mode to fetch phase differential input from the
encoder.
The fetched data is output as BCD data. Phase differential input: 0004, 0006 BCD
output: 0600 to 0615 (4 digits)
2008

2103
SET

2113
SET

2114
RES

CTH0
RES

2400
SET

Initial setting

HSP
0004

2002

HSP
0006
HSP
0008
CTH0
0004

0000
2002 #00000 TM00
LDA
STA

CTH0 #00002
LDA
DIV TBCD

0600
STA
END
ENDH

Cording
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand
0 0004

0000

LD

2008

0015

CTH

0001

SET

2103

0016

LD

2002

0002

CON

0017

LDA

#0000

0018

CON

0019

STA

0003

SET

0004

CON

0005

RES

0006

CON

0007

RES

0008

CON

0009

SET

0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

2113
2114
CTH0

0020

CON

0021

LDA

0022

CON

0023

DIV

2400

0024

CON

LD

2002

0025

TBCD

HSP

0004

0026

CON

HSP

0006

0027

STA

HSP

0008

0028

END

LD

0000

0029

ENDH

TM00
CTH0
#00002

0600

Initial setting
Special utility relays
Turn ON 2013 to reset the current value of CTH0 when CTC0 turns ON.
Turn ON 2113 and turn OFF 2114 to set the high-speed counter to double (x2)
multiplication mode.
Turn ON 2400 to enable the external reset.

The counter is reset at the rising edge of input 0008.

Note : The external reset input 0008 is set with hardware. Programming is not
necessary except for setting the external reset enable relay (2400 to ON).

3-220

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

This section describes the 24-bit high-speed counter and ring counter functions.

4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter

Normally, the high-speed counter operates with 16 bits. You can operate the counter
with 24 bits (0 to 16777215) using special utility relays.
Set the 24-bit operation with the MEMSW instruction.

Visual KV
Series

4.4 Extended Functions of High-speed

Counters Visual KV Series Only

"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)

MEMSW instruction: SW3

No.

Function of switch

ON

OFF

Setting 24-bit/16-bit counter

comparator for CTH0

24-bit

16-bit

MEMSW instruction: SW4

No.

Function of switch

ON

OFF

Setting 24-bit/16-bit counter

comparator for CTH1

24-bit

16-bit

The following data memories are used for 24-bit operation.

Read areas
DM No.

Description

DM No.

14

Description

DM1900

Low-order bits of current

CTH0 value

DM1906

Low-order bits of preset

CTC1 value

DM1901

High-order bits of current

CTH0 value

DM1907

High-order bits of preset

CTC1 value

DM1902

Low-order bits of current

CTH1 value

DM1908

Low-order bits of preset

CTC2 value

DM1903

High-order bits of current

CTH1 value

DM1909

High-order bits of preset

CTC2 value

DM1904

Low-order bits of preset CTC0

value

DM1910

Low-order bits of preset

CTC3 value

DM1905

High-order bits of preset

CTC0 value

DM1911

High-order bits of preset

CTC3 value

Write areas
DM No.

Description

DM No.

Description

DM1912

Low-order bits of current

CTH0 value

DM1918

Low-order bits of preset

CTC1 value

DM1913

High-order bits of current

CTH0 value

DM1919

High-order bits of preset

CTC1 value

DM1914

Low-order bits of current

CTH1 value

DM1920

Low-order bits of preset

CTC2 value

DM1915

High-order bits of current

CTH1 value

DM1921

High-order bits of preset

CTC2 value

DM1916

Low-order bits of preset

CTC0 value

DM1922

Low-order bits of preset

CTC3 value

DM1917

High-order bits of preset

CTC0 value

DM1923

High-order bits of preset

CTC3 value

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-221

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

The high-speed counter and high-speed counter comparator update the contents of
the read area of data memory each scan time.
At the start of an interrupt routine, the current value is updated. The contents of the
write area of data memory is updated with the data write operation.

Visual KV
Series

"Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator" (below) and "4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of
a 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-223)

Note 1: Use the SET, RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 2: The 16-bit/24-bit high-speed counter setting with the MEMSW instruction is
effective when the Visual KV is in RUN mode.
You must change the program to change between 16-bit and 24-bit settings.

Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator

To specify the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator, write the
value into the write area DM1916 to DM1923 and execute the STA and CTC instructions to specify or change the preset value.
When the setting or change is properly performed, the CTC read areas DM1904
through DM1911 are updated with the new values after one scan.
Changing the preset value
Change the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator using the
Access Window, programming support software, handheld programmer, or operator
panel with the following procedure.
1. Write the desired preset value into data memory.
Write the desired preset value to the CTC preset value write areas DM1916
through DM1923.
2. Change the preset value of CTC. (See the notes on the next page.)
With the Access Window
Call CTC in device mode and change the value.

With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTC with the "Edit Device CTC" [F2] option.

With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTC in the dialog box.

With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer

Change the preset value of CTC with the "TIMER COUNTER SETTING
CHANGE" function.

For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Window" (p. 1-79), "Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer" (p. 1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions" (p. 3-33).

Note 1: When the preset value of a 24-bit CTC is changed with an instruction such
as STA CTC0, the value entered as an operand is ignored but the value written in
DM1916 through DM1923 is referred to and used as the preset value.
Note 2: Be sure to write the desired value to the write area of the high-speed
counter comparator preset value (DM1916 through DM1923) before executing the
change operation (e.g., STA instruction).

3-222

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

Change the current value of the 24-bit high-speed counter with the Access Window,
programming support software, handheld programmer, or operator panel with the
following procedure.
1. Write the desired current value into data memory.
Write the desired current value to the CTH current value write areas DM1912
through DM1915.

Visual KV
Series

4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed

Counter

2. Change the current value of CTH. (See notes below.)

With the Access Window
Call CTH in device mode and change the value.

With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTH with the "Edit Device CTH" [F2] option.

With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTH in the dialog box.

With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer

Change the preset value of CTH with the "TIMER COUNTER CURRENT VALUE
CHANGE" function.

For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Window" (p.1-79), "Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions" (p.3-33).

Note 1: The current value of the high-speed counter cannot be changed in the
ladder program.
Note 2: DM1900 to DM1923, the data memories for 24-bit high-speed counters, can
be used only when a 24-bit high-speed counter is specified with the MEMSW instruction.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-223

14

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

4.4.3 Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter

(single-phase input)
Visual KV
Series

The following is a ladder program using a 24-bit high-speed counter and high-speed
counter comparator with a preset value of "1000000".
MEMSW
$0800

0001
0002
0003
0004

2008
2002

#00015 DM1917 #16960 DM1916

LDA
STA
LDA
STA
High-order 16 bits of
high-speed counter
comparator

CTH0
RES

2)

HSP
0004

3)

CTH0
0004

4)

#65535
CTC0

5)

DM1901 DM0001 DM1900 DM0000

STA
LDA
STA
LDA

6)

Low-order 16 bits of
high-speed counter
comparator

CTC0
STA
Writes preset value of
high-speed counter
comparator

2002

0005
0006

2002

0007

High-order 16 bits of
current value of highspeed counter

Low-order 16 bits of
current value of highspeed counter

0008

END
ENDH

1) Sets CTH0 as the 24-bit high-speed counter with the MEWSW instruction. (Turn
on 3 of SW3.)
2) When power is turned on, writes the preset value "1000000" of the high-speed
counter comparator (CTC0) and sets the value with the STA CTC0 instruction.

3) Sets the input time constant of input relay 0004 to 10 s.

4) Counts pulses at input relay 0004 with high-speed counter CTH0.
5) Defines a dummy high-speed counter comparator.
6) Reads the current value of CTH0 into data memory DM0000 (low-order bits) and
DM0001 (high-order bits) each scan time.

3-224

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

1)

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

4.4.4 Ring Counter Function

Visual KV
Series

Normally, the counter reads "#65535 ($FFFF)" by counting down from "0" by one.
The ring counter function is an additional function of the automatic clear function. It
reads "preset value - 1" when it counts down from "0" by one.
Operation of the ring counter function
Normal counter
0

65535

Ring counter
0

CTC1 -1

65535

( CTC3 -1)

Not used

Setting procedure
When setting the ring counter, use CTC1 for CTH0 and CTC3 for CTH1.
Set the upper limit (preset value) to CTC1 or CTC3 and turn ON special utility
relay 2406 (for CTH0) or 2414 (for CTH1). The ring counter is set to read "CTC1/
CTC3 preset value - 1" when it counts down from "0" by one.
To use the ring counter for both counting up/down operations, turn ON special
utility relay 2112 (for CTH0) or 2212 (for CTH1).
High-speed counter

High-speed counter comparator

Special utility relay

When CTH0 is used

Set "upper limit value + 1" to CTC1. Turn ON 2406.

When CTH1 is used

Set "upper limit value + 1" to CTC3. Turn ON 2414.

14

Note 1: Use the SET-RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 2: The flag or the count-up interrupt for each CTC is effective in counting up
operations, but is disabled in counting down operations.
Example: When CTC = 100
Count
up
Count
down

Turns ON.

CTC

Does not turn ON.

CTH
0

97

98

99

99

98

97

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-225

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

4.4.5 Applications of Ring Counters

When using a 16-bit high-speed counter

Visual KV
Series

The following is a ladder program that uses the ring counter of a 16-bit high-speed
counter with the preset value of "10000".

0001
0002

9999

2008
EI

2113
SET

2114
RES

2406
SET

Sets ring
Sets high-speed counter in
counter.
double (x2) multiplication mode.

2002

2112
SET

0004
HSP
0006

2002

0005
0006

0500

#00010
T000

T000

CTH0
0004

3)

#10000
CTC1

4)

0500
RES

5)

INT
CTC1

0008
0009

2)

END

0007

1)

Automatic reset
of high-speed
HSP
counter

0003
0004

CTH0
RES

2002

0010
0011

0500
SET

6)

RETI
ENDH

1) When the power is turned on, an EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets highspeed counter CTH0 in double (x2) multiplication mode, CTH0 as a ring counter,
and the high-speed counter automatic reset function at counting up. Resets the
high-speed counter.
2) Sets the input time constant for input relays 0004 and 0006 to 10 s.
3) Counts 2-phase pulses of input relays 0004 and 0006 at CTH0.
4) Sets the preset value of high-speed counter comparator CTC1 to "10000".
5) Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second and then turns OFF.
6) When CTC1 turns ON, an interrupt is executed. Output relay 0500 turns ON.

3-226

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

When using a 24-bit high-speed counter

Visual KV
Series

The following is a ladder program that uses the ring counter of a 24-bit high-speed
counter with the preset value of "100000".

99999

MEMSW
$0800

0001
0002

2008
EI

2114
RES

2406
SET

Sets high-speed
counter in double (x2)
multiplication mode.

Sets ring
counter.

CTH0
RES

2112
SET

High-order 16
bits of highspeed counter
comparator

2002

2)

Automatic reset of
high-speed counter

#00001 DM1919 #34464 DM1918

LDA
STA
LDA
STA

0003

0004

2113
SET

1)

Low-order 16
bits of highspeed counter
comparator

CTC1
STA

3)

Writes preset
value of highspeed counter
comparator.

HSP
0004
4)

HSP
0006

0005
0006

2002

0007
0008

0500

#00010
T000

T000

5)

#65535
CTC1

6)

0500
RES

7)

END

0009

INT
CTC1

0010
0011

CTH0
0004

0500
SET

2002

8)

RETI

0012

ENDH

0013

1) Sets CTH0 as a 24-bit high-speed counter using the MEMSW instruction (Turn
on 3 of SW3.).
2) When the power is turned on, an EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets highspeed counter CTH0 in double (x2) multiplication mode, CTH0 as a ring counter,
and high-speed counter automatic reset function at counting up. Resets the highspeed counter.
3) Writes the preset value "100000" of high-speed counter comparator (CTC1) for
the 24-bit high-speed counter (CTH0). Sets the preset value with the STA CTC0
instruction.
4) Sets the input time constant for input relays 0004 and 0006 to 10 s.
5) Counts 2-phase pulses of input relays 0004 and 0006 at CTH0.
6) Describes a dummy high-speed counter comparator.
7) Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second and then turns OFF.
8) When CTC1 turns ON, an interrupt is executed. Output relay 0500 turns ON.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-227

14

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed

Counters Visual KV Series Only
This section describes the specified frequency pulse output function, frequency
counter function, and cam switch function.

4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function

With high-speed counter CTH1, output pulses from output relay 0501 with the
frequency (Hz) specified in data memory DM1936. To activate this function, write the
desired value into DM1936 and turn ON special utility relay 2306.
The internal clock of the high-speed counter is automatically set to 1 s. Pulses with
duty ratio of 1:1 are output at the preset frequency obtained with the calculation
"1,000,000/2/Output frequency".
The KV performs the following operations after each scan time during the specified
frequency pulse output function.

Stops pulse output when special utility relay 2306 is turned OFF.
Sets the preset value so that pulses are output at the frequency specified with
the DM. (Pulse duty ratio: fixed to 50%)
Starts pulse output.

Pulse duty
Pulse duty is the ratio of the pulse widths between ON time and OFF time. A pulse
duty of 50% means that the pulse widths between ON time and OFF time are the
same, as follows.

ON
OFF

The ratio between ON and OFF time is 1:1.

Device used for specified frequency pulse output

Special utility relays
Relay No.

Description

2306

Use specified frequency pulse output. ON: Yes, OFF: No Function

is forced OFF when error relay 2307 turns ON.

2307

Error flag for specified frequency pulse output function.

Turns ON when contents of DM1936 is other than 16 to 50000.

Data memory
DM No.
DM1936

3-228

Description
Preset value for specified frequency pulse output is written.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

 Setting method
Set the desired output frequency (Hz) into DM1936. The available range is 16 Hz
to 50 kHz (16 to 50000).
Pulses are output when special utility relay 2306 is ON. The output is stopped
when the relay is turned OFF.
If an unacceptable frequency is specified, special utility relay 2307 (error relay)
turns ON. Special utility relay 2306 is turned OFF and pulse output is stopped.
Note 1: The available minimum frequency specified in DM1936 is 16 Hz.
Note 2: The output is stopped when a value of 15 or less is specified in DM1936.
Note 3: Starts and stops of pulse output or frequency changes are executed after
each scan.
Note 4: It takes a maximum of 200 s from when the output command is issued until
pulses are output.
Note 5: CTH1 and special utility relays 2200 through 2215 cannot be used when the
specified frequency pulse output function is used.

Visual KV
Series

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

4.5.2 Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output

Program using a digital trimmer
The following ladder program illustrates how to use a digital trimmer to output pulses
at a desired frequency (16 Hz to 10 kHz).
Pulse output is stopped when the value of the digital trimmer decreases to 15 or
less.

0001
0002
0003

2008
2002

2306
SET

#10000 DM1938
LDA
STA
0
TMIN

1)

DM1936
2)
STA
0500

2307

3)
END

0004

ENDH

0005

1) Sets the upper limit of the digital trimmer to "10000" and turns ON special utility
relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse output.
2) Sets the input value of the digital trimmer as the output frequency value.
3) Output relay 0500 turns ON when a setting error occurs.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-229

14

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series

Program for speed control

The following ladder program illustrates speed control using the specified frequency
pulse output function.
Control is started when input relay 0000 turns ON. The operation is slowed down
and then stopped when input relay 0001 turns ON.
By specifying the speed (Hz) in data memory DM0000, the program controls the
speed with a start-up speed of 16 Hz and an acceleration speed of 100 Hz/100 ms.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

0000

1000
DIFU

1000

0001

1001
DIFU

1001

1101
1100
T000

#00016 DM0000 DM1936

LDA
STA
CMP

2306
RES

1100
RES

DM1936 DM0000
LDA
CMP

2009
2011

1100
SET

1)

1101
SET

2)

1101
RES

3)

#00100
T
S 000

4)

00
CALL

5)

01
CALL
0500

2307

0008

END

0009

SBN
00

0010

2002

DM0000 DM1936 #00100

LDA
SUB
CMP

2011

TM02
STA

DM1936
LDA

TM02
ADD

7)

DM1936
STA

RET

0012

SBN
01

0013
0014

6)

DM1936 #00100 DM1936

LDA
ADD
STA

2011

0011

2010

2306
SET

T000

0006
0007

#00016 DM1936
LDA
STA

2002

DM1936 DM0000 #00100

LDA
SUB
CMP

0015
0016
0017

2011
2011

TM02
STA

DM1936
LDA

TM02
SUB

8)

DM1936
STA

DM1936 #00100 DM1936

LDA
SUB
STA
RET
ENDH

1) Sets "16" as the preset speed at the rising edge of input relay 0000. Turns ON
special utility relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse output. Then, turns
ON the operating flag.
2) Turns ON slow-down-stop flag 1101 at the rising edge of input 0001.
3) When the slow-down-stop flag turns ON, sets the preset speed to "16". When the
output frequency reaches "16", turns OFF the operation start flag, operating flag,
and slow-down-stop flag.
4) Activates a 100-ms flicker circuit while the operating flag turns ON.
5) Compares the current speed and preset speed every 100 ms. Executes subroutine 0 when the preset speed is faster, and executes subroutine 1 when the
preset speed is slower.
6) Output relay 0500 turns ON when a setting error occurs.
7) Acceleration process. When the current speed is slower than the preset speed by
less than "100", the speed is accelerated by the difference. When the difference
is "100" or more, the speed is accelerated by "100".
8) Deceleration process. When the current speed is faster than the preset speed by
less than "100", the speed is decelerated by the difference. When the difference
is "100" or more, the speed is decelerated by "100".

3-230

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

High-speed counter CTH0 is used. Write the interval (ms) of frequency measurement into data memory DM1404 and turn ON special utility relay 2305. The measurement result (Hz) is written into DM1405.
Input relay 0004 is for pulse input (single-phase input). Input relay 0006 (phase B
input) is ignored.
Devices used with the frequency counter
Special utility relays
Relay No.
2305

Visual KV
Series

4.5.3 Frequency Counter Function

Description
Use frequency counter. ON: Yes, OFF: No

Data memory
DM No.

Description

DM1404

Measurement cycle (ms) of frequency counter [1 to 1000]

DM1405

Result of frequency count (Hz) of frequency counter

Operation flow
1. Set the high-speed counter with external input. Use the END instruction and
measure how much time has elapsed since the last measurement in units of 10
s. After each scan, pulses are counted within the time specified with the data
memory. The frequency is calculated from the count value and written into data
memory.
2. When the time specified with DM1404 elapses from the last measurement, the
current value of CTH0 is fetched and divided by the elapsed time (Unit: 10 s).
The frequency is obtained with the following calculation.
Frequency (Hz) = (100,000 x Pulse count)/Elapsed time (Unit: 10 s)
3. The calculation result (Hz) is written into DM1405.
Setting method
1. Specify the counting period for the frequency counter (the interval of frequency
measurement [Unit: ms]) in data memory DM1404.
2. The preset value must be greater than the scan time. When a value smaller than
the scan time is specified, the frequency is measured each scan time.
Note 1: To use the frequency counter function, set the input time constant to 10 s
with the HSP instruction or the special utility relay. (A maximum frequency of 30 kHz
can be measured.).
Note 2: The counting start/stop or measurement result is updated after each scan.
Therefore, the counting period includes some scan time errors for the time specified
with DM1404. Set the counting period so that overflow does not occur at CTH.
Note 3: Specify the counting period so that the number of pulse inputs in one period
is between 2 and 65535, inclusive.
Note 4: Measurement may fail when the pulse period is 5000 ms or more.
Note 5: The frequency counter cannot be used when CTH0 is used in the ladder
program.
Note 6: Special utility relays concerning CTH0, CTC0/1, and the cam switch cannot
be used.
Note 7: CTH0 and the cam switch function cannot be used when the frequency
counter is used.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-231

14

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

4.5.4 Applications of Frequency Counters

Visual KV
Series

Program for basic operation of the frequency counter

Stores the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 to DM0000 every second (1000
ms). (Unit: Hz)

0001
0002
0003

2008

#01000 DM1404
LDA
STA

2002
2002

2305
SET

1)

HSP
0004

2)

DM1405 DM0000
3)
LDA
STA
END

0004

ENDH

0005

1) Sets the counting period to "1000 ms (1 second)" and turns ON special utility
relay 2305 to start the frequency counter function.
2) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 s.
3) Stores the measured frequency (Hz) into data memory DM0000.
Program for synchronous control
The following ladder program illustrates synchronous control using the frequency
counter and pulse output functions.
Measures the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 every 100 ms and outputs
pulses of the same frequency from output relay 0501.

4
0001
0002
0003
0004

2008
2002
2002
2307

0005
0006

#00100 DM1404
LDA
STA

2305
SET

2306
SET

1)

HSP
0004

2)

DM1405 DM1936
LDA
STA 3)
0500
4)
END
ENDH

1) Sets the counting period to "100 ms" and turns ON special utility relays 2305 and
2306 to start the frequency counter and the specified frequency pulse output
functions.
2) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 s.
3) Uses the measured frequency (Hz) as the preset value for the output frequency
(Hz).
4) Turns on output relay 0500 when an error occurs in the setting of the specified
frequency pulse output.

3-232

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

4.5.5 Cam Switch Function

Visual KV
Series

The cam switch function has two modes: cam switch mode, which simulates cam
operation; and multi-step comparator mode, which compares the value written in
DM1401 with multiple values.
Devices used with the cam switch function
Special utility relays
Relay No.
2314
2315
2715

Description
Start relay
Error relay
In-operation relay

The preset value in the data memory is registered at the rising edge of the start
relay. When the preset value is changed, turn OFF special utility relay 2314 once
and then turn it ON again to register the new value.
Timing diagram of cam switch function
Start relay
2314

In-operation
relay
2715

Cam switch
Stopped
function

Executed

Stopped

Operation with the ladder program.

Operation automatically executed by the Visual KV.
Description: When start relay 2314 is turned ON, the Visual KV automatically turns OFF
start relay 2314 and turns ON in-operation relay 2715 to activate the cam
switch function.
When in-operation relay 2715 is turned OFF, the cam switch function is
stopped.

:

Cam switch mode

Simulates a cam operation.
Connect an encoder to CTH0 to count pulses in double multiplication mode.
CTH0 uses input relays 0004 (phase A), 0006 (phase B) (KV-10xx: 0000), and 0008
(phase Z) (KV-10xx: 0002).
Relays are turned ON/OFF when the pulse count reaches the specified angle.
The cam switch function controls a maximum of 32 successive relays. Specify relay
Nos. with the data memory (DM1400). Each relay is turned ON/OFF once every
rotation. To turn relays ON/OFF several times in one rotation, use the OR instruction
in the ladder program.
Devices used in cam switch mode
Data memory
DM No.

Description

DM1400

Stores initial address of output relays (Values other than 1900

through 2900 whose last two digits are 00.).

DM1402

Twice the pulse numbers for one rotation of the device connected to
CTH0 (1 to 65534)

DM1406/DM1407

DM1408/ DM1409

Angle at which first output relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)
(0 to 65534)
Angle at which second relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)
(0 to 65534)

DM1468/DM1469
DM1470

Angle at which 32nd relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)

(0 to 65534)
Reserved for system use

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-233

14

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

Multi-step comparator mode

Visual KV
Series

Even a single phase incoder can be used by changing a part of the cam switch
function.
To activate the multi-step comparator mode, write the value to be compared into
data memory DM1401 to replace the CTH0 value. This value determines the resolution. If 360 is written in DM1401, and 60 is written in DM1406, the 1st relay is turned
ON at 60/360 i.e. 60.
Devices used in multi-step comparator mode
Data memory
DM No.

Description

DM1400

Stores initial address of output relays (Values other than 1900

through 2900 whose last two digits are 00.).

DM1401

Value to be compared (0 to 65534)

DM1402

Enter "65535" to use multi-stage comparator mode.

DM1406/DM1407

Preset value at which first output relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)

DM1408/ DM1409

Preset value at which second relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)

DM1468/DM1469
DM1470

Preset value at which 32nd relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)

Reserved for system use

Setting method
In cam switch mode
1. Write the initial number of output relays to be used into DM1400.
Be sure to write the initial relay number of each channel.
Example
0500, 0600: Acceptable, 0501, 0610: Unacceptable

2. Write the number of pulses in two pulse-periods of the encoder connected to

CTH0 into DM1402. (Twice the number of pulses for one rotation.)
3. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns ON (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1406. Use units of 0.1 deg. to specify the preset angle for the cam switch
mode. (Write the value of [Desired angle x 10] into data memory.)
4. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1407.
5. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns ON (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1408.
6. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1409.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 as many times as the number of relays to be used (32
relays max.).
8. Turn ON special utility relay 2314.
This relay automatically turns OFF when the cam switch function is activated.
9. Turn OFF special utility relay 2715 to stop the operation.
In multi-step comparator mode
1. Write the initial number of output relays to be used into DM1400.
Be sure to write the initial relay number of each channel.
Example
0500, 0600: Acceptable, 0501, 0610: Unacceptable
2. Write the value to be compared into DM1401, and write "65535" into DM1402.
3. Specify the preset value at which the first relay turns ON into DM1406.
4. Specify the preset value at which the first relay turns OFF into DM1407.

3-234

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

5. Specify the preset value at which the second relay turns ON into DM1408.
6. Specify the preset value at which the second relay turns OFF into DM1409.

8. Turn ON special utility relay 2314.

This relay automatically turns OFF when the cam switch function is activated.
9. Turn OFF special utility relay 2715 to stop the operation.
Note 1: When the cam switch function is used, 32 relays from the relay No. specified with DM1400 is occupied for the function regardless of whether they are used or
not. As a result, these relays cannot be used for any other purpose.
Note 2: To use the cam switch mode, set the input time constant to 10 s with the
HSP instruction or the special utility relay. (A maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be
measured.)
Note 3: When any improper value is set in data memory, the setting error occurs
and special utility relay 2315 turns ON.
Note 4: CTH0 and the frequency counter function cannot be used while the cam
switch function is being used.
Note 5: The cam switch function cannot be used when CTH0 is used in the ladder
program.
Note 6: Special utility relays concerning CHT0, CTC0/1, and the frequency counter
function cannot be used.
Note 7: The scan time is extended by a maximum of 16 ms when the cam switch
function is activated.
Note 8: The in-operation relay of the cam switch function (2715) remains ON even
when the mode is changed or the power is turned OFF.
Note 9: Use the END instruction to change relays or turn them ON/OFF.
Note 10: When the encoder is ON in cam switch mode while the KV is OFF, the
count may be shifted for the time between the start-up and phase Z input.
Note 11: The encoder count is stopped in cam switch mode while the Visual KV is
OFF. (While the Visual KV is ON, the count is continued even in PROGRAM mode.)
Note 12: When a value of 360 or more is specified as the preset angle for the cam
switch function, the value is converted into one within the range of 0 to 360 before
the control.
Example: When 500 is specified, it is converted to 140.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-235

Visual KV
Series

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 as many times as the number of relays to be used (32
relays max.).

14

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode)

Visual KV
Series

The following ladder program illustrates the basic setting of the cam switch function.
Connect the encoder with a resolution of 360 pulses.
Use output relays 0600 through 0603.
Output relay 0600: Turns ON within the range 30 to 90
Output relay 0601: Turns ON within the range 45 to 80
Output relay 0602: Turns ON within the range 70 to 150
Output relay 0603: Turns ON within the range 120 to 270
0001

2008

0002
0003

2002

#00600 DM1400 #00720 DM1402

LDA
STA
LDA
STA
#00300 #00900 #00450 #00800 #00700 #01500 #01200 #02700
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1406 DM1407 DM1408 DM1409 DM1410 DM1411 DM1412 DM1413
HSP
0004

2)

3)

0004

HSP
0006

4)

0005

HSP
0008

5)

0006
0007

0000
0001

1000
DIFU

1000

1001
DIFU

1001

2314
SET

6)

2715
RES

7)

END

0008

ENDH

0009

1)

1) Sets "0600", which is the initial number of relays used for the cam switch function, to
DM1400 and sets twice the number of pulses for one encoder rotation (360 x 2 = 720) to
DM1402.
2) Specifies the preset angles at which output relays 0600 through 0603 turn ON/OFF.
3) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 s.
4) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0006 to 10 s.
5) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0008 to 10 s.
6) The cam switch operation starts when input relay 0000 turns ON.
7) The cam switch operation stops when input relay 0001 turns ON.
3600
(360)

30 DM1406
45 DM1408
70 DM1410
80 DM1409

270
DM1413

90 DM1407
120 DM1412
150 DM1412

Timing Diagram
DM1406

1st relay 0600

ON
OFF

DM1407

DM1408

DM1409

2nd relay 0601 ON

OFF
3rd relay 0602 ON
OFF

DM1410

DM1412

4th relay 0603 ON

OFF
0

3-236

DM1411

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

90

DM1413

180

270
360
Rotation ()

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV Series Only

4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Using the high-speed counter (CTH) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC), the
KV PLC can output clock pulses directly through output relays 0500 and/or 0501
without any delays caused by the scan time.

Visual KV
Series

This section describes the outline and setting method for direct clock pulse output.

The period (frequency) and width of the pulses are determined by the period of the
internal clock used for the high-speed counter (CTH) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC).
The period of the clock pulse (frequency) can be changed with the program within
the following ranges.
Output

Internal clock

0500

0501

Range of pulse period (Frequency)

2100 (1.0 s)

20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)

2101 (10.0 s)

20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)

2102 (100.0 s)

200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.15 Hz)

2200 (1.0 s)

20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)

2201 (10.0 s)

20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)

2202 (100.0 s)

200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.15 Hz)

Pulses of the internal clock are counted with the high-speed counter (CTH). When
the number of current pulses reaches the preset value of the high-speed counter
comparator (CTC), the ON/OFF status of output relays 0500 and/or 0501 is toggled
to output direct clock pulses.
Count value
CTC

ON

ON

Note 1: The operation of output relays 0500 and 0501 are determined by setting the
special utility relays.
Note 2: For more about setting special utility relays, refer to "4.2 Outline of Highspeed Counters" on page 3-206.
Note 3: The ON/OFF status when the direct clock pulse output is started is the
same as when the last direct clock pulse output is stopped. (Initial status: OFF)
Note 4: Output relays 0500 and 0501 cannot be used in a normal program during
direct clock pulse output.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-237

14

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter

Comparator
Visual KV
Series

Changing the pulse period and width

By using two high-speed counter comparators, you can change only the pulse width
while keeping the pulse period constant, or change only the pulse period while
keeping the pulse width constant.
The following examples illustrate how the pulse width and period can be selected
with the high-speed counter comparator.
ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
ON/OFF status is set by special utility relays.
ON
OFF

Pulse width

Pulse period

Pulse width (s) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (s)

Pulse period (s) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (s)
Use the following calculation to obtain the pulse period from the frequency:
Pulse period (s) = 1,000,000/Frequency (Hz)
Example:

To output 10-kHz pulses

Pulse period = 1,000,000 10,000 = 100 s
Preset value for CTC0 = 10 2 1 = 50

Variable pulse width

The period and width of the pulse can be changed by changing the preset values of
CTC0 and CTC1.
ON/OFF status is set by special utility relays.

ON
OFF

Pulse
width

Pulse period

Pulse width (s) = CTC1 preset value x internal clock (s)

Pulse period (s) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (s)

Change CTC1 preset value to change the pulse width.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse period.

Note: The pulse width determined above is the pulse width produced inside the
Visual KV PLC. In reality, the output pulse width may vary depending on the response delay of the output circuit and the load connected to this circuit. Be sure to
determine the pulse width after monitoring the actual output waveform with an
oscilloscope. (Monitor the pulses of variable pulse width.)

3-238

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value

Pulse period
Pulse period (s) = 1,000,000 Frequency (Hz)
CTC preset value for pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio (using one comparator)
CTC preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2

Visual KV
Series

The Visual KV PLC can output a maximum clock pulse of 50 kHz.

Use the following calculations to obtain the pulse period and preset value of the
high-speed counter comparator used to output the clock pulse.

ON

Pulse
width

OFF

Pulse period

CTC preset value for pulses with variable pulse width

CTC preset value for pulse width = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC preset value for pulse period = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
ON
OFF

Pulse
width

Pulse period

Range of CTC preset value with the internal clock

Special utility relay (internal clock)

Period

Range of CTC preset value

2100

2200

1.0 s

10 to 65535

2101

2201

10.0 s

1 to 65535

2102

2202

100.0 s

1 to 65535

Note 1: Set the CTC preset value to 10 or more when the operands for the highspeed counter (CTH) is 2100 and 2200. The clock pulse output may be improper
when the preset value is set to less than 10.
Note 2: The pulse width may vary depending on the load connected to the circuit.
Be sure to determine the pulse width after monitoring actual output waveform with
an oscilloscope.
Note 3: When CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3, are used to output the clock
pulse, do not specify the same value for the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1, or of
CTC2 and CTC3.

Operation with special utility relays

Operation with special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0
The following table shows the ON/OFF status of output relay 0500 which can be
changed by setting special utility relays (2103 through 2112) at the start of operation, or by changing them during clock pulse output.
You can set desired values for the pulse period and pulse width, and can enable or
disable the direct output.
Operation of output relay 0500 when special utility relays are ON/OFF

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-239

14

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV
Series

High-speed
counter
comparator

CTC0

CTC1

Special
utility
relay

Operation when CTH0 (current value)

reaches CTC (preset value)

2103

Automatically clears current value of

CTH0

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2104

Disables/enables control of 0500.

ON:
Disable

OFF:
Enable

2105

Turns OFF direct output through 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2106

Turns ON direct output through 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2107

Reverses ON/OFF status of 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2108

Disables/enables control of 0500.

ON:
Disable

OFF:
Enable

2109

Turns OFF direct output through 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

211

Turns ON direct output through 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2111

Reverses ON/OFF status of 0500.

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2112

Automatically clears current value of

CTH0

ON: Yes

OFF: No

Setting the special utility relay

The special utility relay must be set to output the clock pulse. Set the relays in the
following manner.
Only one relay for each group can be turned ON from relays 2104 through 2107
and 2108 through 2111.
Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn relays 2103 through 2112 ON/
OFF.
Turning OFF relays 2104 or 2108 enables control of output relay 0500.
To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON relays 2103 or 2112 to automatically clear the current value of CTH0. You cannot change the pulse period
unless you turn ON relays 2103 or 2112.
Turning ON/OFF relay 2105 stops/outputs the clock pulse.

Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 2104 through 2107 or 2108
through 2111 are turned ON, priority is given to the relay with the smaller number.
Operation of output 0500 by setting special utility relays
Outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

Outputting a pulse with variable pulse width

Special utility relay settings

Special utility relay settings

2103 ON

2108 OFF

2103 ON

2108 OFF

2104 OFF

2109 OFF

2104 OFF

2109 ON

2105 OFF

2110 OFF

2105 OFF

2110 OFF

2106 OFF

2111 OFF

2106 ON

2111 OFF

2107 ON

2112 OFF

2107 OFF

2112 OFF

Count value

Count value
CTC0
CTC1

CTC0

ON

3-240

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

 Operation with special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1

The following table shows the ON/OFF status of output relay 0501 which can be
changed by setting special utility relays (2203 through 2212) at the start of operation, or by changing them during clock pulse output.
You can set desired values for the pulse period and pulse width, and can enable or
disable the direct output.
Operation of output relay 0501 when special utility relays are ON/OFF
High-speed
counter
comparator

Special
utility relay

CTC2

2203

Automatically clears current value

of CTH1

ON: Yes

OFF: No

2204

Disables/enables control of 0501.

ON:
Disable

OFF:
Enable

2205

Turns OFF direct output through

ON: Yes
0501.
Turns ON direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0501. ON: Yes
ON:
Disables/enables control of 0501. D
isable
Turns OFF direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Turns ON direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0501. ON: Yes
Automatically clears current value ON: Yes
of CTH1

2206
2207
2208
2209
CTC3

Operation when CTH0 (current value)

reaches CTC (preset value)

2210
2211
2212

OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF:
Enable
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No

Setting the special utility relay

The special utility relay must be set to output the clock pulse. Set the relays in the
following manner.
Only one relay for each group can be turned ON from relays 2204 through 2207
and 2208 through 2211.
Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn relays 2203 through 2212 ON/
OFF.
Turning OFF relays 2204 or 2208 enables control of output relay 0501.
To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON relays 2203 or 2212 to automatically clear the current value of CTH1. You cannot change the pulse period
unless you turn ON relays 2203 or 2212.
Turning ON/OFF relay 2205 stops/outputs the clock pulse.
Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 2204 through 2207 or 2208
through 2211 are turned ON, priority is given to the relay with the smaller number.
Operation of output 0501 by setting special utility relays
Outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio
Special utility relay settings
2203 ON

2208 ON

2204 OFF
2205 OFF

Outputting a pulse with variable pulse width

Special utility relay settings
2203 ON

2208 OFF

2209 OFF

2204 OFF

2209 ON

2210 OFF

2205 OFF

2210 OFF

2206 OFF

2211 OFF

2206 ON

2211 OFF

2207 ON

2212 OFF

2207 OFF

2212 OFF

Count value

Count value
CTC2

CTC2

CTC3

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Visual KV
Series

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

ON

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-241

14

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV
Series

This section describes programming examples of the direct clock pulse output.

4.7.1 Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio

To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0500
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with 1:1
ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using the high-speed counter (CTH0) and
high-speed counter comparator (CTC0).
Special utility relay setting
Set the special utility relay (2103 through 2112) according to the following table.
When outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you can simplify the program by
using the reverse (toggle) output (2107: ON).
Relay No.

Setting

2103

ON

2104

OFF

2105

OFF

2106

OFF

2107

ON

Internal clock and CTC0 preset value

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset value of CTC0 for the clock.
CTC0 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2

Obtain the preset value of CTC0 by substituting 1 ms for the pulse period and 10 s
for the internal clock (special utility relay 2101).
In this case, the preset value of CTC0 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the preset value of CTC0 with other internal clocks.
Special utility relay

Internal clock

CTC0 preset value

2100

1.0 s

500

2101

10.0 s

50

2102

100.0 s

Example
Count value
0001

2008

2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
RES

3-242

2107
SET

CTH0
RES

0002

CTH0
2101

0003

#00050
CTC0

2002

2106
RES

CTC0

ON

ON

Sets the pulse output from output relay 0500 with special utility relays 2104 through 2107.
In this example, turns OFF 2104 to enable direct output from 0500 and turns ON 2107 to
reverse the output each time the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value.
Turns ON 2103 to set CTH0 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC0 value.
With this setting, the operation which clears the CTH0 current value when it reaches the
CTC0 preset value is repeated.
The RES CTH0 instruction resets the CTH0 current value when operation starts. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH0 all the time when CTH0 is used to output the
clock pulse.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Cording
Instruction
LD
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES

Operand
2008
2103
2104
2105

Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC

Operand
2107
CTH0
2002
0 2101
0 #00050

Visual KV
Series

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

2106

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when output
starts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scan when output stops, the
clock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.
Tips
Use special utility relay 2105 to control (enable/disable) the clock pulse output by
external inputs.
Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utility relay 2105 ON/
OFF.
With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when it starts as well as
stops.
When either of the following programs is added to the example on the previous
page, the clock pulse is output from 0500 only when 0000 is ON.
When SET-RES instructions are used

When KEEP instruction is used

0000

2105
SET

0000

0000

2105
RES

0000

KEEP
SET
2105
RES

To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0501

This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with 1:1
ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using the high-speed counter (CTH1) and
high-speed counter comparator (CTC2).
Special utility relay setting
Set the special utility relay (2203 through 2212) according to the following table.
When outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you can simplify the program by
using the reverse (toggle) output (2207: ON).
Relay No.

Setting

2203

ON

2204

OFF

2205

OFF

2206

OFF

2207

ON

Internal clock and CTC2 preset value

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset value of CTC2 for the clock.
CTC2 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Obtain the preset value of CTC2 by substituting 1 ms for the pulse period and 10 s
for the internal clock (special utility relay 2201).
In this case, the preset value of CTC2 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC2 preset value with other internal clocks.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-243

14

Visual KV
Series

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Special utility relay

Internal clock

CTC2 preset value

2200

1.0 s

500

2201

10.0 s

50

2202

100.0 s

Example
Count value
0001

2008

2203
SET

2204
RES

2205
RES

2206
RES

2207
SET

CTH1
RES

0002

CTH1
2201

0003

#00050
CTC2

2002

CTC2

ON

ON

Sets the pulse output from output relay 0501 with special utility relays 2204 through 2207.
In this example, turns OFF 2204 to enable direct output from 0501 and turns ON 2207 to
reverse the output each time the CTH1 value reaches the CTC2 value.
Turns ON 2203 to set CTH1 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC2 value.
With this setting, the operation which clears the CTH1 current value when it reaches the
CTC2 preset value is repeated.
The RES CTH1 instruction resets the CTH1 current value when operation starts. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH1 all the time when CTH1 is used to output the
clock pulse.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LD
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES

Operand
2008
2203
2204
2205

Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC

Operand
2207
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050

2206

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when output
starts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scan when output stops, the
clock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.
Tips
Use special utility relay 2205 to control (enable/disable) the clock pulse output by
external inputs.
Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utility relay 2205 ON/
OFF.
With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when it starts as well as
stops.
When either of the following programs is added to the example on the previous
page, the clock pulse is output from 0501 only when 0000 is ON.
When SET-RES instructions are used

3-244

When KEEP instruction is used

0000

2205
SET

0000

0000

2205
RES

0000

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

KEEP
SET
2205
RES

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

4.7.2 Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF

Ratio
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with
variable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using the high-speed counter
(CTH0) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC0 and CTC1).
Special utility relay setting
Set the special utility relay (2103 through 2112) according to the following table.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2103

ON

2108

OFF

2104

OFF

2109

ON

2105

OFF

2110

OFF

2106

ON

2111

OFF

2107

OFF

2112

OFF

Visual KV
Series

To output a clock pulse of 500 s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0500

Internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1 for the
clock.
CTC1 preset value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC0 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
Obtain the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1 by substituting 200 s for the pulse
width, 500 s for the pulse period, and 10 s for the internal clock (special utility
relay 2101).
In this case, the preset value of CTC1 is "20", and that of CTC0 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC preset values with other internal clocks.
Special utility relay

Internal clock

CTC0 preset value

CTC1 preset value

2100

1.0 s

500

200

2101

10.0 s

50

20

2102

100.0s

Example
Count value
0001

2008

0002

2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
RES

2106
SET

2107
RES

2108
RES

2109
SET

2110
RES

2111
RES

CTH0
RES

0003

CTH0
2101

0004

#00050
CTC0

0005

#00020
CTC1

2002

CTC0
CTC1

ON

ON

ON

ON

Sets the pulse output from output relay 0500 with special utility relays 2104 through 2107
and 2108 through 2111.
In this example, turns OFF 2104 to enable direct output from 0500. Turns ON 2106 to turn
ON the output from 0500 when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value, and turns ON
2109 to turn OFF the output when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC1 value.
Turns ON 2103 to set CTH0 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC0 value. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH0 all the time when CTH0 is used to output the
clock pulse.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-245

14

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV
Series

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2008

0013

CON

0001

MPS

0002

SET

0003

CON

0004

RES

0005

CON

0006

RES

0007

CON

0008

RES

0009

CON

0010

RES

0011

MPP

0012

RES

2103
2104
2105
2106
2107

0014

SET

0015

CON

0016

RES

0017

CON

0018

RES

0019

CON

0020

RES

Operand
2109
2110
2111
CTH0

0021

LD

2002

0022

CTH

0 2101

0023

CTC

0 #00050

0024

CTC

1 #00020

2108

Note 1: When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when output
starts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan when output stops.
Note 2: Refer to the following "Tips" to start and stop the clock pulse.
Tips
Use special utility relay 2105 to control (enable/disable) the clock pulse output by
external inputs.
Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utility relay 2105 ON/
OFF.
With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when it starts as well as
stops.
When either of the following program is added to the example on the previous
page, the clock pulse is output from 0500 only when 0000 is ON.

When SET-RES instructions are used

3-246

When KEEP instruction is used

0000

2105
SET

0000

0000

2105
RES

0000

KEEP
SET
2105
RES

You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by changing the CTC0
preset value using the LDA and STA instructions.
To change the period of the clock pulse, refer to "4.3.4 Count Input Method" (p.3212).

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

To output a clock pulse of 500 s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0501

Special utility relay setting

Set the special utility relay (2203 through 2212) according to the following table.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2203

ON

2208

ON

2204

OFF

2209

OFF

2205

OFF

2210

OFF

2206

ON

2211

OFF

2207

OFF

2212

OFF

Visual KV
Series

This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with
variable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using the high-speed counter
(CTH1) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC2 and CTC3).

Internal clock and CTC2/CTC3 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset values of CTC2 and CTC3 for the
clock.
CTC2 preset value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC3 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
Obtain the preset values of CTC2 and CTC3 by substituting 200 s for the pulse
width, 500 s for the pulse period, and 10 s for the internal clock (special utility
relay 2201).
In this case, the preset value of CTC3 is "20", and that of CTC2 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC preset values with other internal clocks.
Special utility relay

Internal clock

CTC2 preset value

CTC3 preset value

2200

1.0 s

500

200

2201

10.0 s

50

20

2202

100.0 s

Example
Count value
0001

2008
2208
RES

0002

2203
SET

2204
RES

2206
SET

2207
RES

2209
SET

2210
RES

2211
RES

CTH1
RES

0003

CTH1
2201

0004

#00050
CTC2

0005

#00020
CTC3

2002

CTC2
CTC3

ON

ON

ON

ON

Sets the pulse output from output relay 0501 with special utility relays 2204 through 2207
and 2208 through 2211.
In this example, turns OFF 2204 to enable direct output from 0501. Turns ON 2206 to turn
ON the output from 0501 when the CTH1 value reaches the CTC2 value and turns ON
2209 to turn OFF the output when the CTH1 value reaches the CTC3 value.
Turns ON 2203 to set CTH1 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC2 value. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH1 all the time when CTH1 is used to output the
clock pulse.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-247

14

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Coding

Visual KV
Series

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES
CON

Operand
2008
2203
2204
2205
2207
2208

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC

Operand
2209
2210
2211
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050
3 #00020

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when output
starts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan when the output
stops.
Tips
Use special utility relay 2205 to control (enable/disable) the clock pulse output by
external inputs.
Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utility relay 2205 ON/
OFF.
With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when it starts as well as
stops.
When either of the following programs is added to the example on the previous
page, the clock pulse is output from 0501 only when 0000 is ON.

When SET-RES instructions are used

3-248

When KEEP instruction is used

0000

2205
SET

0000

0000

2205
RES

0000

KEEP
SET
2205
RES

You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by changing CTC2
preset value using LDA and STA instructions.
To change the period of the clock pulse, refer to "4.3.4 Count Input Method" on
page 3-212.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse of 500
s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0500 and then stop it after
10000 pulses are output.
Special utility relay, internal clock, and CTC settings
Set the special utility relay according to the following table.
Relay No.
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107

Setting
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

Relay No.
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112

Visual KV
Series

4.7.3 Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified

Pulse Count

Setting
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

Specify the internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset values according to the following
table.
Special utility relay
2100
2101
2102

Internal clock
1.0 s
10.0 s
100.0 s

CTC0 preset value

500
50
5

CTC1 preset value

200
20
2

Example
2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
SET

2106
SET

2107
RES

0002

2108
RES

2109
SET

2110
RES

2111
RES

CTH0
RES

0003

2203
SET

#00000
DW
DM1940

2813
SET

CTH1
RES

1000
DIFU

1000

0001

2008
EI

0000
0004
0005

CTH0
2101

0006

#00050
CTC0

0007

#00020
CTC1

2002

0008

CTH1
0500

0009

#10000
CTC2

2002

14

2105
RES

END
0010
INT
CTC2

0011
2002
0012

2105
SET
RETI

0013
ENDH
0014

Sets the pulse output from output relay 0500 with special utility relays 2104 through 2107
and 2108 through 2111.
In this example, turns OFF 2104 to enable direct output from 0500. Turns ON 2106 to turn
ON the output from 0500 when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value and turns ON
2109 to turn OFF the output when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC1 value.
Turns ON 2103 to set CTH0 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC0 value. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Uses an EI instruction to enable interrupts.
The interrupt program (INT CTC2) stops the clock pulse when the CTH1 current value
reaches the CTC2 preset value (when 10000 pulses are output).
Turns ON 2203 to set CTH1 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC2 value. This
forces the operation to repeat by the specified pulses (10000).
Relay 2813 must be turned ON when counting pulses with CTH1.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-249

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV
Series

The input enable relay for CTH0 must be ON all the time when CTH0 is used to output the
clock pulse.
The input enable relay for CTH1 must be ON all the time when CTH1 is used to count the
clock pulse.
Specifies the internal clock (2101) as the clock input for CTH0. Specifies 0500 as the
clock input for CTH1. With this setting, CTH0 is used to output the clock pulse, and CTH1
is used to count the clock pulse.
Specifies the number of clock pulses to the CTC2 preset value.
The clock pulse output starts when input 0000 is turned ON.
To restart the clock pulse output after it stops, turn ON input 0000 again.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
MRD
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
MPP

Operand
2008

Line No.
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048

2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
CTH0

Instruction
Operand
SET
2203
CON
DW
#00000 DM1940
CON
SET
2813
CON
RES
CTH1
LD
0000
DIFU
1000
CON
AND
1000
RES
2105
LD
2002
CTH
0 2101
CTC
0 #00050
CTC
1 #00020
LD
2002
CTH
1 0500
CTC
2 #10000
END
INT
CTC2
LD
2002
SET
2105
RET1
ENDH

Tips
Special utility relays 2103 through 2111 can be turned ON/OFF by using the LDA
and STA instructions instead of the SET-RES instructions.
The example program below can be changed as follows by using the LDA and STA
instructions. The number of lines and steps can be reduced.
2008
EI

2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
SET

2106
SET

2107
RES

2108
RES

2109
SET

2110
RES

2111
RES

CTH0
RES

2203
SET

2813
SET

CTH1
RES

$0268
LDA

2008
EI

2100
STA

CTH0
RES

2203
SET

2813
SET

CTH1
RES

LDA $0268
When LDA $0268 is executed, the value specified by the operand is written into
the internal register as follows.
[0]

Internal register

[2]
0

[6]
1

[8]
1

When STA 2100 is executed, the value in the internal register is assigned to
special utility relays 2100 through 2115.
xx 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Special utility
relay 21xx

3-250

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Sta

rt
Re
ou vers
tpu e
t

Em
sto erge
p
nc

The following ramp-up/down control is available by setting four parameters (DM0000

to DM0003)

Visual KV
Series

4.7.4 Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output

(Ramp-up/down control)

24 VDC

Stepping motor driver

Twisted-pair cable
COM

0001

+
CW (Pulse)
+
CCW (Rotation

0003
0002

0000

KV
COM

direction)

0502

0500
0501

0503

5 VDC

FG

Setting parameters
DM0000: fH [Hz] (Running frequency)
DM0001: fL [Hz] (Start-up frequency)
DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms]
DM0003: No. of pulses for positioning

Stepping motor

Specify values in the range from 153 Hz to

50000 Hz. The fH value must be greater
than the fL value.
(fH - fL) / (Acceleration time / 10 ms)
Must be 65534 pulses or less.

Note 1: A smaller acceleration rate allows smoother control but extends the acceleration time.
Note 2: Be sure to turn OFF input 0007 (phase B input).
Operation
In the example on the next page, each parameter is set as follows:
DM0000: 8000 [Hz]
DM0001: 700 [Hz]
DM0002: 400 [Hz/10 ms]
DM0003: 4000 pulses
When start switch 0000 is pressed, ramp-up/down control is performed as shown
below. Control is stopped when the pulse count reaches "4000".
Pressing the start switch restarts the operation. The operation is reversed while
reverse switch 0001 is ON.
Connection example
The above diagram shows a connection example between the KV PLC and a
stepping motor driver.
Refer to the instruction manual for your stepping motor driver for details.
Set the pulse input method of the stepping motor driver to "1-pulse input method".
Frequency (Hz)

H
(DM0000)

Total pulses
for positioning
(DM0003)

Acceleration
rate
(DM0002)

L
(DM0001)
0

10ms
(Acceleration
change period)

Acceleration
time

Time (ms)
Constant
speed time

Deceleration
time

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

3-251

14

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Example
Specifies high-speed
counters and comparators

0001
0002

2002

Visual KV
Series

0003

#00010
CTC1

#65535
CTC0

CTH0
2100

#65535
CTC2

#65535
CTC3

CTH1
0500

0004

#08000 #00700 #00400 #04000

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003

0005

Starts positioning

2008

0003

0000

0006

1001
DIFU

1001

2100
STA

01
CALL

2813
SET

2105
SET

$0268
LDA

CTH1 counts the number of

clock pulses.
CTC0:Pulse period
CTC1: Pulse width
CTC2:Frequency change point
CTC3:Total No. of pulses for positioning

Sets parameters (DM0000 to

DM0003).

0007
0008

CTC0 generates a clock pulse.

1200
SET

CTH1
RES

CTH0
RES

EI

2105
RES
0502

0001
0009

Sets reverse output.

Emergency stop

0010
0003

2105
SET

0011

Sets emergency stop.

END
0012

Calculation routine for

CTC0, CTC2, and DM0011

0013

SBN
02

0014
0015

#01000
LDA

#10000 DM0012 #00005

MUL
DIV
ADD

#00010
DIV

0016

#00010
LDA

#10000 DM0010 #00005

MUL
DIV
ADD

#00010 DM0011
DIV
ADD

2002

CTC0
STA

DM0010
STA
CTC2
STA

DM0011
STA
RET

0017

Initialization routine

0018

SBN
01

0019
2002
0020

DM0003
LDA

CTC3
STA

Specifies the CTC0 preset value.

CTC0 preset value =
1 DM0012 x 103 x 103

Specifies the CTC2 preset

value.
DM0010: Pulse period T (s)
DM0011: No. of accumulated pulses
DM0012: Current frequency (Hz)
1200: Acceleration flag

02
CALL

#00002 DM0004 DM0001 DM0012 #00000

DIV
STA
LDA
STA
DW
DM0011

RET
0021

Triangle drive check routine

0022

SBN
03

0023
2002
0024

DM0012 #00100 DM0011 DM0004

LDA
DIV
ADD
CMP
RET

0025

Interrupt routine for

acceleration/deceleration

0026

INT
CTC2

0027

Acceleration process

0028
1200
0029

DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0000

LDA
ADD
STA
CMP

2011

03
CALL

2011

02
CALL

2011

1201

0030
2011
0031

DM0003 DM0011
LDA
SUB

1201

1200
RES

2011

02
CALL

2011

02
CALL

0032

CTC2
STA

DM0011
STA

Deceleration process

0033
1200
0034

DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA
CMP

0035

#65535
LDA

CTC2
STA
RETI

0036

Interrupt for pulse stop

0037

INT
CTC3

0038
2002
0039

2105
SET
RETI

0040
ENDH
0041

3-252

Acceleration ratio is added to the

current frequency to change it each
time CTC2 turns ON while
acceleration flag 1200 is ON.
Acceleration stops when the
current frequency reaches fH. Sets
No. of pulses for the deceleration
point.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

Acceleration ratio is subtracted

from the current frequency to
change it each time CTC2 turns
ON while acceleration flag 1200 is
ON. Deceleration stops when the
current frequency reaches fL. The
setting is initialized.
Clock pulse output is stopped when
the No. of pulses equals the CTC3
preset value.

Visual KV
Series

Chapter 5
Positioning Control

Visual KV Series Only

This chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
For KV-10/80 Series, see Chapter 6.
5.1

Outline of Positioning Control ..................................................... 3-254

5.1.1

Ramp-up/down Control .......................................................................... 3-254

5.2

Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures ......................... 3-255

5.2.1
5.2.2

Parameter Setting Procedure ................................................................. 3-255

Operating Procedure .............................................................................. 3-257

5.3

Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function ........... 3-258

5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3

Connection Example .............................................................................. 3-258

Tips ........................................................................................................ 3-258
Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ..................... 3-259

5.1 Outline of Positioning Control

5.1 Outline of Positioning Control

Visual KV
Series

This section describes the outline of positioning control.

5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control

The Visual KV Series can directly output clock pulses not affected by the scan time
to output relay 0502.
If the frequency, the number of output pulses, and the acceleration time of the clock
pulses have been preliminarily set to data memories, the Visual KV Series automatically performs ramp-up/down control.
The ramp-up/down control output function offers ramp-up/down timing charts of the
startup frequency, operating frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time as
shown below.
The output frequency can be set within the range of 200 to 50,000 Hz.
Number of output
pulses (pulses)

Frequency (Hz)

DM1485 and DM1484

Upper digit

Lower digit

Operating
frequency
DM1481

Startup
frequency
DM1480

Acceleration
time DM1482

Deceleration
time DM1482

Time (ms)

By using the ramp-up/down control output function, ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and AC servo motors (pulse input types) is possible.

Clock pulse
Rotation direction
0502
NEW KV

Lo: CW
Hi: CCW
Stepping motor
Servo motor

0503

Motor driver

3-254

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures

This section describes the parameter setting and operating procedures for positioning control.

5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure

Visual KV
Series

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating

Procedures

Preliminarily set each parameter for positioning control to a corresponding data

memory. To operate, special utility relays must be set.

For more about special utility relays, refer to "5.2.2 Operating Procedure" (p. 3-257).

The table below shows the relationship between parameters and data memories.
Data memories for ramp-up/down control
Data memory
DM1480
DM1481
DM1482
DM1484
DM1485
DM1486

Setting contents

Setting range

Ramp-up/down control startup

frequency (Hz)
Ramp-up/down control operating
frequency (Hz)
Ramp-up/down control
acceleration/deceleration time
(ms)
Number of output pulses
(lower 16 bits)
Number of output pulses
(upper 16 bits)

200 to 50,000
200 to 50,000
(value larger than startup frequency)
0 to 4000
0 to 65,535
(2 or more when DM1485 is 0)
0 to 65,535
When an error occurs, a corresponding error code 11 to 17 is stored.

Set value error code

Note: When pulse output is started, the scan time is extended by 10 ms maximum
(if the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 4 s).

Set value error code (DM1486)

If there is an error in the preset parameters when starting operation, a corresponding
error code (11 to 17) is automatically written to DM1486.
Code

Description

Countermeasures

11

Startup frequency value is smaller than

allowable setting range.
Operating frequency value is smaller
than allowable setting range.
Operating (or startup) frequency value is
larger than allowable setting range.
Startup frequency value is larger than
operating frequency value.

Set starting frequency within setting

range (200 to 50,000).
Set operating frequency within setting
range (200 to 50,000).
Set operating (or startup) frequency
within setting range (200 to 50,000).
Set them appropriately so that startup
frequency is smaller than operating
frequency.
Set acceleration/deceleration time within
setting range (0 to 4,000).
Contact our sales office.

12
13
14

15
16
17

Acceleration/deceleration time is larger

than allowable setting range.
System error
Number of pulses output within
acceleration/deceleration time is too
small.

Set number of output pulses to 2 or

more.

Startup frequency (Hz) (DM1480)

Set the frequency (speed) of the motor at startup in positioning control so that motor
rotations start up smoothly.
At the set frequency, the Visual KV Series will output clock pulses.

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-255

15

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures

Operating frequency (Hz) (DM1481)

Set the frequency (speed) of the motor during operation in positioning control.
At the set frequency, the Visual KV Series will output clock pulses.

Visual KV
Series

Note: If the startup frequency is the same as the operating frequency, the timing
chart becomes as shown below.
Operating (startup)
frequency
0

In this case, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored.

Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) (DM1482)

Set the time to accelerate from the starting frequency to the operating frequency
after operation is started.
When operation is stopped, the deceleration time is equivalent to the acceleration
time.
In the set time, the Visual KV Series varies the clock pulse frequency from the
startup frequency to the operating frequency (in the case of acceleration time).
The clock pulse frequency change cycle within the acceleration time is fixed to 5 ms.
Operating frequency

Startup frequency

5ms
Acceleration/deceleration time

Number of output pulses (DM1484 and DM1485)

Set the angle of rotation (movement quantity) in positioning control as the number of
pulses. The Visual KV Series outputs as many clock pulses as the set value.
If the number of output pulses is larger than 65,535, divide it into the upper 16-bit
value and the lower 16-bit value using the following equation.
The minimum value is 2, and maximum value is 4,294,967,295.
(Number of output pulses) 65,536 = A (answer) . . . B (remainder)
A = Number of output pulses (upper 16-bit) DM1485
B = Number of output pulses (upper 16-bit) DM1484
Note 1: When the set number of pulses is too small and the target value cannot be
achieved, triangular control is performed as shown below.
Operating frequency
Startup frequency
0

Note 2: The current value of pulse output cannot be obtained.

3-256

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures

In positioning control, operation is started up, stopped normally, and stopped in

emergencies by the ON/OFF status of special utility relays.
The table below shows the relationship between operations and the special utility
relays used.
Special utility
relay No.

R/W* Function

2308

Stop

2309

R
W

Run
RESET

2310

Start

Description
Performs deceleration at rising edge, then stops
operation.
Remains ON while pulses are output.
Stops operation immediately when being reset in an
interrupt program.
Starts up operation at rising edge.

Visual KV
Series

5.2.2 Operating Procedure

* R: Read W: Write
Operation chart

DM1481
DM1480

DM1485
DM1484

0
DM1482

2310
(START)
2309
(RUN)
2308
(STOP)

DM1480: Startup frequency (Hz)

DM1481: Operating frequency (Hz)
DM1482: Acceleration time (ms)
DM1485: Number of output pulses (upper 16 bits)
DM1484: Number of output pulses (lower 16 bits)
DM1482

When relay 2310 turns ON, clock pulses are

output (detection at rising edge).
While clock pulses are output, relay 2309
remains ON. While clock pulses are not
output, relay 2309 remains OFF.
When relay 2308 turns ON, clock pulses are
decelerated and stopped (detection at rising
edge).

Note 1: If there is no error in the parameter setting when special utility relay 2310
turns ON at startup of the clock pulses, special utility relay 2309 turns ON and clock
pulses are output.
Note 2: If there is an error in the parameter setting, special utility relay 2309 does
not turn ON but a corresponding error code is written to DM1486.
Confirm the error code, and change the erroneously set parameter.
Note 3: By setting special utility relay 2309 to OFF in an interrupt program, clock
pulses can be immediately stopped.
Note 4: Rising of special utility relay 2310, falling of special utility relay 2309, and
rising of special utility relay 2308 are performed by end processing and RETI.
(Special utility relay 2309 turns ON at that time.)
Note 5: It takes a maximum of 10 ms from when special utility relay 2310 turns ON
until pulses are output.
Note 6: Even if special utility relay 2310 is set to ON while special utility relay 2308
or 2309 is ON, it is ignored.
Note 7: When pulse output has finished, special utility relay 2309 is immediately set
to OFF (without regard to the scan time).

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-257

15

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Visual KV
Series

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning

Control Function
This section describes examples of connecting a stepping motor driver and performing ramp-up/down control using the positioning control function of the Visual KV
Series.

5.3.1 Connection Example

Em

24 VDC

erg
enc
ys
Sto
top
p
Sta
rt

Connect the Visual KV Series and stepping motor driver as shown below.
This example is only for reference. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
stepping motor driver.
Set the pulse input type of the stepping motor driver to "1 pulse input type".

Stepping motor driver

Twisted pair cable

COM

0001
0000

0002

Visual KV
COM

+
CW (pulse)
+
CCW

(rotation
direction)

R0502
R0503

5 VDC*

FG

Stepping motor

When using a 24 VDC power supply, be sure to use the outputs with current limiting
resistors (R500, R501, and R502) or use the normal outputs with external current limiting
resistors.

5.3.2 Tips
When using a servo motor, also refer to the connection example above. However,
I/O control dedicated to a servo motor such as servo ON is also required.

3-258

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

5.3.3

Application Examples of the Positioning Control

Function
When start switch 0000 is set to ON, output 0502 starts to output 100,000 pulses
with a startup frequency of 500 Hz, operating frequency of 10 kHz, and acceleration/
deceleration time of 3 seconds.
When input 0001 is set to ON, pulse output is decelerated and stopped.
When input 0002 is set to ON, pulse output is immediately stopped.

Visual KV
Series

Ladder example of ramp-up/down control

Speed (Hz)

1000

500

100000

Coordinate (pulses)

Program example
2008
EI

0001
2002

HSP
0002

0002
0000
0003
0001

#00500 #10000 #03000 #00001 #34464

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

2310
2308

0004

Permit interrupts when operation is

started (so that emergency stop
operations are available).
Set the input time constant of input
0002 to 10 s.
Set each parameter, and start pulse
output at the same time.
Decelerate and stop pulse output.

END
0005
INT
0002

0006
2002
0007

Perform emergency stop processing

by using an interrupt program.

2309
RES
RETI

0008
ENDH
0009

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-259

15

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Ladder example of the jog operation

The jog operation is performed.
Speed (Hz)
CCW direction

Visual KV
Series

CW direction

1000

500

Coordinate (pulses)
Input 0000
(CW direction)

Input 0001
(CCW direction)

While input 0000 is ON, the machine continues to move in the CW direction.
When input 0000 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and stops.

While input 0001 is ON, the machine continues to move in the CCW direction.
When input 0001 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and stops.

Program example
0000

0001

2309

0503
SET

1000
DIFU

0001

0000

2309

0503
RES

1001
DIFU

0001

0002
1000
0003

#00500 #02000 #01000 #65535 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

2310

1001
0004
0000

0001

0005

1100
DIFU

1100

2308
END

0006
ENDH
0007

3-260

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

A palletizing operation is automatically performed.

The machine moves to a target coordinate, then returns to the start position. Next,
the machine moves to a position further away than the target coordinate, then again
returns to the start position. Such an operation is realized using repetitious and
return movements. This type of operation is suitable for, for example, a job where
workpieces to be supplied are located in one position and a moving body picks up
the workpieces and positions them little by little at a certain interval.

Visual KV
Series

Ladder example of automatic operation (palletizing operation)

Speed (Hz)
5000
500

Point 3: 14,000

Coordinate (pulses)
Point 2: 12,000

Point 1: 10,000

500
5000

When start signal 0000 is set to ON, a moving body moves to point 1, returns to the
start position, moves to point 2, and then returns to the start position again. Afterwards, the moving body moves to point 3, then returns to the start position, output
05000 remains ON for 3 seconds, and then the operation is finished.
Program example

0001 Ladder for automatic operation

0002 Point 1: 10,000

Point 2: 12,000

0000
0003

Point 3: 14,000
#00500 #05000 #03000 #00000
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485

1000
SET

#10000
DW
DM1484

1200

1001
JMP

1201

1002
JMP

1202

1003
JMP

1203

1004
JMP

1204

1005
JMP

2310

1006
JMP

0004 Moves to point 1.

0005

0503
SET

1000
STG

2310

2309

15

1200

0006 Returns from point 1.

0007

1001
STG

2309

1100

0503
RES

2310

1100

2309
1201

0008 Moves to point 2.

0009

1002
STG

2309

1101

0503
SET

1101

#12000
DW
DM1484

2310

2309
1202

0010 Returns from point 2

0011

1003
STG

2309

1102

0503
RES

2310

1102

2309
1203

0012 Moves to point 3.

0013

1004
STG

2309

1103

0503
SET

1103

#14000
DW
DM1484

2310

2309
1204

0014 Returns from point 3.

0015

1005
STG

2309

1104

0503
RES

1104
0016 When operation has completed, output 500 remains ON for 3 seconds.
0017

1006
STG

2309

1105

0500

#00030
T000

T000
ENDS

1105
END
0018
ENDH
0019

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-261

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Ladder example of a return to the zero point

A return to the zero point is performed.

Visual KV
Series

Range detected by
zero point sensor

Start

Low speed
Forced stop

Deceleration
and stop

High-speed

When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine moves at a high speed in the CCW
direction. When the zero point sensor turns ON, the machine decelerates, moves at
a low speed in the CW direction, then stops in the position at which the zero point
sensor turns OFF (at the end of the CW direction).
Program example
0001

Return to zero point

0002

Zero point sensor: 0003 Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0502
Rotation direction: 0503

0003 Initial setting

2008
EI

0004
2002

HSP
0003

0005
0006

Moves at high speed in the CCW direction.

0000

0007

1000
DIFU

1000

0008

2309

#00500 #10000 #00500 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
2413
RES

1005
SET
0503
RES

0009 When the zero point sensor turns ON, moves at low speed in the CW direction.
1006

2309

2308
RES

1005

2309

1007
DIFU

0010
0011

#00200 #10200 #00500 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
1007

2413
SET

0503
SET
2310

1006
0012
END
0013
0014

Detects the rising/falling edge of the zero point sensor (003), stops, and
then changes direction.
INT
0003

0015
1006
0016
1005
0017

2308
SET

2309
RES

1006
RES

1006
SET

1005
RES
RETI

0018
ENDH
0019

3-262

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Ladder example of an automatic operation (continuous operation with wait status)

In automatic operation, wait status is realized at each point.

10000
7000
5000
500
0

250000

320000

Wait

Wait

460000

Coordinate
(pulses)

Visual KV
Series

Speed (Hz)

When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine moves to point 1 and stops there. At
the rising edge of wait status reset switch 1, the machine automatically moves to
point 2 and stops there. At the rising edge of waiting status reset switch 1, the
machine automatically moves to point 3. When the machine reaches point 3, output
0500 remains ON for 3 seconds and the operation is finished.
Program example

0001

Ladder for automatic operation (continuous operation with wait status)

0002

Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0508 Rotation direction: 0503

0003

Wait reset switch: 0001

0004
0005
0006
0007
0008

0000

#00500
DW
DM1480

Moves to point 1 at speed of 10 kHz.

Moving quantity: 250,000 pulses
0503
SET

1000
STG

1001
STG

2309

1400

1400

0001

Acceleration/deceleration time: 1 second

#01000 #01000 #00003 #53392

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

Moves to point 2 at speed of 5 kHz.

Moving quantity: 70,000 pulses

1000
SET

2310

2309

1300

1001
JMP

1300

Acceleration/deceleration time: 1 second

1301

15

1301

0009
0503
SET

0010
0011
0012

#05000 #01000 #00001 #04464

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

Moves to point 3 at speed of 7 kHz.

1002
STG

2309

1401

1401

0001

2310

2309

1302

1002
JMP

1302

Acceleration/deceleration time: 1 second

1303

1303

0013
0503
SET

0014
0015
0016

#07000 #01000 #00002 #08928

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

2310

2309

1304

1003
JMP

1304

Moving quantity: 140,000 pulses

When operation has completed, output 500 remains ON for 3 seconds.
1003
STG

2309

1305

0500

#00030
T000

T000

ENDS

1305
0017
0018

END
ENDH

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-263

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Ladder example of a pulse motor application circuit

Visual KV
Series

This is a program example which offers control using both automatic and manual
operations.
In automatic operation, when input 000 is set to ON, the following operation is
performed.
Speed (Hz)
8000
2000
300
0

15000

17500

Coordinate
(pulses)

15000

In manual operation, the machine moves forward while input 0008 is ON, and moves
backward while input 0009 is ON. When input 0007 is set to ON, the machine
returns to the zero point.
Output 0502 outputs pulses. The rotation direction is changed by an ON/OFF of
0503.
This machine is equipped with a zero-point sensor (0002), a forward limit switch
(0006), and a backward limit switch (0004).
Program example
Pulse motor application circuit (with zero point sensor, forward
limit switch, and backward limit switch)
0002 Specifications
0001

0003

Pulse output: 0502

Rotation direction: 0503
Forward limit switch: 0006
Backward limit switch: 0004

0004 Manual switch: Forward = 0008, backward = 0009

Zero point switch:

0005 0007
0006
0007 Automatic operation start: 0000
2008
0008

1200
RES

EI

2002
0009

HSP
0000

0010

HSP
0002

Resets interrupt permission & zero point detection flag.

0011 Manual switch (0008: Forward, 0009: Backward)
0008

0009

2309

0503
RES

0006

1100
DIFU

0008

0009

2309

0503
SET

0004

1101
DIFU

0012
0013
1100

#00600 #04000 #00100 #00001 #00000

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

0014

1103
DIFU

1101
0015
0008

0009

0016

3-264

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

1105
DIFU

Set the startup frequency,

operating frequency, and
acceleration/deceleration
time for manual operation.
Startup frequency: 600 Hz
Operating frequency: 4 kHz
Acceleration/
deceleration: 100 ms
Number of output pulses:
65,536

Return to zero point

0015
0016 Limit switch
0007

1205
DIFU

0017
0018 Move forward.
1205

0503
SET

0019
0020

#00300 #03000 #00250 #00000 #03500

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

1300
DIFU

1200
SET

Trigger end of forward movement

1200

0021

2309
ON
1201

1201

2309
OFF
1202

1202

1203
DIFU

1203

0503
RES

#00500 #00500 #00000 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

1301
DIFU

1200
RES

0024 Start up motor.

1300

0006

1301

0004

Startup frequency: 300 Hz

Operating frequency: 3 kHz
Acceleration time: 250 ms
Number of output pulses:
3,500

Settings for backward

movement

0022 While moving backward at low speed, return to zero point.

0023

In a zero-point-return
operation, the machine
moves forward once, and
then backward. When the
zero point limit switch
(0002) turns ON, the
machine stops.
Settings for forward
movement

Visual KV
Series

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

2310

0025
0026

Drive frequency: 500 Hz

Operating frequency: 500 Hz
Acceleration time: 0 ms
Number of output pulses:
65,535

Give instructions to start up

and decelerate/stop the
motor.

1103
0027
1506

2308

0028
0029 Decelerate and stop (in manual/automatic operation).
0006

0009

0004

0008

2308

0030
0031
1105
0032

Automatic operation

0033

0034 Trigger for stage instruction

2308
0036

15

1400
SET

2008
0035
1408
DIFU

1408

1401
RES

1402
RES

1403
RES

1400
SET

0037 Automatic start (while 0000 is ON)

0038

1400
STG

0000

2308

2309

1401
JMP

0039 When motor operation has finished, moves stage forward.

0040

1401
STG

0041

1402
STG

0042

1403
STG

1407
RES
1405
RES
1406
RES

#00010
T001
#00005
T002
#00005
T003

T001
T002
T003

1500
DIFU
1501
DIFU
1502
DIFU

2309

1405

1402
JMP

1405
2309

1406

1403
JMP

1406
2309

1407

1400
JMP

Create each operation

program using the STG
instruction, and let each
program be executed in
turn.

1407

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

3-265

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

Set parameters for automatic operation.

0043 Set automatic operation parameters.

1500

0503
SET

1501

0503
SET

1502

0503
RES

0044

Visual KV
Series

0045
0046

#00300
DW
DM1480
#00300
DW
DM1480
#00300
DW
DM1480

#08000
DW
DM1481
#02000
DW
DM1481
#15000
DW
DM1481

#00150
DW
DM1482
#00250
DW
DM1482
#00250
DW
DM1482

#00000
DW
DM1485
#00000
DW
DM1485
#00000
DW
DM1485

#15000
DW
DM1484
#02500
DW
DM1484
#17500
DW
DM1484

1503
DIFU
1504
DIFU
1505
DIFU

0047 Start up motor.

1503

1506

0048
1504
0049
1505
0050

1. Startup frequency: 300 Hz

Operating frequency: 8 kHz
Acceleration time: 150 ms
Number of output pulses:
15,000
2. Startup frequency: 300 Hz
Operating frequency: 2 kHz
Acceleration time: 250 ms
Number of output pulses:
25000
3. Startup frequency: 300 Hz
Operating frequency: 15 kHz
Acceleration time: 250 ms
Number of output pulses:
17,500

END
0051
0052 Interrupt for instantaneous stop (to return to zero point)
INT
0002

0053
1200

0008

0009

0000

0054

2309
RES
RETI

0055
ENDH
0056

3-266

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

Stop pulse output at the

zero point by using an
interrupt program.

Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only
This chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
6.1

Interrupt Instructions .............................................................. 3-268

6.1.1
6.1.2

Description of Interrupts ......................................................................... 3-268

Interrupt Instructions .............................................................................. 3-271

6.2

Direct Clock Pulse ................................................................... 3-276

6.2.1

Output of Direct Clock Pulse .................................................................. 3-276

6.3

Positioning Control ................................................................. 3-296

6.3.1

Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control) ......................................... 3-296

KV-10/80

KV-300

Chapter 6

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

6.1

Interrupt Instructions

6.1.1 Description of Interrupts

Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine

KV-10/80

KV-300

Input processing
pt

Scan time

rru

Processing of
direct inputs

te
f in

no

tio

era

Routine program
execution

Output processing

n
Ge

(00000 to 00005)

Interrupt routine
execution

Re

tu
at rns
the to
po sus
int pe
of nd
su ed
sp pr
en og
sio ram
n.

Processing of
direct outputs
(00500 to 00503)

Fig. 1

Routine program flow is shown by the thick arrow on the left of Fig.1. In this case,
input signals can be received only during input processing.
Although input time constant can be made shorter by using HSP or by turning ON
special utility relay 2813, input signals can be received only if they are longer than
the duration of one scan time.
When an interrupt initiation input turns ON, the currently running program is suspended to immediately execute the interrupt routine.
During execution of interrupt routine, input signals shorter than one scan time can be
received by the PLC.

Note: To execute INT (interrupt initiation instruction), execute EI first to enable

interrupt, then use HSP (time constant: 25 s) or turn ON special utility relay 2813
(time constant: 10 s) to reduce the input time constant.
2008
EI

2813
SET

2002
EI

or
2002

HSP
0000

Types of interrupt
High speed counter comparators

CTC0, CTC1, CTC2, CTC3

Input relays

0000, 0001, 0002, 0003

(rising/falling edge selectable)

Interrupt by CTC can be generated when the CTC preset value and CTH current
value are equal.
A signal received through any of inputs 0000 to 0003 can generate an interrupt.

3-268

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

Interrupt priority
If two or more interrupts are generated at different timings, interrupt routines are
executed in the order that interrupts are generated.
If two or more interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupt routines are
executed according to the priority shown below.
CTC0 > CTC1 > CTC2 > CTC3 > 0000 > 0001 > 0002 > 0003
Note that the above priority differs from that for other KV PLCs (KV-10/16/24/40/
80).
The priority is: 0000 > 0001 > 0002 > 0003 > CTC2 > CTC3 > CTC0 > CTC1.
KV-10/80

Note 1: During execution of one interrupt routine, execution of other interrupt routines is inhibited. (One interrupt routine can be executed inside another interrupt
routine by inserting EI.)
Note 2: If other interrupts are generated during execution of one interrupt routine,
the routines of these interrupts are executed after completion of the first interrupt
routine in the order that they are generated. Note that generation of up to 8 levels of
interrupt nesting or up to 8 individual interrupts can be stored during execution of
interrupt routine. However, generation of an interrupt is ignored if generation of the
same interrupt has already been stored.

KV-300

Interrupt routine
2008
EI

2813
SET
END

INT
XXXXX
RETI

ENDH

16

Execute EI to enable interrupt.

Be sure to insert INT between END and ENDH.
Be sure to shorten the input time constant by using HSP or by turning ON special
utility relay 2813.

Instructions that cannot be used in the INT-RETI block

TMR, TMH, TMS, DIFU, DIFD, W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
HKEY, ITVL, @xxxx (instruction), C, UDC, SFT

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-269

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

Direct output
2008
EI

2813
SET
END
INT
0000

2002

0500
( SET )

KV-300

RETI

KV-10/80

INT
0001
2002

0500
( SET )
ENDH

Direct output is enabled only through output relays 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503.
This function allows ON/OFF status of any of output relays 0500, 0501, 0502, and
0503 to be output during execution of interrupt routine.
This function allows immediate ON/OFF status output without delay caused by scan
time.
Note: Be sure to turn ON special utility relay 2813 to shorten the input time constant.

Direct input
2008
1000

2813
SET
0500

END

INT
0000
0005

1000

RETI
ENDH

Direct input is enabled only through input relays 0000 to 0005.

This function allows ON/OFF status of any of input relays 0000 to 0005 to be input
during execution of interrupt routine.
Note 1: Be sure to turn ON special utility relay 2813 to shorten the input time
constant.
Note 2: Input status read using direct input function is valid only in the interrupt
routine. Be sure to insert an internal utility relay after the direct input relay.

3-270

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

DI / EI

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions

DI: Interrupt Disabled

FNC

RES AND
0
8

DI

Disables execution of interrupt.

EI: Interrupt Enabled

ORL
FNC SET
1
3

EI

Enables execution of interrupt.

Key operations
AND
8

FNC

SET
1

ORL
3

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

KV-10/80

RES
0

KV-300

FNC

Operand

Example
1000
EI
1000
DI

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

1000

0001

EI

0021

LDB

0022

DI

1000

16

Description
When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled. When 1000 is OFF, execution
of interrupt is disabled. Interrupts are enabled between EI instruction and DI instruction.
Therefore, once EI is executed, interrupt is enabled until it is disabled by DI.
With the KV, any interrupt is disabled when the operation is started.
DI instruction disables execution of interrupt. Use this instruction to temporarily
disable interrupt.
EI instruction enables the execution of interrupt. Use this instruction to release
interrupt disabled by DI instruction.
During execution of an interrupt, any other interrupt is disabled.To execute another
interrupt during execution of the previous interrupt, include EI instruction in this first
interrupt. Interrupts can be nested up to 8 levels by executing EI in each interrupt
routine.
Note 1: Generation of up to 8 levels of interrupt nesting or up to 8 individual interrupts can be stored while interrupt is disabled. These interrupts are executed after EI
has been executed.
Note 2: Generation of INT CTC is erased from the storage when RES CTC is
executed.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-271

INT / RETI

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

INT: Interrupt

RETI: Return Interrupt

RES
FNC ANL
2
0

LDB
FNC ORL
3
4

INT
nnnn

RETI

Executes interrupt between INT and RETI

instructions at rising edge of input specified
by operand. When 0003 is specified by
operand, the rising or falling edge can be
selected for execution of interrupts.
Represents termination of interrupts.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Key Operations
FNC

ANL
2

RES
0

ENT
R-SRCH

FNC

ORL
3

LDB
4

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand

ENT
R-SRCH

ENT
R-SRCH

Operand
0000 to 0003
CTC0 to CTC3

Example 1
Input pulse width shorter than one scan time (eg. one-shot circuit)
(a)

0000

Input for
routine
program

0500

#00020
T000
T000

0500

0000
(Input remains ON for 1 ms or more.)
(b)

2008

Input for
interrupt
routine

2813
SET

EI
1000

#00020
T000

0000
0500

T000

0500

END

INT
0000
1000

2002

RETI
ENDH
(Input remains ON for 10 s or more.)

Program (a) can be used when input 0000 remains ON longer than the input time constant (8
to 12 ms).
Program (b) is used when input 0000 remains ON shorter than one scan time.
Routine program coding

3-272

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

OR

0500

0002

TMR

000 #00020

0003

ANB

T000

0004

OUT

0500

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

INT / RETI
6.1 Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt routine coding
Operand
2008

Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

2813
1000
0500
000 #00020
T000

Instruction
OUT
END
INT
LD
OUT
RETI
ENDH

Operand
0500
0000
2002
1000

Example 2
Features of INT0003
Upon generation of interrupt by INT0003, the CTH1 current value is automatically
transferred to TM30.
Interrupt generated by any of INT0000 to INT0002 is executed at the rising edge of
the input signal. Interrupt generated by INT0003 can be executed either at the rising
or falling edge of the input signal.
Relay No.

ON

OFF

2206

Executes interrupts at falling edge of

input pulse to 0003.

Executes interrupts at rising edge of

input pulse to 0003.

KV-10/80

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
LD
OR
TMR
ANB

KV-300

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

In the example program below, pulse width of input 0003 is measured.

2206(OFF)
ON
0003
OFF

2008

2206(ON)

1
Pulse width

EI

$0000
LDA

2200
STA

DM0000
STA

2002

CTH1
2200

END

INT
0003

3
2206

2206

TM30
LDA

TM02
STA

TM30
LDA

TM02 DM0000
SUB
STA

KEEP
SET
2206

(a)

RES

(b)

RETI

ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
STA
LD
CTH
END
INT
LDB
LDA

Operand
2008

$0000
2200
DM0000
2002
1 2200
0003
2206
TM30

Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026

Instruction
CON
STA
CON
LD
LDA
CON
SUB
CON
STA
CON
KEEP
RETI
ENDH

Operand
TM02
2206
TM30
TM02
DM0000

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

2206

3-273

16

INT / RETI

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

KV-10/80

KV-300

Initial setting
When the operation is started, EI instruction enables interrupts.

Special utility relays No. 2200 through 2215 are turned OFF. Turning OFF 2203
disables CTC2 from resetting the CTH1 current value to 0.

Turning OFF 2206 allows interrupt to be generated at the rising edge of INT0003.

The value of DM0000 is reset to "0".

Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the input time constant to 10 s.

1.0-s internal clock pulses are counted using CTH1.

INT instruction with 0003 as the operand allows interrupts to be executed.

When interrupt is generated for the first time, 2206 is OFF. Therefore, program in
rung (a) is executed. Then, KEEP turns 2206 ON.

When interrupt is generated for the second time, 2206 is ON. Therefore, program
in rung (b) is executed to calculate the following:
(TM30 at 2nd execution) - (TM30 at 1st execution) = pulse width (unit: 1.0 s)
The result is stored in DM0000.

Example 3
Interrupt by CTC
Pulses input to 0005 are counted. 0501 is turned ON when the number of pulses
reaches 5,000.
2008
1

EI

2203
SET

CTH1
RES

#05000
CTC2

2813
SET

2002

CTH1
0005

0000

0501
RES

END

INT
CTC2

4
2002

0501
SET

RETI

ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

3-274

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
CTC
CON
SET

Operand
2008

2203
CTH1
2 #05000
2813

Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019

Instruction
LD
CTH
LD
RES
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

Operand
2002
1 0005
0000
0501
CTC2
2002
0501

INT / RETI

6.1 Interrupt Instructions

Turning ON special utility relay 2203 allows CTC2 to reset the CTH1 current
value to 0.

The CTH1 current value is reset to 0.

The CTC2 preset value is set to 5000.

Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the input time constant to 10 s.

Pulses input to 0005 are counted using CTH1.

When input 0000 turns ON, output 0501 is reset.

INT CTC2 is used to execute the interrupt. (Interrupt routine is executed when
the CTH1 current value and CTC2 preset value are equal.)

Immediate output to 0501 is performed.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Initial setting
When the operation is started, EI instruction enables interrupts.

Note 1: When the interrupt is executed, the contact of CTC2 is automatically reset.
Note 2: The operand used for INT instruction is not allowed for use with other INT
instructions.

16

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-275

6.2 High-speed Counters

6.2

Direct Clock Pulse

6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse

Outline of High-Speed Counters
Basic Architecture

KV-10/80

KV-300

The KV-300 CPU has two 16-bit (CTH0, CTH1) double-phase counter, each
equipped with two high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, 1, 2, 3). These counters
can be used as a stepping motor controller or are used to measure pulse width.
Block diagram of high-speed counters
0008 (RESET)

Phase A 0004
Phase B (0006)

Internal clocks
2100(1.0 s)
2101(10.0 s)
2102(100.0 s)
External pulse
0004/0006

Phase A 0005
Phase B (0007)

Internal clocks
2200(1.0 s)
2201(10.0 s)
2202(100.0 s)
External pulse
0005/0007
0500

Special utility relay

(2103 to 2115)

16-bit
high-speed counter
CTH0

Control circuit
High-speed
counter comparator
CTC0, CTC1
16-bit highspeed counter
CTH1

0500

INT CTC0
INT CTC1

TM30

Special utility relay

(2203 to 2215)
Control circuit

High-speed
counter comparator
CTC2, CTC3

0501

INT CTC2
INT CTC3

0009 (RESET)

Lists of special utility relays for high-speed counters

Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0

3-276

2100

Internal clock (1.0 s) for CTH0

2101

Internal clock (10.0 s) for CTH0

2102

Internal clock (100.0 s) for CTH0

2103

When comparator CTC0 is ON, automatically clears CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No

2104

Direct output to 0500

1: Disable 0: Enable

2105

Turns OFF output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No

2106

Turns ON output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No

2107

Reverses output (toggle) to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No

2108

Direct output to 0500

1: Disable 0: Enable

2109

Turns OFF output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No

2110

Turns ON output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No

2111

Reverses output to 0500 (toggle).

1: Yes 0: No

2112

When comparator CTC1 is ON, automatically clears CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No

2113

Uses CTH0 in magnification mode.

1: Yes 0: No

2114

Selection of magnification mode for CTH0

1: x 4 0: x 2

2115

Enables external reset for CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No

Direct output level to 0500 through comparator

CTC1 (any one of these is ON)

Direct output level to 0500 through comparator

CTC1 (any one of these is ON)

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1
Internal clock (1.0 s) for CTH1

2201

Internal clock (10.0 s) for CTH1

2202

Internal clock (100.0 s) for CTH1

2203

When comparator CTC2 is ON, automatically clears CTH1.

1: Yes 0: No

2204

Direct output to 0501 through comparator CTC2

1: Enable 0: Disable

2205

Direct output level to 0501 through comparator CTC2

1: ON 0: OFF

2206

Selection of INT3 edge

0: UP edge 1: DOWN edge

2207

Reverse output (toggle) level

1: ON 0: OFF

2208

Direct output to 0501

1: Disable 0: Enable

2209

Turns OFF output to 0501.

1: Yes 0: No

2210

Turns ON output to 0501.

1: Yes 0: No

2211

Reverses output (toggle) to 0501.

1: Yes 0: No

2212

When comparator CTC3 is ON, automatically clears CTH1.

1: Yes 0: No

2213

Uses CTH1 in magnification mode.

1: Yes 0: No

2214

Selection of magnification mode for CTH1

1: x 4 0: x 2

2215

Enables external reset for CTH1.

1: Yes 0: No

KV-10/80

KV-300

2200

Direct output level to 0501 through comparator

CTC3 (any one of these is ON)

For KV-10/80 users

1. KV-10/80 has one 8-bit (CTH0) and one 16-bit (CTH1) single phase counter.
2. Internal clocks are as follows:
2100

0.8 s

2200

0.4 s

2101

6.4 s

2201

0.8 s

2102

102.4 s

2202

3.2 s

3. Special utility relays of 2112, 2113, 2114, 2115, 2212, 2213, 2214, and 2215
are not available.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-277

16

6.2 High-speed Counters

High-speed counter and counter comparators
High-speed counter (CTH1)
CTH1 is a 16-bit hardware counter that counts from 0 to 65535.

KV-10/80

KV-300

You can specify the operands listed in the table below as the count input.
You can specify one operand from the table below.
Operand cannot be modified externally during execution of the program.
When the external pulse (0004, 0005) is selected, CTH1 is used as a High-speed
counter with a response frequency of 30 kHz.*
When one of the internal clocks (2100 to 2102, 2200 to 2202) is selected, CTH1
is used as a High-speed timer.
When the external pulse 0500 is selected as input to CTH1, CTH1 can count
direct clock pulses generated by CTH0.
High-speed counter

CTH0

CTH1

Operand

2100
2101
2102
0004

2200
2201
2202
0005
0500

Countable range

0 to 65535

* KV-10/80: 10 kHz
High-speed counter comparator (CTC)
High-speed counter comparators (CTC) is used only for High-speed counters (CTH).
When the current value of CTH reaches the preset value of one of the comparators
(CTC), the comparator turns ON.
At the contact of High-speed counter comparator (CTC), the level of output (0500,
0501) can be changed (directly output) through hardware or an interrupt can be
generated. To change the level of output 0500 and 0501, set the desired value (ON/
OFF) to special utility relays 2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2205, and 2207 to 2212.
The High-speed counters correspond to the High-speed counter comparators as
shown in the table below.

High-speed
counter

High-speed
counter
comparator

Range of
setting value

Output

CTC0

0 TO 65535

0500

CTH0

CTC1
CTH1

Interrupt

INT CTC0
INT CTC1

CTC2

0501

CTC3

INT CTC2
INT CTC3

Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1

3-278

Each High-speed counter (CTH) has its own internal clock.

The desired clock can be selected by specifying the relay No. as operand for
CTH instruction.
You cannot change the internal clock or external pulse during execution of the
program.
Each clock has the following period:

High-speed counter

CTH0

CTH1

Relay No.

2100

2200

1.0 s

2101

2201

10.0 s

2102

2202

100.0 s

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

Period

6.2 High-speed Counters

CAUTION

You cannot change operands of the high-speed counters (CTH) during

execution of the program. The input time constant of the high-speed
counters is usually set to 25 ms. (The HSP instruction is not required.)

High-speed pulses can be counted at up to 30 kHz through external inputs

(0004 to 0007) by turning ON special utility relay 2813. (Internal pulses can
be counted at up to 50 kHz by turning ON 2813.)*

* KV-10/80 : 10 kHz

KV-10/80

The KV PLC can output clock pulses through 0500 and/or 0501 without any delays
caused by scan time. (Through CPU only)
Direct clock pulses, used with the high-speed counters, are applicable for various
types of production control such as for controlling target positions at desired speed.
To perform ramp-up/down control, see "Controlling stepping motors" in Chapter 5.
A setting of the clock pulse cycle (frequency) can be changed by the program within
the allowable range as shown in the table below.

KV-300

Outline of Pulse Output

Outline of pulse output

Output

Internal clock

0500

2100

20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)

2101

20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)

0501

Range of pulse cycle (frequency)

2102

200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.1 Hz)

2200

20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)

2201

20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)

2202

200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.1 Hz)

Direct clock pulses are output through 0500 and/or 0501 according to the settings on
the special utility relays when the number of internal clock pulses counted by the
high-speed counter reaches the preset value of the comparator.
Output example

16

CTH current value (count value)

CTC preset value

0500
0501

ON

OFF

CAUTION

ON/OFF of output relay 0500/0501 depends on the setting of the special utility
relay. Refer to page 3-281.

For KV-10/80 users

Model

Output

Range of pulse cycle

KV-10, 16, 24, 40

500

500 ms to 52.2 ms
(2 kHz to 19 Hz)

501

666 ms to 419.4 ms
(1.5 kHz to 2.4 Hz)

500

50 ms to 52.2 ms
(20 kHz to 19 Hz)

501

666 ms to 419.4 ms
(1.5 kHz to 2.4 Hz)

KV-80

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-279

6.2 High-speed Counters

Pulse period and width

Period and width of the pulse is determined by the period of the internal clock (CTH)
used and the preset value of the comparator (CTC).
When two counter comparators are used, only the pulse width can be changed while
a constant period is maintained.
The following examples illustrate how pulse width and period can be selected:

KV-300

ON/OFF ratio of 1:1

Pulse width (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)
Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (ms)
KV-10/80

ON/OFF ratio of pulse is 1:1.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse width and period.
ON/OFF status is set special utility relays
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse period

Variable pulse width

ON/OFF status is set by special utility relays.
Pulse width (ms) = CTC1 preset value x internal clock (ms)
Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)

Change CTC1 preset value to change the pulse width.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse period.
ON/ OFF status is set by special utility relays

ON
OFF
Pulse
width

Pulse period

CAUTION

The pulse width determined as above is used to pulses generated from the
KV-300 CPU.
Pulses are output through the output circuit. The pulse width varies depending on the response delay from the output circuit and influence of the connected load. Before setting the pulse width, you should measure the actual
waveform using an oscilloscope. (Use pulses with variable pulse width.)

3-280

To obtain the pulse cycle from frequency, use the following expression:
Pulse cycle (s) = 1000 Frequency (kHz)

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

Special utility relay settings and output statuses

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH0) and special utility relays (2103 to 2112)
By setting the special utility relays 2104 to 2112 at startup or changing these relays
during generation of clock pulse, you can select ON/OFF of output relay 0500 as
listed below.
These special utility relays also allow you to set the pulse cycle and pulse width
and enable or disable the direct output.
Pulse status at CTH0 (current value) = CTC (preset value)
Relay No.

CTC0

2103

Automatically clears current value of CTH0.

2104

Disables output to 0500.

2105

Outputs OFF to 0500

2106

Outputs ON to 0500.

CTC1

CAUTION

Pulse status at ON.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Comparator No.

2107

Inverts output to 0500.

2112

Automatically clears current value of CTH0.

2108

Disables output to 0500.

2109

Outputs OFF to 0500

2110

Outputs ON to 0500.

2111

Inverts output to 0500.

Special utility relay must be ON when clock pulse is generated.

Only one of relays 2104 to 2107 and one of relays 2108 to 2111 can be
turned ON. When two or more of the relays among each group are ON,
priority is given to the relay with the smallest No.

Turning OFF special utility relays 2104 and 2108 enable direct output.
Because these relays are factory-set to ON, be sure to set them to OFF.

ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2104 to 2112 is set using SET and
RES instructions or STA instruction.

Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2103 or 2112 ON to change the
pulse width. Turn ON 2103 or 2112 to change the pulse cycle.

Turn OFF 2105 to start clock pulse output. Turn ON 2105 to stop pulse
output.

When special utility relays 2104 and 2108 are turned ON while the direct
clock pulses are being output, the status of the output relay 0500 is output
and the pulses will be stopped.

Timing diagram of 0500 with special utility relay settings

ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
Variable pulse width
Settings of special utility relays
Settings of special utility relays
2103

ON

2112

OFF

2103

ON

2112

OFF

2104

OFF

2108

OFF

2104

OFF

2108

OFF

2105

OFF

2109

OFF

2105

OFF

2109

ON

2106

OFF

2110

OFF

2106

ON

2110

OFF

2107

ON

2111

OFF

2107

OFF

2111

OFF

CTH0 value

CTH0 value

CTC0

CTC0
CTC1

ON
OFF

ON
OFF

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-281

16

6.2 High-speed Counters

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH1) and special utility relays (2203 to 2205,
2208 to 2212)
By setting the special utility relays 2204 to 2205 and 2208 to 2212 at startup or
changing these relays during generation of clock pulse, you can select ON/OFF of
output relay 0501 as listed below.
These special utility relays also allow you to set the pulse cycle

KV-10/80

KV-300

Pulse status at CTH1 (current value) = CTC (preset value)

Comparator No.

Relay No.

CTC2

2203

Automatically clears current value of CTH0.

2204

Disables output to 0501.

2205

Outputs OFF to 0501

CTC3

CAUTION

Pulse status at ON.

2207

Inverts output to 0501.

2212

Automatically clears current value of CTH0.

2208

Disables output to 0501.

2209

Outputs OFF to 0501

2210

Outputs ON to 0501.

2211

Inverts output to 0501.

Special utility relay must be ON when clock pulse is generated.

Only one of relays 2208 to 2211 can be turned ON. When two or more of the
relays among each group are ON, priority is given to the relay with the
smallest No.

Turning ON special utility relay 2204 and turning OFF special utility relay
2208 enable direct output.

ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2204 to 2212 is set using SET and
RES instructions or STA instruction.

Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2203 or 2212 ON to change the pulse
width.

Turn ON 2203 or 2212 to change the pulse cycle.

Turn OFF 2205 to start clock pulse output. Turn ON 2205 to stop pulse
output.

When special utility relays 2204 and 2208 are turned ON while the direct
clock pulses are being output, the status of the output relay 0501 which is
used in the program is output and the pulses will be stopped.

Timing diagram of 0501 with special utility relay settings

Variable pulse width
ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
Settings of special utility relays
Settings of special utility relays
2203

ON

2212

OFF

2203

ON

2212

OFF

2204

ON

2208

OFF

2204

ON

2208

OFF

2205

OFF

2209

OFF

2205

ON

2209

ON

2206

OFF

2210

OFF

2206

OFF

2210

OFF

2207

ON

2211

OFF

2207

OFF

2211

OFF

CTH1 value

3-282

CTH1 value

CTC2

CTC2
CTC3

ON
OFF

ON
OFF

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

Calculating the pulse cycle and comparator setting value

The KV-300 CPU supports clock pulse output at maximum frequency of 50 kHz.
Obtain the pulse cycle for clock pulse output and comparator setting value from the
following expressions:
Pulse cycle
Pulse cycle (s) = 1000 Frequency (kHz)
For pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio (using one comparator)
CTC setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
ON

KV-300

OFF

KV-10/80

Pulse
width
Pulse cycle

For pulse with variable pulse width (using two comparators)

CTC setting value for pulse width = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC setting value for pulse cycle = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
ON
OFF

Pulse
width
Pulse cycle

Range of CTC setting based on internal clock

Special utility relay (Internal clock)

CAUTION

Cycle

* CTC setting range

10 to 65535

2100

2200

1.0 s

2101

2201

10.0 s

1 to 65535

2102

2202

100.0 s

1 to 65535

When setting 2100 or 2200 for the operand of High-speed counter CTH, set
10 or greater value to CTC. Otherwise, clock pulse is not correctly output.

The pulse width varies depending on the influence of the connected load.
Before setting the pulse width, you should measure the actual waveform
using an oscilloscope.

When generating clock pulse using CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3,
do not set the same value to CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3. If setting
the same value, clock pulse is output at the double clock cycle.

* Refer to page 3-276.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-283

16

6.2 High-speed Counters

Examples of Pulse Output

The following sample explains how to program the pulse output.

Example of clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from 0500
This program example shows how to output clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio from
0500, through High-speed counter CTH0 and High-speed counter comparator
CTC0.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Setting special utility relays

Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown on the right table.
The program can be simplified using reverse output (toggle) for pulse with 1:1 ON/
OFF ratio.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2103

ON

2112

OFF

2104

OFF

2108

OFF

2105

OFF

2109

OFF

2106

OFF

2110

OFF

2107

ON

2111

OFF

Values set to the internal clock and CTC0

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 setting value is calculated from the
following expression.
CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 s (2101: special utility relay) to internal clock
and calculate the CTC0 setting value.
The calculated result is "50".
CTC0 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your
reference.
Special utility relay

Internal clock*

CTC0 value

1.0 s

500

2101

10.0 s

50

2102

100.0 s

2100

Programming example
2008
0001

2103

2104

2105

2106

2107

CTH0

SET

RES

RES

RES

SET

RES

2002
0002
0003

3-284

CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0

CTH0 value
CTC0
ON
OFF

The status of output 0500 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2104 to 2107 at
the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct clock pulses to 0500 is
enabled, and the status of output 0500 is inverted each time CTH0 = CTC0.

Turns ON special utility relay 2103 and specifies to clear CTH0 using CTC0. The
program repeats clearing the CTH0 current value with the value set to CTC0.

Resetting the current value of CTH0 at the beginning of the program allows direct
clock pulses of specified width to be output starting from the 1st pulse.

Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON during clock pulse output.

* Refer to page 3-276.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

Coding

CAUTION

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

0001

SET

2103

0002

CON
RES

0004

CON

0005

RES

0006

CON

0007

RES

0008

CON

0009

SET

0010

CON

0011

RES

2104
2105
2106

KV-10/80

0003

KV-300

Line No.

2107
CTH0

0012

LD

2002

0013

CTH

0 2101

0014

CTC

0 #00050

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input relay which enables/
disables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 scan is generated
at start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, which may stop
clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.
This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2105 turns OFF.
Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2105 as required to enable or disable output of
direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET and RES instructions
together or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.
The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that direct clock pulses
are output through 0500 only when 0000 is ON.
SET/RES Instructions

KEEP Instructions

0000

2105
SET

0000

0000

2105
RES

0000

16

KEEP
SET
2105
RES

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from 0501

This program example shows how to output clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio from
0501, through high-speed counter CTH1 and high-speed counter comparator CTC2.
Setting special utility relays
Special utility relays 2203 to 2212 are set as shown on the right table.
The program can be simplified using reverse output (toggle) for pulse with 1:1 ON/
OFF ratio.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2203

ON

2212

OFF

2204

OFF

2208

OFF

2205

OFF

2209

OFF

2206

OFF

2210

OFF

2207

ON

2211

OFF

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-285

6.2 High-speed Counters

Values set to the internal clock and CTC2
After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 setting value is calculated from the
following expression.
CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 s (2201: special utility relay) to internal clock
and calculate the CTC2 setting value.
The calculated result is "50".
CTC2 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your
reference.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Special utility relay

Internal clock*

CTC0 value

2200

1.0 s

500

2201

10.0 s

50

2202

100.0 s

* Refer to page 3-276.

Programming example
2008
0001

2203

2204

2205

2207

CTH1

SET

SET

RES

SET

RES

CTC2

CTH1
2201
#00050
CTC2

ON
OFF

2002
0002
0003

CTH1 value

The status of output 0501 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2204 to 2207 at
the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct clock pulses to 0501 is
enabled, and the status of output 0501 is inverted each time CTH1 = CTC2.

Turns ON special utility relay 2203 and specifies to clear CTH1 using CTC2. The
program repeats clearing the CTH1 current value with the value set to CTC2.

Resetting the current value of CTH1 at the beginning of the program allows direct
clock pulses of specified width to be output starting from the 1st pulse.

Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON during clock pulse output.

Coding
Line No.

3-286

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

0001

SET

2203

0002

CON

0003

SET

0004

CON

0005

RES

0006

CON

0007

SET

0008

CON

0009

RES

2204
2205
2207
CTH1

0010

LD

2002

0011

CTH

1 2201

0012

CTC

2 #00050

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

CAUTION

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input relay which enables/
disables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 scan is generated
at start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, which may stop
clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.
This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2204 turns OFF.
Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2204 as required to enable or disable output of
direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET and RES instructions
together or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.
The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that direct clock pulses
are output through 0501 only when 0000 is ON.
KEEP Instructions

2204
SET

0000

0000

2204
RES

0000

KV-10/80

0000

KV-300

SET/RES Instructions

KEEP
SET
2204
RES

Example of clock pulse with variable ON/OFF ratio

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 s (2 kHz) and pulse width
200 s from 0500
This program example shows how to output clock pulse varies ON/OFF ratio from
0500, through high-speed counter CTH0 and high-speed counter comparator
CTC0 and CTC1.
Setting special utility relays
Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown in the table below.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2103

ON

2112

OFF

2104

OFF

2108

OFF

2105

OFF

2109

ON

2106

ON

2110

OFF

2107

OFF

2111

OFF

16

Values set to the internal clock, CTC0 and CTC1

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 and CTC1 setting value is calculated from the following expression.
CTC1 setting value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
Assign 200 s to pulse width, 500 s to pulse cycle and 10 s (2101: special utility
relay) to internal clock and calculate the CTC0 and CTC1 setting value.
The calculated results of CTC1 and CTC0 are "20" and "50", respectively.
Values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your reference.
Special utility relay

Internal clock*

CTC0 value

CTC1 value

2100

1.0 s

500

200

2101

10.0 s

50

20

2102

100.0 s

* Refer to page 3-276.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-287

6.2 High-speed Counters

Programming example
2008
0001

2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
RES

2106
SET

2107
RES

0002

2108
RES

2109
SET

2110
RES

2111
RES

CTH0
RES

2002

CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0
#00020
CTC1

0003
0004
0005

ON
OFF

The status of output 0500 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2104 to 2107
and 2108 to 2111 at the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct
clock pulses to 0500 is enabled, and the status of output 0500 is turned ON at
CTC0 and is turned OFF at CTC1.

Turns ON special utility relay 2103 and specifies to clear CTH0 using CTC0. The
program repeats clearing the CTH0 current value with the value set to CTC0.

Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON during clock pulse output.

KV-10/80

KV-300

CTH0 value
CTC0
CTC1

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

CAUTION

Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES

Operand
2008
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107

Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024

Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC

Operand
2109
2110
2111
CTH0
2002
0 2101
0 #00050
1 #00020

2108

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input relay which enables/
disables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 scan is generated
at start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, which may stop
clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.
This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2105 turns OFF.
Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2105 as required to enable or disable output of
direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET and RES instructions
together or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.
The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that direct clock pulses
are output through 0500 only when 0000 is ON.
SET/RES Instructions

KEEP Instructions

0000

2105
SET

0000

0000

2105
RES

0000

KEEP
SET
2105
RES

By overwriting the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC0 using the
LDA and STA instructions, you can change the clock pulse cycle (frequency).
Refer to "Example of pulse output "on page 3-293.

3-288

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 s (2 kHz) and pulse width 200
s from 0501
This program example shows how to output clock pulse with variable ON/OFF ratio
from 0501, through High-speed counter CTH1 and High-speed counter comparator
CTC2 and CTC3.
Setting special utility relays
Special utility relays 2203 to 2212 are set as shown on the right table.
Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2203

ON

2212

OFF

2204

ON

2208

OFF

2205

ON

2209

ON

2206

OFF

2210

OFF

2207

OFF

2211

OFF

KV-10/80

KV-300

Relay No.

Values set to the internal clock and CTC2 and CTC3

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 and CTC3 setting value is calculated from the following expression.
CTC3 setting value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
Assign 200 s to pulse width, 500 s to pulse cycle and 10 s (2201: special utility
relay) to internal clock and calculate the CTC2 and CTC3 setting value.
The calculated results of CTC3 and CTC2 are "20" and "50", respectively.
Values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your reference.
Special utility relay

Internal clock*

CTC2 value

CTC3 value

2100

1.0 s

500

200

2101

10.0 s

50

20

2102

100.0 s

*Refer to page 3-276.

Programming example
2008
0001
2208
RES

0002
2002
0003
0004
0005

16

2203
SET

2204
SET

2205
SET

2207
RES

2209
SET

2210
RES

2211
RES

CTH1
RES

CTC2
CTC3

CTH1
2201
#00050
CTC2
#00020
CTC3

ON
OFF

CTH1 value

The status of output 0501 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2204 to 2207
and 2208 to 2211 at the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct
clock pulses to 0501 is enabled, and the status of output 0501 is turned ON at
CTC2 and is turned OFF at CTC3.

Turns ON special utility relay 2203 and specifies to clear CTH1 using CTC2.
The program repeats clearing the CTH1 current value with the value set to
CTC2.

Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON during clock pulse output.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-289

6.2 High-speed Counters

Coding

KV-10/80

KV-300

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

CAUTION

Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES
CON

Operand
2008

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

2203
2204
2205
2207
2208

Instruction
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC

Operand
2209
2210
2211
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050
3 #00020

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input relay which enables/
disables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 scan is generated
at start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, which may stop
clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.
This controls the clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2205 turns
OFF.
Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2205 as required to enable or disable output of
direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET and RES instructions
together or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.
The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that direct clock pulses
are output through 0501 only when 0000 is ON.
SET/RES Instructions

KEEP Instructions

0000

2204
SET

0000

0000

2204
RES

0000

KEEP
SET
2204
RES

6
By overwriting the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC2 using the
LDA and STA instructions, you can change the clock pulse cycle (frequency).

Example of stopping clock pulse after reaching the specified output pulse count
The following example stops clock pulse having the pulse width of 200 s which is
output from 0500 at cycle of 500 s (2 kHz) after reaching the pulse count value of
10000.
Setting special utility relay, internal clock, and CTC
Settings of the special utility relays, internal clock, CTC0, and CTC1 are listed
below.
Relay No.

Setting

Relay No.

Setting

2103

ON

2112

OFF

2104

OFF

2108

OFF

2105

OFF

2109

ON

2106

ON

2110

OFF

2107

OFF

2111

OFF

Special utility relay

Internal clock*

CTC0 value

CTC1 value

1.0 s

500

200

2101

10.0 s

50

20

2102

100.0 s

2100

3-290

*Refer to page 3-276.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

Programming example

0002
0003
0000
0004
2002
0005
0006
0007
2002
0008
0009

2002

0014

2108
RES
2203
SET

2109
SET
2813
SET

2105
SET

2106
SET

2107
RES

2110
2111
RES
RES
CTH1
RES
1000
1000
DIFU

CTH0
RES

2105
RES
CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0
#00020
CTC1
CTH1
0500
#10000
CTC2

INT
CTC2

0011

0013

2104
RES

END

0010

0012

2103
SET

KV-10/80

EI

KV-300

2008
0001

2105
SET
RET1
ENDH

Sets pulse output to 0500 using special utility relays 2104 to 2107 and 2108 to
2111.
The example on the left sets special utility relays to enable direct output to 0500
(2104: OFF), and turn 0500 output ON at CTC0 (2106: ON) and OFF at CTC1
(2109: ON).

Turns ON special utility relay 2103 to clear CTH0 using CTC0. This allows output
with correct clock pulse width starting from the 1st pulse.

Enables interrupt using the EI instruction.

Stops clock pulse using interrupt program (INT CTC2) when the current value of
High-speed counter CTH1 reaches the setting value of high-speed counter
comparator CTC2 (when 10000 pulses are output).

Turns ON special utility relay 2203 to clear CTH1 using CTC2. This allows
program to operate repeatedly at the specified pulse count (10000 pulses).

Always turns ON 2813 when counting pulses using high-speed counter CTH1.

Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON during clock pulse output.

Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON during clock pulse counting.

Specifies internal clock (2101) for clock input of high-speed counter CTH0.
Specifies 0500 for clock input of high-speed counter CTH1. Then, CTH0 is used
for clock pulse output and CTH1 is used for clock pulse counting.

Sets the clock pulse count using the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC2.

Turns ON input relay 0000 to start clock pulse output.

To restart clock pulse output after once stopped, turns ON input relay 0000
again.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-291

16

6.2 High-speed Counters

KV-10/80

KV-300

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

2008

0024

SET

2203

0001

EI

0025

CON

0002

CON

0026

SET

0003

MPS

0027

CON

0004

SET

0028

RES

0005

CON

0006

RES

0007

CON

0008

SET

0009

CON

0010

SET

0011

CON

0012

RES

0013

MRD

0014

RES

0015

CON

0016

SET

0017

CON

0018

RES

0019

CON

0020

RES

0021

CON

0022

RES

0023

MPP

2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
CTH0

2813
CTH1

0029

LD

0000

0030

DIFU

1000

0031

CON

0032

AND

1000

0033

RES

2105

0034

LD

2002

0035

CTH

0 2101

0036

CTC

0 #00050

0037

CTC

1 #00020

0038

LD

2002

0039

CTH

1 0500

0040

CTC

2 #10000

0041

END

0042

INT

CTC2

0043

LD

2002
2105

0044

SET

0045

RETI

0046

ENDH

Special utility relays 2103 to 2111 can be set to turn ON or OFF using LDA and STA
instructions as well as SET and RES instructions. Example below illustrates how
one program can be made shorter using LDA and STA instructions.

2008
EI

2103
SET

2104
RES

2105
SET

2106
SET

2107
RES

2108
RES
2203
SET

2109
SET
2813
SET

2110
RES
CTH1
RES

2111
RES

CTH0
RES

2008

$0268 $2100
LDA
STA

EI

2203
SET

CTH0
RES

2813
SET

CTH1
RES

LDA $0268
When LDA $0268 is executed, the following data is input to the internal register.
[0]
Internal
register

[2]

[6]

[8]

Internal register
When STA 2100 is executed, the data in the internal register is assigned to 16
special utility relays starting from 2100 to 2115.
Special utility
relays 21**

15
0

14
0

13
0

12
0

11
0

10
0

09

08

07
0

06
1

05
1

04
0

Thus, 2103, 2105, 2106, and 2109 are ON.

3-292

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

03
1

02
0

01
0

00
0

6.2 High-speed Counters

Example of pulse output (Ramp-up/down control)

The following example performs ramp-up/down control as shown below by setting 4
parameters (DM0000 to DM0003).

KV-10/80

24 VDC

KV-300

rt
Sta
KV-300

Re
ve
rs

Connection example
The following chart shows an operation example when the KV-300 CPU is connected to the stepping motor driver. See the stepping motor driver instruction
manual for details.
Set the pulse input mode of the stepping motor driver to "1 pulse input mode".

Stepping motor driver

+
Twisted pair cable

COM 1
0000 11
0001 2
0500
0501
0502
0503
COM

7
8
9
10
20

CW (pulse)
CCW
(rotating
direction)
Stepping motor
24 VDC

FG

Frequency (Hz)
fH
(DM0000)

Positioning
pulse total
count
(DM0003)

Acceleration
rate
(DM0002)
fL
(DM0001)
0

10 ms
Acceleration
change time
Acceleration time

Time (ms)
Constant
rate time

Deceleration time

Setting parameters
DM0000: fH [Hz] (Run frequency) 153 Hz to 50000 Hz fH must be greater than
fL.
DM0001: fH [Hz] (Start frequency)
DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms] (fH-fL) (Acceleration time 10 ms)
DM0003: Positioning pulse count 65534 pulses max.

CAUTION

Although smoother trapezoidal control can be obtained by setting a smaller

acceleration rate, the acceleration time is extended.
Be sure to turn OFF input relay 0007 (phase B input).

Operation
This program sets the parameters as below:
DM0000 = 8000 [Hz], DM0001 = 700 [Hz], DM0002 = 400 [Hz/10 ms], DM0003 =
4000 pulses
The program performs trapezoidal control as shown above when start switch 0000 is
pressed, and stops control when pulse count reaches 4000.
The program restarts operation by re-pressing the start switch. It performs reverse
operation while reverse switch 0001 is ON.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-293

16

6.2 High-speed Counters

Programming exmaple
0001

INITIAL SETUP FOR HIGH-SPEED COUNTER/COMPARATOR

2002

0002

#00010
CTC1

#65535
CTC0

CTH0
2100

0003

#65535
CTC2

#65535
CTC3

CTH1
0500

2008
0004

KV-10/80

KV-300

0005

#00700
DW
DM0001

#08000
DW
DM0000

#00400
DW
DM0002

2813 2105
(SET ) (SET )

#04000
DW
DM0003

STARTS POSITIONING
0003

0000

1001
DIFU

0006

Generates clock pulse through highspeed counter CTH0.

Counts clock pulese through highspeed counter CTH1.
CTC0: Pulse cycle
CTC1: Pulse width
CTC2: Frequency change point
CTC3: Positioning pulse total
count

1001

Sets parameters (DM0000 to

DM0003).

0007
$0268
LDA

0008

2100
STA

01
CALL

1200 CTH1 CTH0

(SET ) (RES ) (RES )

EI

0001

0502
( )

0009

0010

2105
(RES )

Reverse output

EMERGENCY STOP
0003

2105
(SET)

0011

END
0012

0013

CTC0,CTC2,DM0011, CALCULATION SUBROUTINE

SBN
02

0014
2002
0015

#01000
LDA

#10000
MUL

DM0012
DIV

#00005
ADD

#00010
DIV

CTC0
STA

DM0010
STA

0016

#00010
LDA

#10000
MUL

DM0010
DIV

#00005
ADD

#00010
DIV

DM0011
ADD

CTC2
STA

DM0011
STA
RET

0017

0018

Emergency stop
Sets CTC0.
Setting value of CTC0 =
1 DM0012 x 103 x 103 6.4

Sets CTC2.
DM0010: Pulse cycle T (s) x 10
DM0011: Accumulated pulse count
DM0012: Current frequency f [Hz]
1200: Acceleration flag

INITIALIZING SUBROUTINE
SBN
01

0019
2002
0020

DM0003
LDA

CTC3
STA

#00002
DIV

DM0004 DM0001 DM0012

STA
LDA
STA

#00000
DW
DM0011

02
CALL
RET

0021

0022

RAMP UP/DOWN CHECK ROUTINE

SBN
03

0023
2002
0024

3-294

DM0012
LDA

#00100
DIV

DM0011 DM0004
ADD
CMP

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.2 High-speed Counters

RET
0025
INTERRUPT ROUTINE FOR SPEED-UP/SLOW-DOWN
INT
CTC2

0027
SPEED-UP
1200
0029

DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0000

LDA
ADD
STA
CMP

2011

03
CALL

2011

02
CALL

2011

1201
( )

0030
2011 DM0003 DM0011
LDA
SUB

0031

1201
0032
0033

CTC2
STA

DM0011
STA

1200
(RES )

SPEED-UP
1200

0034

DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA
CMP

0035

2011

02
CALL

2011

02
CALL

#65535
LDA

CTC2
STA
RETI

0036
0037

Subtracts the acceleration rate from

the current frequency to change
frequency whenever CTC2 turns
ON while acceleration flag 1200 is
OFF. When the current frequency
reaches fL, stops deceleration and
initializes the settings.

INTERRUPT FOR PULSE STOP

INT
CTC3

0038
2002
0039

Adds the acceleration rate to the

current frequency to change
frequency whenever CTC2 turns
ON while acceleration flag 1200 is
ON. When the current frequency
reaches fH, stops acceleration and
sets the deceleration pulse count.

KV-10/80

0028

KV-300

0026

2105
(SET )

When pulse count of clock pulses

equals the setting value of CTC3,
stops clock pulse output.

RETI
0040
ENDH
0041

16

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-295

6.3 Positioning Control

6.3 Positioning Control

6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control)
Outline of positioning control

KV-10/80

KV-300

The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses, independent of scan time, directly through
output relay 0500 or 0501. When the clock pulse frequency, output pulse count, and
acceleration/deceleration time are set to the data memory addresses in advance,
the KV-300 CPU automatically performs ramp-up/down control. Output frequency
can be set within the range of 153 Hz to 50000 Hz.

Frequency (Hz)

Operation

Start

Output pulse count

Deceleration time

Acceleration time

Time (ms)

With this function, ramp-up/down control over stepper motors and AC servo motors
(pulse input type) becomes possible.
The following section describes setting and application of positioning control
parameters.

Clock pulse

6
0500
0501

Rotation direction
Lo : CW
Hi : CCW

0502
0503

KV-300

3-296

Stepping motor
/servo motor

Motor driver

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.3 Positioning Control

Setting and application of parameters

This section describes how to set and apply parameters for positioning control.

Setting parameters
Set the parameters to the assigned data memory addresses. To operate the
positioning control function, the special utility relays must be set. Refer to page 3-299.
The following table shows the parameters and assigned DM Nos.
Parameter

Allowable setting range

Code 11 to 17 or FFFF (-1)
is entered when error occurs

X-axis

DM9408

0500 Start frequency (Hz)

153 to 50000

(0500)

DM9409

0500 Run frequency (Hz)

153 to 50000

DM9410

0500 Acceleration/deceleration
time (ms)

0 to 4096

DM9411

0500 Output pulse count

(high-order 16 bits)

0 to 65535

DM9412

0500 Output pulse count

(low-order 16 bits)

0 to 65535

Y-axis

DM9413

0501 Start frequency (Hz)

153 to 50000

(0501)

DM9414

0501 Run frequency (Hz)

153 to 50000

DM9415

0501 Acceleration/deceleration
time (ms)

0 to 4096

DM9416

0501 Output pulse count

(high-order 16 bits)

0 to 65535

DM9417

0501 Output pulse count

(low-order 16 bits)

0 to 65535

KV-10/80

Set value error code

KV-300

DMNo.
DM9407

Note: Refer to the following expression to determine the output pulse count.
Output pulse count < (65535 x pulse change cycle [ms]) (1000 x run frequency
[Hz])
Pulse change cycle (t)
The pulse change cycle is the cycle in which the output clock pulse frequency is
changed for acceleration or deceleration. The pulse change cycle is obtained from
one of the following expressions, whichever produces the smaller solution. However,
when the start pulse is less than 500 Hz, the pulse change cycle becomes 14 ms or
more.
Pulse change cycle (t) [ms] = (acceleration time [ms] + 199) 200 x 4
or
Pulse change cycle (t) [ms] = 1000 (run frequency [Hz] 1000)
Run

Start

Acceleration/ deceleration time

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-297

16

6.3 Positioning Control

Set value error code
Automatically writes an error code (11 to 17) into DM9407 when a parameter setting
error is found at startup.

KV-10/80

KV-300

Code

Error description

Corrective action

11

Start frequency is below allowable

range.

Adjust start frequency to within allowable range (153 to 50000).

12

Run frequency is below allowable

range.

Adjust run frequency to within allowable range (153 to 50000).

13

Run/start frequency exceeds allowable range.

Adjust run/start frequency to within

allowable range (153 to 50000).

14

Start frequency is greater than run

frequency.

Reduce start frequency to less than

run frequency.

15

Acceleration/deceleration time
exceeds allowable range.

Adjust acceleration/deceleration time

to within allowable range (0 to 4096).

16

Too many pulses are output during

acceleration/deceleration time.

Change the parameters.

17

Too few pulses are output during

acceleration/deceleration time.

Set 2 or more as value for output

pulse count.

Other calculation error

Change the parameters.

FFFF

Corrective action for error code 16

Error code 16 is issued when the output pulse count during acceleration/deceleration time exceeds other values calculated from the preset parameters.
To recover from the error, the following corrective actions are available.
Change the run frequency and/ or the acceleration/ deceleration time according
to the following expression.
65535

Run frequency
x Pulse change cycle x 65535
1000

Corrective action for error code FFFF (-1)

Reduce run frequency and start frequency.
Reduce accelleration/ deccelleration time.

Start frequency (Hz)

Sets a start frequency (speed) to start the motor rotation smoothly during positioning
control.
The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses at the specified frequency.
Run frequency (Hz)
Sets the motor frequency (speed) during positioning control. The KV-300 CPU
outputs clock pulses at the specified frequency.
Note: When the start frequency equals the run frequency, the system operates as
shown in the following chart.
Preset frequency
0

Here, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored. The output count should be less
than 65535.

3-298

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.3 Positioning Control

Output pulse count

Sets the positioning control rotation angle (moving distance) with the pulse count.
The KV-300 CPU outputs as many clock pulses as specified. If the output pulse
count is greater than 65535, set the pulse count separately for high-order 16 bits
and low-order 16 bits based on the following expressions.

KV-10/80

Pulse change cycle (t) ms = (acceleration time ms + 199) 200 x 4

or
Pulse change cycle (t) ms = 1000 (run frequency Hz 1000)

KV-300

Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)

Sets the time required when the start frequency accelerates to the run frequency at
startup. In the same manner, sets the deceleration time required at stop. The KV300 CPU controls the clock pulse frequency from the start frequency to the run
frequency within the specified time. The pulse change cycle within the acceleration
time is obtained from one of the following expressions, whichever produces the
smaller solution. However, the pulse change cycle when the start pulse is less than
500 Hz becomes 14 ms or more.

(Output pulse count) 65536 = A (solution) B (remainder)

A = Output pulse count (high-order 16 bits)
B = Output pulse count (low-order 16 bits)
Note: When the specified output pulse count is insufficient and does not reach the
target value, the KV-300 CPU performs triangular control.
Run frequency
Start frequency
0

The current pulse output value cannot be checked.

Procedure
When the positioning control function is used, the KV-300 CPU controls start, stop,
and emergency stop by turning ON/OFF the utility relays. The table below shows the
operations and assigned utility relays.
Relay No.

R/W

Function

Description

0500

0501

2308

2311

STOP

Decelerates at rising (UP) edge and stops.

2309

2312

R
W

RUN
RESET

Turns ON during pulse output.

Immediately stops when turning ON during
interrupt program.

2310

2313

START

Starts at rising (UP) edge.

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-299

16

6.3 Positioning Control

Operation chart (when 0500 is used)
DM9409
DM9408

DM9411
DM9412

DM9410

DM9410

When 2310 turns ON, clock pulse is output.

(rising [UP] edge is detected.)
2309 is ON during clock pulse output. When
pulse output is stopped, 2309 turns OFF.
When turning ON 2308, clock pulse
decelerates and stops (rising [UP] edge is
detected.)

2310
(START)

KV-10/80

KV-300

DM9408: Start frequency (Hz)

DM9409: Run frequency (Hz)
DM9410: Acceleration time (ms)
DM9411: Output pulse count
(high-order 16 bits)
DM9412: Output pulse count
(low-order 16 bits)

2309
(RUN)
2308
(STOP)

Note 1: When special utility relay 2310 (2313) is turned ON at start of clock pulse,
2309 (2312) turns ON and the clock pulse is output, assuming parameter settings
are correct.
Note 2: If a parameter setting for the X-axis or Y-axis is incorrect, 2309 (2312) does
not turn ON and an error code is written into DM9407. Check the error code and
adjust the parameter setting.
Note 3: By resetting 2309 (2312) within the interrupt program, you can stop the
clock pulse immediately. You must reset 2309 within the interrupt program; otherwise, the clock pulse is not stopped.
Note 4: Because the clock pulse is output under software control, the pulse width is
extended by 10 s to 20 s in the pulse change cycle. Test the clock pulse output on
the KV-300 system before using it in practical applications.

Examples of stepping motor control

24 VDC

Sta
rt

Em
erg
enc
ys
Sto
top
p

Connection example
The following reference example shows how to connect the KV-300 CPU to a
stepping motor driver. Refer to the stepping motor driver instruction manual for
details.
Set the pulse input mode for the stepping motor driver to "Pulse input mode 1".

+
Stepping motor driver

KV-300

Twisted pair cable

COM
0000
0001
0002

1
11
2
12

0500
0501
0502
0503
COM

7
8
9
10
20

+ CW (pulse)

+ CCW
(rotation
direction)

Stepping motor
24 VDC

+
FG

3-300

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.3 Positioning Control

Ramp-up/down control
When start switch 0002 is turned ON, 0500 outputs 100000 pulses under the
following conditions: start frequency 1 kHz, run frequency 5 kHz, and acceleration/
deceleration time 3 s.
Turn ON 0001 to decelerate and stop pulse output. When 0000 is turned ON, pulse
output is immediately stopped.

0002
0001

#01000 #05000 #03000 #00001 #34464 2310

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410 DM9411 DM9412 2308

0003

Sets parameters and simultaneously

starts pulse.
Decelerates and stops pulse.

END

0004

INT
0000

0005
2002

2309
RES

0006

Executes emergency stop sequence with

interrupt progaram.

KV-10/80

EI
0002

Enables interrupt when starting operation.

This is required to allow emergency stop
operation.

KV-300

2008
0001

RET1

0007

ENDH

0008

Application example of stepping motor control

Assume a program that can be controlled both automatically and manually.
In automatic mode, the system runs as shown in the chart below after 0000 is turned
ON.

8000
2000
300
0

15000

17500

16
15000

In manual mode, the system goes forward while 0008 is ON and rearward while
0009 is ON. It returns to the origin when 0007 turns ON.
A pulse is output from 0500. Reverse the rotation direction by turning ON/OFF 0502.
The system is equipped with an origin sensor (0002), forward end limit (0006), and
rearward end limit (0004).

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-301

6.3 Positioning Control

KV-10/80

KV-300

Program example
0001

STEPPING MOTOR CONTROL PROGRAM (ORIGIN, FORWARD, REVERSE LIMITS)

0002

SPECIFICATION

0003

PULUSE OUT==500 FOR/REV=502 ORIGIN=0002 FOR/END=0006 FOR/END=0004

0004

MANUAL SW: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009 ORIGIN SW=0007

0005

AUTO OPERATION START=0000

0006

0007

ENABLES INTERRUPT & RESETS ORIGIN POSITIONING FRAG

2008

0008

0009

1200
(RES)

< EI >

MANUAL SWITCHES: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009

0008

0009

2309

0502
(SET)

0006

1100
DIFU

0009

0008

2309

0502
(RES)

0004

1101
DIFU

0010

0011
1100

#00600 #04000 #00100

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

0012

#00001 #00000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

Sets start frequency, run frequency,

and acceleration/deceleration time.
Start frequency: 600 Hz
Run frequency: 4 kHz
Acceleration/deceleration time:
100 ms
Output pulse count: 65536

1103
DIFU

1101
0013
0008

0009

1105
DIFU

0014

0015

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ORIGIN * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

0016

LIMIT SWITCHES
0007

1205
DIFU

0017

6
0018

FORWARD IN ADVANCE
0502
(SET)

1205
0019

0020

#00000 #03500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

1300
DIFU

1200
(SET)

#00001 #00000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

1301
DIFU

1200
(RES)

For forward operation, the following

parameters are set:
Start frequency: 300 Hz,
Run frequency: 3 kHz,
Acceleration/decekeratuib time: 250 ms,
Output pulse count: 3500.
For rearward operation, the following
parameters are set:
Start frequency: 50 Hz
Run frequency: 500 Hz
Acceleration/deceleration time: 0 ms
Output pulse count: 65536

STOP FORWARDING
1200

0021

0022

#00300 #03000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

To return to the origin, first goes

forward and then rearward. Stops
when origin limit (0002) turns ON.

2309
ON
1201

1201

2309
OFF
1202

1202

1203
DIFU

POSITIONING ORIGIN WHILE REVERSING SLOWLY

1203

0023

3-302

0502
(RES)

#00500 #05000 #00000

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

6.3 Positioning Control

0024

STARTS MOTOR
1300

0006

1301

0004

2310
( )

0025

Instructs motor start and acceleration/

deceleration stop.

0026
1103
0027
1506

2308

0028

SLOW DOWN & STOP (MANUAL/AUTO)

0009

0004

0008

2308
( )

KV-10/80

0006
0030

KV-300

0029

0031
1105
0032

0033

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * AUTO OPERATION CH0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

0034

STAGE INSTRUCTION START

1400
(SET)

2008
0035
2308
0036

0037

0038

0039

1401
(RES)

1408

1408
DIFU

1402
(RES)

1403
(RES)

1400
(SET)

AUTO START (OPERATES DURING 0000 IS TURNED ON)

1400
STG

0000

1401
JMP

MOVES TO NEXT STAGE AFTER MOTOR STOPS

1407
(RES)

#00010
T001

T001

0040

1401
STG

1500
DIFU

1405
(RES)

#00005
T002

T002

0041

1402
STG

1501
DIFU

1406
(RES)

#00005
T003

T003

0042

1403
STG

1502
DIFU

2309

1405

1402
JMP

1405
2309

1406

1403
JMP

1406
2309

1407

1400
JMP

1407
0043

AUTO OPERATION PARAMETER SET

1500

0502
(SET)

#00300 #08000 #00150

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

#00000 #15000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

1503
DIFU

1501

0502
(SET)

#00300 #02000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

#00000 #02500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

1504
DIFU

1502

0502
(RES)

#00300 #15000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

#00000 #17500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412

1505
DIFU

0044
0045

0046

0047

Creates each of the operation programs

with the STG instruction and makes the
programs ready in the specified order.
Sets the parameters for automatic mode.
(1) Start frequency: 300 Hz
Run frequency: 8 kHz
Acceleration/deceleration time: 150 ms
Output pulse count: 15000
(2) Start frequency: 300 Hz
Run frequency: 2 kHz
Acceleration/deceleration time: 250 ms
Output pulse count: 2500
(3) Start frequency: 300 Hz
Run frequency: 15 kHz
Acceleration/deceleration time: 250 ms
Output pulse count: 17500
Stops pulse at the origin with the interrupt
program.

STARTS MOTOR
1506
( )

1503
0048
1504
0049
1505
0050

END
0051

0052

INTERRUPT FOR EMERGENCY STOP (POSITIONING ORIGIN)

INT
0002

0053
1200
0054

0008

0009

0000

2309
( RES )
RETI

0055
ENDH
0056

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

3-303

16

KV-10/80

KV-300

6.3 Positioning Control

3-304

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control

Chapter 7
Serial Communication
The KV Series can be connected to an external device with an RS-232C interface
to establish communication.
This chapter describes communications specifications, how to connect the KV
Series to external devices, and how to perform communication.
7.1

Communications Specifications ............................................ 3-306

7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3

Communications Specification ............................................................... 3-306

Connection with the KV Unit .................................................................. 3-306
Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer .......................... 3-307

7.2

Serial Communication ............................................................. 3-308

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7

Command Transmission Procedure ....................................................... 3-308

Format of Commands/Responses ......................................................... 3-309
Communication Command/Response List ............................................. 3-310
Setting Communication Commands and Responses to Commands ..... 3-311
Other Response Codes .......................................................................... 3-315
Error Code List ....................................................................................... 3-316
Example Program .................................................................................. 3-317

7.3

Loading Text Data .................................................................... 3-318

7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3

Receiving Text Data ............................................................................... 3-318

Transmitting Text Data ........................................................................... 3-319
Sample Program .................................................................................... 3-320

7.4

ASCII Code List ........................................................................ 3-321

7.1 Communications Specifications

7.1 Communications Specifications

This section describes the specifications for the RS-232C interface and the connection between the KV and external devices.

7.1.1 Communications Specification

The communications specification of the KV is summarized in the table. Set the
communications parameters of the personal computer by referring to the table.
Communications parameters
Duplex

Full

Synchronization

Start/stop

Data format

ASCII

Baud rate

9,600 bps

Data length

8 bits

Parity check

Even

Stop bit length

1 bit

Delimiter

CR

Note 1: Be sure to specify the same communication parameters for the KV and any
external devices to be connected. Communication will fail if different parameters are
used.
Note 2: Refer to the instruction manual supplied with each device when setting
communications parameters on the device.

7.1.2 Connection with the KV Unit

Use the special connection cable (Straight cable: OP-26487, Reverse cable: OP96607) and a 25-pin D-sub connector (OP-26485) to connect the KV to the RS-232C
connector of the external device.

Communication port B
Communication port A

External device with RS-232C connector

KV

Note: The KV-10xx and KV-10/80 Series include only communication port A.
Wiring diagram
The following is the wiring diagram for the RS-232C cable. Be sure to use the
special connection cable to connect the KV with each device.
Device designated as modem

KV
SD
RD
SG

3
5
4

Connection
cable
(Reverse:
OP-96607)

Pin assignment for

the KV

3-306

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

2
3
7
4
5
6
20

SD
RD
SG
RS
CS
DR
ER

25-pin D-sub
connector
(OP-26485)

Device designated
as terminal

KV
SD
RD
SG

3
5
4

Connection
cable
(Straight:
OP-26487)

2
3
7
4
5
6
20

SD
RD
SG
RS
CS
DR
ER

25-pin D-sub
connector
(OP-26485)

7.1 Communications Specifications

7.1.3 Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer

Connect the KV-300 CPU to the RS-232C port of the personal computer with the
supplied connecting cable (OP-226486/OP-26487).

9-pin D-SUB female

connector: OP-26487

Connecting cable
Standard cable:OP-26486

Personal computer with an

RS-232C port

KV-300

Recommended pin assignments for the RS-232C communication cable are shown
below. When connecting the KV-300 CPU, use only the connecting cable supplied.
SD
RD

23

45

SG

KV-300
3
5

DCE
2
3
4
5
6
20
7

SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG

SD
RD

KV-300
3
5

SG

DTE
2
3
4
5
6
20
7

SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG

Pin assignments for

the KV-300 CPU

Standard cable (OP-26486 + OP-26487)

SD
RD

3
5

SG

Modular
Connector

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9-pin D-sub connector

17

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-307

7.2 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

When the KV is connected to a personal computer, the current value or preset value
of timers/counters or contents of data memories in the KV can be loaded to and
modified on the computer.

7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure

Commands are transmitted from a personal computer to the KV base unit as follows:
Transmits a break signal

Initialize the communication buffer and

baud rate setting of the KV.

Transmits communications
start command (CR)

Start communications with the KV.

Transmits a command

Transmit a command which instructs the

KV to perform the required operation.

Receiving a response

Receive and check the response to the

transmitted command.

Transmits communications
end command (CQ)

End communications with the KV.

Transmitting a break signal

A break signal is used to initialize the communication buffer and baud rate setting of
the KV. It is necessary to transmit a break signal of 100 ms or longer to the KV
before starting communication. Another break signal is unnecessary once the
communication is established.
A break signal must have the waveform shown below.

+V

100 ms or longer

SD
-V

10 ms or longer

Note 1: For the first serial communication with a personal computer after the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare
(DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked, be
sure to transmit a break signal. A break signal is unnecessary at other times.
Note 2: If you cannot transmit a break signal, turn OFF the KV once to initialize the
communication program. After that, restart communication between the KV and the
personal computer.
Note 3: Be sure to stop the communication for 10 ms or longer after transmitting a
break signal.

3-308

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

Command/response format
"Command" and "response" in communications between the KV and a personal
computer are defined as follows:
Command: Message transmitted from personal computer to KV
Response: Answer to the command (message from KV to personal computer)
When a personal computer transmits a command to the KV Series basic unit, the KV
sends back a response to the personal computer.
When creating a program to control the KV using a personal computer, create it so
that the response is checked before the next command is transmitted.

7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses

The formats of commands and responses are as follows:
Command format
Use the following format to transmit commands from the personal computer to the
KV. [CR] is a delimiter. The KV ignores [LF] and recognizes the next character after
[LF] as the next command.

Or

Command

Command

R
R

L
F

Response format
The KV sends back a response to the received command in the following format.
When creating a program using a personal computer, create it so that the personal
computer can process the response in this format.
Response

L
F

17

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-309

7.2 Serial Communication

7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List

The following list shows the commands and responses used in serial communication. "_" in the list represents a space.
Function

Command

Response

Starts communication.

CR

CC

Ends communication.

CQ

CF

Changes mode.

Mn

OK

Description

n= 0: PROGRAM mode
1: RUN mode

Clears error.

ER

OK

Checks PLC error.

?E

dd

dd= Error code (00: No error)

f= 0: PROGRAM mode
1: RUN mode

Checks current PLC mode.

?M

Counter

RD_Cnnn

High-speed
counter CTH

RD_CTHn

High-speed
counter
RD_CTCn
comparator CTC

Reads

Timer

RD_Tnnn

Digital trimmer

RD_AT

f= 0: Contact OFF, 1: Contact ON

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
(Current value) (Preset value) n/nnn= Counter No.

f, ddddd, ddddd

f= 0: Contact OFF 1: Contact ON

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
(Current value) (Preset value) nnn= Timer No.

f, ddddd, ddddd

ddddd_ddddd_00000_00000

(Trimmer 0) (Trimmer 1)

Relay contact

RD_nnnnn

Data memory

RD_DMnnnn

Temporary data
RD_TMnn
memory

Writes

Counter current
value

WR_Cnnn_ddddd

Timer current
value

WR_Tnnn_ddddd

CTH current
value

WR_CTHn_ddddd

Counter preset
value 2.

WS_Cnnn_ddddd

Timer preset
value 2.

WS_Tnnn_ddddd

CTC preset
value 2.

WS_CTCn_ddddd

Data memory

WR_DMnnnn_ddddd

Temporary data
WR_TMnn_ddddd
memory
Relay
Forces ON

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

Reads preset values of trimmer 0 and 1.

f= 0: Contact OFF, 1: Contact ON

ddddd

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

nnnn= DM No.

OK

n/nnn= Timer/counter
No. dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

OK

n/nnn= Timer/counter
No. dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

OK

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

nn,nnnn= DM No.

OK

nnnn= Relay No.

nnn= Timer/counter No.

OK

nnnn= Relay No.

nnn= Timer/counter No.
n= CTC No.

ST_nnnnn

Counter contact ST_Cnnn

Timer contact

ST_Tnnn

Relay

RS_nnnnn

Counter contact RS_Cnnn

Forces OFF

Timer contact

RS_Tnnn

High-speed
counter
RS_CTCn
comparator CTC
contact

Note 1: Temporary data memories TM28, TM30, and TM31 are read-only. Values cannot be written into
these memories. However, these memories can be used when special functions are not used.
Note 2: Visual KV Series: When the preset values of timers and counters are changed using "WS", the
ladder program in EEPROM is updated the next time the KV is turned on.
KV-300, 10/80 Series: The "WS" command changes the content of the program stored in the
PLCs EEPROM.
Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.

3-310

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands and Responses to

Commands
This section describes the command settings and responses when a command is
properly processed.
"_" represents a space.
Refer to "7.2.5 Other Response Codes" (p. 3-315) for responses under abnormal
conditions.
Communications start command
Transmit a communications start command to start communication with the KV.
Other commands can be transmitted after the proper response is sent back from the
KV.
Note: Other commands cannot be used unless a [CR] (communications start)
command is transmitted first.
Starts communications between the KV and a personal computer.
Command: CR
Response: CC
Communications end command
Ends communications between the KV and a personal computer.
Command: CQ
Response: CF
Mode change command
Selects the mode between PROGRAM and RUN.
Command: Mn
[n=0; PROGRAM mode, n=1; RUN mode]
Response: OK
Error clear command
Clears error messages on KV.
Command: ER
Response: OK

17

Checking KV PLC error

Checks errors or faults in the KV. The description of the error is indicated with the
error code.
"7.2.6 Error Code List" (p. 3-316).

Command: ?E
Response: dd
Error code (2- or 3-digit number)
Checking current mode
The KV responds with 0 or 1 indicating a current mode.
Command: ?M
Response: f
0: PROGRAM mode 1: RUN mode

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-311

7.2 Serial Communication

Reading counter
Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset values of the specified
counter/up-down counter.
Command: RD_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd
[Preset value of the counter (00000 to 65535: in
decimal)]
[Current value of the counter (00000 to 65535: in
decimal)]
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.
Reading high-speed counter CTH
Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset values of the specified
high-speed counter CTH.
Command: RD_CTHn
High-speed counter No. (0 or 1)
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd
Preset value of CTH (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of CTH (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.
Reading high-speed counter comparator CTC
Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset values of the specified
high-speed counter comparator CTC.
Command: RD_CTCn
High-speed counter comparator No.
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd
Preset value of CTC (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of CTC (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.
Reading timer
Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset values of the specified
timer.
Command: RD_Tnnn
Timer No.
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd
Preset value of timer (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of timer (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.

Reading digital trimmer

Reads the preset values of the digital trimmers.
Command: RD_AT
Response: ddddd_ddddd_00000_00000
Value of trimmer 1 (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Value of trimmer 0 (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Reading relay contact
Reads the contact ON/OFF status of the specified relay.
Command: RD_nnnn
Relay No.
Response: f
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.

3-312

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

Reading DM
Reads the contents of the specified data memory.
Command: RD_DMnnnn
Data memory No.
Response: ddddd
Data in the specified data memory. (00000 to
65535: in decimal)
Reading TM
Reads the contents of the specified temporary data memory.
Command: RD_TMnn
Temporary data memory No. (00 to 31)
Response: ddddd
Data in the specified temporary data memory.
(00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Writing current value of counter
Changes the current value of the specified counter or up-down counter.
Command: WR_Cnn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Counter No.
Response: OK
Writing current value of timer
Changes the current value of the specified timer.
Command: WR_Tnnn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Timer No.
Response: OK
Writing current value of high-speed counter CTH
Changes the current value of the specified high-speed counter CTH.
Command: WR_CTHn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
High-speed counter No.
Response: OK
Writing preset value of counter
Changes the preset value of the specified counter or up-down counter.
Command: WS_Cnnn_ddddd
New preset value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Counter No.
Response: OK
Note: Executing this command changes the program in the KV. The program in EEPROM is
automatically updated the next time the KV is turned ON.

Writing preset value of timer

Changes the preset value of the specified timer.
Command: WS_Tnnn_ddddd
New preset value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Timer No.
Response: OK
Note: Visual KV Series: Executing this command changes the program in the KV. The
program in EEPROM is automatically updated the next time the KV
is turned ON.
KV-300, 10/80 Series: The "WS" command changes the content of the program
stored in the PLCs EEPROM.
Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-313

17

7.2 Serial Communication

Writing preset value of high-speed counter comparator CTC
Changes the preset value of the specified high-speed counter comparator CTC.
Command: WS_CTCn_ddddd
New preset value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
High-speed counter comparator No.
Response: OK
Writing into DM
Writes data into the specified data memory.
Command: WR_DMnnnn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Data memory No.
Response: OK
Writing into TM
Writes data into the specified temporary data memory. TM30 and TM31 are readonly memories, so values cannot be written to them.
Command: WR_TMnn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Temporary data memory No. (00 to 29)
Response: OK
Forcing relay ON
Forces the contact of the specified relay to ON.
Command: ST_nnnnn
Relay No.
Response: OK
Forcing counter contact ON
Forces the contact of the specified counter to ON.
Command: ST_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: OK
Forcing timer contact ON
Forces the contact of the specified timer to ON.
Command: ST_Tnnn
Timer No.
Response: OK

Forcing relay OFF

Forces the contact of the specified relay to OFF.
Command: RS_nnnnn
Relay No.
Response: OK
Forcing counter contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified counter to OFF.
Command: RS_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: OK
Forcing timer contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified timer to OFF.
Command: RS_Tnnn
Timer No.
Response: OK

3-314

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

Forcing CTC contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified high-speed counter comparator to OFF.
Command: RS_CTCn
High-speed counter comparator No.
Response: OK
Note 1: Input relays cannot be forced ON/OFF. (Except when special utility relay
2301 is ON.)
Note 2: "_" in commands and responses represents a space.

7.2.5 Other Response Codes

If the command from a computer is an unspecified one, or an error occurs in the KV,
the KV sends back an appropriate response code for the status.
Response
code
E0

E1

Description
Relay No.
error

Command
error

Cause

Remedy

Undefined relay, counter,

timer, DM, CTH, or CTC
number was specified.

Specify a number that is

defined in the KV being
used.

Counter, timer, CTH, or

CTC number, unused in a
program was specified.

Check a program, and

specify a number used in
the program.

Undefined command was

transmitted.

Check a command.

Incorrect command was

specified.
Command other than "CR"
was transmitted before the
communications path was
established.

Transmit "CR" to start

communications, and then
transmit a command.

E2

When the KV has no program Register a program into the

Program
KV.
unregistered stored, "M1" was transmitted
Check a program and
or reading of timer/counter
specify the number used in
content was attempted.
the program.

E3

Base unit
fault

Hardware error was detected

in a KV base unit.

Turn off the power for the KV,

and then turn it on again. If
the cause of the error is not
removed, the KV may be
faulty. Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.

E4

Writeprotected

Attempt was made to change

the preset value of a counter,
timer, or CTC in a writeprotected program.

Write-enable the program,

and change the preset value.

E5

Base unit
error

"M1" was transmitted before

cleaning an error message
from the KV.

Clear the error message from

the KV, and remove the cause
of the error.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-315

17

7.2 Serial Communication

7.2.6 Error Code List

When a "Checking KV PLC error" command (?E) is transmitted, the KV sends back
the error code. The following list shows the description, cause, and remedy for each
error code.
Error code

Description

Cause

Remedy

00

No error

10

CALL nest error

Subroutines are nested to four levels

or more.

11

FOR nest error

12

INT nest error

FOR/NEXT instructions are nested to Check the program while paying

eight levels or more.
particular attention to usage of
subroutines and the INT instruction,
Five levels or more of interrupts
and restore the program accordingly.
occurred simultaneously.

13

MPS nest error

20

Memory error

MPS/MPP instructions are nested to

eight levels or more.
Content in RAM was erased. All data Turn the KV off once and turn it on.
in data memory and current values of Register data from the beginning.
counters in the KV were cleared.
Scan time exceeds 300 ms.

30

Scan timer error

40

NO PROGRAM

50

SND/RTN failure

51

Division by zero

52

Address error

53

Invalid instruction

54

Watchdog timer error

Check the program again.

Be sure that there is no excessive
repetition using the FOR/NEXT loop.
Be sure that an interrupt is not
executed at a higher rate.

Attempt was made to operate a KV

base unit which has no programs
stored.

Write a program into KV.

Hardware error was detected in a KV Turn off the power for the KV, and
base unit.
then turn it on again. If the cause of
the error is not removed, the KV may
be faulty. Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.

3-316

These errors may occur when a

program is executed.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.2 Serial Communication

7.2.7 Example Program

Typical program for communications between the KV and a personal computer (For
IBM PC-AT & compatible computers using BASIC)

Language Microsoft BASIC Version 7.0

*****I/OAddress (RS-232C Port-1)*****

Port-1&H3F*
Port-2&H2F*

PortCtrl%=&H3FBCOM1
Port1Modem%=&H3FCMODEMCtrl
PortBpsLow%=&H3F8BitrateLow
PortBpsHigh%=&H3F9BitrateHigh
*****ControlCode*****
Port1CtrlCode1%=&H5BBreak&8bitEven1Stopbit
Port1CtrlCode2%=&H1B8bitEven1Stopbit
Note: No parity check is specified due to the
*****InitializesRS-232C*****
limitations of the version of BASIC being used.
OPEN"COM1:9600,N,8,1"FORRANDOMAS#1'
*****RS-232CPortInit*****
OUTPortCtrl %,Port1CtrlCode1%Start transmitting a break signal
SLEEP1wait 1 sec.
OUTPortCtrl%,Port1CtrlCode2%Ends transmitting a break signal

-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-******DebugPrint*****
status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus1";status
status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus1";status

*****SelfInit.*****
linectrl=INP(PortCtrl%)ReadLine-Control-Register
linectrl=linectrlOR&H80'
OUTPortCtrl%,linectrlDLAB=ON

OUTPortBpsLow%,12SetBitRate(9600BPS)
OUTPortBpsHigh%,0'

linectrl=linectrlAND&H7FDLAB=OFF
OUTPortCtrl%,linectrl

*****CtrlLine*****
OUTPort1Modem%,&HBRTS,DTRON !!

*****DebugPrint*****
status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus2";status
status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus2";status
-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-**********************************************************
*****Transmitting a command/receiving a response*****
*********************************************************
a$=""
WHILEa $>"END"
PRINT"Command>>":
INPUTa$
PRINT#1,a $
b$=""
LINEINPUT#1,b$
PRINT"RsP[";b$;"]"
PRINT
WEND
PRINT"GoodBy!!"
CLOSE#1
END

Change value in "SLEEP" timer according to your personal computers clock

frequency so that value I exceeds 100 ms.
Set the baud rate of your personal computer to 9600 bits/s.
Enter END to terminate programming.

Note 1: MS-DOS executable files (KVCOM.EXE) and BASIC source code files
(KVCOM.BAS) are included in the KV Incrediware (DOS) Software (KV-H4E,
version 2.00 or higher).
Note 2: Type in "KVCOM" and press ENTER to call the MS-DOS command line.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-317

17

7.3 Loading Text Data

7.3 Loading Text Data

The KV can be connected to equipment having an RS-232C port to load consecutive
text data (less than 100 bytes) as a batch into its data memories.
Loaded data can be modified and incorporated into a program.

7.3.1 Receiving Text Data

The KV can write up to 100 bytes of text data sandwiched between STX and ETX,
into internal data memories (DM1000 to DM1099 with communication port A,
DM1200 to DM1299 with communication port B), one byte per data memory in
ASCII code.
Communications data format
Note that each text data must include STX (02H) in the 1st byte followed by the text
(100 bytes max.) and end with ETX (03H) in the last byte as shown below.
1st byte

Last byte
Text data (less than 100 bytes)

STX

ETX

Internal data memory

The KV writes received text data into its data memories (DM1000 to DM1099 with
communication port A, DM1200 to 1299 with communication port B), one byte per
data memory in ASCII code.

Dat a
memory

NEW PO RT A
KV
PO RT B
KV- 300
KV- 10/ 80

Dat a No.

DM1000

DM1001 DM1002 DM1003 to DM1098 DM1099

DM1200

DM1201 DM1202 DM1203 to DM1298 DM1299

DM9200

DM9201 DM9202 DM9203 to DM9298 DM9299

Byte count Data 1

Data 2

Data 3 to Data 98

Data 99

The KV writes "00" into the high-order 8 bits and text data in ASCII code into the
low-order 8 bits of the data memory.

7
Byte count of data
Received data

STX Data 1 Data 2 Data 3

Data memory

1st DM
(Byte count of data)

Data 99 ETX

3rd DM

2nd DM

100th DM

4th DM

15

Bits in
data memory

00

High-order 8 bits (00)

Low-order 8 bits (ASCII code)

Note: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.

Special utility relay operation
Three special utility relays assigned for each channel turn on for one scan to
indicate that text data has been received or that data reception has failed.

3-318

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.3 Loading Text Data

Relay No.
( PO RT A)

Relay No.
( PO RT B)

Relay No.
( KV- 300/ 10/ 80)

Descript ion

2801

2806

2804

Turns ON for one scan when text data

has been received.

2802

2807

2805

Turns ON for one scan when text data

has been received while 2801 is ON,
or when 2803 is ON.

2803

2808

2806

Turns ON for one scan when text data

reception has failed.

Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first serial communication with a
personal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the
KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked.
A break signal initializes the communication setting for the KV. If you cannot transmit
a break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the communication setting. The KV
will not receive text data unless its communication setting has been initialized.
Note 2: If [ETX] exists at some point in the text data, the KV writes the data before
[ETX] into the data memory. The data after [ETX] is not written.
Note 3: If KV receives text data while special utility relay 2804 (2809)*1 is ON, the
received data is not written into the data memory. In this case, special utility relay
2802 (2807)*2 turns ON for one scan.
Note 4: When parity errors or other errors occur during text data reception, the
received data is not written into the data memory. In this case, special utility relays
2802 (2807) and 2803 (2808)*3 turn ON for one scan.
Note 5: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.
*1: 2804 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2805 with KV-300/10/80 *3: 2806 with KV-300/10/80

7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data

The KV transmits text data written into its data memories (DM1100 to DM1199 for
communication port A, DM1300 to DM1399 for communication port B), one byte per
data memory in ASCII code.
Transmission data format and internal data memories
When transmitting data from the KV, write the data into the data memory in the
following format.
PO RT A

DM1100

DM1101

DM1102

DM1103 to DM1198 DM1199

Dat a
PO R T B
memory
K V- 3 0 0 /
10/ 80

DM1300

DM1301

DM1302

DM1303 to DM1398 DM1399

DM9300

DM9301

DM9302

DM9303 to DM9398 DM9399

Dat a No.

Byte count

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3 to Data 98

Data 99

The KV writes "00" into the high-order 8 bits and text data in ASCII code into the
low-order 8 bits of the data memory.
Low-order 8 bits (ASCII code)

High-order 8 bits (00)

15

00

Data memory bits

Data memory

1st DM
(Byte count of data)

Transmitted data

2nd DM

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3

3rd DM

4th DM

100th DM

Data 99

Note: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-319

17

7.3 Loading Text Data

Special utility relay operation
Two special utility relays are assigned for each channel for data transmission. Text
data or a break signal is transmitted when the respective relay is turned ON/OFF.
Relay No.
(Port A)

Relay No.
(Port B)

Relay No.
(KV-300/10/80)

2804

2809

2807

Starts/stops transmitting text data.

ON: Start, OFF: Stop

2800

2805

2803

Starts/stops transmitting break signal.

ON: Start, OFF: Stop

Description

Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first serial communication with a
personal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the
KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked.
A break signal initializes the communication setting for the KV. If you cannot transmit
a break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the communication setting.
The KV will not transmit/receive text data unless its communication setting has been
initialized.
Note 2: Turn ON special utility relay 2804 (2809) (SET 2804 [2809])*1 to transmit text
data. Special utility relay 2804 (2809)*1 remains ON during text data transmission,
and automatically turns OFF when the transmission completes.
To forcefully stop the text data transmission, turn OFF special utility relay 2804
(2809) (RES 2804 [2809])*1.
Note 3: A break signal is transmitted while special utility relay 2808*2 is turned ON.
Use the SET-RES instruction pair or OUT-OUB instruction pair to control a break
signal. The communication program of the destination KV is initialized after a break
signal has been transmitted.
*1: 2807 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2803 with KV-300/10/80

7.3.3 Sample Program

The following is the sample program to transmit/receive text data using communication port A on the KV basic unit.
Data to be transmitted: KEYENCE
Transmission header: STX
Transmission delimiter: ETX
Length of received data: Fixed to 7 bytes

0001

Sends break signal (1 sec.).

2008

2800

T000

0002

One scan ON
2800

#00010
T000

0003

Break signal
0004
0005

Transmits text data ("STX KEYENCE ETX").

1001
0000
DIFU
Transmission
start relay

0006

1001

#00009 $0002
$004B
$0045
$0059
$0045
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1100 DM1101 DM1102 DM1103 DM1104 DM1105
No. of
STX
K
E
Y
E
transmitted
data

0007
0008
0009

Receives text data.

Transmits text data when

input relay 0000 turns ON.

2804
$004E
$0043
$0045
$0003
SET
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1106 DM1107 DM1108 DM1109 Transmission
N
C
E
ETX
relay

DM1000 DM1001 DM1002 DM1003 DM1004 DM1005 DM1006 DM1007

2801
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
Reception relay
No. of
Received Received Received Received Received Received Received data
received
data.
data
data
data
data
data
data
0500
2803
T001

0010

Reception error
0500
0011

#00030
T001
END

0012
ENDH
0013

3-320

When power is turned ON,

transmits a break signal for
one second during the first
scan.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

Receives text data.

Turns ON output relay 0500
for 3 seconds when
reception error occurs.

7.4 ASCII Code List

7.4 ASCII Code List

The following are the ASCII code characters used for data transmission.

High-order 4 bits

0
1
2
3
4
Low-order 4 bits

5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D

17

E
F
Characters in the shaded area can be used for data transmission with the KV.
[STX], [ETX], [LF], and [CR] are used as data delimiters.
Only use characters in the shaded area because the other characters are used for
control purposes.

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

3-321

7.4 ASCII Code List

3-322

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

Chapter 8
Programming Examples
This chapter describes the typical programming examples for KV-300, KV-10/80
Series. These programs can be used for Visual KV Series. However, pay attention
to the I/O addressing compatibility before use.
8.1

List ....................................................................................................... 3-324

8.2

Details ................................................................................................. 3-326

8.2.1

Reference Program Examples ............................................................... 3-326

8.1 List

8.1 List
Instruction

Program title

TMR, TMH, TMS [Timers]

One-shot circuit

3-326

Off-delay circuit

3-326

C [Counter]

3-327

Flicker circuit

3-327

Accumulator timer

3-327

Large capacity counter

3-328
3-328

Counter multi-level setting

3-328

DIFU, DIFD

One-shot circuit

3-329

KEEP

Detection of packs on conveyor

3-329

SFT

Alternating circuit

3-330

Repeat shift circuit

3-331

Asynchronous shift register

3-331

Resetting internal utility relays

3-332

HSP

High-speed fetching of input data

3-332

MC-MCR

Emergency stop circuit

3-333

W-UE

Input sequence check

3-334

Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

3-334

Enabling double coil

3-335

Conditional branching

3-335

STP-STE

Process progression

3-336

ITVL

Pulse interval measurement

3-336

Fetching data from KV-AN6

3-337

High-speed counter multi-level setting

3-338

CTH [High-speed counter]

High-speed counter current value clear

3-339

Input of phase differential signal

3-339

SBN [Sub-routine]

DM shift

3-340

FOR-NEXT

Transfer of a block of DM data

3-341

HKEY

Fetching 16-key input

3-342

TMIN [Analog timer]

Changing timer setting value

3-343

Changing setting values of multiple timers

3-343

First-in first-out (FIFO)

3-343

Changing the counter setting value

3-345

LDA/STA

CMP

ADD

Changing the timer setting value

3-345

Comparing values with no specific range

3-345

Setting the upper/lower limit

3-345

Changing the CMP setting value

3-346

Multi-level comparator

3-346

Adding BCD and BIN(binary) values

3-347

Total count

3-348

SUB

Comparison of absolute values

3-348

MUL

Multiplying the counter current value by DM value

3-349

DIV

Total count average

3-349

ANDA

BCD (1-digit) input

3-350

Fetches input data separately

3-350

Output of 2-digit BCD data

3-351

Separate input of 2-digit BCD

3-351

ORA

3-324

On-delay circuit

Multi-level Up/Down counter

STG-JMP

Reference
Page

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

8.1 List
Instruction

Program title

EORA

Judgement of matcing data

3-352

SRA/SLA

Separate input of BCD

3-352

RRA/RLA

Error input count

3-353

INC/DEC

Reference
Page

Total count

3-353

Up/Down count

3-354

MPX

Display of 7-segment LED

3-355

DMX

Output of error input No. in BCD

3-356

TBCD

Output of 4-digit BCD data

3-356

Output of 8-digit BCD data

3-356

Output of 4-digit BCD data

3-357

TBIN

18

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-325

8.2 Details

8.2

Details

8.2.1 Reference Program Examples

Basic Instructions
Applications of TMR, TMH, and TMS Instructions Refer to p. 3-67 to p. 3-71.
One-shot circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and remains ON for a
specified time.
Timing diagram

0000
0500

2s

2s

Ladder diagram

Coding

2-s timer
0000

#00020
T000

0500

T000

00500

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT

Operand
0000
0500
000#00020
T000
0500

Off-delay circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 0500 turns OFF in a
specified time after 0000 turns OFF.
Timing diagram

0000

0500

2s

Ladder diagram
0000

0500

Coding
0500

T000

00000

#00020
T000

2-s timer

3-326

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005

Instruction
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
ANB
TMR

Operand
0000
0500
T000
0500
0000
000 #00020

8.2 Details
On-delay circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after input relay 0000 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 also turns OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0500

2s

1s

Ladder diagram

Coding

2-s timer
0000

#00020
T000

T000

0500

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003

Instruction
LD
TMR
LD
OUT

Operand
0000
000 #00020
T000
0500

Flicker circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while input relay 0000 is ON.
Timing diagram

0500

1s

1s

0000
2s

2s

Ladder diagram
0000

T001

Coding
2-s timer
1-s timer

T000

Line No.
#00020
T000
#00010
T001
0500

Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

ANB

T001

0002

TMR

000 #00020

0003

LD

T000

0004

TMR

001 #00010

0005

OUT

0500

Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of power failure)

Counts special utility relay 2006 (1-s clock pulse) for 3600 s at C001 and inputs the
count value to C002. Accumulates the count for 10000 hours and retains the current
count value even when power failure occurs or power is OFF.
Input relay 0000
Reset relay 0001
(Resolution is 1 s at 2006.)
Ladder diagram

Coding

0000

C001 3600-s counter

C001

1-s pulse

0001

10000-s counter

#03600
C001
2006
1000
#10000
C002
1000

Line No. Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

ANB

C001

0002

001 #03600 2006

0003

LD

C001

0004

OUT

1000

0005

LDB

0001

0006

002 #10000 1000

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-327

18

8.2 Details
Large capacity counter
Accumulates 1 count to C001 for every 10000 counts by C000. This example can
count up to 655350000.
Count input relay 0000
Reset relay 0001
Ladder diagram
0001

Coding

C000

#10000
C000
0000
1000

C000
0001

#65535
C001
1000

Line No. Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

0001

0001

ANB

C000

0002

000 #10000 0000

0003

LD

C000

0004

OUT

1000

0005

LDB

0001

0006

001 #65535 1000

Multi-level UP/DOWN counter

UP/DOWN counter which allows the count setting value up to 99,990,000.
UP input relay: 0001
DOWN input relay: 0002
Reset input relay: 0003
The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC001 and
the low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.
0004

C000
LDA

TBCD

8500
STA

C001
LDA

TBCD

8600
STA

Low-order
4 digits
High-order
4 digits

Ladder diagram

Coding
UDC000
UP
#09999
DW

0001
0002

BCD:
Low-order
4 digits

0003
RES

C000

0001

C000

0002

UDC001
UP
#09999
DW

BCD:
High-order
4 digits

0003
RES

Line No. Instruction

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

LD
LD
LD
UDC
LD
AND
LD
AND
LD
UDC

Counter multi-level setting

Outputs in 3 different levels according to the counter current value.
00000 to 00999 > 0500 turns ON.
01000 to 01999 > 0501 turns ON.
02000 to 02999 > 0502 turns ON.
Ladder diagram
0001

2002 C000
LDA

#09999
C000
0000
#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP

0500
00000 to
00999
0501
01000 to
01999

#02999 2011 0500 0501 0512

02000 to
CMP
02999

3-328

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Operand
0001
0002
0003
000 #09999
C000
0001
C000
0002
0003
001 #09999

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP

Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000

#00999
2011
0500

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT

Operand
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502

#01999

Application of DIFU, DIFD Instructions

One-shot circuit using differentiate instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 0500 and 0501 turns ON oneshot (1 second).
Timing diagram
0000
1000
1001
0500

1S

0501

1S

Ladder diagram

Coding

0000

1000
DIFU
1001
DIFD

1000

T001

0500

0500
1001

#00010
T001
T002

0501

0501

#00010
T002

Refer to p. 3-78.

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
DIFU
0002
DIFD
0003
LD
0004
OR
0005
ANB
0006
OUT
0007
TMR
0008
LD
0009
OR
0010
ANB
0011
OUT
0012
TMR

Operand
0000
1000
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
1001
0501
T002
0501
002 #00010

Application of KEEP instruction

Detection of chewing gum packs
Detects chewing gum packs over the carton using the proximity switch ES Series
(0001 to 0003). If the switch detects that one or more packs of chewing gum are
missing, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.
The timing clock is generated from the visible beam photoelectric switch PZ2 (0000).
Reflector (R-2)

ing ck
ew
Ch m pa
gu

ON

OFF

ing ck
ew
Ch m pa
gu

Proximity Switch ES Series

ON

ES Series
Gum

Gum

Gum

Gum

Gum

Gum

Gum

Gum

PZ2-61

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-329

18

8.2 Details
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500

1s

Ladder diagram
0000 0001 0002 0003

KEEP
SE T
1000

Excecutes SET when

all input relays 0000 to
0003 are ON.

1001
RES
0000

1001
DIFD

1001 1000 T001

0500

0500

#00010
T001

Detects presence/absence
of chewing gum packs at
DOWN edge of 0000.

Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse

from output relay 0500
when 1000 is OFF.

Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 are ON.
Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs at DOWN edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
AND
AND
AND
LD
KEEP
LD

Operand
0000
0001
0002
0003
1001
1000
0000

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
DIFD
LD
ANB
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR

Operand
1001
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010

Refer to p. 3-80.

Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit
Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns alternately ON and OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0500

Ladder diagram

Coding
SFT

1000
D

1000

0000
CLK

1000

2003
RES
1000

0500

Refer to p. 3-82.

3-330

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Line No. Instruction

Operand

0000

LDB

1000

0001

LD

0000

0002

LD

2003

0003

SFT

1000 1000

0004

LD

1000

0005

OUT

0500

8.2 Details
Repeat shift circuit
Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets 1000 to 2008 (ON for 1st
scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 7500 to 7504 every second at T001.
When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same sequence as above repeats.
Ladder diagram

Coding
1000
SET
#00010
T001

2008
T001

SFT

2003
D

1000

T001
CLK

1000

1005
RES
7500

1001

7501

1002

7502

1003

7503

1004

7504

2003

1000
SET

1005

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
SET
0002
LDB
0003
T001
0004
LD
0005
LD
0006
LD
0007
SFT
0008
LD
0009
OUT
0010
LD

Operand
2008
1000
T001
#00010
2003
T001
2003
1000 1005
1000
7500
1001

0011

OUT

7501

0012

LD

1002

0013

OUT

7502

0014

LD

1003

0015

OUT

7503

0016

LD

1004

0017

OUT

7504

0018

LD

1005

0019

SET

1000

Synchronous shift register

Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1000 to 1010) when the data
input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock input to 0001.
Timing diagram
0001
0000
1000

18

1001
1002

.
.
.

Ladder diagram

Coding
1100
DIFU

0000
1100

1000
SET

2003

SFT
D
1000

0001
CLK

1010

0002
RES

Line No. Instruction

Operand

0000

LD

0000

0001

DIFU

1100

0002

LD

1100

0003

SET

100

0004

LD

2003

0005

LD

0001

0006

LD

0002

0007

SFT

1000 1010

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-331

8.2 Details
Resetting internal utility relays
When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No. 1000 through 1915
turn OFF.
SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This application can be used
to reset many relays at one time.
Ladder diagram

Coding
SFT

2003
D

1000

2003
CLK

1915

0000
RES

Line No.
0000

Instruction
LD

Operand
2003

0001

LD

2003

0002

LD

0000

0003

SFT

1000 1915

Applications of HSP instruction

High-speed fetching of input data
When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and input relay 0001 is
ON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high speed and outputs 1-s one-shot
pulse from output relay 0500.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0500

1s

Ladder diagram

Coding

0001
0000
0500

HSP
0000
1-s timer

#00010
T000

T000

0500

Outputs
1-s one-shot
pulse from
output relay
0500.

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan time, use the interrupt instruction. Refer to p. 3-192.

When using the interrupt instruction

Ladder diagram
2008

Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

EI
2813
SET

0500

#00010
T000

T000

0500
RES

Interrupt enabled
Initial settings
Input time constant
10 s
Turns ON timer for
1s when 0500 is ON.
Resets 0500 when
T000 turns ON.

END

2002

INT
0000

Sets interrupt input

at 0000.

0500
SET

Sets 0500 when

0000 turns ON.

RETI
ENDH

3-332

Instruction
Operand
LD
0001
HSP
0000
LD
0000
OR
0500
TMR
000 #00010
ANB
T000
OUT
0500

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
EI
SET
LD
T000
LD
RES

Operand
2008
2813
0500
#00010
T000
0500

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH

Operand
0000
2002
0500

Refer to p. 3-86.

Application of MC-MCR instruction

Emergency stop circuit
When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then 0501 turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.
Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON when 0001 is ON, 0501 turns ON
when 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is ON.
Timing diagram

Coding

0000
0001
0002
0003
0500
0501
0502

Ladder diagram
0000

1000

1001

0001
0002

0000 1002 1002

DIFU
1000

1100
SET

1101
RES

1102
RES
MC

0003
1100
STG

1200

0004

#00010 T000
T000

1101
JMP

1101
STG

1201

0005

#00020 T001
T001

1102
JMP

1102
STG

1202

0006

#00030 T002
T002

1100
JMP
MCR

0007
1001

MC

0001

1203

0002

1204

0003

1205

0008
0009
0010
0011
MCR
0012
1200

0500

0013
1203
0014
1201

0501

0015
1204
0016
1202

0502

0017
1205
0018
END
0019
ENDH
0020

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056

Instruction
LD
OUT
CON
OUB
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
MC
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
MCR
LD
MC
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
MCR
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
END
ENDH

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Operand
0000
1000
1001
0000
1002
1002
1100
1101
1102
1000
1100
1200
000 #00010
T000
1101
1101
1201
001 #00020
T001
1102
1102
1202
002 #00030
T002
1100
1001
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
1200
1203
0500
1201
1204
0501
1202
1205
0502

3-333

18

8.2 Details

Application Instructions
Application of W-UE instruction
Input sequence check
Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is ON and input 0001, 0002, and
0003 turn ON in this sequence.
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500

Ladder diagram

Coding
0001

0000

Line No. Instruction

Operand

1000

1000
0002

0000

LD

0000

0001

W-UE

0002

LD

1000

1001

1001
0003

0001 1000

0003

W-UE

0002 1001

1002
0500

0004

LD

1001

1002

0005

W-UE

0003 1002

0006

LD

1002

0007

OUT

0500

Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

Checks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 turns
ON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns ON when input relay 0001
turns ON and then 0000 turns ON.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0500
0501

Ladder diagram
0000

0001

0001
1000
0000

1000

1001

Coding

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Operand

Leave
warehouse

0000

LD

0000

0001

W-UE

0001 1000

Enter
warehouse

0002

CON

0003

AND

1000

0004

OUT

0500

0005

LD

0001

0006

W-UE

0000 1001

0007

CON

0008

AND

1001

0009

OUT

0501

0501

1001

3-334

Line No. Instruction

0500

8.2 Details

Application of STG-JMP instruction

Enabling double coil
When start SW 0000 is pressed, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then output
relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 s, and then output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502
turn ON for 3 s. The above sequence repeats.
Ladder diagram
1100
DIFU

0000

1000
STG

1000
SET

1100

Turns ON 1000 when input relay 0000 turns ON.

0500 #00010 T000

T000

1001
JMP

Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.

#00020 T001
T001

1002
JMP

Output relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 s.

1000
JMP

Output relays 0500, 0501 and 0502 turn ON for 3 s.

1001
STG

0500 0501

1002
STG

0500 0501 0502 #00030 T002

T002

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

CAUTION

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
OUT

Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
1000
0500
000 #00010
T000
1001
1001
0500
0501

Line No.
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031

Instruction
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
OUT
CON
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP

Operand
001 #00020
T001
1002
1002
0500
0501
0502
002 #00030
T002
1000

The double coil operates normally through different STG instructions. If

different STG instructions turn ON simultaneously, the latter programmed
instruction has the priority.
Conditional branching
When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. Then, as
programmed for conditional branching, output 0501 turns ON for 1 s when 0001
turns ON or 0502 turns ON for 2 s when 0002 turns ON. After either one of the
processes is completed, the program returns to the conditional branching and
repeats the same steps.
Ladder diagram
0000

1100
DIFU

1100

1000
STG

0500

0001

1001
JMP

0002

1002
JMP

1000
SET

1001
STG

0501

#00010
T000

T000

1000
JMP

1002
STG

0502

#00020
T001

T001

1000
JMP

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-335

18

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STG
OUT
MPS
AND
JMP
MPP
AND
JMP
STG

Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
1000
0500
0001
1001
0002
1002
1001

Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026

Instruction
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP

Operand
0501
000 #00010
T000
1000
1002
0502
001 #00020
T001
1000

Application of STP-STE instruction

Process progression
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 automatically turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0501 turns ON for 3 s.
Ladder diagram
0001

0000 1000 1000

DIFU

Coding
1001
SET
STP
1001

0002
T000

1001
RES

T000

0500

1001

#00020
T000

T000

1002
SET

0003
0004
0005
0006

STE
0007
STP
1002

0008
T001

1002
RES

T001

0501

1002

#00030
T001

0009
0010
0011

STE
0012
END
0013
ENDH
0014

The double coil operates normally

across different STP instructions.

Refer to p. 3-114.

Line No. Instruction

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024

LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
LD
SET
STE
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
STE
END
ENDH

Operand
0000
1000
1000
1001
1001
T000
1001
T000
0500
1001
000 #00020
T000
1002
1002
T001
1002
T001
0501
1002
001 #00030

Application of ITVL instruction

Pulse interval measurement
Measures the pulse interval of input relay 0000 and writes the measured data into
DM0100 (in units of 10 ms).
Mode No. 1 (DM0000)
MAX. setting value 51 (DM0001)
MIN. setting value 49 (DM0002)
Average number of measurements 10 (DM0003)

3-336

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

8.2 Details
Reset input relay 0002
Output relay 0500 turns ON
when the pulse interval is not within the range from 490 to 510 mm.
Measure the pulse interval
ON
OFF

500ms

Ladder diagram
2008

2008

2008

2008

#00001
LDA

DM0000
STA

Sets mode 1 in DM0000.

#00051
LDA

DM0001
STA

Sets MAX. setting value (510 ms) in DM0001.

#00049
LDA

DM0002
STA

Sets MIN. setting value (490 ms) in DM0002.

#00010
LDA

DM0003
STA

0000
0001

1002

ITVL
PLS
DM0000

Measures the pulse interval when input relay 0000

turns ON.

PAUSE

Pauses measurement when input relay 0001 turns

ON.

1000
RES

0002

DM0007
LDA

DM0100
STA

Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns

ON.

0500
RES
0500
SET

1000

Sets the average number of measurements (10) in

DM0003.

1001

Writes the average measurement value into

DM0100 and resets 0500 after every time a
measurement is completed.
Turns On output relay 0500 when the pulse
interval is not within the range from 490 to 510
mm.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON

Operand
2008
#00001
DM0000
2008
#00051
DM0001
2008
#00049
DM0002
2008
#00010

Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028

Instruction
STA
LD
LD
LD
ITVL
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
RES
LD
OR
SET

Operand
DM0003
0000
0001
0002
DM0000 1000
1002
DM0007
DM0100
0500
1000
1001
0500

Fetching data from the KV-AN6 (For KV-300 PLC only)

Fetches data from Ch 1 of the KV-AN6. Writes this data value into DM0100.
Mode No. 9000 (DM0000) from Ch 1 of KV-AN6
MAX. setting value 2000 (DM0001)
MIN. setting value 00900 (DM0002)
Average number of measurements 10 (DM0003)
Reset input relay 0002

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-337

18

8.2 Details
Ladder diagram

Coding

2008

#09000
LDA

DM0000
STA

2008

#02000
LDA

DM0001
STA

2008

#00900
LDA

DM0002
STA

2008

#00010
LDA

DM0003
STA
ITVL
PLS
DM0000

2003
0001

PAUSE
1000
RES

0002

DM0007
LDA

1003

DM0100
STA

Refer to p. 3-117.

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LD
LD
ITVL
LD
LDA
CON
STA

Operand
2008
#09000
DM0000
2008
#02000
DM0001
2008
#00900
DM0002
2008
#00010
DM0003
2003
0001
0002
DM0000 1000
1003
DM0007
DM0100

Applications of High-speed counter

High-speed counter multi-level setting
Sets the high speed counter comparator value of the input relay 0005 as below:

#0100 DM0000
#0200 DM0001
#0300 DM0002

When a comparator value is greater than the setting value:

DM0000 0500 turns ON.

DM0001 0501 turns ON.
DM0002 0502 turns ON.

Ladder diagram

Coding

2008 2813 #01000 DM0000 #02000 DM0001 #03000 DM0002

SET LDA STA LDA STA LDA STA
0001

CTH1
00005

8
2002

3-338

CTH1
LDA

DM0000 2009
CMP

0500

DM0001 2009
CMP

0501

DM0002 2009
CMP

0502

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029

Instruction
LD
SET
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
CTH1
LD
LDA
MPS
CMP
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
ANB
OUT

Operand
2008
2813
#01000
DM0000
#02000
DM0001
#03000
DM0002
0001
0005
2002
CTH1
DM0000
2009
0500
DM0001
2009
0501
DM0002
2009
0502

8.2 Details
High-speed counter current value clear
Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the count value reaches setting value
60000, clears the current value of high speed counter CTH1 and turns ON output
relay 0502 for 3 s.
Ladder diagram

Coding

2813
SET

2008

2203
SET

2002

CTH1
RES
CTH1
0005
#60000
CTC2

CTC2

0502

#00030
T001

T001

CTC2
RES

0502
RES

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
SET
0002
CON
0003
SET
0004
CON
0005
RES
0006
LD
0007
CTH1
0008
CTC2
0009
LD
0010
OUT
0011
CON
0012
TMR
0013
CON
0015
AND
0016
RES
0017
CON
0018
RES

Operand
2008
2813
2203
CTH1
2002
0005
#60000
CTC2
0502
001 #00030
T001
CTC2
0502

Input of phase differential signal

Inputs phase differential signals to input relays 0004 and 0006 and counts pulses at
CTH0.
Writes the count value into DM0000.
When high speed counter CTH0 reaches 60000, clears the current value of CTH0,
sets output relay 0500, and stops fetching count value to CTH0.
Sets 0008 as external reset.
Ladder diagram
2008
EI

2813 2103
SET SET

2113 2114 2115 CTH0

SET RES SET RES

0500

2002

CTH0
LDA

DM0000
STA

Initial settings*Note

CTH0
00004
#60000
CTC0

18

END

2002

INT
CTC0
0500
SET
RETI
ENDH

Note: Initial settings for special utility relays

Sets input time constant of input relays 0000 to 0009 to 10 s when 2813 turns
ON.
Clears the current value of CTH0 when 2103 turns ON and CTC0 is ON.
Sets CTH0 in the X 2 mode when 2113 is ON and 2114 is OFF.
Enables external reset (input relay 0008) when 2115 turns ON.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-339

8.2 Details

CAUTION

External reset 0008 is predetermined on hardware even if you do not specify in

the program. However, you have to set external reset enable relay 2115 to ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES

Operand
2008

2813
2103
2113
2114
2115

Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026

Instruction
LDB
CTH
CTC
LD
LDA
CON
STA
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH

Operand
0500
1 0004
0 #60000
2002
CTH0
DM0000
CTC0
2002
0500

CTH0

Application of Subroutine CALL

DM shift
Shifts the data from current DM to the next DM at UP edge of the synchronous
signal (timing).
As the number of DMs to be shifted increases, the required scan time becomes
longer.
Ladder diagram
0000 1000 1000 #00010 TM02 #00030 TM03
DIFU
LDA STA LDA STA
Synchoronous
signal

Designates the
Designates the
shift end
shift start
DM No. (DM0010). DM No. (DM0030).

00
Shifts data from
CALL DM0010 to DM0030.
END
SBN
00

2002

TM03 #00001
LDA
ADD

TM04
STA

TM02
SUB

TM05
STA

Shift level

8
2002

TM03
DEC

TM04
DEC

#TM03
LDA

FOR
TM05
#TM04
STA

Uses the indirect addressing

function to designate DM Nos.

NEXT
2002

#00000
LDA

#TM02
STA

Clears the start DM to #0000

after the data is shifted.

RET
ENDH

3-340

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

The program lines which

execute the data shift
are groped as the subroutine.

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
CALL
END
SBN
LD
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
STA

Operand
0000
1000
1000
#00010
TM02
#00030
TM03
00
00
2002
TM03
#00001

Line No.
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040

Instruction
CON
SUB
CON
STA
FOR
LD
DEC
CON
DEC
CON
LDA
CON
STA
NEXT
LD
LDA
CON
STA
RET
ENDH

Operand
TM02
TM05
TM05
2002
TM03
TM04
#TM03
#TM04
2002
#00000
#TM02

TM04

Refer to p. 3-122.

Application of FOR-NEXT
Transfer of a block of DM data
Uses the indirect addressing function to transfer a block of data from DM0000 DM0099 to DM0100 - DM0199.
Ladder diagram

Coding
SBN
01

2002

#0000
LDA

TMO2
STA

1st DM No. of
transfer source

#00100
LDA

TMO3
STA

1st DM No. of
transfer destination

FOR
#00100

Number of DMs to be Transferred.

2002

#TM02
LDA

#TM03
STA

TM02
INC

TM03
INC
NEXT
RET

Data memory
DM0000

DM0099
DM0100

Transfer
a block of data

Line No. Instruction

0000
SBN
0010
LD
0001
LD
0011
LDA
0002
LDA
0012
CON
0003
CON
0013
STA
0004
STA
0014
CON
0005
CON
0015
INC
0006
LDA
0016
CON
0007
CON
0017
INC
0008
STA
0018
NEXT
0009
FOR
0019
RET

Operand
01
2002
2002
#TM02
#0000

18
#TM03
TM02

TM02
#00100

TM03
TM03
#00100

DM0199

Refer to p. 3-125.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-341

8.2 Details

Application of HKEY instruction

Fetching 16-key input
Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 in 4-digit BCD.
Pressing the keys in the lower line clear the input numerical value.
Wires the 16-key input terminals using 4 outputs and 4 inputs as shown below.

24 VDC

COM 000 001 002 003

KV
COM 500 501 502 503

Ladder diagram
2008

2814
SET

2002

HKEY
0000
0500

2815 2900 2010 $03FF TM05 2010 TM05

LDA
ANDA CMP
STA

DMX

KEY IN
TM06
STA

2815 2900 2010 $03FF TM05 2010 TM05

LDA
ANDA CMP
STA
DM0000 #04
LDA
SLA
2815 2915

TM06 DM0000
Input value
ORA
STA
(BCD)
#00000
Input value
DW
(BCD)
DM0000
END
ENDH

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020

Instruction
LD
SET
LD
HKEY
LD
LDA
CON
ANB
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
DMX
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON

Operand
2008
2814
2002
0000 0500
2815
2900

Refer to p. 3-131.

3-342

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05

TM06
2815
2900

Line No.
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040

Instruction
AND
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
LDA
CON
SLA
CON
ORA
CON
STA
LD
AND
DW
END
ENDH

Operand
2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05
DM0000
#04
TM06
DM0000
2815
2915
#0000 DM0000

8.2 Details

Arithmetic Instructions
Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction
Changing timer setting value
Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change the timer setting value (0 to 24.9 s).
Ladder diagram

Coding

2002

0
TMIN

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
TMIN
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LD
0005
OR
0006
TMR
0007
ANB
0008
OUT

T000
STA

0000

#00010
T000

0500

T000

0500

Operand
2002
0
T000
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500

Changing setting values of multiple timers

Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change setting values of multiple timers (0 to 24.9 s).
Ladder diagram
2002

0
TMIN

Coding
T000
STA

T001
STA

0000

#00010
T000

0500

T000

0500

0001

#00010
T001

0501

T001

0501

0002

#00010
T002

0502

T002
STA

T002

0502

In the above example, T000, T001,

and T002 have the same setting value.

Refer to p. 3-138.

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
TMIN
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
CON
0005
STA
0006
CON
0007
STA
0008
LD
0010
TMR
0011
ANB
0012
OUT
0013
LD
0014
OR
0015
TMR
0016
ANB
0017
OUT
0018
LD
0019
OR
0020
TMR
0009
OR
0021
ANB
0022
OUT

Operand
2002
0
T000
T001
T002
0000
000 #00010
T000
0500
0001
0501
001 #00010
T001
0501
0002
0502
002 #00010
0500
T002
0502

Applications of LDA/STA instruction

First-in first-out (FIFO)
DM data flow

OK/NG judgement
DM0000
DM0001
Data shift

DM0002
DM0003
DM0004
Unloading timing

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-343

18

8.2 Details
The data once fetched is written into DM0004, DM0003, ..., DM0000 in this order. At
the unloading timing, unload the data from DM0004 and shifts the data value to the
next DM.
The ON/NG judgement and unloading timings can be used in asynchronous programs.
Ladder diagram
0000

1000
DIFU

1000

OK/NG judgement timing

0001

$1111
LDA

DM0000
STA

Transfers $1111 to DM0000.

OK/NG judgement

0001

$5555
LDA

DM0000
STA

Transfers $5555 to DM0000.

2002 DM0004 $0000 2010 DM0003 DM0004 $0000 DM0003

LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
2002 DM0003 $0000 2010 DM0002 DM0003 $0000 DM0002
LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
2002 DM0002 $0000 2010 DM0001 DM0002 $0000 DM0001
LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA

Compares the DM value to $0000.

If it is equal to $0000, transfers the
value of the previous DM No. and
then writes $0000 into the current DM No.

2002 DM0001 $0000 2010 DM0000 DM0001 $0000 DM0000

LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
0002

$0000
DM0004
LDA
STA
Unloading timing
Transfers $0000 to DM at unloading timing.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034

3-344

Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
MPS
AND
LDA
CON
STA
MPP
ANB
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON

Operand
0000
1000
1000
0001
$1111
DM0000
0001
$5555
DM0000
2002
DM0004
$0000
2010
DM0003
DM0004
$0000
DM0003
2002
DM0003
$0000
2010
DM0002

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Line No.
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069

Instruction
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@LDA
CON
@STA

Operand
DM0003
$0000
DM0002
2002
DM0002
$0000
2010
DM0001
DM0002
$0000
DM0001
2002
DM0001
$0000
2010
DM0000
DM0001
$0000
DM0000
0002
$0000
DM0004

8.2 Details
Changing the counter setting value
Sets the setting value of counter C000 to DM0000. Reset input is 0005.
Ladder diagram
2002

Coding
DM0000
LDA

0005

Line No. Instruction

Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
STA
C000
0004
LDB
0005
0005
C
000 #9999 0001

C000
STA
#9999
C000
0001

Changing the timer setting value

Sets the setting value of timer T000 to DM0000. Reset input is 0005.
Ladder diagram
2002

Coding
DM0000
LDA

0005

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LDB
0005
T

T000
STA
#9999
T000

Refer to p. 3-140.

Operand
2002
DM0000
T000
0005
0000 #9999

Application of CMP (compare) instruction

When comparing values with no specific range
Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller than the CMP value.
Turns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to the CMP value.
Turns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater than the CMP value.
Ladder diagram
2002 DM000 #01000
LDA

Coding
2009

0500

CMP
2010

0501

2011

0502

DM0000
<#01000
DM0000
=#01000
DM0000
>#01000

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
CMP
0004
MPS
0005
AND
0006
OUT
0007
MRD
0008
AND
0009
OUT
0010
MPP
0011
AND
0012
OUT

Operand
2002
DM0000
#01000
2009
0500
2010
0501
2011
0502

Setting the upper/lower limit

Turns ON 0500 when the C001 value is 1000 or less.
Turns ON 0501 when the C001 value is 2000 or more.
Ladder diagram
0001

2002
2002

C001

#01000

LDA

CMP

C001

#02000

LDA

CMP

2011

#09999
C001
0000
0500

2009

0501

C001 #1000
C001 #02000

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-345

18

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB

Operand
0001
001 #09999 0000
2002
C001
#01000
2011

Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015

Instruction
OUT
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT

Operand
0500
2002
C001
#02000
2009
0501

Changing the CMP setting value

Compares the current value of C000 to the CMP setting value. Sets the CMP setting
value to analog timer TMIN0.
The following example changes the setting value within the range from 0 to 100.
Turns ON 0500 when the C000 value is smaller than the CMP setting value.
Turns ON 0501 when the C000 value is greater than the CMP setting value.
Ladder diagram
0
#00001 #00004 #00010 DM0000
Sets the TMIN setting
TMIN ADD MUL
DIV
STA range from 0 to 100.
0001
#09999
C000
00000
2002 C000 DM0000 2009
0500
LDA
CMP
2002

2009

0501

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
ADD
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
LDB

Operand
2002
0
#00001
#00004
#00010
DM0000
0001

Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

Instruction
C
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
MPS
AND
OUT
MPP
ANB
OUT

Operand
000 #09999 0000
02002
C000

Multi-level comparator
Compares the counter current value according to the following range:
0 to 999 0500 turns ON.
1000 to 1999 0501 turns ON.
2000 to 2999 0502 turns ON.
Counter reset relay 0001
Counter input relay 0000

3-346

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

DM0000
2009
0500
2009
0501

8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
0001

2002 C000
LDA

#09999
C000
0000
#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP

0500

C000 00999

0501

00999 < C000 01999

#02999 2011 0500 0501 0502

01999 < C000 02999
CMP

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP

Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000

#00999
2011
0500

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT

Operand
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502

#01999

Refer to p. 3-146.

Application of ADD instruction

Adding BCD and BIN values
Adds a 4-digit BCD input value (7000 to 7015) to the counter current value and
writes the sum into DM0100.
Ladder diagram
2002
2002

7000

DM0000

Converts BCD input value to BIN.

LDA

TBIN

STA

C001

DM0000

DM0100

LDA

ADD

0001

18

Adds converted BIN value to the current value of

C001 and writes the sum into DM0100.

STA
#09999
C001
0000

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD

Operand
2002
7000

DM0000
2002

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
STA
LDB
C

Operand
C001
DM0000
DM0100
0001
001 #09999 0000

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-347

8.2 Details
Total count
Writes total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. The total count must be
within 65535.
Ladder diagram
#09999 C001
C001
LDA
0001
#09999 C002
0000
C002
LDA
0002
#09999 C003
0000
C003
LDA
0003
2002 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003
LDA
ADD
ADD
0000

DM0001
STA

Writes C001 current value into DM0001.

DM0002
STA

Writes C002 current value into DM0002.

DM0003
STA

Writes C003 current value into DM0003.

DM0100
STA

Writes total count (DM0001 + CM0002 + DM0003) into

DM100.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012

Instruction
Operand
LDB
0000
C
001 #09999 0001
CON
LDA
C001
CON
STA
DM0001
LDB
0000
C
002 #09999 0002
CON
LDA
C002
CON
STA
DM0002
LDB
0000

Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025

Instruction
Operand
C
003 #09999 0003
CON
LDA
C003
CON
STA
DM0003
LD
2002
LDA
DM0001
CON
ADD
DM0002
CON
ADD
DM0003
CON
STA
DM0100

Refer to p. 3-150.

Application of SUB instruction

Comparison of absolute values
Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ON 0500 when the
difference of the two absolute values is greater than 5.
Ladder diagram

#0005 2009 1000

CMP

2002 DM0000 DM0001 2009

LDA
SUB

2009 DM0001 DM0000 #0005 2009 1001

LDA
SUB CMP
0500

1000
1001

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
SUB
MPS
ANB
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MPP
AND

Operand
2002
DM0000
DM0001

Refer to p. 3-150.

3-348

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

2009
#00005
2009
1000
2009

Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

Instruction
LDA
CON
SUB
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
LD
OR
OUT

Operand
DM0001
DM0000
#00005
2009
1001
1000
1001
0500

8.2 Details

Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by DM value
Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 value and writes the high-order
16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bits of the product into
DM0100.
Ladder diagram

Coding

0001

#09999
C001
0000
2002 C001 DM0000 DM0100 TM00 DM0101
STA
LDA
MUL
STA
LDA

Line No. Instruction

Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
C
001 #09999 0000
0002
LD
2002
0003
LDA
C001
0005
MUL
DM0000
0004
CON
0006
CON
0007
STA
DM0100
0008
CON
0009
LDA
TM00
0010
CON
0011
STA
DM0101

Refer to p. 3-150.

Application of DIV instruction

Total count average
Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD.
(C001 + C002 + C003) 3 BCD output value
The BCD value is output to 7500 to 7515.
Ladder diagram
0000

0000

0000

2002

2002

#09999
C001
00001
#09999
C002
00002
#09999
C003
00003
DM0001
LDA

C001
LDA

DM0001
STA

C002
LDA

DM0002
STA

Writes the C002 current

value into DM0002.

C003
LDA

DM0003
STA

Writes the C003 current

value into DM0003.

DM0002 DM0003
ADD
ADD

#00003
DIV

TBCD

07500
STA

Writes the C001 current

value into DM0001.

18

DM0001 DM0002 DM0003

3 Output to 07500
to 07515 in 4-digit BCD.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014

Instruction
LDB
C
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
C
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
C
CON

Operand
0000
001 #09999 0001
C001
DM0001
0000
002 #09999 0002
C002
DM0002
0000
003 #09999 0003

Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029

Instruction
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
ADD
LD
DIV
CON
TBCD
CON
STA

Operand
C003
DM0003
2002
DM0001
DM0002
DM0003
2002
#00003

7500

Refer to p. 3-150.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-349

8.2 Details

Application of ANDA instruction

BCD (1-digit) input
Sets a 1-digit BCD value, which is input to 0000 to 0003, in C000.
Ladder diagram
2002

0000
LDA

$000F
ANDA

TBIN

C000
STA

2002

Fetches data of 0000 to 0015 and retains data of 0000

to 0003 only.
Converts data to BIN and writes it into C000.

#09999
C000
7001

7000

Sets C000.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD

Operand
2002
0000
$000F
2002

Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C

Operand

C000
7000
000 #09999 7001

Fetches input data separately

Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7007) to counter C000
and the high-order 2 digits to timer T001.
Ladder diagram
2002 7000
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

TBIN

C000
STA

2002 7000
LDA

$FF00
ANDA

#08
SRA

TBIN

Converts data of 7000 to 7007 to BIN and

writes it into C000.
T001
STA

0001

#09999
C000
0000

0001

#09999
T001

Shifts data to right by 8 bits, converts it to

BIN, and writes it into T001.
Sets C000.

Sets T001.

Coding

Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON

Operand
2002
7000

Refer to p. 3-159.

3-350

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

$00FF

C000
2002
7000

Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

Instruction
ANDA
CON
SRA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
LDB
T

Operand
$FF00
#08

T001
0001
000 #09999 0000
0001
001 #09999

8.2 Details

Application of ORA instruction

Output of BCD 2-digit data
Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD and sends 2 digits of BCD data
to output relays 7500 to 7507.
However, retain ON/OFF of 7508 to 7515 which are loaded.
Ladder diagram

7500
LDA

#00099
C000
0001
$FF00
ANDA

DM0000
STA

C000
LDA

TBCD

$00FF
ANDA

DM0000
ORA

7500
STA

0000

2002

2002

2002

Sets C000.

Writes data of 7008 to 7015 into DM0000.

Converts the current value of C000 to BCD and
retains the low-order 2 digits of BCD in the
internal register.
ORs the data in the internal register and the
DM0000 data and sends the ORed data to 7500
to 7515.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
LD

Operand
0000
000 #00099 0001
2002
7500
$FF00
DM0000
2002

Line No.
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017

Instruction
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
ANDA
LD
ORA
CON
STA

Operand
C000

$00FF
2002
DM0000
7500

Separate input of 2-digit BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7003 for the 1st digit, 8000 to
8003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
Ladder diagram
0000

2002

7000
LDA

#00099
C001
0001
$000F
ANDA

2002

8000
LDA

$000F
ANDA

2002

#04 DM0000
SLA
ORA
TBIN

18

DM0000
STA

C001
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA

Operand
0000
001 #00099 0001
2002
7000
$000F
DM0000
2002
8000

Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019

Instruction
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA

Operand
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000

C001

Refer to p. 3-161.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-351

8.2 Details

Application of EORA instruction

Judgement of matching data
Turns ON 0500 (OK output) when the ON/OFF statuses of input relays 7000 to
7007 match the DM0000 setting value.
Ladder diagram
2008

2002

Coding

$00AA DM0000
LDA
STA
7000
LDA

$00FF
ANDA

DM0000 2010 0500

EORA

Line No. Instruction

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LD
0005
LDA
0006
CON
0007
ANDA
0008
CON
0009
EORA
0010
CON
0011
AND
0012
OUT

Operand
2008
$00AA
DM0000
2002
7000
$00FF
DM0000
2010
0500

For easy comprehension, the following data is set temporarily.

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

$BBBB 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 7000 to 7015

ANDA
$00FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand
$00BB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Internal register
EORA
$00AA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DM0000
$0011 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Internal register 2010 is OFF. When the

value of internal register

is 0000, 2010 turns ON.

Judges match between the operand and the data of 7000 to 7015.

When 2010 is ON, the two values match.

When 2010 is OFF, the two values do not match.
Refer to p. 3-164.

Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Separate input of BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7012 to 7015 for the 1st digit, 8000 to
8003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
Ladder diagram
0001

2002

7000
LDA

#00099
C001
0000
$F000
ANDA

2002

#12
SRA

DM0000
STA

2002

08000
LDA

$000F
ANDA

2002

#04
SLA

DM0000
ORA

TBIN

C001
STA

2002

3-352

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Sets C001.

Sends the data of 7012 to 7015 to internal

register.
Shifts the value of internal register to right by
12 bits and writes it into DM0000.
Sends the data of 8000 to 8003 to internal
register.
Shifts the data of internal register to left by 4
bits, ORs the internal register data and the
data of DM0000, and sends the ORed data to
internal register.
Converts the data of internal register to BIN
data and writes it into C001.

8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010

Instruction
LD
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SRA
CON
STA
LD

Operand
0001
001 #00099 0000
2002
7000
$F000
2002
#12
DM0000
2002

Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021

Instruction
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
LD
TBIN
CON
STA

Operand
8000
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000
2002

C001

Refer to p. 3-166.

Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count
Writes the number of error detection sensors, which are connected to input relays
(7000 to 7015) and turn ON, into DM0000.
Ladder diagram
7000
LDA

2002

FOR
#00016
2002

#01
RRA

2009

TM10
INC

Writes the data of 7000 to

7015 into internal register.
Executes FOR-NEXT instruction for 16 times.
Shifts the data including carry (2009) to right,
and increments TM10 by 1 when 2009 is ON.

NEXT
2002 TM10
LDA

DM0000 #00000
STA
LDA

TM10
STA

Writes the TM10 data into DM0000, and then writes

#00000 to TM10.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008

Instruction
LD
LDA
FOR
LD
RRA
CON
AND
INC
NEXT

Operand
2002
7000
#00016
02002
#01
2009
TM10

Line No.
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA

Operand
2002
TM10

18

DM0000
#00000
TM10

Refer to p. 3-169.

Applications of INC/DEC instructions

Total count
Writes the total count of 4 lines (0000 to 0003) into DM0000.
Reset input relay is 0005.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-353

8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
2008

#00000
LDA

DM0000
STA

0000

DM0000
INC

0001

DM0000
INC

0002

DM0000
INC

0003

DM0000
INC

0005

#00000
DW
DM0000

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP
edge of input relay 0000.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP
edge of input relay 0001.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP
edge of input relay 0002.
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP
edge of input relay 0003.
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when
0005 turns ON.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@INC
LD

Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000
DM0000
0001

Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013

Instruction
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
DW

Operand
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000

UP/DOWN count
Performs UP count when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs DOWN count when input relay 0001 turns ON.
Writes the count value into DM0000.
Reset input relay is 0005.
Ladder diagram
#00000
LDA

2008

DM0000
STA

0000

DM0000
INC

0001

DM0000
DEC

0005

#00000
DW
DM0000

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge

of input relay 0000.
Decrements DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
of input relay 0001.
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005
turns ON.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD

Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000

Refer to p. 3-172.

3-354

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
@INC
LD
@DEC
LD
DW

Operand
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000

8.2 Details

Application of MPX instruction

Display of 7-segment LED
Displays the current value of counter C000 to the 7-segment LED.
Outputs from 7500 to 7571.
Connection of 7 segments
Connect each of 7 segments to output relays as shown below:
a

a. 7500

b. 7501

c. 7502

d. 7503

e. 7504

c
d

f. 7505
g. 7506

Ladder diagram
Converts the counter value to 16-bit
data using the MPX instruction.

Auto reset counter

C000

1000

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009

#00009
C000
0000

Coding

C000
LDA

#0
MPX

1000
STA

Sends internal register data to

output relays starting from 7500.

$003F
LDA

7500
STA

$0006
LDA

7500
STA

$005B
LDA

7500
STA

$004F
LDA

7500
STA

$0066
LDA

7500
STA

$006D
LDA

7500
STA

$007D
LDA

7500
STA

$0007
LDA

7500
STA

$007F
LDA

7500
STA

$006F
LDA

7500
STA

7-segment display

Line No. Instruction

Operand
0000
LDB
C000
0024
LD
1004
0001
C
000 #00009 0000
0025
LDA
$0066
0002
CON
0026
CON
0003
LDA
C000
0027
STA
7500
0004
CON
0028
LD
1005
0005
MPX
#0
0029
LDA
$006D
0006
CON
0030
CON
0007
STA
1000
0031
STA
7500
0008
LD
1000
0032
LD
1006
0009
LDA
$003F
0033
LDA
$007D
0010
CON
0034
CON
0011
STA
7500
0035
STA
7500
0012
LD
1001
0036
LD
1007
0013
LDA
$0006
0037
LDA
$0007
0014
CON
0038
CON
0015
STA
7500
0039
STA
7500
0016
LD
1002
0040
LD
1008
0017
LDA
$005B
0041
LDA
$007F
0018
CON
0042
CON
0019
STA
7500
0043
STA
7500
0020
LD
1003
0044
LD
1009
0021
LDA
$004F
0045
LDA
$006F
0022
CON
0046
CON
0023
STA
7500
0047
STA
7500

Refer to p. 3-176.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-355

18

8.2 Details

Application of DMX instruction

Output of error input No. in BCD
Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 7000 to 7015 to output relays 8500 to
8507 in 2-digit BCD.
Ladder diagram
2002

07000
LDA

DMX

TBCD

$00FF
ANDA

2002

Converts the most significant bit of 16-bit data

(7000 to 7015) to 4-bit BIN data and sends it to
internal register.
Converts internal register data to BCD data,
executes ANDA instruction, and outputs the data
to 8000 to 8015.

8000
STA

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004

Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
LD

Operand
2002
7000

2002

Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009

Instruction
TBCD
CON
ANDA
CON
STA

Operand

$00FF
8000

Refer to p. 3-176.

Applications of TBCD instruction

Output of 4-digit BCD data
Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 7500 to 7515 in 4-digit BCD data.
Ladder diagram
#09999
C001
0000
7500
STA

0001

2002

C001
LDA

TBCD

Coding

Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LDB

0001

0004

CON

0001

001 #09999 0000

0005

TBCD

0002

LD

2002

0006

CON

0003

LDA

C001

0007

STA

Operand

7500

Output of 8-digit BCD data

Outputs the calculated product of DM0000 x DM0001 (0 to 99999999) in BCD of 8
digits at maximum as below:
High-order 4-digit BCD data To 8500 to 8515
Low-order 4-digit BCD data To 7500 to 7515

DM0000 x DM0001 = TM00

Internal register

(High-order 4 digits)

(Low-order 4 digits)

DM00 Internal register #10000 = TM00

Internal register --- TM01

(High-order 4 digits) (Low-order 4 digits)

(Display)

8500 to 8515 7500 to 7515

(High-order 4 digits) (Low-order 4 digits)

3-356

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

(Remainder)

8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
2002 DM0000 DM0001
LDA
MUL
DM0101
LDA

#10000 DM0101
DIV
STA

TBCD

TM01
LDA

TBCD

7500
STA

8500
STA

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2002

0010

CON

0001

LDA

DM0000

0011

TBCD

0002

CON

0012

CON

0003

MUL

0004

CON

0005

DIV

0006

CON

0007

STA

0008

CON

0009

LDA

DM0001
#10000

0013

STA

0014

CON

0015

LDA

0016

CON

DM0101

0017

TBCD

0018

CON

TM01

0019

STA

Operand

750
DM0101

8500

Refer to p. 3-180.

Application of TBIN instruction

Output of 4-digit BCD data
Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7015) as the counter C001 value.
Ladder diagram
2002

7000
LDA

C001
STA

TBIN

0001

Converts data of 7000 to 7015 to BIN

data and writes it into C001.

#09999
C001
0000

Sets C001.

Coding
Line No.

Instruction

Operand

Line No.

Instruction

0000

LD

2002

0004

CON

0001

LDA

7000

0005

STA

Operand
C001

0002

CON

0006

LDB

0001

0003

TBIN

0007

001 #09999 0000

Refer to p. 3-183.

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

3-357

18

8.2 Details

3-358

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Index

Index For Visual KV Users Only

Index For Visual KV Users Only

The following is the index with some descriptions for your reference.
Purpose

Title

Page

A
Access Window, changing device value in

Device mode

1-87

Access Window, changing modes in

Selecting modes and setting/resetting key lock

1-82

Access Window, displaying directions in

User messages

1-97

Access Window, displaying errors in

Error messages and error status

1-97

Access Window, error display in

Error List

1-372

Access Window, increasing device selection speed in

Turbo function

1-83

Access window, part names functions of

Part names and functions of the Access Window

1-82

Access Window, switching the KV PLC between RUN and

PROGRAM (stop) modes in

System Mode

1-94

Access Window, using digital trimmer in

Digital Trimmer Mode

1-84

Application instructions, learning about

Application instructions

3-36

Arithmetic instructions, learning about

Arithmetic instructions

3-38

Basic instructions

3-34

Device used for cam switch function

3-233

Cam switch, using KV as

Cam switch function

3-233

CE marking, acquiring

Restriction on acquiring the CE marking

B
Basic instructions, learning about
C
Cam switch function, setting item for

(2)

Command transmission between KV and personal computer

Communication command/response list

3-310

Command transmission, when error occurs during

Error code list

3-316

Communication port, specifications of

Communications Specification

3-306

Contact comments, transmitting them to KV PLC

Contact comment save function

3-27
1-69

Contacts, protecting

Contact protection

Conventional KV series, differences with

Compatibility with conventional KV peripheral units

(4)

Current consumption

General specifications

1-4

Data memory, functions assigned to

Data memories

3-19

Direct clock pulse, outline of

Outline of direct clock pulse output

3-237

ON/OFF ratio of 1:1

3-238

Variable pulse width

3-238

Pulse output setting with the high-speed counter

comparator

3-238

Index

Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

using
Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with variable pulse
width
Direct clock pulse, setting item for
E
Expansion unit, checking operation of

Connection information for expansion units

1-75

Expansion unit, connecting

Connecting Visual KV Series expansion units

1-71

Expansion unit, maximum number to be connected to

Number of connectable units

1-73

Expansion unit, setting its height flush with AC-type basic unit

Expansion unit spacer

1-66

External output, disabling

Output prohibition function

3-26

Input refresh disabled function

3-26

F
Forcing input ON/OFF without switch
Frequency counter function, setting item for

Devices used with the frequency counter

3-231

High-speed counter, increasing measurement range of

24-bit high-speed counter

3-221

High-speed counter, measuring frequency with

Frequency counter function

3-231

High-speed counter, outputting pulses using

Direct Clock Pulse Output

3-237

High-speed counter, reading current value of

Reading the current value of the high-speed

counter

3-211

High-speed counter, resetting the value to other than "0"

Preset function

3-215

3-360

Index

Index For Visual KV Users Only

Purpose

Title

Page

High-speed counter, resetting the value to "0"

Resetting the high-speed counter

3-214

High-speed counter, selecting input source for

Count input method

3-212

High-speed counter, specifications of

Specifications of high-speed counters

3-208

High-speed counter, specifying the preset value of

Preset value of the high-speed counter

comparator

3-211

High-speed counter, using, as ring counter

Ring counter function

3-225

I
Input time constant of basic unit, changing

Input time constant change function

3-23

Input time constant of expansion unit, setting

Input time constant for expansion units

1-76

Interrupt instruction, outputting relay status independent of

scan time

Direct Input/Output

3-197

Interrupt instructions, learning about

Interrupt instruction

3-41

Interrupt programs, instructions that cannot be used within

Instructions that cannot be used

3-196

Interrupt, reading current value of high-speed counter by

Input capture

3-195

Interrupt, setting input condition for

Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input

3-195

Interrupt: when several interrupts are executed

Interrupt priority

3-196

K
KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV, using

Cautions when using the previous version of ladder

support software

KV-P3E(01), entering instructions using

Function No. list (alphabetical order)

(5)
3-41

KV-P3E(01), functions available with

Function Nos. list

1-216

KV-P3E(01), operating

Basic programming operation

1-200

M
Memory card, capacity of

Storage capacity

1-230

Memory card, replacing battery of

To replace battery

1-238

Multi-step comparator operation of DM, executing

Multi-step comparator mode

3-234

Output disabled function

3-26

Attaching a unit directly to a panel

1-66

O
Output, disabling output from KV

Personal computer, receiving data from

Receiving text data

3-318

Personal computer, transmitting data from KV to

Transmitting text data

3-319

Program capacity, calculation of

Calculating the byte count used

3-4

Program capacity, learning about

Program capacity

3-4

Programs, saving into memory card

Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)]

1-230

Pulse motor, driving

Parameter setting procedure

3-255

Pulse output at desired frequency

Specified frequency pulse output function

3-228

Relay Nos. assigned to basic unit

Relay list

3-5

Relay Nos. assigned to expansion unit

List of relays in expansion units

3-6

Relay Nos., assigning

Assigning relay Nos.

3-8

LOAD and SAVE modes

1-96

S
Saving current value of counter/DM into ROM
Scan time

Scan time

3-3

Sensors or other devices, connecting to KV

Wiring procedures for basic units

1-67

Special utility relays, change in status of, when arithmetic

instruction is used

Change in status of special utility relays

(arithmetic flags) by arithmetic instructions

3-186

Special utility relays, functions assigned to

Special utility relay list

3-86

Specified frequency pulse output function, setting item for

Device used for specified frequency pulse output

3-228

T
Temporary data memory, functions assigned to

Temporary data memory

3-21

Timers/counters, maximum number of

Timer/Counter list

3-18

Index

3-361

Index

P
Panel mounting of KV

Index For KV-300, KV-10/80 Users Only

Index For KV-300, KV-10/80 Users Only

A

A/D converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]

A/D conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [AD4]
ADD/@ADD: Add .................................................. 3-150
AND: And ................................................................ 3-58
ANB: And Bar ......................................................... 3-58
ANDA/@ANDA: And A ......................................... 3-159
ANL: And Load ....................................................... 3-61
Application Instructions ...................... 3-36, 3-45, 3-95
Arithmetic Instructions ...................... 3-38, 3-48, 3-134
ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert ................................ 3-183
Assignment of Data Memory ................................. 3-19
Assignment of I/O relay numbers ......................... 3-22

B
Basic Instructions ................................ 3-34, 3-42, 3-56
Baud rate ......................................... 2-136, 1-247 [KV-L2]
Break signal .......................................................... 3-308

C
C: Counter .............................................................. 3-72
CALL: Subroutine Call ......................................... 3-122
CMP/@CMP: Compare ......................................... 3-146
COM/@COM: Complement .................................. 3-171
Commands [Serial communication] ................... 3-310
Communications ....................................... 2-135, 3-306
CON: Connect ....................................................... 3-102
Connector wiring ....................................................... 1-72
CTC: Counter Comparator .................................. 3-204
CTH1: 16-Bit Counters ......................................... 3-204

Index

D
Data Memory ........................................................... 3-19
D/A converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]
D/A conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [DA4]
DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory ........................ 3-172
DI: Interrupt Disabled ........................................... 3-193
DIFD: Differentiate Down ....................................... 3-78
DIFU: Differentiate Up ........................................... 3-78
Dimensions ............................................................. 1-404
DIN rail (mounting) .................................................. 1-180
Direct Clock Pulse ................................................ 3-276
Display Interface Mode [KV-L2] .............................. 1-244
DIV/@DIV: Divide .................................................. 3-150
DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer ................................. 3-176
DW: Data Memory Write ...................................... 3-136

H
High-Speed Counters .......................................... 3-276
HKEY: 16 Key Input .............................................. 3-131
HSP: High Speed .................................................... 3-86

I
INC/@INC: Increment Memory ............................ 3-172
Indirect Addressing of Data Memory or Relay .. 3-127
Input Relays .............................................................. 3-9
Instruction List .............................................. 3-34, 3-42
INT: Interrupt ........................................................ 3-192
Interface [RS-232C] .............................................. 3-306
Internal register .................................................... 3-135
Internal Utility Relays ............................................. 3-11
Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1 ................... 3-278
Interrupt Instructions ........................................... 3-268
I/O distribution ......................................................... 1-187
ITVL: Interval Timer .............................................. 3-117

J
JMP: Jump ............................................................ 3-106

K
KEEP: Keep ............................................................ 3-80
KV-10/16/24/40/80 ............................ 1-167, 1-175, 1-177
KV-300 ......................................................... 1-166, 1-170
KV-AD4 ................................................................... 1-334
KV-AN6 ................................................................... 1-312
KV-B16R/B16S/C32T .............................................. 1-172
KV-C16X/C32X ....................................................... 1-171
KV-DA4 ................................................................... 1-334
KV-L2 ...................................................................... 1-240
KV-R1A/R16X/R16R/R16T/R8X/R8R/R8T .. 1-173, 1-174
KV-U4/U5 ..................................................... 1-168, 1-169
KV mode [KV-L2] .................................................... 1-253

L
LD: Load .................................................................. 3-57
LDA/@LDA: Load A .............................................. 3-140
LDB: Load Bar ........................................................ 3-57

E
EI: Interrupt Enabled ............................................ 3-193
END: End ................................................................. 3-94
ENDH: End Hi ......................................................... 3-94
ENDS: End Stage ................................................. 3-106
Environment requirements ........................................ 1-64
EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A .......................... 3-164
Error code list .......................................................... 1-372
Extended Ladder Diagrams ................................... 3-29

3-362

FOR: Repeat Start ................................................ 3-125

Index

Macros ...................................................................... 2-72

MC: Master Control ................................................ 3-89
MCR: Master Control Reset ................................... 3-89
Memory Card .......................................................... 1-230
MEMSW: Memory Switch ...................................... 3-92
Module names ......................................................... 1-175
Mounting Environment .............................................. 1-64
MPP: Pop .............................................................. 3-103
MPS: Push ............................................................ 3-103

Index For KV-300, KV-10/80 Users Only

N
NEXT: Repeat End ................................................ 3-125
Non-procedure mode [KV-L2] ................................. 1-292
NOP: No Operation ................................................ 3-94

O
OR: Or ..................................................................... 3-60
ORA/@ORA: Or A ................................................. 3-161
ORB: Or Bar ............................................................ 3-60
ORL: Or Load .......................................................... 3-63
OUB: Out Bar .......................................................... 3-65
OUT: Out ................................................................. 3-65
Output Relays ......................................................... 3-10

P
Peripheral equipments ............................................ 1-176
Port1/Port2 [KV-L2] ................................................. 1-245
Positionning control ............................................ 3-296
Programming examples ...................................... 3-324

R
RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert ............. 3-183
Receiving text data .............................................. 3-318
Relay/Memory/Memory Switch Lists ....................... 2-167
Relay/Memory Nos. ................................................. 2-167
Relay No. List .......................................................... 2-167
Relay Nos. and Functions ....................................... 2-167
RES: Reset .............................................................. 3-66
RET: Subroutine Return ...................................... 3-122
RETI: Return Interrupt ......................................... 3-192
RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A ................................... 3-169
ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root .............................. 3-185
RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right .................................... 3-169
RS-232C cable connection .................................. 3-307
RS-232C Protocol ................................................. 3-306
RS-422A [KV-L2] ..................................................... 1-248

System Configuration (Memory Card) ..................... 1-196

System specifications [Visual KV Series] ................ 1-382
System specifications [KV-300 Series] ................... 1-392

T
TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD ............................. 3-180
TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN .................................. 3-180
Temporary Memory ...................................... 2-172, 2-176
Timers and Counters ............................................... 2-169
TMH: 0.01-s Timer .................................................. 3-68
TMIN: Trimmer In .................................................. 3-138
@TMIN: Trimmer Setting ..................................... 3-138
TMR: 0.1-s Timer .................................................... 3-67
TMS: 1-ms Timer .................................................... 3-69
Transmitting text data .......................................... 3-319
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1-372

U
UDC: Up-Down Counter ......................................... 3-76

W
W-DE: Wait Down Edge ......................................... 3-98
W-OFF: Wait OFF ................................................... 3-96
W-ON: Wait ON ....................................................... 3-96
W-UE: Wait Up Edge .............................................. 3-98

X
@xxxx: Differentiation ......................................... 3-137

Index

MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer ...................................... 3-176

MRD: Read ............................................................ 3-103
MUL/@MUL: Multiply ........................................... 3-150

S
SBN: Subroutine Entry ........................................ 3-122
Serial Communication ......................................... 3-306
SET: Set .................................................................. 3-66
SFT: Shift ................................................................ 3-82
SLA/@SLA: Shift Left A ....................................... 3-166
Special Utility Relays ............................................... 2-174
SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A .................................... 3-166
STA/@STA: Store A ............................................. 3-140
Station No. [KV-L2] ................................................. 1-246
STE: Step End ...................................................... 3-114
STG: Stage ............................................................ 3-106
STP: Step .............................................................. 3-114
SUB/@SUB: Subtract ........................................... 3-150
System configuration ............................................... 1-166

Index

3-363

Index Software/P3E (handheld programmer)

Index Software/P3E (handheld programmer)

MULTI-MONITOR [P3E] ......................................... 1-212

A
ACCS ...................................................................... 1-234
ALL CLEAR [FNC60] [P3E] ..................................... 1-217
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR
(DM ALL CLEAR): [FNC64] [P3E] ...................... 1-219
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET
(L-RELAY ALL RST): [FNC65] [P3E] ................... 1-219

B
Break signal .......................................................... 3-308

C
CLEAR [P3E] .......................................................... 1-232
Comments (Relay comment, Line comment) ............ 2-46
Compile ..................................................................... 2-75
Converting N.O./N.C. ................................................ 2-65
Copy, move and delete ............................................. 2-69
COUNTER CLEAR (CTR CLEAR): [FNC62] [P3E] 1-218
Customizing KV-LADDER ,
Defining Environment Strings ................................ 2-19
Copy, move and delete operation ............................. 2-52

D
Data Communications between KV
and Personal Computer .................................... 3-306
Display mode ........................................................... 2-19
Double coil check ...................................................... 2-76

E
Edit screen ................................................................ 2-27
Entering symbols ....................................................... 2-37
Environment requirements .......................................... 2-3
Error message list ................................................... 2-156

Index

H
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR):
[FNC61] .............................................................. 1-217
Handheld Programmer KV-P3E .............................. 1-196
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR
(HIGH SPEED CTR CLR): [FNC63] [P3E] .......... 1-218

I
Installing Ladder Builder .............................................. 2-9

J
Jump ......................................................................... 2-58

L
Ladder Monitor ........................................................ 2-134
Ladder Simulator ....................................................... 2-84
Line comment ........................................................... 2-46

M
Macros ...................................................................... 2-72
Memory Card [P3E] ................................................. 1-230
Monitor Mode .......................................................... 2-134
Monitor screen ........................................................ 2-143
MOVE CURSOR [P3E] ........................................... 1-202

3-364

Index

O
OFFLINE EDITOR START (OFFLINE EDITOR):
[FNC67] [P3E] .................................................... 1-221
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP (QUIT OFF-L EDIT):
[FNC68] [P3E] .................................................... 1-221
ON/OFF MONITOR [P3E] ....................................... 1-215

P
Printer Setting, Defining Environment Strings .......... 2-77
Printing examples ...................................................... 2-81
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK (PROGRAM SIZE):
[FNC75] [P3E] .................................................... 1-229
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED
(COMMUNICATION): [FNC66] [P3E] ............. 1-220

Q
Quitting software ....................................................... 2-16

R
READ TRIMMER SETTING (TRIMMER MONITOR):
[FNC73] [P3E] .................................................... 1-228
Registration of cursor position and
jump to registered position ................................... 2-59
RELAY ON/OFF (FORCED SET/RESET):
[FNC71] [P3E] .................................................... 1-226
Replacing relays ........................................................ 2-64
RS-232C cable connection ......................................... 2-7
RS-232C Protocol ....................................................... 2-3

S
SCAN TIME MONITOR [P3E] ................................. 1-212
SCROLL [P3E] ........................................................ 1-202
Search ....................................................................... 2-58
Searching Program [P3E] ....................................... 1-207
Selecting display mode ............................................. 2-19
Setting print range ..................................................... 2-77
Simulator Mode ......................................................... 2-84
Simulator screen ....................................................... 2-86
Starting and quitting software ................................... 2-16
Starting edit mode .................................................... 2-29
Starting the Monitor Function .................................. 2-139
Starting the Simulator ................................................ 2-86
SYNTAX CHECK (PROGRAM CHECK):
[FNC74] [P3E] .................................................... 1-228

T
Temporary Memory ................................................ 3-21
Time Chart Monitor ................................................. 2-157
Time Chart Viewer ....................................... 2-148, 2-167
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE
(CHG: T/C SET-V): [FNC70] [P3E] .................... 1-224
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE
(CHG: T/C CURT-V): [FNC69] [P3E] ................. 1-222

W
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY (DM WRITE):
[FNC72] [P3E] .................................................... 1-227

Index

Index

3-365

Index

3-366

Index

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the
purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use.
KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally
in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold
KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/
Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF
DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED
GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS
AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers
or damage limitations may not apply.

Index

BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or

delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/
Samples.

Index

3-367

96M0366

INDEX

Installation

Support
Software

Programming

2. System Installation
3. Access Window
4. KV-D20 Operator
Interface Panel

1. Introduction

1. Programming

2. Editor

2. Instructions

3. Simulator

3. Interrupts

4. Monitor

4. High-speed Counters

5. Appendices

5. Positioning Control
6. Interrupts, High-speed
Counters, Positioning
Control

5. KV-10/80 Hardware
6. Handheld Programmer

7. Serial Communication

7. KV-L2 Serial Interface

Module

8. Programming
Examples

8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O

Module
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AFFILIATED COMPANIES

KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
PHONE: 81-6-6379-2211
FAX: 81-6-6379-2131

KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA

PHONE: 201-930-0100 FAX: 201-930-0099

KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

PHONE: 03-252-2211 FAX: 03-252-2131

KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

PHONE: 01908-696900 FAX: 01908-696777

KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-369-2777 FAX: 02-369-2775

KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

PHONE: 0711-79 73 71-0 FAX: 0711-797 77 99

KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-2627-3100 FAX: 02-2798-8925

KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

PHONE: 01 47 92 76 76 FAX: 01 47 92 76 77

KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

PHONE: 02-563-1270 FAX: 02-563-1271

KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

PHONE: 392-1011 FAX: 392-5055
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 1999 NKVP-UM-4-1000 Printed in Japan

User's Manual
Visual KV Series 3 Programming

1. Configuration and
Specifications

Visual KV Series

Programming

How this manual is organized:

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.